Fiat Kobelco E40 2sr E50 2sr Mini Crawler Excavator Service Repair Workshop Manual – PDF Download

Page 1

E40.2SR - E50.2SR WORKSHOP MANUAL ENGLISH Pubblication Nr. 604.13.368

Edition 08/2004 English - Printed in Italy Printed by Studio ti - 41204



INTRODUCTION

TO THE READER • This manual has been written for a skilled technician, in order to give him the information necessary to repair this machine. Read this manual carefully for correct information about repair procedures.

For any question or comment, or in case you notice a mistake in this manual content, please contact: FIAT KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY S.p.A. Strada Settimo, 323 San Mauro Torinese (TO) 10099 ITALIA PRODUCT SUPPORT Fax. ++39 011 0077357

ADDITIONAL REFERENCE MANUALS • In addition to this Workshop Manual, refer also to the following: Operation and maintenance instruction manual Spare parts catalog

DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKSHOP MANUAL

• The “Hydraulic exavator” Workshop Manual contains the technical information necessary for machine service and repair, the service equipment, the information • This repair manual consists of one single volume, on maintenance standards, the removal and installing identified with: procedures, and the disassembly and assembly proE40.2SR - E50.2SR - Workshop Manual “Hydraulic cedures. exavator” • The complete Workshop Manual for the model E40.2SR - E50.2SR consists of the following volume identified by print number as shown herebelow: VOLUME Workshop Manual - “Hydraulic exavator”

MACHINE TYPE E40.2SR E50.2SR

PRINT No. 604.13.368


INTRODUCTION

AVOID ACCIDENTS Most accidents, whether they occur in industry, on the farm, at home or on the highway, are caused by the failure of some individuals to follow simple and fundamental safety rules or precautions. For this reason MOST ACCIDENTS CAN BE PREVENTED by recognising the real cause and doing something about it before the accident occurs. Regardless of the care used in the design and construction of any type of equipment there are conditions that cannot be completely safeguarded against without interfering with reasonable accessibility and efficient operation. Carefully read indications, cautions and safety warning quoted in the “SAFETY RULES� section. A careful operator is the best insurance against an accident. The complete observance of one simple rule would prevent many thousand serious injuries each year. That rule is: Never attempt to clean, oil or adjust a machine while it is in motion.

ATTENTION On machines having hydraulically, mechanically and/or cable controlled equipment (such as showels, loaders, dozers, scrapers etc.) be certain the equipment is lowered to the ground before servicing, adjusting and/or repairing. If it is necessary to have the equipment partially or fully raised to gain access to certain items, be sure the equipment is suitably supported by means other than the hydraulic lift cylinders, cable and/or mechanical device used for controlling the equipment.

COPYRIGHT BY FIAT KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY Product Support - Documentation Centre

S.p.A.

Strada di Settimo, 323 - S. Mauro T.SE (TO) ITALY All rights reserved. Reproduction of text and illustrations in whole or in part, is strictly prohibited.


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

0-1


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

alert against possible damage to the machine and its components and is represented as follows:

WARNING

CAUTION

Do not operate or perform any maintenance on this machine until all instructions found in the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL have been thoroughly read and understood. Improper operation or maintenance of this machine may cause accidents and could result in serious injury or death. Always keep the manual in storage. If it is missing or damaged, place an order with an authorized our Distributor for a replacement. If you have any questions, please consult an authorized our Distributor.

(4) It is very difficult to forecast every danger that may occur during operation. However, safety can be ensured by fully understanding proper operating procedures for this machine according to methods recommended by Manufacturer. (5) While operating the machine, be sure to perform work with great care, so as not to damage the machine, or allow accidents to occur. (6) Continue studying the manual until all Safety, Operation and Maintenance procedures are completely understood by all persons working with the machine.

(1) Most accidents, which occur during operation, are due to neglect of precautionary measures and safety rules. Sufficient care should be taken to avoid these accidents. Erroneous operation, lubrication or maintenance services are very dangerous and may cause injury or death of personnel. Therefore all precautionary measures, NOTES, DANGERS, WARNINGS and CAUTIONS contained in the manual and on the machine should be read and understood by all personnel before starting any work with or on the machine. (2) Operation, inspection, and maintenance should be carefully carried out, and safety must be given the first priority. Messages of safety are indicated with marks. The safety information contained in the manual is intended only to supplement safety codes, insurance requirements, local laws, rules and regulations. (3) Messages of safety appear in the manual and on the machine: All messages of safety are identified by either word of "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION". 1) DANGER- Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury and is represented as follows:

DANGER 2) WARNING- Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury and is represented as follows:

WARNING 3) CAUTION- Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to

0-2


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

WARNING

Do not operate this machine unless you have read and understand the instructions in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL. Improper machine operation is dangerous and could result in injury or death.

The proper and safe lubrication and maintenance for this machine, recommended by Manufacturer, are outlined in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL for the machine. Improper performance of lubrication or maintenance procedures are dangerous and could result in injury or death. Read and understand the MANUAL before performing any lubrication or maintenance.

(6) Relieve all pressure in air, oil or water systems before any lines, fittings or related items are disconnected or removed. Always make sure all raised components are blocked correctly and be alert for possible pressure when disconnecting any device from a system that utilizes pressure.

The serviceman or mechanic may be unfamiliar with many of the systems on this machine. This makes it important to use caution when performing service work. A knowledge of the system and or components is important before the removal or disassembly of any component. Because of the size of some of the machine components, the serviceman or mechanic should check the weights noted in this manual. Use proper lifting procedures when removing any components. Weight of components table is shown in the section: SPECIFICATIONS.

(7) Lower the bucket, dozer, or other attachments to the ground before performing any work on the machine. If this cannot be done, make sure the bucket, dozer, ripper or other attachment is blocked correctly to prevent it from dropping unexpectedly. (8)

Use steps and grab handles when mounting or dismounting a machine. Clean any mud or debris from steps, walkways or work platforms before using. Always face to the machine when using steps, ladders and walkways. When it is not possible to use the designed access system, provide ladders, scaffolds, or work platforms to perform safe repair operations.

(9)

To avoid back injury, use a hoist when lifting components which weigh 20 kg (45 lbs) or more. Make sure all chains, hooks, slings, etc., are in good condition and are the correct capacity. Be sure hooks are positioned correctly. Lifting eyes are not to be side loaded during a lifting operation.

The following is a list of basic precautions that must always be observed. (1)

(2)

Read and understand all Warning plates and decal on the machine before Operating, Maintaining or Repairing this machine. Always wear protective glasses and protective shoes when working around machines. In particular, wear protective glasses when using hammers, punches or drifts on any part of the machine or attachments. Use welders gloves, hood/goggles, apron and the protective clothing appropriate to the welding job being performed. Do not wear loose fitting or torn clothing. Remove all rings from fingers, loose jewelry, confine long hair and loose clothing before working on this machinery.

(3)

Disconnect the battery and hang a "Do Not Operate" tag in the Operators Compartment. Remove ignition keys.

(4)

If possible, make all repairs with the machine parked on a level, hard surface. Block the machine so it does not roll while working on or under the machine. Hang a "Do Not Operate" tag in the Operators Compartment.

(5)

Do not work on any machine that is supported only by lift, jacks or a hoist. Always use blocks or jack stands, capable of supporting the machine, before performing any disassembly.

(10) To avoid burns, be alert for hot parts on machines which have just been stopped and hot fluids in lines, tubes and compartments. (11) Be careful when removing cover plates. Gradually back off the last two capscrews or nuts located at opposite ends of the cover or device and carefully pry cover loose to relieve any spring or other pressure, before removing the last two capscrews or nuts completely. (12) Be careful when removing filler caps, breathers and plugs on the machine. Hold a rag over the cap or plug to prevent being sprayed or splashed by liquids under pressure. The danger is even greater if the machine has just been stopped because fluids can be hot. (13) Always use the proper tools that are in good condition and that are suited for the job at hand. Be

0-3


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS sure you understand how to use them before performing any service work.

been damaged or altered should be checked for balance before reusing.

(14) Reinstall all fasteners with the same part number. Do not use a lesser quality fastener if replacements are necessary.

(22) Be careful when servicing or separating the tracks (crawlers). Chips can fly when removing or installing a track (crawlers) pin. Wear safety glasses and long sleeve protective clothing. Tracks (crawlers) can unroll very quickly when separated. Keep away from front and rear of machine. The machine can move unexpectedly when both tracks (crawlers) are disengaged from the sprockets. Block the machine to prevent it from moving.

(15) Repairs which require welding should be performed only with the benefit of the appropriate reference information and by personnel adequately trained and knowledgeable in welding procedures. Determine type of metal being welded and select correct welding procedure and electrodes, rods or wire to provide a weld metal strength equivalent at least to that of the parent metal. Make sure to disconnect battery before any welding procedures are attempted. (16) Do not damage wiring during removal operations. Reinstall the wiring so it is not damaged nor will be damaged in operation of the machine by contacting sharp corners, or by rubbing against some object or hot surface. Do not connect wiring to a line containing fluid. (17) Be sure all protective devices including guards and shields are properly installed and functioning correctly before starting a repair. If a guard or shield must be removed to perform the repair work, use extra caution and replace the guard or shield after repair is completed. (18) The maintenance and repair work while holding the bucket raised is dangerous due to the possibility of a falling attachment. Don’t fail to lower the attachment and place the bucket to the ground before starting the work. (19) Loose or damaged fuel, lubricant and hydraulic lines, tubes and hoses can cause fires. Do not bend or strike high pressure lines or install ones which have been bent or damaged. Inspect lines, tubes and hoses carefully. Do not check for leaks with your hands. Very small (pinhole) leaks can result in a high velocity oil stream that will be invisible close to the hose. This oil can penetrate the skin and cause personal injury. Use card-board or paper to locate pinhole leaks. (20) Tighten connections to the correct torque. Make sure that all heat shields, clamps and guards are installed correctly to avoid excessive heat, vibration or rubbing against other parts during operation. Shields that protect against oil spray onto hot exhaust components in event of a line, tube or seal failure must be installed correctly. (21) Do not operate a machine if any rotating part is damaged or contacts any other part during operation. Any high speed rotating component that has

0-4


INDEX

E40.2SR E50.2SR

Title

Index No.

OUTLINE

1

SPECIFICATIONS

2

ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3

TOOLS

11

STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

12

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

22

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

23

COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24

WHOLE DISASSEMBLING & ASSEMBLING

31

ATTACHMENTS

32

UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

33

TRAVEL SYSTEM

34

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

42

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

43

ENGINE

44

ENGINE

51

SUPPORTING DATA

71

DATA

OPT.

E/G TROUBLESHOOTING

DISASSEMBLING

SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

SPECIFICATIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

APPLICABLE MACHINES

0-5


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

[MEMO]

0-6


1. OUTLINE TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR REPAIRS ..................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 PREPARATION BEFORE DISASSEMBLING .............................................. 1-3 1.1.2 SAFETY IN DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING .................................... 1-3 1.1.3 DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT ............ 1-3 1.1.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 1-4 1.1.5 HYDRAULIC PARTS ..................................................................................... 1-5 1.1.6 WELDING REPAIR ....................................................................................... 1-5 1.1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURE ..................................................................... 1-5 1.2 INTERNATIONAL UNIT CONVERSION SYSTEM ............................................ 1-6



1. OUTLINE

1-1


1. OUTLINE

1-2


1. OUTLINE

1.1

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR REPAIRS

(2) Suspend warning tag "DO NOT OPERATE" from the doorknob or the operating lever, and have a preliminary meeting before starting work.

1.1.1

PREPARATION BLING

(3) Stop the engine before starting inspection and maintenance to prevent the operator being caught in machine.

BEFORE

DISASSEM-

(4) Identify the location of a first-aid kit and a fire extinguisher, and also where to make contact in a state of emergency.

(1) Understanding operating procedure Read OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL carefully to understand the operating procedure.

(5) Choose a hard, level and safe place, and place the attachment on the ground securely.

(2) Cleaning machines Remove soil, mud, and dust from the machine before carrying it into the service shop to prevent loss of work efficiency, damage of parts, and difficulty in rust prevention and dust protection while reassembling.

(6) Use a lifter such as a crane to remove heavy parts (20 kg [45 lbs] or more) from the machine. (7) Use proper tools, and replace or repair defective tools. (8) Support the machine and attachment with supports or blocks if the work is performed in the lifted condition.

(3) Inspecting machines Identify the parts to be disassembled before starting work, determine the disassembling procedure by yourself considering the workshop situations etc., and request procurement of necessary parts in advance.

1.1.3

(4) Recording Record the following items for communication and prevention of recurring malfunction.

(1) Removing hydraulic equipment 1) Before disconnecting pipes, release the hydraulic pressure of the system, or open the return side cover and take out the filter.

1) Inspection date and place. 2) Model name, applicable machine number, and hour meter read.

2) Carefully drain oil of the removed pipes into a containers without spilling on the floor.

3) Trouble condition, place and cause.

3) Apply plugs or caps on the pipe ends to avoid oil spillage and dust intrusion.

4) Visible oil leakage, water leakage and damage. 5) Clogging of filters, oil level, oil quality, oil contamination and loosening of connections.

4) Clean off the external surface of the equipment before disassembling, and drain hydraulic and gear oil before placing it on the workbench.

6) Result of consideration if any problem exists based on the operation rate per month calculated from hour meter indication after the last inspection date.

(2) Disassembling hydraulic equipment 1) Do not disassemble, reassemble or modify the hydraulic equipment without the permission of the manufacturer, who is not responsible for the performance and function of the product after modification.

(5) Arrangement and cleaning in service shop 1) Tools required for repair work. 2) Prepare space to place the disassembled parts. 3) Prepare oil containers for draining oil etc. 1.1.2

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

2) When disassembling and reassembling for unavoidable reason, refer the work to qualified personnel who have the specific knowledge or completed the parts service training.

SAFETY IN DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

3) Provide matching marks to facilitate reassembling work. (1) Wear appropriate clothes with long sleeves, safety shoes, safety helmet and protective glasses.

4) Before starting the work, read the manual of disassembling procedure, if it is provided, and decide whether the work can be performed by yourself.

1-3


1. OUTLINE 5) Use the special jig and tools without fail if they are specified.

WARNING

6) If it is hard to remove a part according to the procedure, do not try it by force but investigate the cause.

Operation of the hydraulic equipment without filling hydraulic oil or lubricant or without performing air bleeding will result in damage to the equipment.

7) Place the removed parts in order and attach tags to facilitate the reassembling.

3) Perform air bleeding of the hydraulic pump and slewing motor after loosening the upper drain plug, starting the engine and keep it in low idle condition. Complete the air bleeding when seeping of hydraulic oil is recognized, and tightly plug.

8) Note the location and quantity of parts commonly applied to multiple locations. (3) Inspecting parts 1) Ensure that the disassembled parts are free from seizure, interference and uneven contact. 2) Measure and record wear condition of parts and clearance.

4) Perform air bleeding of the travel motor and the hydraulic cylinders by running the engine for more than 5 minutes at low speed without load.

3) If the problem is found in a part, repair or replace it with a new one.

WARNING

(4) Reassembling hydraulic equipment

Do not allow the hydraulic cylinder to bottom on the stroke end just after the maintenance.

1) Turn ON the ventilation fan or open windows to maintain good ventilation prior to starting the cleaning of parts. 2) Perform rough and finish cleaning before assembling.

5) Perform air bleeding of pilot line by performing a series of digging, slewing and travel.

3) Remove washing oil by air and apply clean hydraulic or gear oil for assembling.

6) Check hydraulic oil level after placing the attachment to the oil check position, and replenish oil if necessary.

4) Always replace the removed O-rings, backup rings and oil seals with new ones by applying grease in advance.

1.1.4

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

5) Remove dirt and moisture from and perform degreasing on the surface where liquid gasket to be applied. 6) Remove rust preventive agent from the new parts before use.

(1) Do not disassemble electrical equipment.

7) Fit bearings, bushings and oil seals using special jigs.

(3) Turn the key OFF prior to connecting and disconnecting work.

8) Assemble the parts utilizing matching marks.

(4) Disconnect the connector by holding it and pressing the lock. Do not pull the wire to apply force to the caulking portion.

(2) Handle it carefully not to drop and give a shock.

9) Ensure all the parts are completely assembled after the work.

(5) Connect the connector and ensure it is completely locked.

(5) Installing hydraulic equipment 1) Ensure hydraulic oil and lubricant are properly supplied.

(6) Turn the key OFF prior to touching the terminal of starter or generator.

2) Perform air bleeding when:

(7) Remove the ground (earth) terminal of battery when handling tools around the battery or its relay.

1. Hydraulic oil changed 2. Parts of suction side piping replaced

(8) Do not splash water on the electrical equipment and connectors during machine washing.

3. Hydraulic pump installed 4. Slewing motor installed

(9) Check for moisture adhesion inside the waterproof connector after pulling it out, since it is hard to remove moisture from the connector.

5. Travel motor installed 6. Hydraulic cylinder installed

1-4


1. OUTLINE 1.1.6

If moisture adhesion is found, dry it completely before the connection.

(1) Refer repair welding to qualified personnel according to the appropriate procedure.

WARNING

(2) Disconnect the ground (earth) cable of the battery before starting the repair. Failure to do so will cause damage to the electrical equipment.

Battery electrolyte is hazardous. Battery electrolyte is dilute sulfuric acid. Exposure of skin or eyes to this liquid will cause burning or loss of eyesight. If the exposure occurs, take the following emergency measures and seek the advice of a medical specialist. •

When skin exposed: Wash with water and soap sufficiently.

When eyes exposed: Immediately wash away with city water continuously for more than 10 minutes.

(3) Move away the articles in advance that may cause fire if exposed to sparks. (4) Before starting the repair of the attachment, do not fail to cover the plated surface of the piston rod with flameproof sheet to prevent it from being exposed to sparks. 1.1.7

When swallowed: Drink a large amount of milk or water.

When clothes exposed: Immediately undress and wash.

1.1.5

(2) Industrial waste disposal Dispose of the following parts according to the relevant regulations: Waste oil and waste container Battery (3) Precautions for handling hydraulic oil Exposure of eyes to hydraulic oil will cause inflammation. Wear protective glasses before handling to avoid an accident. If an eye is exposed to the oil, take the following emergency measures:

HYDRAULIC PARTS

When an eye exposed: Immediately wash away with city water sufficiently till stimulative feeling vanishes.

When swallowed: Do not let vomit, and receive medical treatment immediately.

When skin exposed: Wash with water and soap sufficiently.

(1) O-ring • •

Ensure O-rings have elasticity and are not damaged before use. Use the appropriate O-rings. O-rings are made of various kinds of materials having different hardness to apply to a variety of parts, such as the part for moving or fixed portion, subjected to high pressure, and exposed to corrosive fluid, even if the size is same.

Fit the O-rings without distortion and bend.

Always handle floating seals as a pair.

(4) Others Use replacement parts and lubricants authorized as the genuine parts.

(2) Flexible hose (F hose) •

Use the appropriate parts. Different parts are used depending on the working pressure even the size of fitting and the total length of the hose is same.

Tighten the fitting at the specified torque. Ensure no kink, tension, interference nor oil leakage is recognized.

ENVIRONMENTAL MEASURE

(1) Run the engine at the place that is sufficiently ventilated.

When a large amount of the liquid flows out: Neutralize with sodium bicarbonate or wash away with city water.

WELDING REPAIR

1-5


1. OUTLINE

1.2

INTERNATIONAL UNIT CONVERSION SYSTEM (Based on MARKS’ STANDARD HANDBOOK FOR MECHANICAL ENGINEERS)

(3) Derived Units Table 1-3

Introduction Although this manual includes International System of Unit and Foot-Pound System of Units, if you need SI unit, refer to the following international system of units. Given hereinafter is an excerpt of the units that are related to this manual.

Base units Table 1-1

SI units

Derived units

Derived units of base units Table 1-2 Derived units bearing peculiar designations Table 1-4

Prefixes of SI (n-th power of 10, where n is an integer) Table 1-5

(1) Base units Table 1-1 QUANTITY

UNIT

SYMBOL

Length

meter

m

Mass

kilogram

kg

Time

second

s

Electric current

ampere

A

Thermodynamic temperature

kelvin

K

Amount of substance

mol

mol

Luminous intensity

candela

cd

(2) Supplementary units Table 1-2 QUANTITY

UNIT

SYMBOL

Plane angle

radian

rad

Solid angle

steradian

sr

SYMBOL

Area

square meter

m2

Volume

cubic meter

m3

Velocity

meter per second

m/s

Acceleration

meter per second squared

m/s2

Density

kilogram per cubic meter

kg/m3

Table 1-4

2. Construction of SI Unit System

SI unit system

UNIT

(4) Derived Units bearing Peculiar Designations

1. Etymology of SI Unites French: Le Systeme International d’ Unites English: International System of Units

Supplementary units Table 1-2

QUANTITY

1-6

QUANTITY

UNIT

SYMBOL

FORMULA

Frequency

hertz

Hz

1/s

Force

newton

N

kg • m/s 2

Pressure and Stress

pascal

Pa

N/m2

Energy, Work and Quantity of heat

joule

J

N•m

Power

watt

W

J/s

Quantity of electricity

coulomb

C

A•s

Electric potential difference, Voltage, and Electromotive force

volt

V

W/A

Quantity of static electricity and Electric capacitance

farad

F

C/V

Electric resistance

ohm

Celsius temperature

celsius degree or degree

C

(t+273.15)K

Illuminance

lux

lx

lm/m2

V/A


1. OUTLINE (5) Prefixes of SI Table 1-5 PREFIX

SYMBOL MULTIPLICATION FACTORS

giga

G

109

mega

M

106

kilo

k

103

hecto

h

102

deca

da

10

deci

d

10–1

centi

c

10–2

milli

m

10–3

micro

P

10–6

nano

n

10–9

pico

p

10–12

(6) Unit Conversion Table 1-6 QUANTITY Gravitational

SI

CONVERSION FACTOR

Mass

kg

kg

Force

kgf

N

1 kgf = 9.807 N

N•m

kgf•m = 9.807 N•m

Torque

kgf•m

Pressure

kgf/cm2

Motive Power

PS

kW

1 PS = 0.7355 kW

Revolution

rpm

min–1

r/min *1

MPa 1 kgf/cm2 = 0.09807 MPa

*1 Units that are allowed to use.

1-7


1. OUTLINE

[MEMO]

1-8


2. SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.1 COMPONENTS NAME ..................................................................................... 2-3 2.2 MACHINE DIMENSIONS .................................................................................. 2-4 2.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE ....................................................... 2-6 2.4 MACHINE & COMPONENTS WEIGHT (DRY) ................................................. 2-7 2.5 TRANSPORTATION ......................................................................................... 2-9 2.6 TYPE OF CRAWLER SHOES ........................................................................ 2-11 2.7 TYPE OF BUCKET ......................................................................................... 2-12 2.8 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 2-14 2.8.1 SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 2-14 2.8.2 ENGINE PERFORMANCE CURVE ............................................................ 2-15



2. SPECIFICATIONS

2-1


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2-2


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.1

COMPONENTS NAME

32 30 36

33

34 15 16

17

8 18

35 19

31

12 3

37 13

5

11

4

14

1

29 28 24 27

20 25

2

7 6

26 21

23

9 22 10

No.

NAME

No.

NAME

No.

NAME

No.

NAME

1 Engine

2 Oil filter

3 Radiator

4 Reservoir tank

5 Air cleaner

6 Muffler

7 Fuel tank

8 Hydraulic tank

9 Hydraulic pump

10 Slewing motor

11 Swing cylinder

12 Control valve

13 Travel lever

14 Safety lock lever

15 Canopy

16 Operating lever

17 Dozer operating lever

18 Throttle lever

19 Monitor panel (gauge cluster)

20 Battery

21 Swivel joint

22 Travel motor

23 Slewing bearing

24 Idler assy

25 Lower roller

26 Upper roller

27 Rubber crawler shoe

28 Dozer blade

29 Dozer cylinder

30 Boom

31 Boom cylinder

32 Arm cylinder

33 Light

34 Arm

35 Link

36 Bucket cylinder

37 Bucket

2-3


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.2

MACHINE DIMENSIONS Unit: mm (ft•in)

1960 {6'5.2"} 750 {2'5.5"} 725 {2'4.5"} 70 {2.76"}

(1) E40.2SR (CANOPY)

115 {4.53"}

0

1940 {6'4.4"}

R980 } {3'2.6"

5000 {16'4.9"}

635 {2'1.0"}

345 {13.6"}

2600 {8'6.4"}

2140 {7'0.3"} 1570 {5'1.8"} 980 {3'2.6"}

1630 {5'4.2"} 1820 {5'11.7"} 2330 {7'7.7"} 2780 {9'1.4"}

400 {15.7"} 1560 {5'1.4"} 1960 {6'5.2"}

1940 {6'4.4"}

115 {4.53"}

R980 } {3'2.6"

0

1960 {6'5.2"} 750 {2'5.5"} 725 {2'4.5"} 70 {2.76"}

(2) E40.2SR (CAB)

5000 {16'4.9"}

635 {2'1.0"}

345 {13.6"}

2600 {8'6.4"}

2140 {7'0.3"} 1570 {5'1.8"} 980 {3'2.6"}

1630 {5'4.2"} 1820 {5'11.7"} 2330 {7'7.7"} 2780 {9'1.4"}

400 {15.7"} 1560 {5'1.4"} 1960 {6'5.2"}

2-4


2. SPECIFICATIONS Unit: mm (ft•in)

140 {5.51"}

R980 } {3'2.6"

25 {0.98"}

1960 {6'5.2"} 750 {2'5.5"} 725 {2'4.5"} 70 {2.76"}

(3) E50.2SR (CANOPY)

1940 {6'4.4"}

5230 {17'1.9"}

635 {2'1.0"}

345 {13.6"}

2600 {8'6.4"}

2140 {7'0.3"} 1570 {5'1.8"} 980 {3'2.6"}

1690 {5'6.5"} 1970 {6'5.6"} 2480 {8'1.6"} 2910 {9'6.6"}

400 {15.7"} 1560 {5'1.4"} 1960 {6'5.2"}

140 {5.51"}

R980 } {3'2.6"

25 {0.98"}

1960 {6'5.2"} 750 {2'5.5"} 725 {2'4.5"} 70 {2.76"}

(4) E50.2SR (CAB)

5230 {17'1.9"}

1940 {6'4.4"}

635 {2'1.0"}

345 {13.6"}

2600 {8'6.4"}

2140 {7'0.3"} 1570 {5'1.8"} 980 {3'2.6"}

1690 {5'6.5"} 1970 {6'5.6"} 2480 {8'1.6"} 2910 {9'6.6"}

400 {15.7"} 1560 {5'1.4"} 1960 {6'5.2"}

2-5


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.3

SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE

SPEED AND GRADEABILITY Model Applicable Machines Shoe Type

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

PH05-03501~

PJ04-03001~

Rubber shoe Iron shoe (OPT) Rubber shoe Iron shoe (OPT)

Slewing Speed

min-1 {rpm}

8.8 {8.8}

Low km/h (mph) (1st) 2.8

Travel Speed Gradeability

8.8 {8.8}

High (2nd)

Low (1st)

High (2nd)

Low (1st)

High (2nd)

Low (1st)

High (2nd)

4.6

2.8

4.6

2.8

4.6

2.8

4.6

% (degree)

58(30)

ENGINE Model (YANMAR)

4TNV88-XYB

Type

Water-cooled, 4-cycle type Swirl chamber type diesel engine

Number of cylinders-Bore u Stroke

4 - ø88 mm u 90 mm (3.46 in u 3.54 in)

Total Displacement

L

Output Rating

2.189 (134 cu•in)

kW/min {PS/rpm}

30.4 / 2400 {41.3 / 2400}

N•m/min (lbf•ft/rpm)

98.4 / 1440 (72.6 / 1440)

-1

-1

Maximum Torque Starting Motor Generator

V u kW

12 u 2.3

VuA

12 u 55

HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS Hydraulic Pump

Variable displacement axial piston + gear pump

Hydraulic Motor

Axial piston

Hydraulic Motor w/Reducer (Travel)

2-Axial piston, 2-Speed motor

Control Valve

11-spool multiple control valve

Cylinder (Boom, Arm, Swing, Bucket, Dozer)

Double action cylinder

Return Filter

Safety valve containing/Filter Type (30P)

SIDE DIGGING & DOZER Type Boom Swing Angle Stroke of Dozer (above/below)

Boom swing by hydraulic cylinder Right

60°

Left

70°

mm (in)

505 / 325 (19.9/12.8)

495 / 375 (19.5 / 14.8)

WEIGHT Rubber shoe

Iron shoe

Rubber shoe

Iron shoe

4200 (9260)

4300 (9480)

4630 (10200)

4730 (10400)

kg (lb)

1930 (4260)

m

2280 (5030)

m

Travel system

kg (lb)

1670 (3680)

1770 (3900)

1720 (3790)

1820 (4010)

Attachment (Boom+STD Arm+STD Bucket)

kg (lb)

505 (1110)

535 (1180)

Oil & Water

kg (lb)

95 (209)

m

Machine Weight

kg (lb)

Upper slewing body

Note: This figure is calculated with standard bucket.

2-6


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.4

MACHINE & COMPONENTS WEIGHT (DRY) Unit: kg (lb) E40.2SR

MODEL

RUBBER SHOE CANOPY

CAB

IRON SHOE CANOPY

CAB

COMPLETE MACHINE

4200 (9260) 4340 (9570) 4300 (9480) 4440 (9790)

UPPER FRAME ASSEMBLY (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS)

1930 (4260) 2070 (4560) 1930 (4260) 2070 (4560)

UPPER FRAME

570 (1260)

CANOPY / CAB

85 (187)

ENGINE HYDRAULIC PUMP RADIATOR HYDRAULIC TANK

m 220 (485)

m 85 (187)

m 220 (485)

170 (375)

m

m

m

35 (77)

m

m

m

5 (11)

m

m

m

37 (82)

m

m

m

4 (9)

m

m

m

110 (243)

m

m

m

SWING CYLINDER

39 (86)

m

m

m

SLEWING MOTOR

40 (88)

m

m

m

FUEL TANK SWING BRACKET

35 (77)

m

m

m

COUNTERWEIGHT

270 (595)

m

m

m

GUARD • BONNET

145 (320)

m

m

m

BOOM CYLINDER

47 (104)

m

m

m

1670 (3680)

m

1770 (3900)

m

525 (1160)

m

m

m

CONTROL VALVE

LOWER FRAME ASSEMBLY (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS) LOWER FRAME

76 (168)

m

m

m

65u2 (143u2)

m

m

m

UPPER ROLLER

5u2 (11u2)

m

m

m

LOWER ROLLER

9u10 (20u10)

m

m

m

FRONT IDLER

42u2 (93u2)

m

m

m

IDLER ADJUSTER

30u2 (66u2)

m

m

m

SPROCKET

14u2 (31u2)

m

m

m

RUBBER CRAWLER SHOE

210 u2 (463u2)

m

400 mm (15.7") IRON SHOE

260u2 (573u 2)

m

SLEWING BEARING TRAVEL MOTOR

SWIVEL JOINT DOZER DOZER CYLINDER ATTACHMENT ASSEMBLY (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS) BOOM ASSEMBLY BOOM ARM CYLINDER ARM ASSEMBLY ARM BUCKET CYLINDER

22 (49)

m

m

m

170 (375)

m

m

m

27 (60)

m

m

m

505 (1110)

m

m

m

230 (507)

m

m

m

160 (353)

m

m

m

42 (93)

m

m

m

170 (375)

m

m

m

105 (232)

m

m

m

27 (60)

m

m

m

13 (29)

m

m

m

4u2 (9u2)

m

m

m

107 (236)

m

m

m

95 (210)

m

m

m

HYDRAULIC OIL

45 (99)

m

m

m

FUEL

44 (97)

m

m

m

BUCKET LINK IDLER LINK BUCKET ASSEMBLY (STD) FLUIDS (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS)

Note: Bucket weight is shown with standard bucket weight.

2-7


2. SPECIFICATIONS Unit: kg (lb) E50.2SR MODEL

RUBBER SHOE CANOPY

COMPLETE MACHINE

CAB

IRON SHOE CANOPY

CAB

4630 (10200) 4770 (10500) 4730 (10400) 4870 (10700)

UPPER FRAME ASSEMBLY (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS)

2280 (5030) 2420 (5340) 2280 (5030) 2420 (5340)

UPPER FRAME

570 (1,260)

CANOPY / CAB

85 (187)

m 220 (485)

m 85 (187)

m 220 (485)

170 (375)

m

m

m

35 (77)

m

m

m

5 (11)

m

m

m

37 (82)

m

m

m

4 (9)

m

m

m

110 (243)

m

m

m

39 (86)

m

m

m

SLEWING MOTOR

40 (88)

m

m

m

CONTROL VALVE

35 (77)

m

m

m

COUNTERWEIGHT

580 (1,280)

m

m

m

GUARD • BONNET

145 (320)

m

m

m

ENGINE HYDRAULIC PUMP RADIATOR HYDRAULIC TANK FUEL TANK SWING BRACKET SWING CYLINDER

BOOM CYLINDER LOWER FRAME ASSEMBLY (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS)

58 (128)

m

m

m

1720 (3790)

m

1820 (4010)

m

545 (1,200)

m

m

m

76 (168)

m

m

m

TRAVEL MOTOR

65u2 (143u2)

m

m

m

UPPER ROLLER

5u2 (11u2)

m

m

m

LOWER ROLLER

9u10 (20u10)

m

m

m

42u2 (93u2)

m

m

m

IDLER ADJUSTER

30u2 (66u2)

m

m

m

SPROCKET

14u2 (31u2)

m

m

m

RUBBER CRAWLER SHOE

210 u2 (463u2)

m

400 mm (15.7") IRON SHOE

275 u2 (606u2)

m

22 (49)

m

m

m

175 (386)

m

m

m

27 (60)

m

m

m

535 (1,180)

m

m

m

240 (529)

m

m

m

165 (364)

m

m

m

50 (110)

m

m

m

180 (397)

m

m

m

115 (256)

m

m

m

BUCKET CYLINDER

27 (60)

m

m

m

BUCKET LINK

13 (29)

m

m

m

LOWER FRAME SLEWING BEARING

FRONT IDLER

SWIVEL JOINT DOZER DOZER CYLINDER ATTACHMENT ASSEMBLY (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS) BOOM ASSEMBLY BOOM ARM CYLINDER ARM ASSEMBLY ARM

IDLER LINK BUCKET ASSEMBLY (STD)

4u2 (9u2)

m

m

m

112 (247)

m

m

m

95 (210)

m

m

m

HYDRAULIC OIL

45 (99)

m

m

m

FUEL

44 (97)

m

m

m

6 (13)

m

m

m

FLUIDS (ASSY OF FOLLOWINGS)

COOLANT

Note: Bucket weight is shown with standard bucket weight.

2-8


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.5

TRANSPORTATION

(1) LOADING MACHINE ON A TRAILER 1) Keep trailer bed clean. Put chocks against truck wheels. 2) Use a ramp or loading deck. Ramps must be strong enough, have a low angle, and correct height. Load and unload machine on a level surface. 3) Travel machine onto ramps slowly. Center the machine over the trailer. 4) Lower all attachment. 5) Stop engine. Remove key from switch.

WARNING Do not put chains over or against hydraulic lines or hoses. 6) Fasten machine to trailer with chains or cables. During transportation, the bucket or attachments may hit the canopy or the cab. Therefore, set the machine in the transporting position by observing following points: 1. Extend the bucket cylinder fully. 2. Extend the arm cylinder fully. 3. Lower the boom. 4. If machine cannot be transported with arm cylinder fully extended, remove bucket or attachment and extend arm cylinder. (2) TRANSPORTATION DIMENSION AND WEIGHT OF ATTACHMENT 1) BOOM WITH ARM CYLINDER Model

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

LuHuW mm (ft•in)

2790 u 1070 u 310 (9’1.8") (3’6.1") (12.2")

2910 u 1040 u 310 (9’6.6") (3’4.9") (12.2")

Weight w/arm cyl. kg (lb)

223 (492)

237 (523)

H

L 2) ARM & BUCKET (Standard bucket) Model

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

LuHuW mm (ft•in)

2630 u 510 u 600 (8’7.5") (20.1") (23.6")

2770 u 510 u 650 (9’1.1") (20.1") (25.6")

Weight kg (lb)

164 (362)

175 (386)

H

L

2-9


2. SPECIFICATIONS 3) ARM Model

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

LuHuW mm (ft•in)

1870 u 420 u 250 (6’1.6") (16.5") (9.84")

2010 u 420 u 250 (6’7.1") (16.5") (9.84")

Weight kg (lb)

164 (362)

175 (386)

H L

4) BUCKET (Standard bucket) Model

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

Heaped capacity m3(cu•yd)

0.14 (0.18)

0.16 (0.21)

LuHuW mm (ft•in)

780 u 690 u 650 (30.7") (27.2") (25.6")

780 u 690 u 750 (30.7") (27.2") (29.5")

Weight kg (lb)

89 (196)

98 (216)

H

L

5) DOZER w/o cylinder weight Model

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

LuHuW mm (ft•in)

1130 u 335 u 1960 (3’85") (13.2") (6’5.2")

1190 u 335 u 1960 (3’11") (13.2") (6’5.2")

Weight kg (lb)

170 (375)

175 (386)

H L

2-10


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.6

TYPE OF CRAWLER SHOES Type

Shoe width mm (in)

Total Crawler width mm (ft•in)

Number of Link

E40.2SR

400 (15.7")

1960 (6’5")

E50.2SR

400 (15.7")

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

Model

Ground pressure kPa (psi) CANOPY

CAB

68

26 (3.77)

27 (3.92)

1960 (6’5")

72

26 (3.77)

27 (3.92)

400 (15.7")

1960 (6’5")

36

26 (3.77)

27 (3.92)

400 (15.7")

1960 (6’5")

38

27 (3.92)

28 (4.06)

Rubber shoe

Iron shoe (option)

2-11


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.7

TYPE OF BUCKET TYPE

ARM

Width mm (ft•in)

Heaped capacity m3 (cu.yd)

Weight kg (lb)

E40.2SR Length 1870 mm (6’1.62” ft•in)

E50.2SR Length 2010 mm (6’7.13” ft•in)

(ISO 7451)

Digging buckets

300 (11.81”)

0.050 (0.06)

56.14 (123.37)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

450 (17.72”)

0.090 (0.11)

74.01 (163.16)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

550 (21.65”)

0.120 (0.15)

82.43 (181.72)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

600 (23.62”)

0.130 (0.17)

85.89 (189.35)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

650 (25.59”)

0.140 (0.18)

89.33 (196.94)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

700 (27.56”)

0.160 (0.21)

92.79 (204.57)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

750 (29.53”)

0.180 (0.23)

97.73 (215.45)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

800 (31.49”)

0.200 (0.26)

101.22 (223.15)

V O

V O

Digging buckets

900 (35.43”)

0.220 (0.28)

109.64 (241.71)

V O

V O

Cleaning buckets

1200 (47.24”)

0.220 (0.28)

113.17 (249.49)

Q P X

Q P X

Cleaning buckets

1400 (55.11”)

0.240 (0.31)

126.22 (278.26)

Q P X

Q P X

Cleaning buckets

1500 (59.05”)

0.260 (0.34)

132.44 (291.98)

Q P X

Q P X

2-12


2. SPECIFICATIONS

WARNING ◆ The buckets with this length, during left arm slewing higher than 1 m from ground, can interfere with the cabin. For a safe use, consult the Dealer and ask for left slewing limiter of the arm support. ●: Width with lateral cutter ❍: Width without lateral cutter V: Generic digging for digging and sand loading operations, gravel, clay, earth in general, etc.. The specific weight of the material should not be higher than 1400 kg/m3. ■: Digging for light applications for operations of digging,sand loading/unloading of gravel, clay, earth in friabile and dry state, ditch cleaning, etc.

2-13


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.8

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

2.8.1

SPECIFICATIONS Model

E40.2SR, E50.2SR

Engine Model

4TNV88-XYB

Type

Vertical, 4-cycle water-cooled diesel engine

No. of cylinders - Bore u Stroke

4 - 88 mm (3.46 in) u 90 mm (3.54 in)

Total displacement

2.189 liter (134 cu•in)

Compression ratio

19.1

Rated output

30.4 kW (41.3 PS) at 2400 rpm

Maximum torque

139.3 ~ 147.1 N•m (103 ~ 109 lbf•ft) at 1440 rpm

Low idling

1175 ± 25 rpm

High idling

2600 ± 25 rpm

Fuel consumption rate

Less than 242 g / kWh (178 g / PS•h)

Allowable tilting angles

Continuous ; 30 for all direction

Rotating direction

Counterclockwise as seen from flywheel side

Firing order

1-3-4-2-1

Fuel injection timing (FID, b.T.D.C.)

15.5±1

Fuel injection pressure Valve action

Valve clearance

19.6

MPa (2840

psi)

Open

Close

Intake valve

b.T.D.C. 15 ± 5

a.B.D.C. 45 ± 5

Exhaust valve

b.T.D.C. 56 ± 5

a.B.D.C. 18 ± 5

Intake valve

0.2 mm (0.008 in) in cold condition

Exhaust valve

0.2 mm (0.008 in) in cold condition

Thermostat action

Start 71 ± 1.5 C (160 ± 3 F) / Full open 85 C (185 F)

Compression pressure

3.4 ± 0.1 MPa (500 ± 14 psi) at 250 rpm

Lubrication oil pressure

0.44 MPa (64 psi) at 2300 rpm

Dimensions L u W u H

684 u 554 u 662 mm (26.9 u 21.8 u 26.1 in)

Dry weight

170 kg (375 lb)

Governor

Mechanical centrifugal governor (All speed type)

Fuel filtration

cartridge type paper filter

Lubrication system

Forced lubrication with trochoid pump

Cooling system

Liquid cooling / Radiator

Starter capacity

12 V u 2.3kW 12 V u 55 A

Generator capacity Starting aid

Air heater (12 V - 400 W)

Cooling water capacity: Max / Engine

6.0 / 2.7 liter (1.59 / 0.71 gal)

Engine oil volume: Max / Effective

7.4 / 4.0 liter (1.96 / 1.06 gal)

2-14


2. SPECIFICATIONS 2.8.2

ENGINE PERFORMANCE CURVE

E40.2SR, E50.2SR Model: 4TNV88A-XYB Rated Output: 30.4 kW / 2400 min-1 (41.3 PS / 2400 rpm) [Sd] 4

Sd

2 0

GT

600

[GT]

500 (148) 200 400

[T]

(129) 175 300 (111)

150

T

(92) 125

50

(68)

(74) 100

45

(61)

(55)

75

40

(54)

(37) 50 g/kWh

35

(48)

[ F ] (235) 320

30

(41)

25

(34)

PS

(221)

300

(206)

280

20

(27)

(191)

260

15

(20)

(177)

240

10

(14)

(162)

220

5

(7)

(147)

200

F

kW g/PSh

800

0

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

min-1{rpm} F Fuel consumption volume =

U X 1000

XPXD

242 = X 21.2 X D 0.835 X 1000 = 8.81 D F. Fuel consumption rate (g/kwh) P. Shaft output (kw)

U Specific gravity D. Standard load factory (0.60 ~ 0.70) Fuel consumption in normal operation; 5.29 ~ 6.17 L/h (load factor: (0.60 ~ 0.70))

T. Shaft torque F. Fuel consumption rate PS.Power output GT. Exhaust temperature Sd. Smoke: Bosch

2-15

2800

PS

[PS]


2. SPECIFICATIONS

[MEMO]

2-16


3

3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.1 BOOM ............................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 BOOM DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ............................................................. 3-3 3.1.2 BOOM MAINTENANCE STANDARDS ......................................................... 3-4 3.2 ARM .................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.2.1 ARM DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ................................................................ 3-7 3.2.2 ARM MAINTENANCE STANDARDS ............................................................ 3-9 3.3 BUCKET .......................................................................................................... 3-13 3.3.1 BUCKET DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ....................................................... 3-13 3.3.2 DETAIL DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS OF LUG SECTION .......................... 3-14 3.4 DOZER ............................................................................................................ 3-15 3.4.1 DOZER DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ......................................................... 3-15 3.4.2 DOZER MAINTENANCE STANDARDS ..................................................... 3-16 3.5 SWING ............................................................................................................ 3-18 3.5.1 SWING BRACKET DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ........................................ 3-18 3.5.2 SWING PORTION MAINTENANCE STANDARDS .................................... 3-19



3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3-1


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3-2


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.1

BOOM

3.1.1

BOOM DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS

Fig. 3-1 Boom Dimensional Drawings Table 3-1 Unit: mm (ft•in) No.

DIMENSIONS

NAME

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

2670 (8'9.12")

2790 (9'1.84")

Distance between pins of boss

R1406 (4'7.35")

R1434 (4'8.46")

C

Distance between pins of bracket

R1475 (4'10.1")

R1487.5 (4'10.6")

D

Height of boom cylinder rod pin

E

Height of arm cylinder (head side) pin

F

A

Boom length

B

470 (18.5")

457.5 (18.0")

941.5 (37.1")

908 (35.7")

Boom width

250 (9.84")

m

G

Inner width of bracket for boom cylinder (rod side) mounting

76 (2.99")

m

H

Boom end inner width

175 (6.89")

m

J

Boom end outer width

265 (10.4")

m

K

Inner width of bracket for arm cylinder (head side)

66 (2.60")

m

d1

Boom pin dia. [Bushing outer dia.]

ø50 (1.97") [ø60 (2.36")]

m

d2

Boom cylinder (rod side) pin dia.

ø50 (1.97")

m

d3

Pin dia. of arm end

ø60 (2.36")

m

d4

Arm cylinder (head side) pin dia.

ø45 (1.77")

m

3-3


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.1.2

BOOM MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

(1) Clearance of pin and bushing on boom section

Fig. 3-2 Clearance of pin and bushing on boom section Table 3-2 Unit: mm (in) Standard dimensions Pos.

Item

A

Boom

B

Boom cylinder (Head side)

C

Boom cylinder (Rod side)

D

Arm cylinder (Head side)

Pin dia.

Clearance

Tolerance Tolerance on bushing on pin dia. bore dia. +0.061 0 (+0.0024) ( 0 )

ø50 (1.97)

–0.02 –0.08 (-0.0008) (-0.0031)

+0.25 +0.05 (+0.0098) (+0.0020)

Standard value

Standard value for repair

Serviceabili ty limit

0.7 (0.028)

1.0 (0.039)

0.02~ 0.141 (0.0008~0.0 056)

0.07~ 0.33 (0.0028~ 0.0130)

ø45 (1.77)

(Note) •

The tolerance for bushing inside diameter means the dimension after fitting of it into place.

The part number for pins may be changed owing to improvement, use them only for reference.

3-4

Remedy

Replace bushing or pin


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS (2) Clearance in thrust direction on boom and cylinder installation section

Fig. 3-3 Clearance in thrust direction on boom section

3-5


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS Table 3-3 Unit: mm (in) Standard dimensions Sec.

Item No. Dimensions

L1 Swing bracket

Boom cylinder B-B (Head side)

C-C

Boom cylinder (Rod side)

(9.84

(9.84

Remedy Standard Serviceabilvalue for No. Dimensions ity limit repair

0.1~0.5 (0.004~ 0.020)

PL1

377 (14.8)

0.1~0.5 (0.004~ 0.020)

PL2

264 (10.4)

0.5~0.9 (0.020~ 0.035)

PL3

213 (8.39)

0.1~0.5 (0.004~ 0.020)

PL4

200 (7.87)

)

75

Boom cylinder L2 Swing bracket

(2.95

)

77 (3.03

)

1.0 (0.039)

75

Boom cylinder L3

(2.95

)

76 (2.99

1.5 (0.059)

Adjusted with shim

)

65

Arm cylinder L4 Boom

)

250

Boom

Arm cylinder D-D (Head side)

Standard value

Pin length

250

Boom A-A Boom

Clearance X adjusted with shim (total of both sides)

(2.56

)

66 (2.60

)

3-6


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.2

ARM

3.2.1

ARM DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS

Fig. 3-4 Arm dimensional drawings

3-7


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS Table 3-4 Unit: mm (ft•in) No.

Dimensions

Name

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

1430 (4'8.30")

1560 (5'1.42")

A

Arm length

B

Distance between pins of boss and bracket

R405 (15.9")

m

C

Distance between pins of boss and bracket

R1118 (3'8.02")

m

D

Distance between pins of boss and boss

R230.5 (9.07")

m

E

Height between pins of boss and bracket

311 (12.2")

m

F

Height between pins of boss and bracket

211 (8.31")

191.5 (7.54")

G

Height between pins of boss and center

12 (0.472")

m

H

Boss width

150 (5.91")

m

J

Boss width

175 (6.89")

m

K

Bracket inner width

61 (2.40")

m

L

Bracket inner width

61 (2.40")

66 (2.60")

M

Idler link dimension

320 (12.6")

m

N

Bucket link dimension

310 (12.2")

m

D1 I.D. of boss

ø55 (2.17")

m

D2 I.D. of boss

ø55 (2.17")

m

D3 I.D. of boss

ø75 (2.95")

m

d1

Pin dia.

ø45 (1.77")

m

d2

Pin dia.

ø45 (1.77")

m

d3

Pin dia.

ø60 (2.36")

m

d4

Pin dia.

ø45 (1.77")

m

d5

Pin dia.

ø45 (1.77")

m

3-8


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.2.2

ARM MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

(1) Clearance of pin and bushing

Fig. 3-5 Clearance of pin and bushing on arm section Unit: mm (in) Standard dimensions Pos.

Item

A

Arm point (Connected part of bucket)

B

Bucket link (Bucket side)

C

Idler link (Connected part of arm)

Pin dia.

ø45 (1.77)

Bucket link (Idler link side)

D

Tolerance on pin dia.

–0.02 –0.05 (-0.0008) (-0.0020)

D’

Bucket cylinder (Rod side)

E

Bucket cylinder (Head side)

F

Arm foot (Connected part of boom)

ø60 (2.36)

G

Arm cylinder (Rod side)

ø45 (1.77)

Clearance

Tolerance on bushing bore Standard value dia. +0.064 +0.005 (+0.0025) (+0.0002)

0.025~ 0.114 (0.0010~ 0.0045)

+0.076 +0.035 (+0.0030) (+0.0014)

0.055~ 0.126 (0.0022~ 0.0050)

+0.073 +0.032 (+0.0029) (+0.0013)

0.052~ 0.123 (0.0020~ 0.0048)

+0.25 +0.05 (+0.0098) (+0.0020)

0.07~ 0.30 (0.0028~ 0.0118)

+0.061 0 (+0.0024) ( 0 ) +0.25 +0.05 (+0.0098) (+0.0020)

Standard value for repair

Serviceability limit

0.7 (0.028)

1.0 (0.039)

0.02~ 0.111 (0.0008~ 0.0044) 0.07~ 0.30 (0.0028~ 0.0118)

(Note) •

The tolerance for bushing inside diameter means the dimension after fitting of it into place.

The part number for pins may be changed owing to improvement, use them only for reference.

3-9

Remedy

Replace bushing or pin


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS (2) Clearance in thrust direction on arm and cylinder installation section

Fig. 3-6 Clearance in thrust direction on arm section

3-10


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS Table 3-6 • E40.2SR

Unit: mm (in) Standard dimensions

Sec.

Item No.

L1 Bucket

Bucket link (Rod side)

L2

(5.91

(5.94

Arm L3 Link side

L4

L5

150 (5.91)

0.1~0.5 (0.004~ 0.020)

— (—)

(2.165

)

(5.91

0.6~1.0 (0.024~ 0.039)

1.5 (0.059)

0.1~0.5 (0.004~ 0.020)

)

— (—)

Idler link

287.5 (11.3)

PL3

210.5 (8.29)

PL5

210.5 (8.29)

PL6

183 (7.20)

PL7

265 (10.4)

PL8

183 (7.20)

2.0 (0.079) Adjusted with shim

60

Head side L6

(2.36

0.5~0.9 (0.020~ 0.035)

)

61

Arm

(2.40

)

175

Arm L7

(6.89

Less than 0.5 (0.020)

)

175

Boom

(6.89

1.0 (0.039)

1.5 (0.059)

)

60

Rod side L8 Arm

PL2

)

150

Bucket link

Arm cylinder G-G (Rod side)

287.5 (11.3)

See "NOTE"

)

57±0.4 (2.24±0.016)

D-D

F-F Arm foot

0.7~2.2 (0.028~ 0.087)

55

Rod side

Bucket cylinder E-E (Head side)

)

PL1

151

Link side

Bucket link (Idler link side)

151

150

Bucket

Idler link C-C (Connected part of arm)

Standard Service- Remedy Standard value for ability No. Dimensions Dimensions value repair limit

(5.94

Link side B-B Bucket link

Pin length

150 (5.91)

Arm A-A Arm point

Clearance X adjusted with shim (total of both sides)

(2.362

)

61 (2.402

0.5~0.9 (0.020~ 0.035)

)

(Note) •

Clearance X shall be adjusted using shims, if clearance exceeds the standard value for repair.

3-11


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS Table 3-7 • E50.2SR

Unit: mm (in) Standard dimensions

Sec.

Item No.

L1 Bucket

Standard Service- Remedy Standard Dimensions value for ability No. Dimensions value repair limit

151 (5.94

L2

(5.91

(5.94

Bucket link (Rod side)

Arm L3 Link side

L4

150 (5.91)

L5

— (—)

(2.165

L6

(5.91

(2.36

(2.40

0.6~1.0 (0.024~ 0.039)

PL3

210.5 (8.29)

1.5 (0.059)

0.1~0.5 (0.004~ 0.020)

2.0 (0.079) Adjust- PL5 ed with shim

L7

)

0.5~0.9 (0.020~ 0.035)

PL6

183 (7.20)

PL7

265 (10.4)

PL8

183 (7.20)

)

(6.89

)

175

Boom

(6.89

Less than 0.5 (0.020)

1.0 (0.039)

1.5 (0.059)

)

65

Rod side L8

(2.56

)

66 (2.60

0.5~0.9 (0.020~ 0.035)

)

(Note) •

210.5 (8.29)

175

Arm

Arm

)

61

Arm

Arm cylinder (Rod side)

287.5 (11.3)

60

Head side

G-G

)

— (—)

Idler link

F-F Arm foot

0.1~0.5 (0.004~ 0.020)

150

Bucket link

Bucket cylinder (Head side)

PL2

)

57±0.4 (2.24±0.016)

D-D

E-E

287.5 (11.3)

See "NOTE"

)

55

Rod side

Link side

Bucket link (Idler link side)

PL1

151

Bucket

Idler link C-C (Connected part of arm)

0.7~2.2 (0.028~ 0.087)

)

150

Link side B-B Bucket link

Pin length

150 (5.91)

Arm A-A Arm point

Clearance X adjusted with shim (total of both sides)

Clearance X shall be adjusted using shims, if clearance exceeds the standard value for repair.

3-12


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.3

BUCKET

3.3.1

BUCKET DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS

Fig. 3-7 Bucket dimensional drawings Table 3-8 Unit: mm (in) No.

Model

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

Heaped Capacity m3 (cu.yd)

0.14 (0.17)

0.16 (0.20)

A

Distance between pin and bracket

228.5 (9)

m

B

Distance between bucket pin and tooth end

R802 (31.6)

m

C

Inner width of bucket top end

568 (22.36)

668 (26.29)

D

Inner width of lug

181 (7.12)

m

E

Inner width of bracket

151 (5.94)

m

F

Outer width of side cutter

650 (25.59)

700 (27.56)

G

Outer width of bucket bottom plate

510 (20.08)

610 (24.01)

H

Outer tooth distance

500 (19.68)

600 (23.62)

J

Pitch between teeth

166 (6.53)

200 (7.87)

J0

Pitch between teeth

166 (6.53)

200 (7.87)

d1

Pin dia.

ø45 (1.77)

m

d2

Pin dia.

ø45 (1.77)

m

3-13


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.3.2

DETAIL DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS OF LUG SECTION

Fig. 3-8 Dimension of lug section Table 3-9 Unit: mm (in) Portion

Dimensions

Plate outer dia. øA

Boss thickness B

ø75 (2.95)

15 (0.59)

3-14

Pin bore dia. øC ø45 (1.77

)

Lug plate thickness D 10 (0.39)


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.4

DOZER

3.4.1

DOZER DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS

Fig. 3-10 Dozer dimensional drawings Table 3-10 Unit: mm (ft•in) No.

Dimensions

NAME

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

A

Blade width

1960 (6'5.17")

m

B

Blade height

346 (1'1.62")

m

C

Distance from dozer attaching pin center to cutting edge end

R1092 (3'6.99")

R1149 (3'9.24")

D

Inner width of dozer attaching bracket

531 (20.9")

m

E

Width of dozer attaching bracket

69 (2.72")

m

F

Distance from dozer attaching pin center to attaching pin on dozer cylinder head side

R712 (28.0")

m

62 (2.44")

m

1046 (3'5.18")

1105.3 (3'5.72")

Vertical distance from dozer attaching pin center to edge end

313 (12.3")

m

d1

Dozer attaching pin dia.

ø40 (1.57")

m

d2

Attaching pin dia. on dozer cylinder head side

ø55 (2.17")

m

G

Attaching bracket inner width on dozer cylinder head side

H

Horizontal distance from dozer attaching pin center to edge end

J

3-15


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.4.2

DOZER MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

Fig. 3-11 Dozer maintenance standards A-B-C = Pin (1) Clearance of pin and bushing Table 3-11 Unit: mm (in) Standard dimension Pos.

Item

A

Dozer blade cylinder (Head side)

B

Dozer blade cylinder (Rod side)

C

Dozer blade foot

Pin dia.

ø55 (2.17)

ø40 (1.57)

Clearance

Tolerance on Tolerance on Standard val- Standard val- Serviceabilipin dia. bushing bore ue ue for repair ty limit dia. –0.15 –0.21 (-0.0059) (-0.0083)

+0.25 +0.05 (+0.0098) (+0.0020)

0.20~ 0.46 (0.0079~0.01 81)

–0.06 –0.09 (-0.0024) (-0.0035)

+0.215 +0.115 (+0.0085) (+0.0045)

0.175~ 0.305 (0.0069~0.01 20)

1.5 (0.059)

(Note) •

The tolerance for bushing inside diameter means the dimension after fitting of it into place.

The part number for pins may be changed owing to improvement, use them only for reference.

3-16

2.0 (0.079)


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS (2) Clearance in thrust direction on the dozer and cylinder installation section Table 3-12 Unit: mm (in) Standard dimensions Pos.

A

Item

Dozer blade cylinder (Head side)

No.

Dimensions

Dozer blade cylinder (Rod side)

L1

Dozer blade foot

(2.362

)

)

60

Rod side L2 Lower frame

Lower frame

Remedy

No. Dimensions

PL1

141 (5.55)

PL2

141 (5.55)

PL3

137 (5.39)

62

Dozer blade

(2.362

2.0~3.5 (0.079~0.035) Adjusted with shim

)

62 (2.441

)

69±0.5 (2.72±0.020)

Dozer blade C

Pin length

60

Head side

(2.441

B

Clearance X adjusted with shim (total of both sides)

L3

72 (2.83

2.5~4.5 (0.079~0.177)

)

(NOTE) •

Clearance X shall be adjusted using shims, if clearance exceeds the standard value for repair.

3-17


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.5

SWING

3.5.1

SWING BRACKET DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS

E

H

d3

D

B

G

A

d2

C F1

F J

F2 d4

d1 Fig. 3-12 Swing bracket dimensional drawings Table 3-13

Unit: mm (in) No.

NAME

DIMENSION

A

Distance between swing center pin and boom foot pin

67 (2.64)

B

Distance between boom foot pin and boom cylinder pin

207.6 (8.17)

C

- ditto -

320.7 (12.6)

D

Distance between swing center pin and swing cylinder pin

E

- ditto -

290 (11.4)

F

Inside width of swing center

329 (13.0)

F1 - ditto -

R307.5 (12.1)

78.5 (3.09)

F2 - ditto -

76 (2.99)

G

Inside width of boom foot

250 (9.84)

H

Inside width for installing boom cylinder

77 (3.03)

J

Inside width for installing swing cylinder

73 (2.87)

d1

Pin dia. of swing center

ø80 (3.15)

d2

Pin dia. of boom foot

ø50 (1.97)

d3

Pin dia. of boom cylinder

ø50 (1.97)

d4

Pin dia. of swing cylinder

ø50 (1.97)

3-18


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.5.2

SWING PORTION MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

(1) Clearance of pin and bushing

B

C

A

D Fig. 3-13 Clearance of pin and bushing on swing portion Table 3-14 Unit: mm (in) Standard dimension Pos.

Item

A

Swing cylinder (Rod side)

B

Swing cylinder (Head side)

C

Swing center (Upper side)

D

Swing center (Lower side)

Pin dia.

ø50 (1.97)

ø80 (3.15)

Tolerance on Tolerance on bushing bore pin dia. dia.

–0.02 –0.05 (-0.0008) (-0.0020)

+0.150 0 (+0.0059) ( 0 ) +0.061 +0.009 (+0.0024) (+0.0004)

Clearance Standard value 0.02~ 0.20 (0.0008~0.00 79) 0.029~ 0.111 (0.0001~0.00 44)

Standard value for repair

Serviceability limit

1.5 (0.059)

2.0 (0.079)

(Note) •

The tolerance for bushing inside diameter means the dimension after fitting of it into place.

The part number for pins may be changed owing to improvement, use them only for reference.

3-19


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS (2) Clearance in thrust direction on swing bracket and cylinder installation section

PL1 X

PL2

L1

X

L2

B-B

A-A

1

C-C, D-D Fig. 3-14 Clearance in thrust direction on swing portion 1. Washer - To be install the groove to the lower side [t=2.3 (0.091�)]

3-20


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS Table 3-15 Unit: mm (in) Standard Dimension Sec.

Item No.

Swing A-A cylinder (Rod side)

Dimensions

L1

(2.76

L2

0.5~0.9 (0.020~ 0.035)

1.5 (0.059)

(2.76

)

(2.83

PL1

146.5 (5.77)

PL2

151 (5.94)

Replace PL3 washer

155 (6.1)

Adjusted with PL4 shim

142 (5.59)

— Adjusted with shim

)

72

0.5~0.9 (0.020~ 0.035)

1.0 (0.039)

)

73

Upper frame L3

(2.87

)

78.5

Bracket

(3.09

)

73

Upper frame L4 Bracket

Remedy Standard Serviceability value for No. Dimensions limit repair

70

Cylinder

Swing center D-D (Lower side)

)

73

Bracket

Swing B-B cylinder (Head side) Upper frame

Standard value

Pin length

70

Cylinder

(2.87

Swing center C-C (Upper side)

Clearance X adjusted with shim (total of both sides)

(2.87

)

78.5 (2.99

Less than 0.5 (0.020)

)

3-21

1.5 (0.059)


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

[MEMO]

3-22


11. TOOLS TABLE OF CONTENTS 11.1 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR CAPSCREWS & NUTS ........................... 11-3 11.1.1 METRIC COARSE THREAD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES. MAKE CERTAIN TO TIGHTEN ALL CAPSCREWS & NUTS TO PROPER TORQUE VALUES.................................................................................... 11-3 11.1.2 METRIC FINE THREAD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES. MAKE CERTAIN TO TIGHTEN ALL CAPSCREWS & NUTS TO PROPER TORQUE VALUES. .................................................................................. 11-4 11.2 SCREW AND TOOL SIZES ............................................................................ 11-5 11.2.1 CAPSCREW ............................................................................................. 11-5 11.2.2 CAPSCREW (SOCKET BOLT) ................................................................ 11-5 11.3 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR JOINTS AND HOSES ............................. 11-5 11.3.1 JOINTS FOR PIPING (O-RING SEALING TYPE) ................................... 11-5 11.3.2 HYDRAULIC HOSE (30° FLARE TYPE) ................................................. 11-5 11.4 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SLEEVE TYPE TUBE FITTINGS ............ 11-6 11.4.1 SLEEVE TYPE TUBE FITTINGS ............................................................. 11-6 11.5 SPECIAL SPANNERS FOR TUBES ............................................................... 11-7 11.6 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................................................................ 11-7 11.7 APPLICATION OF SCREW LOCKING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS ......... 11-7 11.8 COUNTERWEIGHT LIFTING JIG ................................................................... 11-8 11.9 UPPER FRAME LIFTING JIG ......................................................................... 11-9



11. TOOLS

11-1


11. TOOLS

11-2


11. TOOLS

11.1

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR CAPSCREWS & NUTS

The following Torque Specifications are provided for use when actual torque value of a fastener is not known. Check the capscrews and nuts for their looseness and dropping off before the start of daily work and at the periodical maintenance. Retighten the loosened ones, and install new ones for the dropped off. For the new machine, the check and retightening of them must be carried out at first 50 hours operation. For the replacement of them, make sure to use the same size of genuine parts. Refer to the table below for the tightening and retightening of capscrews. •The table below is not applicable for the capscrews to fix the cover, etc., made of plastic. For the tightening torque for such capscrews, consult with an authorized Distributor. Over-tightening may cause damages on the parts to be fixed. •In case that the tightening torque is specified in the manual, use such torque values regardless to the table below. •Numerical indication on the capscrew head shows the classification for strength (e.g., 7 = 7 T). No indication is provided for smaller size of capscrews, M 5 or less.

1

1. Classification 11.1.1

Metric Coarse Thread Standard Tightening Torque Values. Make Certain to tighten all Capscrews & Nuts to proper torque values. Torque value Unit: N•m (lbf•ft)

Classification Nominal size

4.8T

7T

10.9T

No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication

M6

P=1

4.4±0.5 (3.2±0.4)

3.7±0.4 (2.7±0.3)

9.6±1.0 (7.1±0.7)

8.1±0.8 (6.0±0.6)

17.4±1.8 (12.8±1.3)

14.7±1.5 (10.8±1.1)

M8

P=1.25

10.7±1.1 (7.9±0.8)

9.0±0.9 (6.6±0.7)

23.5±2.0 (17.3±1.5)

19.6±2.0 (14.5±1.5)

42.2±3.9 (31.1±2.9)

35.3±3.9 (26.0±2.9)

M10

P=1.5

21.6±2.0 (15.9±1.4)

17.9±1.8 (13.2±1.3)

46.1±4.9 (34.0±3.6)

39.2±3.9 (28.9±2.9)

83.4±8.8 (61.5±6.5)

70.6±6.9 (52.1±5.1)

M12

P=1.75

36.3±3.9 (26.8±2.9)

31.4±2.9 (23.2±2.1)

79.4±7.8 (58.6±5.8)

66.7±6.9 (49.2±5.1)

143±15 (105±11)

121±12 (89.2±8.9)

M14

P=2

57.9±5.9 (42.7±4.4)

49.0±4.9 (36.1±3.6)

126±13 (92.9±9.6)

106±10 (78.2±7.4)

226±20 (167±15)

191±19 (141±14)

M16

P=2

88.3±8.8 (65.1±6.5)

74.5±6.9 (55.0±5.1)

191±20 (141±15)

161±16 (119±12)

343±39 (253±29)

284±29 (209±21)

M18

P=2.5

122±12 (90.0±8.9)

103±10 (75.8±7.2)

265±29 (195±21)

226±20 (167±15)

481±49 (355±36)

402±39 (297±29)

M20

P=2.5

172±17 (127±13)

144±14 (106±10)

373±39 (275±29)

314±29 (232±21)

667±69 (492±51)

559±59 (412±44)

M22

P=2.5

226±20 (167±15)

192±20 (142±15)

500±49 (369±36)

422±39 (311±29)

902±88 (665±65)

755±78 (557±58)

M24

P=3

294±29 (217±21)

235±29 (173±21)

637±69 (470±51)

520±49 (383±36)

1160±118 (856±87)

941±98 (694±72)

M27

P=3

431±39 (318±29)

353±39 (260±29)

941±98 (694±72)

765±78 (564±58)

1700±167 (1250±123)

1370±137 (1010±101)

11-3


11. TOOLS Torque value Unit: N•m (lbf•ft) Classification Nominal size

4.8T

7T

10.9T

No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication

M30

P=3.5

588±59 (434±44)

490±49 (361±36)

1285±127 (948±94)

1079±108 (796±80)

2300±235 (1700±173)

1940±196 (1430±145)

M33

P=3.5

794±78 (586±58)

667±69 (492±51)

1726±177 (1270±131)

1451±147 (1070±108)

3110±314 (2290±232)

2610±265 (1930±195)

M36

P=4

1030±98 (760±72)

863±88 (637±65)

2226±226 (1640±167)

1863±186 (1370±137)

4010±402 (2960±297)

3360±333 (2480±246)

11.1.2

Metric Fine Thread Standard Tightening Torque values. Make certain to tighten all Capscrews & Nuts to proper torque values. Torque value Unit: N•m (lbf•ft)

Classification Nominal size

4.8T

7T

10.9T

No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication

M8

P=1.0

11.3±1.1 (8.3±0.8)

9.5±1.0 (7.0±0.7)

24.5±2.0 (18.1±1.5)

20.6±2.0 (15.2±1.5)

44.1±3.9 (32.5±2.9)

37.3±3.9 (27.5±2.9)

M10

P=1.25

22.6±2.0 (16.7±1.5)

18.7±1.9 (13.8±1.4)

48.1±4.9 (35.5±3.6)

41.2±3.9 (30.3±2.9)

87.3±8.8 (64.4±6.5)

73.5±6.9 (54.2±5.1)

M12

P=1.25

39.2±3.9 (28.9±2.9)

33.3±2.9 (24.6±2.1)

85.3±8.8 (62.9±6.5)

71.6±6.9 (52.8±5.1)

154±16 (114±12)

129±13 (95.2±9.6)

M16

P=1.5

92.2±8.8 (68.0±6.5)

77.5±7.8 (57.2±5.8)

196±20 (145±15)

169±17 (125±13)

363±39 (268±29)

304±29 (224±21)

M20

P=1.5

186±19 (137±14)

155±16 (114±12)

402±39 (297±29)

333±29 (246±21)

726±69 (535±51)

608±59 (448±44)

M24

P=2

314±29 (232±21)

265±29 (195±21)

686±69 (506±51)

569±59 (420±44)

1240±118 (915±87)

1030±98 (760±72)

M30

P=2

637±59 (470±44)

530±49 (391±36)

1390±137 (1030±101)

1157±118 (853±87)

2500±255 (1840±188)

2080±206 (1530±152)

M33

P=2

853±88 (629±65)

706±70 (521±52)

1860±186 (1370±137)

1550±155 (1140±114)

3350±334 (2470±246)

2790±275 (2060±203)

M36

P=3

1070±108 (789±80)

892±88 (658±65)

2330±226 (1720±167)

1940±196 (1430±145)

4200±422 (3100±311)

3500±353 (2580±260)

11-4


11. TOOLS

11.2

SCREW AND TOOL SIZES

11.2.1

Capscrew

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm Tool size

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm

M6

10

M24

36

M8

13

M30

46

M10

17

M36

55

M12

19

M42

65

M16

24

M48

75

M20

30

11.2.2

d

Tool size

B

Capscrew (Socket bolt)

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm Tool size

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm

d

Tool size

M6

5

M20

17

M8

6

M24

19

M10

8

M30

22

M12

10

M36

27

M14

12

M42

32

M16

14

M48

36

(M18)

14

B

11.3

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR JOINTS AND HOSES

11.3.1

JOINTS FOR PIPING (O-RING SEALING TYPE)

Nominal screw size (PF)

Spanner size (mm)

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

1/8

14

17±2 (12±1)

1/4

19

36±2 (27±1)

3/8

22

74±5 (54±4)

1/2

27

108±9.8 (80±7)

3/4

36

162±9.8 (119±7)

1

41

255±9.8 (188±7)

11.3.2

HYDRAULIC HOSE (30° FLARE TYPE)

Nominal screw size (PF)

Spanner size (mm)

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

1/8

17

15±2.0 (11±1)

1/4

19

29±4.9 (22±4)

3/8

22

49±4.9 (36±4)

1/2

27

78±4.9 (58±4)

3/4

36

118±9.8 (87±7)

1

41

137±15 (101±11)

NOTE: The application of the tightening torque is subject to a dry condition.

11-5


11. TOOLS

11.4

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SLEEVE TYPE TUBE FITTINGS

11.4.1

SLEEVE TYPE TUBE FITTINGS

Tube size OD u Thickness (mm)

Spanner size (mm)

Tightening Torque N•m (lbf•ft)

10 u 1.5

19

44±4.9 (33±4)

15 u 2.0

27

147±20 (110±14)

18 u 2.5

32

177±20 (130±14)

22 u 3.0

36

216±20 (160±14)

28 u 4.0

41

275±29 (200±22)

35 u 5.0

55

441±44 (330±33)

11-6


11. TOOLS

11.5

SPECIAL SPANNERS FOR TUBES

Applicable tube diameter mm (in)

Part No.

HEX mm (in)

27

15 (0.591)

(1.063)

32

18 (0.709)

(1.26)

36

22 (0.866)

(1.417)

41

28 (1.102)

11.6

Dimensions of a special spanner mm

(1.614)

SPECIAL TOOLS Unit: mm (in)

No.

Tools name

1

Torx driver (with tamper proof) T25 (for M5)

11.7

Tools No.

Shape

Use

4.4 (0.17")

For instrument R.H cover

—

APPLICATION OF SCREW LOCKING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS Service

Screw locking compound Sealing compound

Manufacturer

Features

Loctite

Three-Bond

#242

1360 K

Low strength

#262

1374

Middle strength

#271

1305

High strength

#515

1215

Sealing

11-7


11. TOOLS

11.8

COUNTERWEIGHT LIFTING JIG

Q’ty: 2 set Material: Mild steel UNIT: mm (in)

49 9 (1.93") (0.35")

(2.36")

40 (1.57")

") .95 0 ( 24

45(

C

12 (0.47")

112 (4.41") 60

30 (1.12")

170 (6.69")

") 20

0.

310 (12.2")

40

(1.5

8")

0 R15 ) 1" 9 . (5 100 (3.94")

477 (18.8")

527 (20.7")

10 (0.39") (539) {21.2"}

20(4)-90 {0.79"(0.16")-3.54"}

10

C

70 (2.76") 10 (0.39")

3 (0.12") 10 (0.39")

R50 (1.9 7")

)

9"

.3

(0

12 (0.47")

300 (11.8")

3 (0.12")

100 (3.94")

R

R (1 50 .9 7" )

135 (5.32")

50 (1.97")

Fig. 11-1 Counterweight lifting jig

11-8

160 (6.30")


11. TOOLS

11.9

UPPER FRAME LIFTING JIG

Q’ty: 2 set Material: Mild steel UNIT: mm (in)

(1.97")

) 9" .7

50

40(2)-100 {1.58"(0.079")-3.94"}

24( 0.9 5")

(0 20

C 2-

5 (0.20")

244 (9.61")

16 (0.63")

310 (12.2")

100 (3.94") 4

1. 0(

58

15 (0.59")

")

40(2)-120 {1.58"(0.079")-4.72"}

12 (0.47")

420 (16.5")

(536) {21.1"}

167 (6.58") 50 (1.97")

5 ) C2 .98" (0

Fig. 11-2 Upper frame lifting jig

11-9

0 R2 9") .7 (0

C (0 10 .3 9" )

50

0 R3 8") .1 (1

5 (0.20")

(1.97")

12 (0.47")

470 (18.5")

5 (0.20")

16 (0.63")

R


11. TOOLS

[MEMO]

11-10


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.1 STANDARD WORKING TIME TABLE FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF EXCAVATOR ............................................................................................ 12-4



12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

12-1


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

12-2


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE PREFACE (1) Working Conditions 1) Technicians: One or more technicians qualified (with five years or more of field experience and having completed the training in the operation of vehicle type construction machinery) to be provided. 2) Facilities: General jigs, tools, apparatus, testers to be provided. The maintenance workshop to be equipped with a good enough capacity of building with crane and inspection instruments necessary for specific self inspection activities. 3) Place: The workshop to be located on a flat land at which the work is able to perform and to which a service car or truck crane is accessible. (2) Applicable Range of Standard Maintenance Time 1) Standard maintenance time: Direct maintenance time plus spare time. 2) Direct maintenance time: Net time actually spent for maintenance. 3) Spare time: Time for transportation of the machine for maintenance, preparation for safety work, meeting for the work and physiological time for the needs of body. (3) Excluded Time (not included in the standard maintenance time) 1) Repairing time: Time for machining, sheet metal processing, welding, gas cutting, removing broken screw, taking care of parts and painting. 2) Items excluded from maintenance time because of uncertainty in time: Receiving the vehicle into shop, transportation, delivery, final inspection and investigation of causes for trouble, diagnosis and inspection. 3) Indirect time: Time for field work, preparation of required parts, etc., before starting work, going to and from the site, waiting due to user’s convenience at the site and paper work for reports, bills, etc. 4) Special time: Working time at early morning, at mid night and on holidays shall be separately calculated. 5) Separate calculation: The cost for service cars, trucks with crane and truck cranes shall be separately calculated. (4) Applicable Machine for Estimation of Standard Maintenance Time 1) Standard machine. 2) A well maintained machine combined with standard attachments which has operated in a normal circumstances.

12-3


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

12.1

STANDARD WORKING TIME TABLE FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF EXCAVATOR

(1) Standard maintenance time table 1) Units of working time: 6 minutes = 0.1 hour 2) Calculating method of standard maintenance time: Maintenance time = Working time u Number of workers (Working time = Maintenance time / Number of workers) 3) When more than one work are done: a. Add each standard maintenance time b. A net time (readily starting) is given except covers easily removed by hand. c. Assy works include the following works marked with black dot • 4) O / H: The removing and installing time are not included. 5) Abbreviations in the table. ASSY :

Assembly

SOL :

Solenoid

Rem. :

Removal

ATT

Attachment

SW

:

Switch

Inst. :

Installation

Bearing

V

:

Valve

O/H

Overhaul

:

BRG : C/V

:

Control valve

F hose:

Flexible hose

Cyl

:

Cylinder

E/G

Engine

:

:

(2) Classification of work code No.

GROUP

01

Attachment

02

Canopy and Guard

03

Upper Structure

04

Under carriage

GROUP No.

REMARKS To indicate removing, installing, replacement and overhaul.

EQUIPMENT PORTION

WORK TO BE DONE

UNIT

00 Bucket portion Rem.l/Inst.

1 pc.

02 • Bucket removing / installing position

Preparation

1 pc.

04 • Bucket drive pin

01 Attachment

05 • Bucket sling and transfer 06 Bucket (Single) 07 • Bushing

Include adjustment

0.4 0.1

Rem./Inst.

1 pc.

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

Preparation

1 pc.

0.1

O/H

1 pc.

Replace

1 pc.

10 Arm portion 11 Arm ASSY

UNIT: HOUR

Refer to 32.1.2

01 Bucket ASSY 03 • Bucket installing pin

REMARKS

Include stopper pin.

Not include removal / inst.

0.1

0.6 0.5

Refer to 32.1.3 Rem./Inst.

1 pc.

0.8

Preparation

1 pc.

0.2

Rem./Inst.

1 pc.

Include stopper pin.

0.1

14 • Bucket cylinder head pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

Include stopper pin.

0.1

15 • Bucket cylinder assy

- ditto -

1 pc.

16 • Arm cylinder rod pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

17 • Boom top pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

18 • Arm sling and transfer

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

12

• Bucket cylinder removing / installing position and piping

13 • Bucket cylinder rod pin

12-4

0.1 Include stopper pin.

0.1


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE GROUP No.

EQUIPMENT PORTION

WORK TO BE DONE

UNIT

20 Boom portion 21 Boom ASSY

UNIT: HOUR

Refer to 32.1.4 1 pc.

1.0

Preparation

1 pc.

0.1

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

24 • Boom cylinder rod pin

Rem./Inst.

1 pc.

25 • Boom cylinder piping

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

22 • Boom removing / installing position 23 • Boom cylinder temporary slinging

26 • Arm & Bucket piping

Rem./Inst.

Include stopper pin.

0.1

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.2

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.1

28 • Boom foot pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

29 • Boom assy slinging

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

30 Arm cylinder removing / installing

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.3

31 • Arm cylinder piping

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

32 • Arm cylinder head pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

33 • Arm cylinder slinging

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

40 Boom cylinder removing / installing

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.3

41 • Boom cylinder piping

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

42 • Boom cylinder head pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

43 • Boom cylinder slinging

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

27 • Boom assy temporary slinging

01 Attachment

REMARKS

50 Bucket cylinder

O/H

1 pc.

51 • Pin bushing

Replace

1 set

O/H

1 pc.

Replace

1 set

60 Arm cylinder 61 • Pin bushing 70 Boom cylinder

O/H

1 pc.

71 • Pin bushing

Replace

1 set

80 Swing portion 81 Swing bracket assy

Include stopper pin.

Include stopper pin.

0.1

0.1

2.5 Include seal.

1.0 2.5

Include seal.

1.0

Include seal.

1.0

2.5 Refer to 32.1.5

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

After removing boom.

0.4

82 • Swing cylinder rod pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

83 • Swing bracket slinging

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

84 • Swing center pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

85 Swing cylinder removing / installing

- ditto -

1 pc.

Rem. / Inst.

2 pcs.

0.2

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

88 Swing cylinder

O/H

1 pc.

89 • Pin bushing

Replace

1 pc.

Include seal.

1.0

Rem. / Inst.

1 set

Panel assy (3)

0.1

86 • Swing cylinder hose 87 • Swing cylinder head pin

Other necessary works 90 Dozer portion 91 Dozer ASSY

After removing swing bracket.

0.3

2.5

Refer to 32.1.6 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.6

92 • Dozer cylinder hose

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.2

93 • Dozer cylinder rod pin

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

94 • Dozer installing pin

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.2

95 Dozer cylinder

O/H

1 pc.

96 • Pin bushing

Replace

1 set

12-5

2.5 Include seal.

1.0


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE GROUP No.

EQUIPMENT PORTION

WORK TO BE DONE

UNIT

00 Canopy portion 01 Canopy assy 02 • Hand rail

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.2 0.1 Refer to 33.1.1

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.4

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

21 Cover assy (1)

Rem. / Inst.

1pc.

0.1

22 Bonnet assy (2)

- ditto -

1pc.

0.1

23 Cover assy (3)

- ditto -

1pc.

0.1

12 • Harness 20 Bonnet & Guard

Refer to 33.1.2

24 Cover assy (4)

- ditto -

1pc.

0.1

25 Cover assy (5)

Rem. / Inst.

1pc.

0.1

30 Control stand portion 31 Control stand ASSY 02 Canopy & Guard

UNIT: HOUR

Refer to 33.1.1

10 Cab portion 11 Cab assy

REMARKS

Refer to 33.1.14 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

1.0

32 • Air cleaner

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

33 • E / G control cable

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.2

34 • Deceleration motor (OPT)

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

35 • Filler neck

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

36 • Fuel air bleed hose

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

37 • Harness

- ditto -

1 set

0.3

Rem. / Inst.

1 set

Canopy

0.2

- ditto -

1 set

Floor cover

0.1

- ditto -

1 set

Guard (Cover, support)

0.4

- ditto -

1 pc.

Counterweight

0.4

- ditto -

1 pc.

Negative terminal of battery

0.1

Other necessary works

40 Floor plate portion 41 Floor plate assy Other necessary works

Refer to 33.1.3 Rem. / Inst.

1 set

- ditto -

1 pc.

50 Counterweight portion

0.5 Canopy removal / inst

0.2

Refer to 33.1.5

51 Counterweight ASSY

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.4

52 • Lifting tools

Preparation

1 set

0.1

53 • Slinging

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.1

54 • Counterweight fixing bolt

- ditto -

1 set

0.1

Other necessary works

- ditto -

3 pcs.

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.2

02 Swing yoke

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

03 Swing cable

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

04 Other necessary works

- ditto -

1 set

Guards

0.3

00 Control portion

03 Upper structure

01 E / G control cable

10 Intake portion 11 Air cleaner ASSY

Cover and Hose

0.4

Refer to 33.1.11 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.3

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

13 • Hose (2)

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

14 • Element

Replace

1 pc.

0.1

12 • Hose (1)

20 Exhaust portion 21 Muffler ASSY

Refer to 33.1.13 Rem. / Inst.

12-6

1 pc.

0.4


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE GROUP No.

WORK TO BE DONE

UNIT

22 • Clamp

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

23 • Exhaust manifold attaching nuts

- ditto -

4 pcs.

0.1

24 • Muffler fixing bolt

- ditto -

4 pcs.

0.1

- ditto -

1 set

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.6

32 • Connector

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

33 • Generator fixing bolt

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.1

34 •

- ditto -

1 pc.

Include tension adjusting

0.3

- ditto -

1 set

Covers

0.1

- ditto -

1 pc.

Negative terminal of battery

0.1

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.5

37 • B-terminal

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

38 • S-terminal connector

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

39 •

Starter fixing bolt

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.2

Other necessary works

- ditto -

1 set

Cover and Floor plate

0.1

- ditto -

1 set

Seat and Stand cover

0.3

- ditto -

1 pc.

Negative terminal of battery

0.1

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.6

Replace

1 pc.

0.2

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.1

44 • Hose (Return; filter side)

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

45 • Level sensor connector

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

46 • Fuel tank fixing bolt

- ditto -

4 pcs.

0.1

- ditto -

1 pc.

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

After removing fuel tank ;

1.6

52 • Return filter

Replace

1 pc.

Include pressure releasing & replacing O-ring

0.2

53 • Hydraulic oil

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.2

54 • Suction hose

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.2

Replace

1 pc.

56 • Pilot return hose

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.1

57 • Swivel drain hose

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

58 • SOL. valve return hose

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

59 • Slewing, C / V return hose

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.2

EQUIPMENT PORTION

Other necessary works 30 E / G Accessory portion 31 Generator

V-belt

Other necessary works 36 Starter

03 Upper structure

42 • Fuel 43 • Hose (Supply; water separator side)

Other necessary works

55 • Strainer

60 • Tank fixing bolt Other necessary works

72 • Hydraulic oil 73 • Pilot delivery oil hose

Covers

0.2

Refer to 33.1.10

Include replacing O-ring

0.1

- ditto -

4 pcs.

- ditto -

1 pc.

Covers

0.2

- ditto -

1 pc.

Control valve

1.6

- ditto -

1 pc.

Solenoid valve

0.1

Preparation

1 pc.

Hyd. oil tank pressurizing

0.1

70 Pump portion 71 Pump ASSY

0.1

Refer to 33.1.9

50 Hydraulic oil tank portion 51 Hydraulic oil tank ASSY

Heat insulation cover

UNIT: HOUR

Refer to 33.1.12 & 33.1.15

40 Fuel portion 41 Fuel tank ASSY

REMARKS

0.2

Refer to 33.1.6 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

After removing counterweight

1.2

Replace

1 pc.

Include pressure releasing

0.2

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

12-7

0.1


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE GROUP No.

WORK TO BE DONE

UNIT

74 • Suction hose

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.2

75 • Suction tube (pump side)

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.2

76 • Main pump delivery hose

- ditto -

3 pcs.

0.2

77 • Pump fixing bolt

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.2

O/H

1 pc.

3.0

Feed

1 pc.

Hyd. oil in pump

0.1

Preparation

1 pc.

Hyd. oil tank pressurizing

0.1

EQUIPMENT PORTION

78 Pump ASSY Other necessary works

80 Radiator portion 81 Radiator ASSY 82 • Coolant (LLC)

UNIT: HOUR

Refer to 33.1.16 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

1.2

Replace

1 pc.

0.2

83 • • Coolant density

Measuring

1 pc.

(0.2)

84 • Reserve tank hose

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.1

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.2

85 • Radiator hose

03 Upper structure

REMARKS

86 • Cooler hose

- ditto -

2 pcs.

0.2

87 • Radiator fixing bolt

- ditto -

3 pcs.

0.1

88 • Radiator lifting or slinging

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

Other necessary works

- ditto -

1 pc.

Counterweight

0.4

- ditto -

1 set

Covers

0.2

- ditto -

1 pc.

Duct

0.1

90 Engine (E / G) Installing portion

Refer to 33.1.17

91 Engine ASSY

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

92 • Fuel hose

- ditto -

4 pcs.

Rem. / Inst.

1 set

0.3

94 • Engine fixing nut

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.2

95 • Engine slinging

- ditto -

1 set

0.2

- ditto -

1 set

Covers

0.2

- ditto -

1 pc.

Canopy

0.2

93 • Harness, connector and cable

Other necessary works

For injection pump - 2 pcs. & For feed pump - 2 pcs.

0.2

- ditto -

1 set

Control stand

1.0

- ditto -

1 pc.

Counterweight

0.4

- ditto -

1 pc.

Air cleaner

0.2

- ditto -

1 pc.

Muffler

0.4

- ditto -

1 pc.

Pump

1.2

- ditto -

1 pc.

Radiator

1.0

- ditto -

1 pc.

Battery negative terminal

0.1

100 Control valve portion 101 Control valve ASSY

1.0

Refer to 33.1.7 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

1.6 Include attaching hose’s tag and plug

102 • Piping connector, hose

- ditto -

1 set

103 • Control cable, Yoke

- ditto -

1 set

0.2

104 • Fixing bolt

- ditto -

1 set

0.1

O/H

1 pc.

3.0

Rem. / Inst.

1 set

Covers

0.1

- ditto -

1 set

Hoses

0.2

105 Control valve ASSY Other necessary works 110 Slewing motor portion 111 Slewing motor ASSY

1.0

Refer to 33.1.19 Rem. / Inst.

12-8

1 pc.

1.0


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE GROUP No.

WORK TO BE DONE

UNIT

REMARKS

UNIT: HOUR

112 • Piping connector, hose

- ditto -

7 pcs.

Include attaching hose’s tag and plug

0.5

113 • Fixing bolt

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.3

O/H

1 pc.

3.0

Rem. / Inst.

1 set

Floor plate, Covers

0.2

Feed

1 pc.

Hyd. oil in motor

0.1

EQUIPMENT PORTION

114 Slewing motor ASSY Other necessary works 120 Swivel joint portion

03 Upper structure

121 Swivel joint ASSY

Refer to 33.1.20 2.5

1 pc.

122 • Under cover

- ditto -

1 pc.

123 • Piping connector, hose

- ditto -

1 set

124 • Stopper

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.1

125 • Fixing bolt

- ditto -

1 set

0.2

O/H

1 pc.

2.0

Preparation

1 pc.

Removal / Inst. position. (Secure working space.)

0.1

1 pc.

Canopy removal / inst. (for easy working)

0.2

1 pc.

Floor plate cover (2) removal / inst.

0.1

126 Swivel joint ASSY Other necessary works

130 Upper frame portion 131 Upper frame ASSY 132 •

Fixing bolt

133 • Upper frame slinging 134 • Cleaning Other necessary works

01 Rubber crawler

0.1 Include attaching hose’s tag and plug

1.5

Refer to 33.1.21 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

- ditto -

1 set

1.0 Apply sealant

0.3

- ditto -

1 pc.

0.3

Cleaning

1 pc.

0.2

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

Canopy

0.2

- ditto -

1 pc.

Guard (Cover, support)

1.5

- ditto -

1 pc.

Counterweight

0.4

Drain / Feed

1 pc.

Hydraulic oil

0.2

Rem. / Inst.

1 set

Swivel joint hose

0.5

- ditto -

1 set

Boom, Swing bracket

1.5

00 Travel portion

04 Under carriage

After removing slewing motor

Rem. / Inst.

Refer to 34.1.2 Rem. / Inst. One side

0.6

02 • Rubber shoe removing / inst. position. Preparation One side

0.1

03 • Tension adjusting

0.2

04 • Crawler shoe

Adjusting

One side

Rem. / Inst. One side

10 Upper roller portion 11 Upper roller ASSY 12 Upper roller

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

O/H

1 pc.

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

0.2

O/H

1 pc.

1.0

20 Lower roller portion 21 Lower roller ASSY 22 Lower roller

32 Idler & Idler adjuster ASSY

After removing crawler shoe

0.2 1.0

Refer to 34.1.6

30 Front idler & Idler adjuster portion 31 Idler & Idler adjuster ASSY

0.2 Refer to 34.1.3

Refer to 34.1.7 & 34.1.8 Rem. / Inst. One side After removing crawler shoe O/H

12-9

One side

0.5 0.1


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE GROUP No.

EQUIPMENT PORTION

33 Idler ASSY 34 Idler adjuster ASSY

WORK TO BE DONE

UNIT

O/H

One side

1.0

- ditto -

One side

0.5

40 Sprocket portion 41 Sprocket

04 Under carriage

UNIT: HOUR

Refer to 34.1.9 Replace

One side

50 Travel motor portion 51 Travel motor ASSY

REMARKS

After removing crawler shoe

0.5

Refer to 3 34.1.10 Rem. / Inst. One side After removing crawler shoe

1.0

52 • Motor cover

- ditto -

One side

53 • Hydraulic connector, hose

- ditto -

One side

54 • Motor fixing bolt

- ditto -

One side

0.3

55 • Motor slinging

- ditto -

One side

0.1

O/H

One side

3.0

- ditto -

One side

3.0

One side Hyd. oil in motor

0.1

56 Travel motor 57 Travel reduction unit Other necessary works

Feed

60 Slewing bearing portion 61 Slewing bearing ASSY 62 • Slewing bearing fixing bolt 63 • Slewing bearing 64 • Slewing bearing slinging

0.1 Include attaching hose’s tag and plug

0.6

Refer to 34.1.11 Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

- ditto -

1 pc.

Cleaning

1 pc.

Rem. / Inst.

1 pc.

12-10

After removing upper frame

0.6 0.3

Decreasing / Replenishment

0.1 0.2


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES TABLE OF CONTENTS 13.1 HOW TO USE MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND PRECAUTIONS ........... 13-3 13.2 PERFORMANCE INSPECTION STANDARD TABLE .................................... 13-5 13.2.1

STANDARD VALUE TABLE .................................................................. 13-5

13.3 MEASURING ENGINE SPEED ....................................................................... 13-7 13.3.1

ENGINE SPEED MEASUREMENT ....................................................... 13-7

13.4 MEASURING HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE ................................................. 13-9 13.4.1

STANDARD FOR HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE MEASUREMENT ..... 13-9

13.4.2

PRESSURE MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................. 13-9

13.5 MEASURING TRAVEL PERFORMANCES .................................................. 13-13 13.5.1

TRAVEL ............................................................................................... 13-13

13.5.2

TRAVEL DEVIATION ........................................................................... 13-13

13.5.3

MOVEMENT DRIFT DUE TO GRAVITY ............................................. 13-14

13.5.4

DRAIN RATE ON TRAVEL MOTOR .................................................... 13-14

13.6 MEASURING SLEW PERFORMANCES ...................................................... 13-15 13.6.1

SLEW TIME ......................................................................................... 13-15

13.6.2

OVERRUN WHEN SLEWING STOPS ................................................ 13-15

13.6.3

SLEW DRIFT DUE TO GRAVITY ........................................................ 13-15

13.6.4

DRAIN RATE OF TRAVEL MOTOR .................................................... 13-16

13.7 MEASURING ATTACHMENT OPERATING PERFORMANCES .................. 13-17 13.7.1

CYLINDER SPEED .............................................................................. 13-17

13.7.2

GRAVITY DRIFT OF CYLINDERS ...................................................... 13-18

13.8 MEASURING SLEW BEARING PERFORMANCES ..................................... 13-19 13.8.1

SLEW BEARING-BUCKET TIP PLAY ................................................. 13-19

13.8.2

SLEW BEARING PLAY ........................................................................ 13-19

13.9 MEASURING CRAWLER TENSION ............................................................. 13-20 13.9.1

CRAWLER TENSION .......................................................................... 13-20



13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13-1


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13-2


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.1

HOW TO USE MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND PRECAUTIONS

(1) Application 1) For New Machine: This manual is to be used to check the actual performance and functions of the machine compared with the PERFORMANCE STANDARDS. 2) At Specific Self-Inspection (as per LOCAL RULES); The maintenance standards are used to make them as the criteria to determine the time for reconditioning, adjustment and replacement. 3) At Deterioration of Performance; This manual is of the criteria of safe and economical judgment whether the deterioration of performance on the machine would be caused by any faults or normal deterioration due to machine operation for a long period. 4) For Replacement of Major Components; This manual is of the standard to determine the time for replacement to recover the performance of major components such as pump, etc. (2) Terminology 1) Standard Values: These are of the standard values to assemble and regulate a new machine. Where special notes are not given, these values are based on the machine with standard structure (the machine with standard attachments and shoes). 2) Standard Values for Repair: These are of the values at which the reconditioning is required. In order to ensure the performance and safety, it is strictly prohibited to use the machine with the parts and components being over the standard values. 3) Serviceability Limit: This is of the service limit for each part and component at which the reconditioning is impossible and they must be replaced to new ones. All the parts and components which are estimated to exceed the serviceability limit up to the next periodical inspection and maintenance, should be also replaced to new ones. The machine operation with the parts and components which have exceeded the serviceability limit, causes increase of troubles and down time of the machine, and also causes safety problems. (3) Precautions for Judgment: 1) Evaluation for Measured Data: It is inevitable some variation on the measured data due to differences between measuring conditions, peculiar variability on a new machine, old and new versions of the machine and measuring characteristics. The judgment for the measured data should be comprehensively conducted based on the extent of level of the measured data, instead of mere comparison with the standard values. 2) Determination for Reconditioning, Adjustment or Replacement: There are two kinds of deterioration of machine performance; one is due to normal wear with time elapsing of operation, and the other is recoverable to the standard values with the adjustment for pressure, etc. Therefore, the determination for reconditioning, adjustment or replacement should be conducted taking various factors into consideration such as operating hours, working conditions and maintenance conditions of the machine, so that the machine is able to be operated at the optimum performance level. (4) Other Precautions 1) Parts with Aging Effect: The rubber products such as hydraulic hoses, O-rings, oil seals, etc. are deteriorated with the aging effect. It is necessary to replace them to new ones at periodical intervals or at every overhaul. 2) Parts required Periodical Replacement: It is recommendable to designate the important hoses critical to secure the safety as Very Important Parts (V.I.P.), and periodically replace with new ones.

13-3


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES 3) Inspection & Replacement of Lubricants: It is necessary for the user of the machine to fully familiarize himself with the procedures and precautions to handle the machine in safe and carry out the maintenance, as well as the procedures for inspection and lubrication. Refer to the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL as well.

13-4


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.2

PERFORMANCE INSPECTION STANDARD TABLE

13.2.1

STANDARD VALUE TABLE Table 13–1(1/2)

[TEMPORARY]

Model Item

Unit

Standard value

Hyd. oil cleanliness

Class

8±1

8±1

50~60 (122~140)

50~60 (122~140)

60~90 (140~194)

60~90 (140~194)

1150±50

1150±50

2550±50

2550±50

1150±50

1150±50

Coolant temperature (Radiator surface)

*2 Port (Over load) relief valve pressure

°C (°F)

Low idle

Engine speed

Measuring condition

Hyd. oil temperature (Tank surface)

High idle

rpm

Deceleration Boom • Bucket • Travel (LH)

P1

Arm • Swing • Travel (RH) • Service

P2

Dozer

P3

Pilot relief valve Pilot Line pressure

MPa (psi)

Boom

Head Rod

Arm

Head Rod

Bucket

Standard value

Repairable value

23.0

(3340

)

23.0

(3340

)

23.0

(3340

)

23.0

(3340

)

23.0

(3340

)

23.0

(3340

)

3.5±0.4 (508±58)

3.5±0.4 (508±58)

27.5

(3990

)

27.5

(3990

)

(3700

)

25.5

(3700

)

Head

25.5 kgf/cm2 (psi) 25.5

(3700

)

25.5

(3700

)

Dozer

Head

25.5

(3700

)

25.5

(3700

)

*1 Slew

LH/RH

21.0

(3050

)

21.0

(3050

)

Crawler Speed (5 rev.) Travel

E50.2SR

Repairable value

Div.

Main relief valve pressure

E40.2SR

Travel Speed 10 m (32.8 ft)

Low

Rubber crawler

37.5±2.1

48

40.2±2.3

51

21.9±1.1

28

23.5±1.2

30

35.1±2.0

45

37.5±2.1

48

High

20.5±1.0

26

21.9±1.1

28

Low

13.7±0.7

18

13.7±0.7

18

8.1±0.4

10

8.1±0.4

10

15.0±0.7

19

15.0±0.7

19

8.8±0.4

11

8.8±0.4

11

high Low

Iron crawler Rubber crawler

High Low

Iron crawler

sec.

High

Travel deviation Drift due to gravity

sec.

W/P.B. (5 min)

mm (in) mm (in)

140

(5.5 0 (0)

)

280 (11.0)

140

1 (0.04)

*1. The pressure for slew is controlled by the relief valve attached to the slew motor. *2. Reference value for checking of pressure (tighten up the adjusting nut of main relief valve. Refer to item 13.4.2.1)

13-5

(5.5 0 (0)

)

280 (11.0) 1 (0.04)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES Table 13–1(2/2)

[TEMPORARY]

Model Div.

E40.2SR

Item

Unit

Standard value

Repairble value

Standard value

Repairable value

13.9±0.7

17

13.9±0.7

17

0

0

— 3.8

Slew

Slew time per 2–revolution sec. Overrun when slewing stops Drift due to gravity

Boom Cylinder speed Cylinders

2.3±0.4

2.9

3.0±0.4

2.1±0.4

2.7

2.6±0.4

3.3

Ext.

2.2±0.4

2.8

2.9±0.4

3.7

Ret.

2.0±0.4

2.6

2.5±0.4

3.2

Ext.

2.8±0.4

3.6

3.3±0.4

4.2

2.1±0.4

2.7

2.5±0.4

3.2

2.8±0.4

3.6

2.8±0.4

3.6

Ret.

1.8±0.4

2.3

1.8±0.4

2.3

Ext.

5.5±0.8

7.0

5.5±0.8

7.0

Ret.

4.0±0.6

5.1

4.0±0.6

5.1

Ext.

2.7±0.4

3.5

2.7±0.4

3.5

Ret.

1.9±0.4

2.4

1.9±0.4

2.4

Arm

Ret. Ext.

Bucket Swing Dozer

Cylinder Gravity move

mm (in)

Cano- Ext. py Ret. Cab

Crawler Slew bearing

E50.2SR

sec.

Boom

12

Arm

6

(0.24

6

(0.24

(10 min) Dozer

mm (in)

Bucket tip

150

Bucket tip play

40

18 (0.71)

12

)

12 (0.47)

6

(0.24

)

12 (0.47)

)

12 (0.47)

6

(0.24

)

12 (0.47)

260 (10.2)

150

80 (3.1)

40

(0.47

)

(5.9

(1.6

)

)

(0.47

)

(5.9

(1.6

)

)

18 (0.71)

260 (10.2)

80 (3.1)

mm (in)

Crawler tension

Rubber Steel

mm (in)

85~95 (3.35~3.14) 130~150 (5.12~5.91)

13-6

85~95 (3.35~3.14)

130~150 (5.12~5.91)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.3

MEASURING ENGINE SPEED

13.3.1

ENGINE SPEED MEASUREMENT

(1) Measuring Instruments

2

1) Diesel Speedometer (1) (Measuring engine speed by means of applying a pick-up (2) to one of injection pipes)

1

2) Surface Thermometer (Measuring the surface temperature getting contact of the probe with the surface of hydraulic oil tank and radiator) (2) Engine Warming up Operation Start up the engine, and make the coolant temperature within the range of 60 to 90 째C (140 to 194 째F). Check the coolant temperature with the coolant thermometer on the monitor panel. The white color zone shows approx. 67 to 105 째C (153 to 221 째F) of temperature range. Therefore, when the indicator is located at around center of the white zone, it is suitable for the engine operation.

Fig. 13-1 Engine Speed measurement (The above figure shows concept)

(3) Engine Speed Measurement 1) Apply the pick up of speedometer to one of convenient injection pipes. (Refer to Fig. 13-1)

WATER TEMPERATURE

2) Measure the engine speed at idling with no load, and compare it to the figure in the STANDARD VALUE TABLE.

13-7


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES (4) Speed Adjustment 3

1) Low (3) / High (4) Idling Speed is low ; The proper engine speed is obtained with the length of accelerator wire as shown in the right sketch. When the engine speed is lower than the standard speed, adjust the length of wire with loosening the capscrew (9) of throttle lever side.

(5.28") 134

4

Y

CAUTION

A 9

However, if the proper high idling speed is not obtainable, consult it with the engine manufacturer.

6 15

30

5

Y

32

Z [WATER TEMPERATURE (OPT)] 5. Decel cable 6. Throttle cable

Z

A Fig. 13-2 Accelerator wire adjustment

13-8


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.4

MEASURING HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE

13.4.1

STANDARD FOR HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

(1) Hydraulic Instruments • 6.86 MPa (1000 psi) pressure gauge: 1 set • 49 MPa (7100 psi) pressure gauge: 3 sets • Surface Thermometer: 1 set • Pressure Measuring Kit and Oil Analyzing

P3 (G3)

• Equipment: 1 set (2) Measuring cleanliness of hydraulic oil

P2 (G2)

CAUTION After releasing air in the hydraulic oil tank, open the cover and sample oil in the hydraulic tank, and measure with the instrument for analysis. If the measured value is over the standard value, replace the return filter and/or change the hydraulic oil.

13.4.2 13.4.2.1

P1 (G1)

PRESSURE MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT Main Circuit Pressure

(1) Measuring Conditions Engine speed: High idling Hydraulic oil temperature: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) Coolant temperature (on radiator surface): 60~90 °C (140 ~ 194 °F)

OR9

OR8 OR3

OR1

(2) Pressure Measuring Procedures 1) After releasing pressure in the hydraulic oil tank, and setting a 49 MPa (7100 psi) pressure gauge to either of pressure detecting ports (G1, G2 or G3, PF1/4 with plug), operate the circuit to be measured to measure the relief pressure. 2) When the main relief pressure is being within the standard range, the measurement for the overload relief pressure may be omitted.

OR7

OR4

Fig. 13-3 Main hydraulic oil pressure measurement

3) If the main relief pressure is lower than the standard range, tighten up the main relief valve by half turn [pressure increase by 12.2 MPa (1770 psi)], then measure the pressure at overload relief valve. 4) After adjustment for the overload relief pressure, return back the main relief pressure within the standard range.

13-9


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

Press.Detecting Port Operating Circuit

Port Location

Boom, Bucket & Travel (left)

G1

Arm, Travel (right) Swing & Service

G2

Dozer & Slew

G3

Size

2

Relief Valve

1

MR1 PF1/4

MR2 Main relief valve (MRV2)

MR3

2

Attaching position of overload relief valve 1

OR1

BUCKET DIGGING

OR3

BOOM UP

OR4

BOOM DOWN

OR7

ARM IN

OR8

ARM OUT

OR9

DOZER DOWN

Fig. 13-4 Main relief valve (MRV1)

(3) Pressure Adjustment 1) Control Valve: Main Relief Valve and Overload Relief Valve a.Loosen the lock nut (2), and adjust the setting pressure turning the setscrew (1). Roughly with one full turn: Main relief valve & Overload relief valve: Approx. 12.2 MPa (1770 psi) CW turning: Increasing setting pressure CCW turning: Decreasing setting pressure b.After the adjustment, tighten up the lock nut holding the setscrew not to turn around. c.Again activate the relief valve to check the stable setting pressure. Tightening torque for nut (2): 19.6 N•m (14.5 lbf•ft) 2) Slewing Motor: Relief Valve a.The adjustment of setting pressure for relief valve of slewing motor is not available. If the adjustment is required by fatigue of spring and so on, replace with the new rekief valve in an assembly. b.Therefore the port of detecting pressure is not equipped on the slewing motor.

13-10

Fig. 13-5 Relief valve (Slewing motor)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES 13.4.2.2

Pilot Circuit Pressure

(1) Measuring Conditions Engine: High idling Hydraulic oil temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) Coolant temp.: 60 ~ 90 °C (140 ~ 194 °F) at radiator surface

4 5

(2) Measurement Releasing pressure in the hydraulic oil tank of hydraulic system, and setting a 6.86 MPa (1000 psi) pressure gauge to the pressure detecting port (G4, PF 1/4 with plug) (4), measure the pilot relief pressure. Pressure Detecting Port Port Location

Size

G4

PF1/4

Relief Valve PR1 Fig. 13-6 Pilot oil pressure measurement Unplug PF1/4, and set a 6.86 MPa pressure gauge

(3) Pressure Adjustment Adjust it with the relief valve attached to the solenoid valve (5). 1) Loosen the lock nut (2), then turn the setscrew (1) to adjust the set pressure. CW screwing: Set pressure is increased. CCW screwing: Set pressure is decreased.

1

2 3

PR1

2) After the adjustment, lock the setscrew with the lock nut holding the setscrew not to allow its turning. 3) Again actuate the relief valve, and verify that the set pressure is being stable. Tightening Torque: Lock Nut (2): 7.8 N•m (5.8 lbf•ft) Relief valve (PR1): 44 N•m (32 lbf•ft) Capscrew (3): 7.8 N•m (5.8 lbf•ft)

13-11

Fig. 13-7 Relief valve


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.5

MEASURING TRAVEL PERFORMANCES

•TEST PROCEDURES Measure 3-time each. Apply average data of the above for judgement. 13.5.1

Travel

(1) Travel Speed (5 Revolutions) • Engine: High Idle • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Machine Body is raised using both hoe attachment and dozer blade. • Set crawler shoes in motion. Starting after one full revolution, measure the time required for 5 revolutions. (To measure speed after it has stabilized.) (2) Travel Speed (10 m) • Engine: Rated r.p.m. • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Travel Posture • Set machine in motion. Starting after a running of 5 meters, measure the time required to travel 10 meters. Do this on level and hard ground. • Travel Posture: Fully extend the arm and bucket cylinders and place the hoe attachment so that its lowest part is even with the machine’s minimum ground clearance level. The hoe attachment must be in a no-load and the dozer blade must not touch the ground.

13.5.2

Travel Deviation

Engine: Rated r.p.m.

Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F)

Measurement Posture: Travel Posture

Measure the deviation "X" at the point of half of 10 m (32.8 ft) travel after 5 m preliminary running. Measure on level and hard ground.

13-12

5m(16.4ft)

10m(32.8ft)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES 13.5.3

Movement drift due to gravity

Measure the movement distance of machine on a slope due to machine’s own weight, holding the machine for 5 minutes on the slope. Measuring Conditions: •

Engine: Stopped

Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F)

Gradient: 15° (Approx. 1/3.73)

Machine posture: Fully extending the boom, arm and bucket cylinders, and fully contracting the dozer cylinder.

13.5.4

DRAIN RATE ON TRAVEL MOTOR

(1) Preparation 1) Apply stopper pins (1) for both travel sprockets of left and right. 2) Stop the engine, and release air in the hydraulic oil tank.

A

3) Connect a hose to the drain port of travel motor, and receive the drained oil in a container. 4) Apply a plug to the drain piping at tank side.

1 (2.36") (0.47") 60 12

WARNING Make sure of the rotating direction of travel motor referring to the right sketch. Otherwise, the rib (A) may be broken by the stopper pin (1).

80 (3.15")

1

Ø 40 (1.57")

(2) Measurement: • Engine: At rated speed • Hydraulic oil temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Machine posture: Locking the traveling, and allowing relief on the travel motor • Measure the drained volume of oil for 30 seconds of relief. Unit: liter (gal) /30 sec DRAIN DATE OF TRAVEL MOTOR SPEED SHIFT

1 st

Standard value

Standard value for repair

Serviceability limit

1.5 (0.40) or less

-

3 (0.79) or more

13-13

12 (0.47") 70 (2.76")


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.6

MEASURING SLEW PERFORMANCES

•TEST PROCEDURES Measure 3-time each. Apply average data of the above for judgement. 13.6.1

Slew Time

Engine: High Idle

Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F)

Measurement Posture: Completely retract the arm cylinder, fully extend the bucket cylinder and place so that boom foot pin (B) and bucket pin (A) are at matching height. Place the dozer blade on the ground.

With the hoe attachment in a no-load, drive 1 rotation, then measure the time required for the next 2 rotations.

13.6.2

Overrun When Slewing Stops

Engine: High Idle

Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F)

Measurement Posture: Same as that for measuring slew time.

Prior to measuring, draw matching marks on the outer race of the slew bearing and lower frame at exactly 180 degrees slew from the starting point. Then with the hoe attachment in a no-load, slew 180 degrees from starting point (A). At which point return the operating lever to neutral (B). Measure the distance between the position marks and the point the hoe attachment stops (C).

13.6.3

Slew Drift due to Gravity

Engine: Stopped

Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C(122 ~ 140 °F)

Gradient: 15° (Approx. 1/3.73)

Measurement Posture: Same as that for measuring slew time.

Slew the upper slewing structure and stop at right angle to the slope, then draw matching marks on the slew bearing’s outer race and the lower frame. Then measure the distance (A) that develops between the marks after 5 minutes. Measure for both RH and LH directions.

13-14


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES 13.6.4

Drain Rate of Travel Motor

(1) Preparation 1) Stop the engine, and release air inside the hydraulic oil tank. 2) Disconnect the slew motor drain hose at the return side to the hydraulic oil tank. Then receive the drain oil to a container. Install plug on bore of tank after removing drain hose. (2) Measurement: • Engine: At rated speed • Hydraulic oil temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Machine posture: Pushing a fixture with the side of bucket, operating the engine. • Measure the drained volume of oil for 30 seconds relieving at full stroke of the slewing operation. Unit: liter (gal) /30sec DRAIN RATE OF SLEW MOTOR Standard Value

Standard value for repair

Serviceability

3.0 (0.79) or less

-

-

13-15


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.7

MEASURING ATTACHMENT OPERATING PERFORMANCES

•TEST PROCEDURES Measure 3-time each. Apply average data of the above for judgement. 13.7.1

Cylinder Speed

(1) Boom Cylinder Speed • Engine: High Idle • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Completely retract the arm cylinder, fully extend the bucket cylinder and place the dozer blade on the ground. • Then measure the time required for the bucket to reach its highest point (lowest point) from its lowest point (highest point) placing on the ground. (Do not include the cushioning time.) (2) Arm Cylinder Speed • Engine: High Idle • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Completely retract the arm cylinder, fully extend the bucket cylinder, position the arm horizontally and place the dozer blade on the ground. • Then measure the time required for the arm cylinder to completely retract (extend) from a fully extended state (retracted state). (3) Bucket Cylinder Speed • Engine: High Idle • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Completely retract the arm cylinder, position the arm horizontally and place the dozer blade on the ground. • Then measure the time required for the bucket cylinder to completely retract (extend) from a fully extended state (retracted state). (4) Swing Cylinder Speed • Engine: High Idle • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Same as that for measuring slew time. • While swinging the boom left (right) to right (left), measure the time required for a full stroke each way.

13-16


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES (5) Dozer Cylinder Speed • Engine: High Idle • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Using the hoe attachment lift up the dozer blade side. • Then, up and down the dozer blade with full stroke, measure the time required per stroke in each direction. 13.7.2

Gravity drift of Cylinders

(1) Boom, Arm, Bucket, Dozer, Bucket Tip • Engine: Stopped • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Measurement Posture: Completely retract the dozer and arm cylinders, fully extend the bucket cylinder and position the bucket pin to the same height as the boom foot pin. • Maintain the position for 10 minutes then measure the change of rod length and distance of the bucket tip. (2) Swing Cylinder • Engine: Stopped • Hydraulic Oil Temp.: 50 ~ 60 °C (122 ~ 140 °F) • Gradient: 15° (Approx. 1/3.73) • Measurement Posture: Same as that for measuring slew time. • Slew the upper slewing structure and stop at right angle to the slope, then measure the change in rod length after 5 minutes.

13-17


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.8

MEASURING SLEW BEARING PERFORMANCES

•TEST PROCEDURES Measure 3-time each. Apply average data of the above for judgement. 13.8.1

Slew Bearing-Bucket Tip Play

Measurement Posture: Completely retract the arm cylinder and fully extend the bucket cylinder.

Move the tips of the bucket teeth from side to side (left and right) and measure the play.

13.8.2

Slew Bearing Play

(1) Attach a dial gauge to the bottom face of the slew bearing’s outer-race located in front of the upper slewing structure.

(2) Raise the crawler on one side off the ground and set the dial gauge to zero.

(3) Then raise the opposite crawler and read the dial gauge.

13-18


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13.9

MEASURING CRAWLER TENSION

13.9.1

Crawler Tension

•

Raise the machine completely off the ground using the hoe attachment and dozer blade. Then measure the distance (A) (of sag) between the center point on the crawler frame and top of the crawler shoe.

B A

CAUTION C

In the case of rubber crawlers, measurements should be taken with setting the joint ("M" or " mark) in the top center position.

"

A

A. Distance B. Rubber C. Iron

13-19


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS AND TEST PROCEDURES

13-20


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 22.1 SUMMARY ...................................................................................................... 22-3 22.1.1 FUNCTION AND FEATURES OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ....................... 22-3 22.2 HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND COMPONENT MODELS ................................ 22-4 22.3 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT OPERATION .............................................................. 22-6 22.3.1 COLOR CODING STANDARD FOR HYDRAULIC .................................. 22-6 22.3.2 NEUTRAL CIRCUIT ................................................................................. 22-6 22.3.3 TRAVEL OPERATING CIRCUIT .............................................................. 22-7 22.3.4 SLEW OPERATING CIRCUIT ................................................................. 22-8 22.3.5 BUCKET OPERATING CIRCUIT ............................................................. 22-8 22.3.6 BOOM OPERATING CIRCUIT ................................................................. 22-9 22.3.7 ARM OPERATING CIRCUIT .................................................................... 22-9 22.3.8 SWING OPERATING CIRCUIT ............................................................. 22-10 22.3.9 DOZER OPERATING CIRCUIT ............................................................. 22-10 22.3.10TRAVEL / DOZER COMBINED OPERATING CIRCUIT ........................ 22-11 22.3.11TRAVEL / BOOM COMBINED OPERATING CIRCUIT ......................... 22-11



22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

22-1


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

22-2


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

22.1

SUMMARY

22.1.1

FUNCTION AND FEATURES OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

The hydraulic circuits are built up with the following functions and features in order to achieve easy operation, safety and high working efficiency.

Slew Attachment Others

Easy Operation and Safety

Travel

PerformDevice ance

Function

Features

• Straight traveling

• Straight traveling secured by independent travel function in combined operations

• Preventing overrunning of travel motor

• Preventing overrunning on a slope

• Parking brake • Slewing (with dozer) independent circuit

• Automatic braking at parking • Constant slewing speed when operating in simultaneous operation condition

• Auto slewing parking brake

• Protecting against slewing drift on a slope

• Slewing shockless function

• Smooth feeling when starting and stopping slewing operation • Responsive operability

• Hydraulic pilot control system • Dozer (with slewing) independent circuit.

• Secure the travel straight when travelling and working with dozer.

• Multi-control valve (Note: Option) • Closed pressurized hydraulic oil tank

• Capable of selecting operation pattern from four types using one lever • Preventing contamination of hydraulic oil and improving self sucking up efficiency

• Suction strainer

• Removing dirt of suction side

• Line filter in pilot circuit

• Preventing malfunction in pilot operating circuit

Travel Pump Attachment Electricity

Low fuel Consumption

High Working Performance

• Return filter

• Preventing contamination of hydraulic oil • Total power control (Pumps:: P1 + P2 + P3) • Effective use of engine power with variable pump (Power shifting by P3 pump) • 2 speeds traveling

• Improving working efficiency with 2 travel speeds shifting

• P3 pump oil flow conflux in arm or N & B op- • Speed increased by conflux P3 pump oil piperation ing (when no dozer or slewing used) • Push button deceleration (Note; Option)

• When waiting for dump truck, the engine speed is repeatedly changed and the fuel consumption and noise are reduced

22-3


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

22.2 •

HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND COMPONENT MODELS

For the Hydraulic circuit diagram, refer to Fig. 71-1 of Supporting Data that is provided at the and of this Shop Manual. STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

E40.2SR

NAME

MODEL No.

1

PUMP ASSY

AP2D25LV1RS7

2

CONTROL VALVE

BCV65-AQ10

3

SLEWING MOTOR

PLC-120-18B-1FS2-8284A

4

TRAVEL MOTOR

GM06VA

5

BOOM CYLINDER

6

ARM CYLINDER

ø80-ø50-717

7

BUCKET CYLINDER

ø75-ø45-546

8

SWING CYLINDER

ø90-ø50-567

9

DOZER CYLINDER

ø95-ø55-200

10

SWIVEL JOINT

11

PILOT VALVE (ATT)

PV48M2042

12

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL)

PVD6P4001

13

SOLENOID VALVE

2KWE5G-30/G12WS-249A

14

PILOT VALVE (DOZER)

PV6P

15

SHUTTLE VALVE

16

CONTROL VALVE (OPT)

17

RETURN FILTER (ELEMENT)

18

SUCTION STRAINER

19

INLINE FILTER

Y-426800

20

CHECK VALVE

S15AO-K2

21

STOP VALVE

22

SELECTOR VALVE

23

OIL COOLER

24

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

CANOPY

ø90-ø50-704

CAB

ø90-ø50-680

NOTE: This is for reference only, because the model number might be changed due to improvement.

22-4


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM •

For the Hydraulic circuit diagram, refer to Fig. 71-1 of Supporting Data that is provided at the and of this Shop Manual. STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

E50.2SR

NAME

MODEL No.

1

PUMP ASSY

AP2D25LV1RS7

2

CONTROL VALVE

BCV65-AQ10

3

SLEWING MOTOR

PLC-120-18B-1FS2-8284A

4

TRAVEL MOTOR

GM06VA

5

BOOM CYLINDER

6

ARM CYLINDER

ø90-ø50-716

7

BUCKET CYLINDER

ø75-ø45-546

8

SWING CYLINDER

ø90-ø50-567

9

DOZER CYLINDER

ø95-ø55-200

10

SWIVEL JOINT

11

PILOT VALVE (ATT)

PV48M2042

12

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL)

PVD6P4001

13

SOLENOID VALVE

2KWE5G-30/G12WS-249A

14

PILOT VALVE (DOZER)

PV6P

15

SHUTTLE VALVE

16

CONTROL VALVE (OPT)

17

RETURN FILTER (ELEMENT)

18

SUCTION STRAINER

19

INLINE FILTER

Y-426800

20

CHECK VALVE

S15AO-K2

21

STOP VALVE

22

SELECTOR VALVE

23

OIL COOLER

24

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

CANOPY

ø100-ø55-699

CAB

ø100-ø55-666

NOTE: This is for reference only, because the model number might be changed due to improvement.

22-5


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

22.3

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT OPERATION

22.3.1

COLOR CODING STANDARD FOR HYDRAULIC

Blue:

Feed, drain circuit,

less than 0.34 MPa (50 psi)

Green:

Return, make-up circuit,

0.34~ 0.59 MPa (50~86 psi)

Purple:

Secondary pilot pressure,

0.59~3.5 MPa(85~508 psi)

Red:

Primary pilot pressure,

3.5~3.9 MPa (508~ 566 psi)

Orange:

Main pump drive pressure,

4.9~23 MPa (711~3340 psi)

Blue tone:

At valve selection

Red valve:

When proportional valve (reducing) is operating

Red solenoid:

In active and exciting

Displaying the flow circuit and standby circuit when operating. Regarding the electrical symbols in this manual, refer to the electric circuit diagram. NOTE: For the hydraulic circuit operation, refer to Fig. 71-4 to 11 of Supporting Data that is provided at the end of this Shop Manual. 22.3.2

NEUTRAL CIRCUIT (Refer to Fig. 71-4)

2) Pilot Secondary Pressure Circuit While the pilot valves (11), (12) and (14) are being in neutral, the pilot secondary pressure is not generated. By means of operating the operating lever, the secondary pressure is generated in accordance with its motion and led to the control valve (2) from the pilot valve to shift each spool of shifting valve.

(1) Pilot Circuit 1) Pilot Primary Pressure Circuit The oil delivered from the A4 port on pump assy (1) enters into the solenoid valve (13) through the line filter (19). The pressurized oil from the port A2 of the solenoid valve (13) with the safety lock lever released (in the operating condition) is supplied to the P ports of the pilot valves for attachment (11), travel (12) and dozer (14). Since the operating circuit is fully closed in the neutral position, the oil delivered by the pump other than the oil supplied to the Pp1 port of the control valve loses its flowing passage, and returns to the hydraulic tank (24) through the relief valve (set pressure: 3.5 MPa [508 psi]) built in the solenoid valve (13). The oil supplied to the Pp1 port is led to the tank passage through the pilot passages provided to the service spool and through the pilot passages provided to the right and left travel spools.

(2) Main Circuit

22-6

1) Variable Pump Circuit The delivered oil from A1 and A2 ports on variable pump enters into P1 and P2 ports on control valve (2) respectively. All the discharged oil from these two ports finally returns to the hydraulic oil tank (24), through each valve of travel left, boom and bucket for the P1 oil, and through each valve of travel right, swing, service and arm for the P2 oil. 2) Third Pump Circuit The oil delivered from A3 port on 3rd pump enters into P3 port on control valve (2). The whole amount of oil discharged through the port P3 returns to the hydraulic oil tank (24) through the selector valves for the dozer and slewing and the independent travel and flow conflux valves.


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 22.3.3

spool moves to the neutral position with the spring force. As the results, the passage in return oil side is throttled, and the motor speed is suppressed by a back-pressure, then the motor is controlled to the speed corresponding to the supplied oil volume of the pump.

TRAVEL OPERATING CIRCUIT (Refer to Fig. 71-5)

Pilot oil hydraulic system with operating lever 22.3.3.1

2nd Speed Operating Circuit (Independent-forward travel)

(1) Pilot Circuit 1) Shifting signal for 2nd speed travel When the "Rabbit and Turtle" mark (at the power cut-off, it automatically takes back for 1st speed) on the nob of travel right lever is pushed down, it actuates the 1st and 2nd speed travel shifting valve of solenoid valve (13). The pressurized oil signal for 2nd speed is generated from the A1 port of solenoid valve(13), and led to the P port on travel motor (4) through swivel joint (10), and shifts the 2-speed shifting valve (404). 2) Changing travel valve spool The pilot secondary pressure is generated from pilot valve (12) by the operation for travel forward. The pressurized oil is led to the Pb7 and Pb6 ports on control valve (2) to shift the travel valve spool. (2) Main Circuit 1) Circuit up to Travel Motor (4) The delivered oil from A1 and A2 ports on variable pump enters into the P1 and P2 ports of control valve (2), and led to the B7 and B6 ports through the travel valve. Then it is led to the A and B ports on left and right travel motors respectively through the swivel joint (10). 2) Travel Motor a. The pressurized oil supplied to the travel motor shifts the spool of the counterbalance valve (brake valve) (408), releases the parking brake (403), opens the hydraulic circuit having closed by the check valve (407) and rotates the travel motor. It actuates the speed shifting valve (404) when the 2nd speed signal is sent. The high pressure oil pumped through the shuttle valve (406) passes the speed change valve (404), actuates the 2-speed shifting piston (401) and provides the motor with high speed and low torque. b. When the motor reaches near to a self-running condition (over-running) at going down a slope and so on, the oil pressure of supply side gets down to lower pressure, and the counter balance valve [brake valve] (408)

22-7

c. The counterbalance valve spool is so designed that it is gradually shifted by a throttle effect to stop or start the motor absorbing shock at the start and stop of the machine. d. When load increases during high speed travel, the speed automatically shifts to the 1st speed, resulting in low speed and high torque.


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 22.3.4

22.3.5

SLEW OPERATING CIRCUIT

BUCKET OPERATING CIRCUIT

(Refer to Fig. 71-6)

(Refer to Fig. 71-7)

Pilot oil hydraulic system with operating lever

Pilot oil hydraulic system with operating lever

22.3.4.1

22.3.5.1

Slew (left) Operating Circuit

Bucket Digging Operation Circuit

(1) Pilot Circuit

(1) Pilot Circuit

1) Bucket Spool Shifting When the operating lever is put at bucket digging position, the pilot secondary pressure oil is generated from the pilot valve (11). The pressurized oil entered into the Pb9 port on control valve (2) shifts the bucket valve spool.

1) Slew Valve Spool Shifting With operation for slew (left), the pilot secondary pressure oil is generated from the pilot valve (11), and led to the Pb2 port of control valve (2) to shift the slew valve spool. 2) Releasing Parking Brake The pilot primary pressure is always led to PB port on the timer valve (303). With the slew operation, the operating pilot secondary pressure is led to PP port on the timer valve (303) through the shuttle valve (14) to shift the spool. It leads the pilot primary pressure 3.5 MPa (508 psi) to the parking brake to release it. (Similarly, the arm in operation releases the slew brake.) 3) Activating Parking Brake When the slew operating lever is returned to neutral position to stop slewing, the pilot secondary pressure disappears causing to shift the timer valve (303), then the pressurized oil is shut down. The oil in the brake cylinder is discharged due to spring force, and drained through the throttle in the timer valve (303). Thus the braking is activated with some time lag for 2.5 to 5.0 seconds to smoothly absorb the slewing inertia at its stop of motion.

(2) Main Circuit 1) Supply Circuit for Cylinder (7) The oil delivered from A1 port on variable pump of pump assembly (1) enters into P1 port on control valve (2). The pressurized oil from B9 port through bucket valve is supplied to the head side of bucket cylinder (7) to activate the digging work. The return oil from the rod side of cylinder (7) enters into A9 port on control valve (2) and returns into the tank through bucket valve. 22.3.5.2

Bucket Dumping Operating Circuit

(1) Pilot Circuit 1) Bucket Spool Shifting When the operating lever is moved to bucket dumping position, the pilot secondary pressure oil is supplied from pilot valve (11), and enters into Pa9 port on control valve (2) to shift the bucket valve spool. (2) Main Circuit

(2) Main Circuit 1) Supply Circuit for Slewing Motor (3) The oil delivered from the A3 port on hydraulic oil pump (1) is supplied to the B port on slewing motor (3) through the P3 port on control valve (2) and slew valve to drive the slewing motor. 2) Slewing Motor (3) a. The relief valve (304) relieves rapidly increased pressure at start and stop of the machine to ease shock. b. The make-up valve (check valve) (305) has a function to replenish oil from the return oil circuit that is led to the tank [T2 port on control valve (2)] to the slewing motor, to prevent the slewing motor from the cavitation due to negative pressure generated in it because of inertia on the slewing mass.

22-8

1) Supply Circuit for Cylinder (7) Similar to the case for bucket digging, the pressurized oil delivered from A1 port on variable pump enters into P1 port on control valve (2). The oil supplied from A9 port through bucket valve is entered into the rod side of bucket cylinder (7) to activate the bucket dumping.


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 22.3.6

22.3.7

BOOM OPERATING CIRCUIT

(Refer to Fig. 71-9)

(Refer to Fig. 71-8)

Pilot oil system with operating lever With oil flow conflux function for the third pump.

Pilot oil hydraulic system with operating lever 22.3.6.1

Boom UP Operating Circuit

22.3.7.1

(1) Pilot Circuit 1) Boom Spool Shifting When the operating lever is put at boom up position, the pilot secondary pressure oil is generated from pilot valve (11). The pressurized oil entered into Pa8 port on control valve (2) shifts the boom valve spool.

Arm In Operating Circuit

(1) Pilot Circuit 1) Shift for Arm Spool At the arm in operation, the pilot secondary pressure generated from the pilot valve (11) is led to the Pa3 port on control valve (2) to shift the arm valve spool. Furthermore, the pilot secondary pressure acts to the PP port on timer valve (303) through the shuttle valve (15) to release the parking brake. Since the spool of the arm valve shifts to close the pilot passage, the pressure of pilot oil thru the Pp1 port equals to the supply pressure. Thus the pressure overcomes the spring forces of the independent travel and flow conflux valves to shift the valve spool.

(2) Main Circuit 1) Supply Circuit for Cylinder (5) The oil delivered from A1 port on variable pump of pump assy (1) enters into P1 port on control valve (2). The oil supplied from B8 port through boom valve and lock valve is entered into the head side of boom cylinder (5) to up the boom. 22.3.6.2

ARM OPERATING CIRCUIT

Boom Down Operating Circuit

(2) Main Circuit

(1) Pilot Circuit

1) Supply Circuit for Cylinder (6) The oil delivered from the A2 port on variable pump enters into P2 port on control valve (2). The pressurized oil from the P3 port joins with the oil from the P2 port through the independent travel and flow conflux valves. The joined oil flows out from the A3 port through the arm valve and is supplied to the head side of the arm cylinder (6) to perform arm in work.

1) Boom Spool Shifting When the operating lever is put at boom down position, the pilot secondary pressure oil is generated from pilot valve (11), and enters into Pa8 port on control valve (2) to shift the boom valve spool. At the same time, the pilot secondary pressure is led to the boom lock valve (206) to push up the check valve and open the oil path from closed condition.

2) Return Line from Cylinder (6) The return oil from the rod side of arm cylinder enters into the B3 port on control valve (2), and is led to the return line from the T1 port through arm valve, then return to the tank.

(2) Main Circuit 1) Supply Circuit for Cylinder (5) and Return Oil Circuit The pressurized oil delivered from A1 port on variable pump is led to boom valve provided on control valve (2), and supplied to the rod side of boom cylinder (5) to down the boom. The oil returned from the head side of cylinder (5) enters into B8 port on control valve (2), and returns to the tank through the boom lock valve (206) and boom valve. Its flow rate is restricted by the throttle effect in boom valve, accordingly the boom is lowered at a stable speed.

22.3.7.2

Operating Circuit for Arm Out

(1) Pilot Circuit At the operation for arm out, the pilot secondary pressure is generated from the pilot valve (11), and led to the Pb3 port on control valve (2) to shift the arm valve spool. The independent travel and flow conflux valves are actuated as in the excavating operation. (2) Main Circuit

a. Boom lock valve (206) This is of a check valve mechanism to prevent the boom from lowering due to its own weight while the boom valve is being at neutral position.

22-9

As in the case of excavating operation, the oil having flown into the control valve (2) joins with the pressurized oil from P2 and P3, flows out from the B3 port and is supplied to the rod side of the arm cylinder to perform arm out work.


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 22.3.8

22.3.9

SWING OPERATING CIRCUIT

DOZER OPERATING CIRCUIT (Refer to Fig. 71-11)

(Refer to Fig. 71-10) Cable driving system with operating pedal

Pilot oil system with operating lever

22.3.8.1

22.3.9.1

Swing (left) Operating Circuit

Dozer Down Operating Circuit

(1) Dozer Operation

(1) Swing Operation When depress the left side of swing pedal, the swing valve spool in control valve (2) is shifted by the cabling mechanism. Since the pilot oil pressure is not utilized for it is activated regardless to the safety lock lever.

When the operating lever is pushed forward, the pilot secondary pressure is generated from the pilot valve (14) to shift the dozer valve spool through the Pb1 port of the control valve (2). (2) Main Circuit

(2) Main Circuit 1) Supply Circuit for Cylinder (8) The delivered oil from A2 port on variable pump enters into P2 port on control valve (2), and comes out from A5 port through cylinder valve, and is supplied to the head side of cylinder (8) to activate the swing (left). a. At activation of the swing valve spool for both left and right swing motions, a part of appropriate volume of oil is returned to the tank through the P2 bypass circuit due to the throttle effect on the spool. Then supplying volume of oil to the cylinder is restricted to ensure the slow and stable swing motions for both leftward and rightward.

22-10

1) Supply Circuit for Cylinder (9) The oil delivered from A3 port of the hydraulic pump (1) enters into P3 port on control valve (2), and is led to B1 port through dozer valve. The pressurized oil passed through swivel joint (10) is supplied to the head side of dozer cylinder (9) to activate dozer down motion.


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 22.3.10

22.3.11

TRAVEL / DOZER COMBINED OPERATING CIRCUIT

TRAVEL / BOOM COMBINED OPERATING CIRCUIT (Refer to Fig. 71-13)

(Refer to Fig. 71-12) At the combined operation of travel and dozer at the same time, the straight traveling is secured with this function.

At the combined operation of travel and boom at the same time, the straight traveling is secured with this function.

22.3.10.1

22.3.11.1

Travel (1st speed forwarding) /Dozer Down Operating Circuit

(1) Pilot Circuit Both the travel and dozer are operated by the lever using the pilot oil system. The operation of each lever directly shifts the travel valve spool and dozer valve spool in the control valve (2) respectively. (2) Main Circuit The oil delivered from A1 and A2 ports on the variable pump (1) enters into P1 and P2 ports on control valve (2), and each flow of left and right is led to swivel joint (10) and travel motor (4) respectively through each travel valve of left and right. The oil delivered from A3 port on the third pump enters into P3 port on control valve (2), then it is led to the dozer cylinder (9) through dozer valve and swivel joint (10). 1) The dozer is operated by the pressurized oil supplied by the third pump which has no relation with travel circuit. Then there is no variation on the supply volume of pressurized oil for both travel motors of left and right even though the dozer is operated during traveling. Thus the straight traveling is secured. (The slewing is operated in the same way as the dozer.) 2) As the above mentioned, the traveling speed is not changed from the single operation for traveling securing the straight traveling.

Travel (1st speed forward) / Boom Up Operating Circuit

(1) Pilot Circuit The traveling/boom up is of the pilot oil hydraulic system with lever operation. By means of pushing forward of travel operating lever and pulling this side of boom up operating lever, the pilot secondary pressure shifts the travel valve spool and/or boom spool in the control valve (2). Thus the pilot passage of the boom valve is closed to make the pressure of the oil from the Pp1 port equal to the supply pressure. Therefore the hydraulic pressure overcomes the spring force of the independent travel and flow conflux valves to shift the valve spool. (2) Main Circuit The oil delivered from A1 and A2 ports on the variable pump enters into P1 and P2 ports on the control valve (2). The whole amount of oil from the P1 and P2 ports is supplied to the travel motor in the same way as operating the independent travel. The oil flows from the travel valve through the B7 and B6 ports and the swivel joint (10) to the right and left travel motor (4). The oil delivered from the port A3 of the hydraulic pump (1) is supplied to the boom cylinder. The oil through the P3 port of the control valve (2) flows through the dozer and slewing valves and through the shifted independent travel and flow conflux valves to the boom valve. The oil from the B8 port through the boom and block valves is supplied to the head side of the boom cylinder (5). 1) When the travel and other attachments (boom, arm, bucket, swing, and service (for N & B) are operated in combination, the independent travel and flow conflux valves are actuated. Thus the attachments are actuated only by oil supplied from the P3 port. Therefore the oil of the P1 and P2 ports is utilized only by the travel to secure stable travel in the combined operation.

22-11


22. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

[MEMO]

22-12


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 23.1 HOW TO READ CIRCUIT DIAGRAM AND HARNESS CONNECTION ......... 23-3 23.1.1 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .............................................................. 23-3 23.1.2 HARNESS CONNECTION ....................................................................... 23-3 23.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & HARNESS ...................................................... 23-4 23.2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LIST ............................................................ 23-4 23.2.2 HARNESS & CABLE LIST ....................................................................... 23-6 23.2.3 ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR COMPONENTS & HARNESS .......... 23-8



23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

23-1


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

23-2


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

23.1

HOW TO READ CIRCUIT DIAGRAM AND HARNESS CONNECTION

23.1.1

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

NOTE: For the electric circuit diagram, refer to Fig. 71–13 of Supporting Data that is provided at the end of this shop manual. (1) In the diagram, the number, size and color of wires are shown on the wiring line. The size of the wire is to be 0.75 sq (square mm = mm2) unless otherwise specified. Symbol B G L

Color BLACK GREEN BLUE

Symbol O Br Lg

Color ORANGE BROWN LIGHT GREEN

R

RED

Gr

GRAY

W Y

WHITE YELLOW

Sb V

SKY BLUE VIOLET

P

PINK

23.1.2

Example: 6 2 R 1 2 3

1. Wire color red 2. Wire size 2 sq (mm2) 3. Wire N. 6

HARNESS CONNECTION

(1) Indication for Connector 1

5

3

4 2

1) The figure for the connector pin arrangement is shown by putting the lock (1) (nail) to upper portion, and looking from the fitting face. 2) The numbers in the connector show the wire No. (3), and alphabetical letters show the wire color (2). 3) On the side face of connector, the connector name (4) and serial number of the connector No. (5) are indicated. 4) At the place indicated as "DOUBLE SPLICE", Two wires are connected to one place. (2) The connector is to be connected with engaging the male (M) and female (F) connectors of the same number. Example: CN-101M and CN-101F Where: M means for Male, and F for Female. (3)

mark means the connector with diode. The direction for diode is shown by the arrow.

(4) The AVSS wires are to be used for the size between 0.75 sq and 2 sq. AVS wires between 3 sq and 5 sq and others are AV wires, unless otherwise specified. (5) The wire size is 0.75 sq, unless otherwise specified. (6) The treatment for the harness end is to be as follows: 1)

: After roughly applying harness taping, wires are installed in a corrugated tube.

2)

: Harness taping by two plies.

3)

: No harness treatment for connection.

(7) The length for the above (6)-3) is to be 30 ± 10 mm. (1.2 ± 0.4 in), and the length includes in the total length of wire shown in the diagram.

23-3


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

23.2

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & HARNESS

23.2.1

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LIST

Refer to Fig. 71–13 Group

Diode

Electrical Fittings

Light

Motor

Relay

Code D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-12 D-13 D-14 E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-6 E-7 E-8 E-10 E-12 E-13 E-14 E-15 E-16 E-17 E-18 E-20 E-26 L-1 L-2 L-5 M-1 M-2 M-3 M-4 M-6 R-1 R-2 R-3 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-9 R-10 R-11 R-13 R-14 R-22 R-23 R-24 R-25

Part Name DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE FUSE BOX GENERATOR (ALTERNATOR) HORN FUSIBLE LINK (45A) GAUGE CLUSTER POWER SOCKET AIR HEATER RADIO (OPT) HEATER (OPT) BATTERY SEQUENCE BOX FUSE BOX FOR COOLER (OPT) COOLING UNIT CONDENSER MOTOR COMPRESSOR TRAVEL ALARM HOUR METER ROOM LAMP BOOM WORKING LIGHT CAB / CANOPY WORKING LIGHT STARTER MOTOR WIPER MOTOR (CAB) WASHER MOTOR (CAB) DECELERATION MOTOR FUEL PUMP BATTERY RELAY SAFETY RELAY DECELERATION RELAY TIMER UNIT E/G STOP RELAY CHARGE INDICATOR RELAY CAB / CANOPY WORKING LIGHT RELAY CONDENSER SPEED SHIFT RELAY CONDENSER RELAY COOLER RELAY SLEW / SWING SELECT RELAY SW. SELECT RELAY SLEW / SWING PRESERVATION RELAY NIBBLER OPEN RELAY NIBBLER CLOSE RELAY

23-4


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Group Sensor

Solenoid

Switch

Code SE-1 SE-2 SE-5 SV-1 SV-2 SV-3 SV-5 SV-9 SV-10 SV-12 SW-1 SW-2 SW-3 SW-4 SW-5 SW-6 SW-7 SW-9 SW-10 SW-11 SW-14 SW-15 SW-16 SW-23 SW-24 SW-25 SW-26 SW-27 SW-28 SW-30 SW-31 SW-33 SW-34

Part Name FUEL SENSOR ENGINE THERMO SENSOR ENGINE WATER TEMPERATURE LEVER LOCK SOL. 2-SPEED SELECT SOL. E/G STOP SOL. POWER SHIFT SOL. (Cooler Spec) NIBBLER OPEN SOL. NIBBLER CLOSE SOL. SLEW/SWING SELECT SOL. KEY SWITCH WORKING LIGHT SW. 2-SPEED SELECT SW. WIPER WASHER SW. E/G COOLANT TEMP. SW. E/G OIL PRESSURE SW. HORN SW. LEVER LOCK SW. HEATER SW. (OPT) DECELERATION SW. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION SW. (NA) HI, LOW PRESS SW. CONDENSER SPEED SHIFT SW. TRAVEL ALARM SELECT SW. (OPT) TRAVEL RIGHT (FORWARD) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) TRAVEL RIGHT (REVERSE) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) TRAVEL LEFT (FORWARD) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) TRAVEL LEFT (REVERSE) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SLEW/SWING SELECT SW. SLEW/SWING LEVER PRESS. SW. (LEFT) SLEW/SWING LEVER PRESS. SW. (RIGHT) NIBBLER OPEN SW. NIBBLER CLOSE SW.

NOTE: The part number may be changed owing to modification, use them only for reference.

23-5


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 23.2.2 Code H-1 H-3 H-4 H-5 H-6 H-7 H-8 H-9 H-10 H-11

HARNESS & CABLE LIST Name Inst Main Harness Engine Harness Starter Cable (+) Battery Ground Cable (–) Engine Ground Cable Boom Harness Key Switch Harness Canopy Work Light Harness Boom Work Light Extension Harness Connection Harness with Cab

Remarks

(OPT.)

NOTE: The part number may be changed owing to modification, use them only for reference.

23-6


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

This page is blank because of editing convenience.

23-7


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 23.2.3 23.2.3.1

ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR COMPONENTS & HARNESS Upper Frame Portion

1

3

6 4

Fig. 23-1 Upper Frame Portion (1/8)

23-8


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

8 2 9

10 2

11

5

12

13

14 15

16

2

7

14 17

20

18

16 19

Fig. 23-2 Upper Frame Portion (2/8)

23-9


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 1. To canopy light

11. Relay assy

2. Clip

12. Connect with fuel sensor

3. Tighten after checking no paint Tightening torque 10.7 N·m (7.9 lbf·ft)

13. Fix white taping part. Clip

4. To boom

15. Connect with two-speed select sw.

5. Clip. Fix option connector 6. Fix with ring terminal gnd. connector

16. Capscrew tighten after checking no paint Tightening torque 46.1 N·m (34.0 lbf·ft)

7. Starter cable

17. B (-)

8. Main harness and eng. harness are connected by the machine center side so that a tube may not hit a bared part

18. PB (+)

14. Fix white taping part

19. Battery ground cable 20. Capscrew tightening torque 23.5 N·m (17.3 lbf·ft)

9. Connection with a heater relay harness 10. Tightening torque 23.5 N·m (17.3 lbf·ft)

23-10


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

This page is blank because of editing convenience.

23-11


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1

2

E-26 3

11 A

10

9

4

5

8 6 7

Fig. 23-3 Upper Frame Portion (3/8) 1. Clip Fix white taping part Tightening torque 46.1 N·m (34.0 lbf·ft)

6. Clip. Harness is fixed to a plate using a hole of dozer pilot cover

2. Tightening torque 7.4~9.8 N·m (5.5~7.2 lbf·ft)

8. Fixed so that branch may become downward

3. Clip Fix white taping part Tightening torque 46.1 N·m (34.0 lbf·ft)

9. Fixed so that it may be attached to a wall.

4. Clip fusiblelink to connector

7. Fix white taping part

10. Fix white taping part 11. Tightening torque 9.6 N·m (7.08 lbf·ft)

5. Attachment of slit downward

23-12


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM M-1

10

11 SW-7

12 SW-11

19

SW-1

13

SW-4 SW-10 SW-2

14 15

B 20

16 18 17

15

10. To boom

15

Fig. 23-4 Upper Frame Portion (4/8) 15. Clip.

11. Connect with lever lock sw.

16. Clip. Fix white taping part.

12. Clip. After fixing harness of lever lock sw. and horn sw. it is fixed using a hole.

17. In decelles. Itt is bundles and fixec.

13. Through the slit.

18. It is installed so that slit of a grommet may be suitable in front.

14. Connect with lever lock sw.

19. Cluster gauge 20. Clip. Fix white taping part.

23-13


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3

M-4

1

2

M-6

4

5 6 7

Fig. 23-5 Upper Frame Portion (5/8) 1. Air cleaner 2. It depends perpendicularly and connects at 45 degrees. Tightening torque 3.4~4.9 N·m (2.5~3.6 lbf·ft) 3. Fix connector to plate

4. Tighten after checking no paint. Tightening torque 46.1 N·m (34.0 lbf·ft) 5. Eng. ground cable 6. Clip. Tichtening torque 23.5 N·m (17.3 lbf·ft) 7. Eng. harness

23-14


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 8 9

10

11

12

13

Fig. 23-6 Upper Frame Portion (6/8) 8. To canopy light

11. Fix white taping

9. WG (+)

12. White taping is fixed to upp frame

10. P (-)

13. Clip. White taping part fixes to the joint of T port of a solenoid valve

23-15


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1

3

2

4

5 6

9 7

8

Fig. 23-7 Upper Frame Portion (7/8) 1. Connect with boom light harness

6. Breather tank

2. Clip

7. Connect main harness to cab harness

3. Inst¡Main harness (Vender connection)

8. Harness is fixed so that a plate may not be straddled

4. A white taping part is on a hose clamp.

9. Let hose&tube of breather tank back pass

5. It fixes so that harness may not swell to a breather tank side

23-16


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 10 1

2 11

12

14 13 E-1

15

18 16

19

17

20

Fig. 23-8 Upper Frame Portion (8/8) 1. Connect with boom light harness

14. Fixed to seatstand clip.

2. Clip

15. Eng. harness

10. Clip. Boom light harness is fixed to boom hose.

16. Harness is fixed to a plate using a hole of dozer pilot cover.

11. It is the 230 mm (9.06�) thing done for clamp of the white taping part by the way from a boom hose mouthpiece part. 12. White taping part is fixed to the hose for boom cylinders.

17. Fusible link 18. Eng. harness 19. Fix white taping part. 20. Connect with main harness

13. Clip. Fix in 100 mm (3.94�) pitch.

23-17


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 23.2.3.2

Engine Portion E-4 1

2

H-3

H-3

H-4

A

E-14 SE-5 E-2

3

M-1

4

5

H-3

6 H-4

Fig. 23-9 Engine Portion (1/2) 1. Clip. Fasten with a bolt for lifting lug. 4. Clip. Fix white taping part. 2. Clip. Fix white taping part.

5. Connect with main harness

3. Fasten with a bolt for starter motor. Tightening torque 1.7 ~ 2.4 N·m (1.3 ~ 1.8 lbf·ft)

6. Clip. Fix white taping part.

23-18


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SE-2 8

7

10

9

B SV-3

E-4

10

10 SW-6

11 M-6

12

13 H-6

14

Fig. 23-10 Engine Portion (2/2) 7. Fix white taping part.

11. Fix white taping part.

8. Connect with main harness

12. Clip. Fix white taping part.

9. Fix the eyelet terminal to the side. Tightening torque 5.9 ~ 9.8 N·m (4.35 ~ 7.23 lbf·ft)

13. Clip. Fix white taping part. 14. Capscrew

10. Clip

23-19


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 23.2.3.3

Relay Unit Portion

1. To decel. To air heater

1

2. To horn sw. lever lock sw.

2

3. Clip 4. To cab harness 5. Relay assy 6. Clip. It attaches so that the cut portion of clip may not be from the plate side.

3

4

R-2 R-6

R-1 R-7

R-6 E-14

R-3

R-8

6

5

Fig. 23-11 Relay Unit Portion (1/2)

23-20


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

R-2

R-6 E-14

R-8

H-1 R-3 CN-32M

CN-61F CN-60F

Fig. 23-12 Relay Unit Portion (2/2)

23-21


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 23.2.3.4

Fuel Tank Portion 2 SE-1

1

3

1

1

1

1 1

Fig. 23-13 Fuel Tank Portion (1/2) 1. Capscrew. Tightening torque 11.0 N路m (8.11 lbf路ft)

3.

2. Fuel sensor. Tightening torque 2.94 N路m (2.17 lbf路ft)

23-22

Fuel tank


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5 6 4

7

M-6

Fig. 23-14 Fuel Tank Portion (2/2) 4. Fuel filter

6. Inlet

5. Return

7. Water separator

23-23


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 23.2.3.5

Work Light Portion

(1) Boom Work Light 2 1

H-7

3

L-2

4

5

6

7 8 9

11

10

1. Clip. White taping part is fixed on outside of the bar

7. To working light

2. Through to the hole 3. Connect with main harness

8. The electric wire by the side of work light is slacked so that water may not enter.

4. Lets harness pass so that a white taping part may come to a hose stop clamp.

9. Clip. A terminal is fixed to the hole of a bracket after clipping to the main line as this figure.

5. Clip. Harness is fixed of insulock under the tube.

10. Eyelet terminal to be binded to bolt.

6. Eyelet terminal to be binded to bolt.

11. Clip. Harness is bundled and it clips in the hole of a bracket.

23-24


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (2) Cab / Canopy Work Light H-9

12

13

14

15

16

12. It is the sake of a temporary stop at the time of delivery. Tightening torque 7.0 ~ 8.0 N路m (5.16 ~ 5.91 lbf路ft)

15. To connect harness of upp frame side. 16. Fix to the welding clip.

13. It is the inside of the pillar of a canopy pass. 14. Cab / Canopy working light. Tightening torque 16.7 ~ 21.6 N路m (12.3 ~ 15.9 lbf路ft)

23-25


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 23.2.3.6

Cab Portion (OPT)

1 2

H-11

3

4

B

M-3

Fig. 23-15 Cab Portion (OPT) (1/2) 1. Connects white cab harness.

3. Capscrew. Fix a terminal for ground.

2. Fix with plate.

4. Connects white light harness.

23-26


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

A

5

A

B

Fig. 23-16 Cab Portion (OPT) (2/2) 5. Clip 6. Switch. Connect to connector of inst-main harness with “wiper” tag

NOTE: Tightening torque. Threads size tightening torque M8 23.5 N·m (17.3 lbf·ft)

23-27

6


23. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

[MEMO]

23-28


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 24.1 HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS ......................................................................... 24-3 24.1.1 HYDRAULIC PUMP .................................................................................. 24-3 24.1.2 PILOT VALVE (ATT) ............................................................................... 24-14 24.1.3 2PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL) ...................................................................... 24-18 24.1.4 CONTROL VALVE .................................................................................. 24-24 24.1.5 SLEWING MOTOR .................................................................................. 24-42 24.1.6 TRAVEL MOTOR .................................................................................... 24-49 24.1.7 SWIVEL JOINT ........................................................................................ 24-60 24.1.8 CYLINDER .............................................................................................. 24-62 24.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 24-70 24.2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LIST ........................................................... 24-70 24.2.2 SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ......................................24-72



24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24-1


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24-2


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24.1

HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS

24.1.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP

24.1.1.1 SUMMARY 1. GENERAL VIEW A2 A1

R1

A1

A3

A2

A3 æ ]

ß

A4 S1

R1

A1 A2

A4

A3

S1 S1 No.

Ports Name

Size

S1

Suction port

SAE 11/2

A1, A2

Delivery port

PF 1/2

A3

Delivery port

PF 1/2

A4

Pilot delivery port

PF 3/8

R1

Air bleed port (with breather valve)

M10X1.0

Fig. 24-1 General view of hydraulic pump

24-3


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. SPECIFICATIONS Model (Type) Piston pump P1 + P2

Gear pump P3

Trochoid pump P4

23.0 (3340)

20.0 (2900)

3.5 (508)

cc/rev (cu•in/rev)

23.8 (1.45) × 2

14.1 (0.86)

5.1 (0.31)

L/min (gal/min)

57.1 (15.1) × 2

33.8 (8.93)

12.2 (3.22)

Item Working pressure Displacement Delivery flow

MPa (psi)

Control system Rated revolution Weight

AP2D18LV3RS7

Total power shift control by tilting angle (power shift) min (rpm)

2400

-1

kg (lb)

35.0 (77.2)

24-4


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.2 CONSTRUCTION • FUNCTION

No.

NAME

No.

No.

1

Shaft assy

6

Piston assy

2

Swash plate assy

7

Gear pump assy

3

Rotary group

8

Housing assy

4

Cover assy

9

Trochoid pump assy

5

Spring assy Fig. 24-2

1. Piston pump • This pump is a variable displacement double piston pump which delivers two equal flows with one cylinder block., and has only one inlet port, but the flow is separated into two flows by the control plate on the cover and is led to two delivery ports provided on the cover. • The hydraulic pressure produced by the delivery oil acts on the hanger, resists the spring force, and tilts the hanger. As the piston stroke is changed by the tilting of the hanger, the flow rate varies. • The 3rd pump or pilot pump is installed on the same shaft with a coupling.

24-5


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Operation • Pump operation Displacement q (cm3) q=ΠXd2/4XtanαXDXZ/2X10-3 s (Stroke) (Number of piston)

1 12

2 3

4 5

13 11

9 10

8 7 6

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Piston Bottom dead point Cylinder block Control plate Suction port In side P2 Out side P1

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Delivery port Suction stroke Delivery stroke Top dead point Hanger (Sliding surface) Hanger bearing

a. The cylinder block is fitted on the spline and rotates with the drive shaft. b. The piston fitted on the cylinder block follows the sliding surface of the hanger and moves to and from c. The piston moves to increase the capacity from the bottom dead point to the top dead point, the pressure oil flows from the inlet port into cylinder block through the control plate. (Suction stroke 9) d. But as the piston moves to decrease the capacity from the top dead point to the bottom dead point, the pressure oil is sent out to the delivery port. (Delivery stroke 10) e. By changing the tilting angle of the hanger (sliding surface), the displacement varies. f. The oil sucked from the inside port of the cylinder block is delivered from the delivery port inside of the control plate. g. The oil sucked from the outside port of the cylinder block is delivered from the delivery port outside of the control plate.

24-6


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM • Control

13

14

17

15

16

15 S

13. Spring A 14. Hanger 15. Piston 16. Piston for P3 shift 17. Spring B

ÂŚPI.Total pressure ÂŚP

Q. Flow rate S. Shift control line

a. The delivery pressure P1 and P2 are directed to the piston which slides on the hanger and acts on the hanger. b. The spring is provided to act against the delivery pressure. c. When the oil pressure vie piston acting on the hanger exceeds the installation load of the spring, the hanger is fixed to the maximum tilting position. d. When the oil pressure via piston acting on the hanger exceeds the installation load of the spring, the hanger is tilted and kept tilted at a position where the oil pressure is balanced with the spring forces. (Region A in above figure) e. When the oil pressure acting on the piston rises further to reduce the tilting angle, the spring B which has been inactive up to now becomes active. f. To overcome the spring force of two springs, the oil pressure must be higher and the shifting line becomes more steep. (Regions A + B in the middle of the figure above) g. When the P3 oil pressure acts on the shift piston, the control shifting line is shifted.

24-7


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM • Adjusting procedure of set torque 18

17

19

21

24 22

20

23 22

21

17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Spring seat Cover Adjusting screw Spring guide Tighten

Q

22. Loosen 23. Hexagon nut 24. Starting pressure of tilting ÂŚP. Total pressure Q. Flow rate

a. Adjusting procedure 1. Loosen the hexagon nut. 2. Set the power line by tightening or loosening the adjusting screw.

24-8


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.3 INNER CONSTRUCTION Refer to Fig. 24-2 regarding the whole pump 1. Drive shaft

1

2 8 10 9 6

No.

NAME

3

7

11

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Shaft

1

8

Oil seal

1

2

Seal case

1

9

O-ring

1

3

Bearing

1

10

Snap ring

1

6

Snap ring (for Shaft)

1

11

Key

1

7

Snap ring (for Shaft)

1

2. Swash plate (Hanger)

1 2 5 6 3 4

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Hanger

1

4

Bearing

2

2

Plate

1

5

Capscrew

4

3

Distance piece

1

6

O-ring

1

24-9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3. Rotary group

1

8

2

7

9

5

6

10

4

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Piston

10

7

Spring

1

2

Cylinder block

1

8

Parallel pin

3

4

Retainer

1

9

Spring seat

2

5

Plate

1

10

Snap ring (for hole)

1

6

Guide

1

4. Control spring

1

No.

NAME

6

5

34, 44, 54, 64 2 7 9 4

Q’TY

No.

3

8

NAME

Q’TY

1

Spring seat

1

8

Capscrew

2

2

Spring seat

1

9

Nut

1

3

Cover

1

10

Spring

1

4

Setscrew

1

34

Shim

2

5

Spring

1

44

Shim

2

6

Spring

1

54

Shim

2

7

O-ring

1

64

Shim

2

24-10


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 5. Cover

4

X

3 10

2 Z Z 7

4

17

16

X

X-X

13

1

5

6

9 7

11

9 7 Z-Z

16 Y

9 11

Y

16

Y-Y

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Cover

1

9

Orifice

3

2

Control plate

1

10

Bearing

1

3

Parallel pin

2

11

Plug assembly

2

4

Capscrew

3

13

Capscrew

1

5

O-ring

1

16

Plug: M8

2

6

O-ring

4

17

Plug: M5

1

7

Plug: M6

4

24-11


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 6. Gear pump

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

3

Housing

1

10

Plate

2

16 Square ring

1

4

Cover

1

11

Guide

2

17 Square ring

2

5

Gear

1

12

Coupling

1

18 O-ring (1B P6)

1

6

Gear

1

14

O-ring

2

19 Capscrew (M12×25)

6

7

Side plate assy

2

15

O-ring

1

24-12


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 7. Housing

1

3

6

8

2

7

5

X

7

5 X

4 No.

NAME

9 Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Cylinder

1

4

Parallel pin

1

7

Disk spring

3

2

Piston

1

5

Spring seat

1

8

O-ring

1

3

Piston

2

6

Capscrew

2

9

O-ring

1

8. Trochoid pump

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Gear

1

6

Capscrew

3

2

Casing

1

7

Side plate (B)

1

3

Side plate (A)

1

8

Spring pin

1

4

O-ring

1

9

Plate

1

5

Spring pin

1

24-13


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2

PILOT VALVE (ATT)

24.1.2.1 SUMMARY 1. General view 2 3 1 (3)

2 (4)

T

P

T

1

A 4 I

I OT

1 (3)

psi

lbf·ft

MPa

580

2.95

497 435

2.2

SP

300 22 290

1.48 1.35

0.74

145 78

0.69

0

0 mm

SP

PR 0

10

5

2 (4)

psi

580

15

19

OT deg.

OT

lbf·ft 2.95

MPa

497

OT

435

2.2

300 22 290

1.75

1.48 1.39

0.74

145 78

0.69

SP

0

0 mm

SP

PR 0

5

10

15

20

OA

24-14

OT

25 deg.


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM A. The adjust nut (opposing flats: 22): Fix adjust nut by means of spanner (opposing flats: 22) when the lever is installed. Then tighten the mating lock nut to 41 ± 0.3 N⋅m (30 ± 2.2 lbf⋅ft) OA.Operation angle (degree) OT. Operation torque (N⋅m) (lbf⋅ft) PR.Push rod stroke mm SP. Secondary pressure (MPa) (psi) T. Tightening torque: 6-PF1/4 T= 29.4 ± 2.0 N⋅m Max primary pressure

6.9 MPa (1.000 psi)

Rated flow

15 L/min 4.0 (gal/min)

Weight

1.6 kg (3.5 lb)

24-15


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2.2 CONSTRUCTION 1

2 2

3

2 (4)

1 (3)

Fig. 24-3 Pilot valve-Sectional view 3. Secondary pressure adjusting shims 1. Apply Loctite #277 (part of slant line) 2. Apply grease on top No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

101

Casing

1

213

Seal

4

241–1 Spring

2

151

Plate

1

214

O-ring; 1B P20

4

241–2 Spring

2

201

Spool

4

216–1 Spring seat

2

301

Joint; M14 (1)

1

211

Plug

4

216–2 Spring seat

2

302

Disk

1

212–1 Push rod (2)

2

217

Washer 2 (3)

4

312

Adjusting nut; M14

1

212–2 Push rod (2)

2

221

Spring

4

501

Bellows

1

RIGHT PILOT VALVE PORT No.

OPERATION

1

BUCKET DIGGING

2

BOOM DOWN

3

BUCKET DUMP

4

BOOM UP 1

LEFT PILOT VALVE PORT No. 1

SLEWING LEFT ARM OUT

3

SLEWING RIGHT

4

ARM IN

4 F25782

OPERATION

2

3 2

24-16


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2.3 OPERATION • Lever in neutral position (See Fig. 24-4) In this case, the force of the secondary pressure setting spring (241) that determines the output pressure of the pilot valve is not transmitted to the spool (201). Accordingly, the spool (201) is pushed up by the return spring (221) and spring seat (216) permitting the output port 2, 4 to connect with the tank port T. This makes the output pressure equal to the tank pressure.

Fig. 24-4 Lever in neutral position • When the Lever is tilted (See Fig. 24-5) When the lever is tilted, the push rod (212) strokes. The spool (201) and spring seat (216) moves downward to make the port P to connect with the port 2, 4. With the result that the oil of the pilot pump flow out to the port 2, 4, to produce a pressure.

Fig. 24-5 When Lever is tilted • The Lever being held (See Fig. 24-6) When the lever is tilted till the pressure of the port 2, 4 rises to an oil pressure corresponding to the set spring force, the hydraulic pressure is balanced with the spring (241) force. And when the pressure of the port 2, 4 rises above a set pressure, the port P are closed and the port T are opened. When the pressure of the port 2, 4 falls below a set pressure, the port P are caused to open and the port T are caused to close, thus holding the second pressure constant.

Fig. 24-6 Lever being held

24-17


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.3

2PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL)

24.1.3.1 SUMMARY 1. General view

1. 4-M8 X P1.25

3. 4-PF1/4

T= 16.7 ± 1.5 N⋅m 2. 2-PF1/4

T= 29.4 ± 2.0 N⋅m

T= 29.4 ± 2.0 N⋅m 2. Specifications ITEM

SPECIFICATIONS

Model (Type)

PVD6P4001

Max. primary pressure

6.9 MPa (1000 psi)

Rated flow

10 L/min (2.6 gal/min)

Weight

3.9 kg (8.6 lb)

24-18


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3. Performance Characteristics • Required operating torque (damper) 12.9 ± 1.9 N⋅m (9.5 ± 1.45 lbf⋅ft). Push rod speed 0.0275 m/ s. (The actual required torque is found by adding the operating torque of the damper in the valve operating torque in the left operating lines)

580

MPa

8.85

OT

7.69

435 340

6.64

21

4.48

4.43

290

4.27 3.58

SP. Secondary pressure (MPa) (psi) OT. Operation torque

145

(N⋅m) (lbf⋅ft) PR.Push rod stroke mm OA.Operation angle (degree)

2.21

SP

78

SP

PR OA

24-19

OT


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.3.2 CONSTRUCTION 472 501

1 1

1

471

413

214 210 202 271 201 212 224

402

414

203

213

336

102

218

225

311 211 252

324 335

217 313 251 261 301 101

Fig. 24-7 Pilot valve-Sectional view 1. Apply grease

Torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

NAME

Q’TY

101 Casing

1

102 Casing (Damper)

1

201 Cover

2

202 Plug (1)

Torque No. N•m (lbf•ft) 6.9 (5.1)

NAME

Q’TY

252 Plug

2

261 O-ring

3

271 Capscrew

4

4

301 Spool

4

203 Grease cup

4

311 Spring seat

4

210 Packing

4

313 Washer

4

211 O-ring

4

324 Spring

4

212 O-ring

4

335 Spring

4

213 O-ring

2

336 Spring

4

214 Push rod (1)

4

413 Cam shaft

2

217 Shim

4

414 Bushing (1)

4

218 Spring seat

4

420 Cam

2

224 Piston

4

471 Steel ball

4

225 Steel ball

12

472 Set screw

2

29.4 (21.7) 251 RO Plug

3

501 Boots (Bellows)

2

8.8 (6.5)

6.9 (5.1)

24-20


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.3.3 OPERATION 1. Reducing valve • When the lever is at neutral position, (See Fig. 24-8) The spool is pushed up by the return spring (335) through spring seat (311), and is positioned at the neutral position in the right figure. Therefore, the pressure at delivery ports 1 and 2 is equivalent to that of port T because the delivery port is connected to only port T following the switched spool condition. 311

335

1. Port 1 2. Port 2

301

2,4

1,3

Fig. 24-8 • In case where the lever is tilted, (See Fig. 24-9) By rotating cam (420) in clockwise, push rod (214) on the port 1 side is pushed down, and the spool moves down by way of spring seat (311), spring (324) for setting the secondary pressure, shim (217) and washer (313) and consequently the port P is connected to the port 1 and the supplied oil from the pilot pump flows into port 1 and generates pressure. When the pressure at port 1 rises to the pressure equivalent to the spring pressure for the secondary pressure setting set by tilting the control section, the hydraulic pressure applied to the spool balances the spring force, and maintains port 1 at a constant delivery pressure. The spool on the port 2 side is held at neutral position, and the return oil from the control valve is discharged through port T.

A 24-9 B Fig.

A. B.

24-21

Neutral position Full stroke


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Dumping mechanism • In case of neutral position, Push rod (214) is pushed up by dumping spring (336) through piston (224), and holds at the position shown in Fig. 24-7. • Where the control section is inclined from the neutral position, By rotating the cam clockwise, the push rod on the port 1 side is pushed down, and the piston also moves down. Then, the oil in the dumping piston chamber is discharged through the orifice, and the simultaneously generated pressure produces dumping force. On the other hand, the push rod on the port 2 side moves up by the dumping spring through the piston. Then, oil is sucked from the tank into the dumping piston chamber through three ball check valves. The oil outside of the piston chamber flows out through the passage leading to port T on the casing top end.

1

3 2

4

4 A

5

2 (4)

1 (3)

Fig. 24-10 Operation when the lever is stroked from the neutral position 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Cam Orifice Push rod Piston Steel ball

A. When stroking from the neutral position towards the mark Â&#x;, the oil in the piston chamber on the right (left) side is discharged through the orifice, and the simultaneously generated pressure produces damping force.

24-22


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM • Where the control section is inclined in the opposite direction from the full tilting After tilting the cam clockwise fully, if it is rotated counterclockwise, the push rod on the port 2 side is pushed down and the piston moves down. Then, the same as above, the oil in the damping piston chamber is discharged through restriction of piston, and the simultaneously generated pressure produces damping force. On the other hand, the push rod on the port 1 side is moved up by the force of the return spring and damping spring. Similarly oil is sucked from the tank into the damping piston chamber through three ball check valves. And the oil in the piston chamber flows out through the passage leading from the casing top end to the tank port. That is, either tilting operation from the neutral position to the full tilting position or the full tilting position to the neutral position is designed to produce the damping force. 7

8

1 3

B

4

6

D

C E

9 F

2 (4)

1 (3)

Fig. 24-11 Operation when the lever is stroked or operated in reverse 1. 3. 4. 6. 7. 8. 9. B.

Cam Push rod Piston Damping spring Neutral position Full stroke Return spring The oil outside of the piston is ows through the passage leading to port T on the casing top end.

D. When tilting in reverse direction from the neutral position, the push rod is pushed up by the force of the damping spring. (In operation in direction) E. Oil in T lines is sucked in the damper chamber through three ball check valves. (In operation in direction)

F. When shifting the lever in revese from direction to

(In operation in direction) C. The oil in the piston chamber is discharged through the restriction, and the simultaneously generated pressure produces the damping force. (In operation in direction)

24-23

( ) condition, the piston on the left side immediately performs the roles of the damper piston. The damping force is produced on both sides constantly.


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.4

CONTROL VALVE

24.1.4.1 GENERAL VIEW AND HYDRAULIC PORTS NO. B G

1

2

Pb1

Pb2

4

5

Pb3

Pb4

H 3

6

8

7

12

10

9

Pb8 Pb6

Pb7

Pb9 Pb8’

Pa1

Pa2

Pa4

Pa6

F 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Pa9

Pa7 Pa8

Pa3

D

A

13

C 12. Bucket 13. Manual operate

Dozer Slewing Supply and independent travel Arm Service Swing Travel right Supply Travel left Boom

A. Pilot port 16-PF1/4 (Pa1~Pa4 - Pa6 - Pa9 Pb1~Pb4 - Pb6 - Pb9) B. Drain port Dr1 PF1/4 C. Tank port T2 PF1/2 D. Pump port P1, P3-P2 3-PF1/2 F. Actuator port 18-PF3/8 (A1~A9 / B1~B9) G. Tank port T1 PF1/2 H. Pp1 PF1/4

24.1.4.2 SPECIFICATIONS Model (Type) Valve operation

BCV365–AQ10

Manual

Swing

Pilot

Travel left, Travel right, Boom, Arm, Bucket Slewing, Dozer, Service, Travel straight and conflux

Flow rate Setting pressure at main relief valve P1, P2, P3

P1, P2 – 57.1 L/min(15.1 gal/min), P3 → 33.8 L/min(8.9 gal/min) P1, P2: 23.0

P3:23.0 Setting pressure at over load relief valve

MPa (3340 psi) at 57.1 L/min (15.1 gal/min) (MR1, MR2)

MPa (2900

psi) at 33.8 L/min (8.9 gal/min) (MR3)

B1, A3, B3, B10 port (OR6, OR4, OR5, OR1) 25.5 at 5 L/min (1.3 gal/min) B8, B9 port (OR3, OR2) 27.5

24-24

MPa (4000

MPa (3700

psi)

psi) at 5 L/min (1.3 gal/min)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.4.3 CONSTRUCTION 1. Control Valve: Overall composition 15

13

16

15

15

20

19 18

20 12

1

No.

2

3

14

NAME

15

4

5

Q’TY

No.

17

6

7

8

NAME

9

16

Q’TY

10

21

11

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Dozer section

1

8

P1, P2 inlet straight

1

15 Over load relief valve

4

2

Slewing section

1

9

Travel (left) section

1

16 Over load relief valve

2

3

P3 inlet, independent travel & conflux section

1

10 Boom section

1

17 Anti cavitation valve

1

4

Arm section

1

11 Boom lock section

1

18 Tie bolt

4

5

Service section

1

12 Bucket section

1

19 Tie bolt

4

6

Swing section

1

13

2

20 Nut

8

7

Travel (right) section

1

14 P3 Main relief valve

P1, P2 Main relief valve supply

24-25

1


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Component Parts The control valve is roughly classified into the following four sections. • Manual operation section: Swing • Pilot operation section: Travel right and left, boom, arm, bucket, slewing, independent travel and conflux, dozer blade, service(nibbler & breaker • Accessory section: P1 and P2 inlets, and P3 inlet (common with independent travel and conflux) • Accessory section (valve): P1, P2, P3 main relief, overload relief, anti cavitation, boom lock * For respective operation section, only typical example is described. - Manual operation: Swing (No.6) No.

Name

Q’TY

1

Body

1

2a

Spool

1

2b

O-ring 1A P14.5

1

2c

Dust wiper

1

2d

Oil seat retainer

1

2e

Spring seat

2

2f

Spring

1

2g

Spool end

1

3

O-ring 1A P14.5

1

4

Dust wiper

1

5

Oil seat retainer

1

6

Socket bolt M6 X 12

2

7

Socket bolt M6 X 22

2

8

Cover

1

9

Load check valve

1

10

Spring (for check valve)

1

11

Plug (for check valve)

1

12

O-ring 1B P11

1

13

Plug PF3/8

1

14

O-ring 1B P14

1

15

Anti cavitation valve

1

15

12 11

9 10

14 13

7

8

2g 6

24-26

5

4

3

1

2a

2b 2c 2d 2e 2f


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM - Pilot operation: Slewing (No.2) No.

Name

Q’TY

1

Body

1

2a

Spool

1

2b

Spring seat

1

2c

Spring

1

2d

Spool end

1

2e

Spring seat

1

3

O-ring AS 1B 119

2

4

Pilot cover “A”

1

5

Pilot cover “B”

1

6

Socket bolt M6 X 45

4

7

Loed check valve

2

8

Spring (for check valve)

1

9

Plug PF3/8

1

10

O-ring 1B P11

1

11

Plug PF3/8

1

12

O-ring 1B P14

1

10 9

7 8

12 11

6

4

6

5

1

2a

3

2b

2c

2d

2e

- Main relief valve (P1, P2, P3) and overload relief valve No.

Name

Q’TY

1

Socket

1

2

Pressure regulating valve

1

3

Piston

1

4

Body

1

5

Poppet

1

6

Adjust screw

1

7

Lock nut M14

1

8

Spring (Adjust valve)

1

9

Spring (Pressure regulating)

1

10

O-ring 1A P7

1

11

Back up ring

1

12

Seat (adjust section)

1

13

O-ring AS 1B 15

1

14

O-ring 1B P10

1

15

O-ring 1B P22

1

16

O-ring 1B S10

1

17

Back up ring

1

17

13

3

1

24-27

11

2

10

14

9

12

15

5

16

8

7

4

6


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM - Anti cavitation valve No.

Name

Q’TY

1

Anticavitation valve

1

2

Body

1

3

Plug

1

4

Spring

1

5

Back up ring

1

6

O-ring 1A P10A

1

7

O-ring 1B P14

1

8

O-ring 1B P15

1

1

6

5

7

2

4

3

8

- Main relief valve (P3) No.

Name

Q’TY

1

Socket

1

2

Pressure regulating valve

1

3

Piston

1

4

Plug

1

5

Body

1

6

Poppet

1

7

Adjust screw

1

8

Lock nut M14

1

9

Spring (Adjust valve)

1

10

Spring (Pressure regulating)

1

11

O-ring 1B P15

1

12

O-ring 1B S10

1

13

O-ring 1A P7

2

14

Back up ring

2

15

O-ring 1B P14

1

15

14

13

5

11

4

8

7

1

24-28

2

10

3

6

12

9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM - Overload relief valve No.

Name

Q’TY

1

Socket

1

2

Pressure regulating valve

1

3

Piston

1

4

Plug

1

5

Body

1

6

Poppet

1

7

Adjust screw

1

8

Lock nut M14

1

9

Spring (Adjust valve)

1

10

Spring (Pressure regulating)

1

11

O-ring 1B P15

1

12

O-ring 1B S10

1

13

O-ring 1A P7

2

14

O-ring 1B P14

2

15

Back up ring

1

16

Spring guide

1

15

14

13

5

11

4

8

7

1

24-29

2

10

3

6

16

12

9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.4.4 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

24-30


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Dozer spool Swing spool Travel independent and conflux spool Arm spool Service spool Boom swing spool Travel right spool Travel left spool Travel left spool Boom spool Bucket spool P1 (RV1) relief valve P3 (RV3) relief valve B1 Over load relief valve A3 Over load relief valve B3 Over load relief valve

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

24-31

A8 Over load relief valve B8 Over load relief valve B9 Over load relief valve Boom lock valve Anticavitation valve Over load relief plug P1 by-pass passage P2 by-pass passage P3 by-pass passage P1 parallel passage P2 parallel passage P3 parallel passage Pp1 Pilot passage Tank passage


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.4.5 EXPLANATION OF OPERATION 1. Neutral position P1: The oil delivered from the hydraulic pump flows from the P1 port of the control valve (hereafter called a C/V) into the left travel spool section through the passage of the supply section. At the spool neutral position, the entered oil passes through the by-pass of the spool leading from the left travel to the boom because the spool does not cut off the by-pass and flows out to the tank circuit through the by-pass of the spool for the bucket and the by-pass leading to the tank. P2: The oil delivered from the hydraulic pump flows from the P2 port of C/V into the right travel spool section through the passage of the supply section. At the spool neutral position, the entered oil passes through the by-pass of the spools for the right travel, boom swing and service, and flows out to the tank circuit through the by-pass circuit leading from the by-pass of the spool for service. P3: The delivery from the hydraulic pump flows from the (C/V) P3 port into the parallel circuit of swing and dozer operation. Since the spool does not shut off the by-pass passage in the neutral spool condition, the oil having flown into the parallel passage flows out to the tank passage through the by-pass passages of the spools for the dozer and slewing and through the by-pass passage of the P3 supply section.

WARNING As the flow from the pump is fed into each line (P1, P2, P3), the switching sections of respective line shown below are in operable condition. Therefore, don’t operate them except when working. P1 line: Left travel, Boom, Bucket P2 line: Right travel, Boom Swing, Service and Arm P3 line: Dozer, slewing [Service and Arm] Pp1: The delivery oil from the gear pump flows from the (C/V) Pp1 port into the pilot circuit through the orifice provided on P3 supply section. (Two systems for shifting independent travel and for shifting arm and service flow conflux) In the neutral spool condition, the oil of the independent travel shifting side flows out to the tank passage through the passages provided to the right and left travel spool and the swing spool. Therefore the pilot circuit pressure becomes equal to the tank pressure, the received pressure of the independent travel valve is equal to the tank pressure, and consequently the independent travel spool does not switch. Moreover, the oil of the flow conflux shifting side flows out to the tank passage through the passage provided to the service spool. Since the pilot passage pressure equals to the tank pressure and the receiving pressure of the flow conflux piston equals to the tank pressure, the flow conflux spool is not shifted.

WARNING When the engine is stopped (when each hydraulic pump is stopped), the actuator does not function even when being loaded by the self weight, because the pilot pressure does not act on the pilot control spool (except for the condition where the accumulator, etc. is attached and the pressure remains due to the pipe volume). On the spool of boom swing which directly actuates the spool, the port on the loaded side is led to the tank circuit with the operating direction making it unable to hold the load, consequently the actuator may be actuated causing danger. Therefore, even if the engine is stopped, when there are people around the machine or it may be in contact with implements, don’t use the control lever.

24-32


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 12. B. C.

Fig. 24-12 Operation at neutral position D. Tank passage Dozer E. P3 side. By-pass passage Slewing F. Independent travel - flow conflux spool Supply and independent travel G. From P3 port Arm H. P2 side. By-pass passage Service I. From P2 port Swing L. Pilot passage for independent travel Travel (right) M. Orifice Supply N. Piston for conflux Travel (left) O. Pilot passage for conflux Boom P1. From P1 port Bucket Q. P1 side. By-pass passage P3 side. Parallel passage From by-pass passage of tank to tank passage

24-33


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Pilot operating section • Operating boom raise With the boom raise operation, the pilot secondary pressure enters into the Pa8 port, and moves the spool for the boom operation. And with the movement of the spool, as the by-pass circuit is cut at the boom switching section, the oil received through the P1 port flows from the parallel circuit through the check valve installed on the upper part of the spool by-pass circuit for the travel operation into the parallel circuit on the boom switching section. With the movement of the spool, as the circuit from the passage leading to the boom lock section to the bridge passage is opened, the oil entered in the parallel circuit passes through the load check valve on the boom switching section and flows into the boom lock section through the bridge passage. The oil entered in boom section opens the lock valve and is fed into the boom cylinder head side. On the other hand, the return oil from the boom cylinder rod side flows into the B8 port, and with the movement of the spool the oil flows out into the tank circuit that is connected by the notch of the spool. Consequently, the boom cylinder extends and raises the boom. The oil from the Pp1 port passes through the orifice provided on the P3 supply section and flows into the pilot circuit. The oil entered into the pilot circuit flows from the travel switching section to the tank circuit, and the pilot circuit pressure becomes equal to the tank pressure, consequently the independent travel spool is not switched. 14

R T

W

U

5

11 11 P 9

10

Fig. 24-13 Operation at boom raising 9. 10. 11. 14. P. R.

Travel (left) Boom P1, P2 supplied port Boom cylinder From P1 pump Parallel passage

S. T. U. W.

24-34

Pilot passage Bridge passage By-pass passage The oil entered in through the Pp1 port flows out from the travel switching section into the tank circuit.


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3. Manual operation section • Left swing operation With the left swing operation, the swing spool moves to the push–in direction. With the movement of the spool, as the by-pass circuit is cut off at the swing switching section, (a portion of the oil flows out to the by-pass (tank) circuit through the notch provided on the swing spool.), the oil entered through the P2 port flows into the parallel circuit through the check valve provided on the upper part of the travel spool by-pass circuit. With the movement of the spool, as the circuit from the A5 port to the bridge passage is open, the oil entered in the parallel circuit passes though the load check valve, flows into the A5 port through the bridge passage, and is fed into the swing cylinder head side. On the other hand, the return oil from the swing cylinder rod side flows into through the B5 port, and with the movement of the spool the return oil flows out to the tank circuit that is connected by the notch of the spool. Consequently, the swing cylinder extends, and the boom swings leftward. The oil entered through Pp1 port passes through the orifice provided on the P3 supply section, and flows into the pilot circuit. As the oil entered in the pilot circuit flows out from the travel switching section into the tank circuit, the pilot circuit pressure becomes equal to the tank pressure, and consequently the independent travel spool is not switched. 15

T R S

U

Z

6

7

I

R

I

w

Fig. 24-14 Operation of swing 6. 7. 15. I. R. S.

Swing Travel (right) Swing cylinder From P2 pump Parallel passage Pilot passage

T. Bridge passage U. By-pass passage W. The oil entered in through the Pp1 port flows out from the travel switching section into the tank circuit. Z. Some oil flows into the by-pass passage.

24-35


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 4. Arm flow conflux function This valve actuates the arm and service using joined flow amount of P2 and P3. The flow conflux circuit is used only for actuating the arm and service as explained below. The operation for the service shifts the spool for the arm by the secondary pressure from the remote control valve. Since the spool shifting results in shutoff of the pilot and tank passages for flow conflux, the pressure in the flow conflux pilot passage equals to the Pp1 port supply pressure, which acts on the flow conflux piston to move it to the position where the piston collar contacts with the inner shoulder the valve. At the same time, the flow conflux piston moves the flow conflux and independent travel spools. Once the spool is shifted, the pressurized oil supplied from P3 flows into the second by-pass passage of P2 side through the parallel and by-pass passages of the slewing and dozer shifting and through the check valve provided to the P3 supply section, which is connected to the by-pass passage of the P2 side at the upstream (between boom swing and service) of the service shifting section, and also connected to the by-pass passage of the P2 side through the check valve at the P3 supply section. Therefore the flow of oil supplied from P3 joins in the parallel passage of the P2 side in proportion to an operating amount of the arm or the service. (The drawing below shows service operation.)

N

K

S

Fig. 24-15 Actuation of flow conflux circuit in service operation `

3. 4. 5. G. H. I. N.

Supply and independent travel Arm Service From P3 port P2 side. By-pass passage From P2 pump Piston for conflux

K. The parallel passage of P2 side through the check valve P. From P1 pump R. Parallel passage S. Pilot passage V. From P3 pump W. By-pass passage W1.Bridge passage

24-36


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 5. Independent travel function When both right and left travels is shifted, and one of boom, bucket, boom swing and servise is shifted, the oil flows from the Pp1 port through the throttle into the pilot passage, in which pressure equals to the Pp1 port supply pressure because the pilot passage is shut off from the tank passage. Then the Pp1 port supply pressure acts on the travel straight spool, and the spool moves until it contacts with the pilot cap overcoming the spring force. Once the spool is shifted, the pressurized oil supplied from P3 passes through the parallel and by-pass passages of the slewing and dozer shifting sections, and passes through the spool of the P3 supply section and the land of main unit to flow into the second parallel passage of the P1 side and the parallel passage of the P2 side. In addition, if the pressure of pilot passage is equal to the pressure of Pp1 port, the spools in the P1/P2 supply section are shifted too. Thereby P2 parallel passage is connected with P1 parallel passage. After these shifting, the pressurized oil supplied to P1 and P2 actuates the right and left travel, and the pressurized oil supplied to P3 actuates the other attachments. Therefore even if the travel and other attachment are simultaneously operated, the travel is correctly performed without deviating. The arm or service operated in the flow conflux position without relating to the independent travel function can be simultaneously performed with the travel in the same operability as the independent travel function. K

G

S

1

2 G

P1

3

4

G P2 K

H

P3 P1, P2 P1 Q

Fig. 24-16 Independent travel actuation 1. 2. 3. 4. G. K. Q.

Dozer Slewing Supply and independent travel Arm From P3 pump The parallel passage of P2 side To the parallel passage of P1 side

S. Pilot passage P1. Pp1 pressure P2. Oil from P3 pump is cut off by both travel operation and attachment operation P3. Travel straight spool and P1/P2 supply spool are shifted simultaneously, and P1 parallel passage connects with P2 parallel passage.

24-37


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 6. Function of Lock Valve • Piston Holding When the boom spool is at neutral position, the pilot piston chamber (a) is connected to the drain passage through the pilot port (Pb8’) for releasing lock valve. And the piston chamber (b) is also connected to the drain passage through the drain port (Dr1). Therefore the piston (C) is held at the position shown in the figure. And the hydraulic pressure to hold the boom cylinder is applied to the lock valve chamber as shown in the figure, pressing the needle valve and lock valve to their seats respectively. Then it prevents leakage on the head side of boom cylinder, and also prevents the arm cylinder from its movement due to leakage.

14

16 17

20

19

18

Fig. 24-17 Function of Lock Valve (piston holding) 14. Boom cylinder 16. Lock valve chamber 17. Needle valve sheet

18. Needle valve 19. Lock valve 20. Body seat

24-38

b

a

A

C


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM • Release When the pilot pressure is applied to the pilot port (Pb8’) for releasing lock valve, the piston (C) is moved to the right side opening the needle valve through piston (A). At that time, the return oil from boom cylinder passes through the throttle on lock valve, then lock valve chamber • → pilot piston chamber → drilled hole in turn, and flows into the tank path through the throttle hole (drilled hole) on boom spool pushing up the steel ball. The opening of the needle valve results in the pressure drop in the lock valve chamber. The return oil from the boom cylinder opens the lock valve, and flows into the tank passage through the notch (groove) of the boom spool and the throttle (drilled hole).

14

20

19

Fig. 24-18 Function of Lock Valve (release) 14. 16. 17. 18.

Boom cylinder Lock valve chamber Needle valve sheet Needle valve

19. 20. 22. 23.

24-39

Lock valve Body seat Pilot piston chamber Drilled hole

18

a

b

16 17

23 A

C


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 7. Operation of relief valve • Operation at relief condition - The pressure oil passes through the inside of the piston placed in the pressure regulating valve (main valve) and fills in "A" chamber inside of the piston through the orifice "B" to securely seat the pressure regulating valve and the socket, and the socket and the body seat. 25

"B"

24

26

P

27 28

30

"A"

29

Fig. 24-19 24. 25. 26. 27.

28. Socket 29. Pressure regulating valve 30. Adjust valve

Tank passage Piston Adjust valve spring Body seat

- When the pressure of the oil in the P port reaches to the set pressure of the spring, the pressure oil acts on the adjust valve through the piston and opens the adjust valve. Then, the pressure oil passes through the inside of the piston, orifice B, A chamber, ring orifice, and drilled hole D in order, and flows out to the tank circuit around the socket.

31

"D"

31. Ring orifice “C“ - The pressure in "A" chamber drops because the adjust valve is open, consequently the pressure oil in the P port flows out to the tank circuit through the drilled hole "E".

"E" - When the pressure on the P port drops lower than the spring set pressure of the adjust valve, the adjust valve is pushed against the seat by the adjust valve spring force of the adjust valve and the pressure in "A" chamber is equal to the pressure in the P port, consequently the adjust valve is also pushed against the seat and returns to the former condition(Fig. 24-19).

24-40


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM • Suction operation When the negative pressure is generated in the P port, the oil is supplied through the tank circuit. When the pressure of the tank circuit from the P port rises, the socket is pushed up. Consequently, the space between the body seat and the socket opens, and the oil flows from the tank passage into the P port and the space fills with the oil.

"E" • Operation of anti-cavitation valve When the negative pressure is generated in the P port, the oil is supplied through the tank circuit. When the pressure from the P port rises, the valve is pushed up. Consequently, the space between the body seat and the socket opens, and the oil flows from the tank circuit into the P port and the space fills with the oil. 24

P

27 28

24. Tank passage 27. Body seat 28. Socket

24-41


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.5

SLEWING MOTOR

24.1.5.1 GENERAL VIEW

24.1.5.2 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT Port

NAME

A

Main port

B

Main port

T

Tank port

DR

Drain port

PB

Slewing parking brake release port

PP

Slewing parking brake pilot port

Size PF3/8

PF1/4

Rotating direction: Inlet A port: Clocwise (Seen from shaft side): Inlet B port: Counter clockwise

24.1.5.3 SPECIFICATIONS Items Part No.

Specifications Type

Hydraulic motor Parking brake Relief valve Reduction unit

Slewing motor unit

PLC-120-18B-1FS2-8284A

Slewing motor Displacement Rated flow

PM-1B-22B-FS2-4572A 3

cm /rev (cu•in/rev)

22.1 (1.35)

L/min (gal/min)

33.8 (8.93)

Static friction torque

N•m (lbf•ft)

73.0 (54)

Release pressure

MPa (psi)

Min 2.5 (363), Max 4.9 (710)

Set pressure

MPa (psi) 21.0 (3045) at 34 L/min (9.0 gal)/min

Cracking pressure

MPa (psi) 16.5 (2393) at 1 L/min (0.26 gal/min)

Reducting ratio

17.7

Weight (with Reduction unit)

kg (lb)

24-42

Approx. 40 (88)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.5.4 CONSTRUCTION 242

A

510

B

B

411 409 407 405 404 410 406 412

403

408

402

412

401

301 302 304 305 244

303

A A-A

235 236 245 238 223 218 231 224

201 217 225 221 215 205 232 212 204

237

213

234

206

233

209 505

507

306

208 503

506

203

207 501

511

226

210 502

214

130 504

124

202

107

129

118

127

111

105

106

216

117

103

110

109 123

119

113

125

102

136

108 114 101 116 128 115 112 104

24-43

512

508 509

B-B


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

No.

NAME

Q’TY

(Reduction assy)

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

204 Cylinder

1

302 Check valve

2

101 Casing

1

205 Valve plate

1

303 Plug

2

102 Carrier 1

1

206 Piston

9

304 Spring

2

103 Carrier 2

1

207 Shoe

9

305 O-ring ; 1B P11

2

306 O-ring ; 1B P18

2

104 Pinion shaft

1

208 Shoe holder

1

105 Internal gear A

1

209 Cylinder holder

1

106 Spur gear 1

4

210 Swash plate

1

401 Seat

2

107 Spur gear 2

3

212 Retainer

2

402 Retainer

2

108 Sun gear 1

1

213 Pin

3

403 Poppet

2

109 Sun gear 2

1

214 Filter

2

404 Piston

2

110 Pin 1

4

215 Spring

1

405 Cap

2

111 Pin 2

3

216 Ball bearing

1

406 Spring

2

112 Seal ring

1

217 Ball bearing

1

407 Spacer

*

113 Thrust collar

1

218 O-ring ; 1B G120

1

408 O-ring ; 1B P14

2

114 Pre-load collar (semi-circular)

2

221 Snap ring

1

409 O-ring ; 1B P18

2

115 Taper roller bearing

1

223 Socket bolt ; M12×35

5

410 O-ring ; 1B P22

2

116 Taper roller bearing

1

224 Spring pin

1

411 O-ring ; 1B P28

2

117 Roller

68

225 Parallel pin ; ø6×14

1

412 Backup ring

4

118 Roller

69

226 Parallel pin

1

(Timer assy)

119 Thrust washer

14

231 Piston

1

501 Valve block

1

(Relief valve assy)

123 Snap ring (for shaft 30)

1

232 Spring B

12

502 Spool

1

124 Snap ring (for shaft 20)

7

233 Friction plate

2

503 Piston

1

125 Spring pin

7

234 Separator plate

2

504 Stopper

1

127 Pin

4

235 O-ring ; 1B G100

1

505 Spring (1)

1

128 Oil seal

1

236 O-ring ; 1B G110

1

506 Spring (2)

1

129 O-ring

1

237 Backup ring

1

507 Spring seat

1

130 Socket bolt ; M8×25

5

238 Backup ring

1

508 Plug ; PF1/4

4

136 Ring

1

242 Socket bolt ; M6×15

4

509 O-ring ; 1B P11

4

244 Socket bolt ; M8×50

4

510 O-ring ; 1B P7

2

201 Body

1

245 O-ring ; 1B P18

2

511 Plug

2

202 Housing

1

512 Plug

1

203 Shaft

1

(Motor assy)

(Valve assy) 301 Cover

1

24-44


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.5.5

FUNCTION AND OPERATION

(1) Operating slewing motor This hydraulic motor, the axial piston (swash plate) type, converts hydraulic energy delivered by the pump into rotary motion. Oil supplied through the control valve from hydraulic pump is directed to the valve plate (1). This oil enters port A (7) of the valve plate and the oil flows into the cylinder bore in the cylinder (2) aligned with port A (7) and pushes the piston (3). The force on the piston is converted by the swash plate (4) into rotary motion, which is transmitted to the shaft (5) splined to the cylinder (2). Return oil from the cylinder bore flows out port B (6) of the valve plate (1). In the case of reverse rotation, the oil flows into port B (6), and the return oil flows out port A (7).

Fig. 24-20 Operation of hydraulic motor (2) Operation of parking brake The parking brake operates to fix the output shaft of the slewing motor mechanically when the slewing motor stops. • Operation when the brake release pressure is blocked: When the brake release pressure is blocked, brake piston (1) is pressed in the direction arrow of the above Fig. 24-21 by the action of spring (2). At this time, two friction plates (4) fixed by the crescent-shaped groove of cylinder (3) are sandwiched between three separator plates (6) fixed to housing (5). As the result, cylinder (3) is unable to turn by the frictional force between friction plates (4) and separator plates (6), thereby fixing the output shaft of the slewing motor. • Operation when the brake release pressure is continued: When the brake release pressure is through, it is directed to chamber (7) in Fig. 24-21 below. The pressure then overcomes the action of spring (2) and moves brake piston (1) in the direction of arrow in Fig. 24-21 below. The result is that friction plates (4) and separator plates (6) are released from frictional power, allowing cylinder (3) to rotate.

24-45

2 1 5 7 4 6 3

2 1 8 7 4 6 3

Fig. 24-21 Operation of parking brake


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (3) Operation of hydraulic valve 1) Shockless relief valve The shockless valve is made up of a poppetm (1), spring and the piston (2) that changes two steps stroke. The IN and OUT ports of the hydraulic motor are closed when the hydraulic motor stops. The motor attempts to keep slewing by inertia of the upper structure. This produces pressure (braking pressure) on the OUT port side by the pumping action of the motor. The shockless relief valve relieves the braking pressure by the following two step actions, in order to absorb the shocks at motor stop and prevent the motor from breaking down at the same time. The shockless relief valve also operates to absorb shocks the same way when the motor starts up. a) 1st Stage As pressure P1 flowing into the hydraulic motor increases, pressure corresponding to the spring action F1 causes the poppet (1) open. b) 2nd Stage The pressure P1 flows into "secondary chamber" (3) through the "orifice B and A" (4-5) which causes the piston to push to the stroke end (4). This reduces the length of the spring and increases the spring force. The pressure P1 rises to a set value Ps. The above-mentioned 2-step action absorbs shocks which occur when the hydraulic motor starts and stops. 2) Check Valve After accelerating slewing of the upper structure, when the speed is being reduced by half-lever, the supply flow rate from pump to port A (6) is lowered. But if the upper structure is slewed at a comparatively high speed, the pressure in the (C) section is lowered to negative pressure making lubrication necessary. However, when the pressure of port B (7) is equal to or lower than the working pressure of cushion relief valve the oil of (C) section led through port A (6) is discharged to the control valve through port B (7). As a result, the flow rate from the control valve does not satisfy the specialized oil quantity. To prevent this, the make-up check valve (8) is installed to supply necessary oil into the (C) section.

24-46

2

1

3

5

4

4

P

T

Fig. 24-22 Operation of shockless relief valve 6

9

8

C

Fig. 24-23

7


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3) Action of hydraulic parking brake (P/B) timer When the parking brake operates as the upper structure produces inertia, the hydraulic parking brake timer operates to delay the operation of the parking brake for a certain time length. a) When the parking brake is released ; If the pressure flows into the brake release command secondary pilot pressure port (PP), it overcomes the force of spring (505) and pushes spool (502) to the positions in Fig. 24-24 and in the figure above. On that occasion, the brake release pressure at the brake releasing primary pressure port (PB) passes through the arrow in Fig. 24-24 above, is flowed into the chamber of the parking brake piston, and releases the parking brake. b) When the parking brake acts ; If the pilot pressure at the brake releasing command secondary pilot pressure port (PP) is blocked, spool (502) is pushed back to the position in the figure below by the force of spring (505). The brake release pressure at the brake releasing pressure port (PB) is blocked by spool (502) and block the pressure supply to the chamber of the parking brake piston. The pressure of the parking brake piston chamber is pushed out by the force of the spring in the parking brake and flows out to the DR port through the passage indicated by an arrow in the figure below: On that occasion, the oil that is flowing out is regulated by the orifice of piston (503), flows out to the DR port slowly, and delays the action of the parking brake for a certain time length.

Fig. 24-24 Operation of hydraulic parking brake timer When the brake releasing command secondary pilot pressure flow into port PP;

When the brake releasing command secondary pilot pressure is blocked at port PP; Fig. 24-25 Operation of hydraulic parking brake timer

24-47


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (4) Reduction Unit (Planetary 2 stage) This slewing reduction unit for the slewing motor is made up of two stage planetary gear sets. It converts highspeed rotary motion from the slewing motor (4) into low speed and high-torque motion to rotate the pinion shaft (3). Refer to the Fig. 24-25, sun gear 2 (S2) is splined on the output shaft of the slewing motor (4) and the rotation of sun gear 2 (S2) performs primary reduction through gears (S2), (b2), and (a2). After primary reduction, rotation performs secondary reduction through gears (S1) (splined to carrier 2), (b1), and (a1). After secondary reduction, rotation is transmitted to the pinion shaft splined to carrier 1 creating slewing force. The gear ratio of the two-stage planetary gear can generally expressed by:

R=

Zs1 Zs2 Zs1+Za1 Zs2+Za2

Where ; Zs1, 2 : S1, 2 Number of teeth Za1, 2 : a1, 2 Number of teeth 4

2

1 3

Fig. 25-26 Operation of slewing reduction

24-48


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24.1.6

TRAVEL MOTOR

24.1.6.1 SPECIFICATIONS 1. General View

F

E

X

G

X

E. Oil filling port F. Oil level check port G. Drain port No. A, B D1, D2 P P2, P3

NAME

SIZE

The relation between rotating direction of reduction unit and oil inlet and outlet port (View from X side)

Hydraulic oil fill / drain port

PF1/2

Rotating direction

Oil inlet port

Oil outlet port

Drain port

PF1/4

Clockwise

A

B

1st/2nd speed select port

PF1/8

Counterclockwise

B

A

Pressure gauge port

PT1/8

24-49


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Specifications Model (Type)

GM06VA

Rated output revolution (1st / 2nd) Reduction unit

rpm

Output torque (1st / 2nd)

N•m (lbf•ft)

Reduction ratio

Parking brake

5710 / 3280 (4211 / 1033) 1 / 68.6

cm3/rev (cu•in/rev)

Displacement (1st / 2nd)

Hydraulic motor

30.9 / 52.2

26.4 / 15.3 (1.61 / 0.93)

Rated operating pressure

MPa (psi)

23.0 (3340)

Rated output revolution (1st / 2nd)

min (rpm)

2119 / 3583

L/min (gal/min)

57.1 (15.1)

-1

Rated flow 2-Speed shifting pressure

MPa (psi)

3.5 (507)

Automatic 2-speed shifting pressure

MPa (psi)

18.5 (2680)

Static friction torque

N•m (lbf•ft)

64.7 (47.7)

Releasing pressure

MPa (psi)

0.89 (129)

Weight

kg (lb)

24-50

65 (143)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 1. Construction (Outline)

R

H

I L M N

O

T

Q

H. I. L. M. N.

Reduction unit Hydraulic motor Brake valve Parking brake High and low speed change mechanism

O. Q. R. S. T.

24-51

Control valve Hydraulic pump High speed Low speed Hydraulic circuit

S


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Sectional view

A

B

A

B-B

A-A

24-52


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM No.

NAME

1

Hub

2 3

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

108 Thrust ball

1

Spindle

1

109 Timing plate

1

Carrier

1

110

Washer

2

4

Sun gear (1)

1

112

Piston

1

5

Planetary gear (1)

3

113

Spring

8

6

Sun gear (2)

1

114

Spring

1

7

Planetary gear (2)

4

115

Friction plate

1

9

Thrust washer (1)

2

116

Separator plate

2

11

Thrust collar (4)

4

132 Oil seal

1

12

Thrust washer (3)

7

135 O-ring

1

13

Cover

1

139 O-ring

1

14

Coupling

1

145 Snap ring

1

22

Ring nut

1

149 Ball bearing

1

24

Ball bearing

2

150 Ball bearing

1

27

Needle roller bearing with retainer

3

151 Roller

3

28

Needle roller bearing with retainer

4

167 Pivot

2

29

Inner race

3

177 Parallel pin

2

190 Spring

30

Inner race

4

Floating seal kit

1

Rear flange assembly

1

31

Floating seal

2

• Rear flange kit

1

33

Plug with flange

1

201 •• Rear flange

1

35

O-ring

1

223 • Spool

1

37

O-ring

1

39

Plug

2

263 •• Spool

1

40

Hexagon head screw

7

264 •• Oil stopper

1

41

Steel ball

1

221 • Plug

2

42

Parallel pin

2

224 • Plug

2

43

O-ring

2

225 • Stopper

2

44

O-ring

1

226 • Plug

2

45

Ring

1

227 • Valve

2

47

Hexagon socket set screw

2

228 • Spring

2

1

230 • Spring

2

236 • O-ring

2

• Spool kit

Cylinder and piston kit 104 •Cylinder block

104

1

1

237 • O-ring

2

•Piston kit

252 • Hexagon socket plug

4

••Piston assembly

254 • Hexagon socket plug

4

105 •••Piston

105

266 • Spring

1

106 •••Shoe

106

268 • Steel ball

1

Piston kit

1

273 • O-ring

2

•Piston assembly

1

275 • Orifice

1

1

276 • Orifice

1

161 ••Piston 162 ••Shoe

1

279 • Filter

1

163 •Seal ring

1

280 • Plug with flange

1

102 Shaft

1

299 • Name plate

1

103 Swash plate

1

241 Parallel pin

2

107 Retainer plate

1

243 Capscrew

6

24-53


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.6.3 FUNCTION 24.1.6.3.1

Reduction Unit

1. Function This reduction gear unit is composed of two stage planetary gear mechanism. The reduction gear reduces the high speed of hydraulic motor and converts it low–speed, high– torque rotation. 2. Operating Description The rotation of hydraulic motor shaft is transmitted to sun gear (4) of the first stage which is linked with shaft (102) in spline. Sun gear (4) is meshed with three planetary gears (5), and three planetary gears (5) mesh with hub (1) while rotating on their axis. At that time, the hub is rotated by the rotation of the planetary gears (5). The hub rotation is transmitted to carrier (3) which connected to planetary gears (5), and that causes sun gear (6) rotation of the second stage. The rotation of sun gear (6) is transmitted to the hub via four planetary gears (7) of the second stage. The generated rotation of reduction gear is output rotation. (7)

(5) (4)

(102)

O

I

(6) (3)

(1)

24.1.6.3.2

Hydraulic Motor Section (Brake valve, parking brake, high and low speed change mechanism)

1. Function 1) Hydraulic motor Hydraulic motor is referred to as a swash plate type axial piston motor which converts the pressure oil power fed by pump into rotary motion. 2) Brake valve a. Travel motor controls the force of rotational inertia of the body to brake and stop the rotation smoothly. b. Check valve function to prevent hydraulic motor from cavitation. c. Open the port to release the parking brake force at travel motor operation, and close the port at a standstill. 3) Parking brake The parking brake is used to the prevent machine from running away or slipping while parking on a slope using the friction plate type brake mechanism, and is installed on the hydraulic motor. 4) High / Low 2-speed shifting mechanism By means of changing the tilt angle of the swash plate to change the stroke volume of piston with help of the function on the shifting valve and control piston, the speed is shifted to high speed with low torque or low speed with high torque.

24-54


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Operation 1) Hydraulic motor Hydraulic oil fed by pump enters rear flange (201) of travel motor, and is led from timing plate (109) to cylinder block (104) through brake valve mechanism. This pressure oil is led to only the one side of Y1 - Y2 tied between top dead point and bottom dead point of piston (105) stroke. And the pressure led to one side of cylinder block pushes 4 or 5 pistons (105), generating the power {F (N) = 100 x P (MPa) x A (cm2)}. This power enters on swash plate (103), but swash plate (103) is fixed having an angle (Îą) against axis of drive shaft (102), and divided into component of force (F2, F3). And the radial component of force (F3) generated various torque (T = F3 x ri) against line Y1 - Y2. The total torque [T = ÂŚ (F3 x ri)] is connected to turning effort, and rotates cylinder block (104) through piston (105). This cylinder block (104) is connected with drive shaft (102) with spline, and rotates drive shaft (102) to transmit torque. 2) Brake valve a. Operation (Brake released) The pressure oil is led to through port (A), opens valve (227), and led to port (C) on the section side of hydraulic motor to rotate hydraulic motor. At the same time, the pressure oil enters chamber (b) through passage (a) from the small hole of spool (223), and exerts on the end of spool to generate the force. Then the force of spring (228) slides the spool placed on the neutral position leftward. The sliding of spool forms the space (passage) between spool and rear flange with spool groove. This passage is connected to port (D) and port (B) of the return circuit of the hydraulic motor, and the return oil returns to tank side, enabling hydraulic motor to rotate. Then, the sliding of spool (223) leads pressure oil to port (P). The pressure oil led to port (P) moves piston (112) of parking brake, and releases parking braking force. (For details, refer to item "Parking brake".) If pressurized oil is supplied from port (B) the movements of spool (223) and valve (227) are reversed so that the hydraulic motor is rotated reversely.

24-55


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. Stop / Stall (braking action) If pressurized oil supply through the port (A) is suspended while travelling, the hydraulic force to push up the spool is lost, and the spool (223) which is slided to left side, tries to return to the neutral position through the stopper (225) due to the spring (228) force. At that time, through the oil in the chamber (b) tries to flow out to the port (A) side through the passage (a) in the spool, its flow is restricted and some back pressure is generated by the throttle effect in the passage (a) controlling the return speed of the spool. At the same time, the hydraulic motor tries to rotate with its inertia force even though the pressurized oil is suspended, and the return oil from the hydraulic motor tries to return to the port (B) side from the port (D) through the passages on spool groove and rear flange. When the spool entirely return to the neutral position, the passage on the hydraulic motor of the oil return side is completely closed by the spool, and the hydraulic motor ceases its rotation. While machine working, the brake valve smoothly stops rotation of the hydraulic motor which tries to rotate with its inertia force, by means of throttling the return side passage of the hydraulic motor, generating back pressure due to shape of the spool groove and controlling the return speed of the spool. On the other hand, when braking is operated, the hydraulic motor tries to rotate with its inertia force and to intake oil with its pumping function. However, because the intake side is closed its passage with the spool, the oil supply is suspended. This causes cavitation in the hydraulic motor. To prevent the cavitation, the valve (227) is operated by very slight negative pressure to open the passages of port (A) side and intake port (C) of the hydraulic motor. And when pressurized oil is supplied through the port (B), each motion of the above mentioned parts becomes symmetrical right and left to stop the hydraulic motor.

24-56


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM c. Self-traveling While machine is being operated, as the travel speed is increased due to steep slope, the oil flow rate of the hydraulic motor is higher than the supply flow rate of the hydraulic oil pump. The rotation of the hydraulic motor in this case is called a self-traveling (Overrun). While self-traveling, the oil pressure is lowered similar to the stopping condition. Then brake valve is moved similar to the stopping condition, throttles passage in the return side of hydraulic motor, and generate backing pressure. In addition, the force of inertia decreases the revolution of hydraulic motor to revolution having a balance with the supply flow rate of pump.

3) Parking brake a. Traveling The pressure oil led trough brake valve actuates on spool (223) of brake valve on the hydraulic motor section, opens passage to parking brake, and is led to cylinder chamber (a) compressed of spindle (2) and piston (112) on the reduction gear section. If the pressure of oil which is 0.89 MPa(129 psi) or higher it exceeds the force of spring moving piston (112) toward rear flange (201) side. This movement of piston (112) reduces the push power to separator plate (116) and friction plate (115), and makes the movement of friction plate (115) which is installed to cylinder block (104) on hydraulic motor section free releasing the brake power to cylinder block (104).

24-57


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. Stopping If pressure oil from brake valve is cut, and the pressure in cylinder chamber (a) lowers 0.89 MPa(129 psi) or less, the piston (112) goes to rightward by the force of spring (113). Also, the force of the spring pushes mating plate (116) and friction plate (115), which is in a free state because piston (112) is pushed, against spindle (2) on the reduction gear section. The frictional force produced by the push power stops the rotation of cylinder block (104), and transmits braking torque 32.4 N•m (23.9 lbf•ft) to hydraulic motor shaft. And since oil is controlled through the proper oil passage, it results in smooth operation.

4) High / Low 2-speed shifting mechanism a. Low speed When the pilot pressure (10) is not supplied through the port (D), the valve (263) is pushed up to the upper position due to the spring (266) force and pressurized oil through the port (A) or (B), the pressurized oil is cut off at port (C), and oil in the chamber (P) is released into the drain (D) (motor case) through the valve (263). Accordingly, the tilt angle of the swash plate (103) becomes the maximum mum stroke volume and low speed rotation of the hydraulic motor.

1 resulting the maxi-

10

Y P

D

D. Drain

24-58


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. High speed When 3.5 MPa (507 psi) of the pilot pressure (10) is supplied through the port (D), it defeats the spring (263) force and pressurized oil through the port (A) or (B) to push down the valve (263) to lower position, the pressurized oil at the port (C) is led to the chamber (P) through the valve (263), and the piston (161) pushes the swash plate (103) up to the plane X and maintain it at its position. At that time, the tilt angle of the swash plate becomes the minimum draulic motor.

2 resulting the minimum stroke volume and high speed rotation of the hy-

10

X

P

D

D. Drain c. Automatic shifting to low speed during high speed operation If the load is increased while high speed operation, the oil pressure at the port (A) or (B) is also increased. And when the oil pressure reaches to 18.5 MPa (2680 psi), it excesses the pilot pressure (10) of 3.5 MPa (507 psi), and the valve (263) is pushed up to upper position, and oil in the chamber (P) is released into the drain (D) (motor case) through the valve (263). At that time, the swash plate (103) gets touch with the plane Y of spindle, and the tilt angle of swash plate becomes the maximum resulting low speed rotation.

1 and is maintained at its position

10

Y P

D

D. Drain

24-59


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.7

SWIVEL JOINT

24.1.7.1 GENERAL VIEW

B

G (P)

(F) D C (E) F

P D

A

B

E C A G

Fig. 24-27 General view 24.1.7.2 SPECIFICATIONS Port No.

A, B, C, D

E, F

P

G (Drain)

Rated working pressure

MPa (psi)

20.6 (2990)

3.4 (500)

0.5 (73)

Pressure test

MPa (psi)

30.9 (4480)

30.9 (4480)

1.0 (145)

70 (18.5)

40 (10.6)

10 (2.6)

PF1/2

PF3/8

PF1/4

PF3/8

Rated flow

L/min (gal/min)

Port size Revolution Weight

rpm

Less than 15

kg (lb)

Approx 22 (49)

24-60


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.7.3 CONSTRUCTION

14

5

1 11 10

16

8 6

P F E D C B A G

3

15 13 7, 17 4

12

9

2

Fig. 24-28 Construction No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

STEM

1

10

DUST SEAL

1

2

BODY

1

11

DUST SEAL

1

3

FLANGE

1

12

SNAP RING

1

4

SPACER

1

13

BOLT (M10 X 30)

4

5

PIN

1

14

PLUG (PF1/4)

3

6

SLIPPER SEAL

4

15

SPRING WASHER

4

7

NAME PLATE

1

16

BACK-UP RING

1

8

O-RING

1

17

CLEVIS

2

9

O-RING

1

24.1.7.4 OPERATION The swivel joint is installed on the slewing center of the machine, and plays a role to continuously connect the oil circuit regardless of the slewing angle of the upper frame.

24-61


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.8

CYLINDER

24.1.8.1 SPECIFICATIONS 1. General View

B

A

C

Fig. 24-29 General view of cylinder A. Fully retracted length B. Fully extended length

C. Part No. and manufacturing No. stamp position

E40.2SR

Unit: mm (ft–in) Center distance of mounting pins Full extend B / Full retract A

Cushion

Dry weight kg (lb)

Boom (Canopy) ø90 / ø50 (3.54" / 1.97") 704 (2’3.7")

1743 / 1039 (5’8.6" / 3’4.9")

Rod side

47 (104)

Boom (Cab)

ø90 / ø50 (3.54" / 1.97") 680 (2’2.8")

1719 / 1039 (5’7.7" / 3’4.9")

Rod side

46 (101)

Arm

ø80 / ø50 (3.15" / 1.97") 717 (2’4.2")

1825 / 1108 (5’11.9" / 3’7.6") Rod & Head

Bucket

ø75 / ø45 (2.95" / 1.77") 546 (1’9.5")

1378 / 832 (4’6.3" / 2’8.8")

None

27 (60)

Swing

ø90 / ø50 (3.54" / 1.97") 567 (1’10.3")

1510 / 943 (4’11.4" / 3’1.1")

None

39 (86)

Dozer

ø95 / ø55 (3.74" / 2.17")

700 / 500 (2’3.6" / 1’7.7")

None

27 (60)

Cylinder

Cylinder Bore / Rod Dia.

Stroke

200 (7.87")

E50.2SR

42 (93)

Unit: mm (ft–in) Center distance of mounting pins Full extend B / Full retract A

Cushion

Dry weight kg (lb)

Boom (Canopy) ø100 / ø55 (3.94" / 2.17") 699 (2’3.5")

1768/ 1069 (5’9.6" / 3’6.1")

Rod side

57 (127)

Boom (Cab)

ø100 / ø55 (3.94" / 2.17") 666 (2’2.2")

1753 / 1069 (5’9.0" / 3’6.1")

Rod side

56 (123)

Arm

ø90 / ø50 (3.54" / 1.97")

716 (2’4.2")

1836 / 1120 (6’0.3" / 3’8.1")

Bucket

ø75 / ø45 (2.95" / 1.77")

546 (1’9.5")

1378 / 832 (4’6.3" / 2’8.8")

None

27 (60)

Swing

ø90 / ø50 (3.54" / 1.97") 567 (1’10.3")

1510 / 943 (4’11.4" / 3’1.1")

None

39 (86)

Dozer

ø95 / ø55 (3.74" / 2.17")

700 / 500 (2’3.6" / 1’7.7")

None

27 (60)

Cylinder

Cylinder Bore / Rod Dia.

Stroke

200 (7.87")

24-62

Rod & Head 49 (108)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.8.2 CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION 24.1.8.2.1

Construction

1. Boom cylinder

21

3

4

20

17 16 15

19

14

18

2

1

13

5

6

12

Fig. 24-30 Construction of boom cylinder

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

TUBE ASSY

1

13 RING

1

2

ROD ASSY

1

14 ROD BUSHING

1

3

BUSHING

2

15 SEAL RING

1

4

HEAD

1

16 BACK-UP RING

1

5

CUSHION BEARING

1

17 DUST SEAL

1

6

PISTON

1

18 O RING

2

9

LOCK NUT

1

19 BACK-UP RING

3

10 WEAR RING

2

20 O RING

1

11 SEAL RING

1

21 DUST SEAL

4

12 SEAL RING

1

24-63

11

10

9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2. Arm cylinder

21

3 4

20

17 16 15

19

14

18

2

1

13

5

11

6

12

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

TUBE ASSY

1

14 ROD BUSHING

1

2

ROD ASSY

1

15 SEAL RING

1

3

BUSHING

2

16 BACK-UP RING

1

4

HEAD

1

17 DUST SEAL

1

5

CUSHION BEARING

1

18 O RING

2

6

PISTON

1

19 BACK-UP RING

3

9

LOCK NUT

1

20 O RING

1

10 WEAR RING

2

21 DUST SEAL

4

11 SEAL RING

1

23 CUSHION BEARING

1

12 SEAL RING

1

24 PLATE RING

1

13 RING

1

25 RING

1

24-64

9

23

24

Fig. 24-31 Construction of Arm cylinder

No.

10

25


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3. Bucket cylinder

21

3

4

17

20

19

16 15

18

2

1

6

11

13

14

Fig. 24-32 Construction of bucket cylinder

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

TUBE ASSY

1

14 ROD BUSHING

1

2

ROD ASSY

1

15 SEAL RING

1

3

BUSHING

2

16 BACK-UP RING

1

4

HEAD

1

17 DUST SEAL

1

6

PISTON

1

18 O RING

1

9

LOCK NUT

1

19 BACK-UP RING

1

10 WEAR RING

1

20 O RING

1

11 SEAL RING

2

21 DUST SEAL

4

13 RING

1

24-65

10

9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 4. Swing cylinder

21

3 4

20

17 16 15

19

18

1

2

6

11

13

14

Fig. 24-33 Construction of swing cylinder

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

TUBE ASSY

1

14 ROD BUSHING

1

2

ROD ASSY

1

15 SEAL RING

1

3

BUSHING

2

16 BACK-UP RING

1

4

HEAD

1

17 DUST SEAL

1

6

PISTON

1

18 O RING

1

9

LOCK NUT

1

19 BACK-UP RING

1

10 WEAR RING

2

20 O RING

1

11 SEAL RING

1

21 DUST SEAL

4

13 RING

1

24-66

10

9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 5. Dozer cylinder

21

3 4

20 19

17 16 15

2

18

14

6

1

13 Fig. 24-34 Construction of dozer cylinder

No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

TUBE ASSY

1

14 ROD BUSHING

1

2

ROD ASSY

1

15 SEAL RING

1

3

BUSHING

2

16 BACK-UP RING

1

4

HEAD

1

17 DUST SEAL

1

6

PISTON

1

18 O RING

1

9

LOCK NUT

1

19 BACK-UP RING

1

10 WEAR RING

1

20 O RING

1

11 SEAL RING

2

21 DUST SEAL

4

13 RING

1

24-67

11

10

9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.8.2.2

Function (Example for boom cylinder)

1. Fundamental Function This is a kind of hydraulic actuator, and converts the energy in pressurized oil supplied by the hydraulic pump to a large force linear direction by means of the piston, as well as changing over the operating direction for either extension or retraction by means of actuating the valve lever to change over the direction of pressurized oil flow. Such conversion of energy force and change over the operating direction are of the fundamental function of this cylinder. 2. Function of each Parts The following description is based on a cylinder with a typical structure (Boom cylinder). 1) Cylinder Head Assy The cylinder head assy also works as a bearing by means of pressing the bushing (14) into the cylinder head (4). The oil leakage is prevented by insersion of the seal ring (15) into the bore of cylinder head. The dust invasion is protected by pressing the dust seal (17) into the bore of cylinder head. By means of fitting with the cushion bearing (5) at adjacent to the fully extended position of the cylinder, a high oil pressure is generated to absorb the cylinder shock at the fully extended position. And the cylinder head has another function of charging and discharging highly pressurized oil from the inside of cylinder tube to the port.

17

16

18

19

20

4

15

14

13

1

2

Fig. 24-35 Cylinder head assy No. 1

NAME TUBE ASSY

13 RING 16 BACK-UP RING 18 O-RING 19 BACK-UP RING 20 O-RING a. Rod bushing (14) The rod bushing (14) is pressed into the bore on cylinder head to support the piston rod. Along with the wear ring installed outer periphery of the piston, the bushing (14) bears radial load imposed on the cylinder, and performs linear movement against the piston rod at high facial pressure, and minimized the eccentricity of piston rod that badly affects to the sealing effect by supporting its one end. b. Dust seal (17) The dust seal (17) is located at the entrance where the piston rod comes in and out. Its function is to protect invasion of dust and water into the cylinder to secure good sealing effect of the seal ring (15), as well as to remove dust and mud adhered on the piston rod.

24-68


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) Piston Assy The piston assy has the seal ring (11) which is inserted at the center portion of the piston (6), to prevent leakage of pressurized oil from either chamber of left or right to the other chamber. The wear rings (10) are inserted in both sides of the seal ring (11) to bear radial load imposed on the cylinder, and also to catch contaminations.

5

6

11

10

12

1

9

23

24

25

Fig. 24-36 Piston assy a. Seal Ring (11) The location of seal ring (11) is the center of piston. The seal ring (11) is to seal the circular gap between the piston and the cylinder tube utilizing a tension of the O-ring, to form both chambers of high pressure side and low pressure side isolating from each other making the piston as the border. b. Wear Ring (10) Two wear rings are provided at both sides of the seal ring (11) directly getting in touch with the cylinder tube. Along with the bushing (14), the slide rings (10) bear radial load imposed on the cylinder, perform linear movement against inside face of cylinder at high facial pressure, and minimize the eccentricity of piston rod that badly affects to the sealing effect by supporting it at one end. And the slide ring has another function of burying and catching contaminations between the cylinder tube and the slide rings. c. Cushion Bearing (5) The cushion bearing (5) is located between the piston and the stepped portion of piston rod. This cushion ring has the inner seal ring (12), this causes the seal ring has floating mechanism. This floating mechanism absorbs the shock at plunge of cushion bearing. It has the function to form a circular gap adjacent to the fully extended position, and to throttle the oil to absorb the collision speed of cylinder at the fully extended position to soften the shock. d. Cushion bearing (23) The cushion bearing (23) is located at the end of piston rod. At the full retracting of cylinder rod, cushion bearing (23) plunges into hole of cylinder bottom, and forms a circular gap and throttles the oil flow. Consequently the collision speed of rod slows down and the shock of collision is absorbed.. No.

NAME

1

TUBE ASSY

9

LOCK NUT

24 PLATE RING 25 RING

24-69


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24.2

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

24.2.1

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LIST Group

Diode

Electical Fittings

Light

Motor

Relay

Code

Part Name

D-1

DIODE

D-2

DIODE

D-3

DIODE

D-4

DIODE

D-12

DIODE

D-13

DIODE

D-14

DIODE

E-1

FUSE BOX

E-2

GENERATOR (ALTERNATOR)

E-3

HORN

E-4

FUSIBLE LINK (45A)

E-6

GAUGE CLUSTER

E-7

POWER SOCKET

E-8

AIR HEATER

E-10

RADIO (OPT)

E-12

HEATER (OPT)

E-13

BATTERY

E-14

SEQUENCE BOX

E-15

FUSE BOX (OPT) (FOR COOLER)

E-16

COOLING UNIT

E-17

CONDENSER MOTOR

E-18

COMPRESSOR

E-20

TRAVEL ALARM (OPT)

E-26

HOUR METER

L-1

ROOM LAMP

L-2

BOOM WORKING LIGHT (55 W)

L-5

CAB / CANOPY WORKING LIGHT

M-1

STARTER MOTOR

M-2

WIPER MOTOR (CAB)

M-3

WASHER MOTOR (CAB)

M-4

DECELERATION MOTOR

M-6

FUEL PUMP

R-1

BATTERY RELAY

R-2

SAFETY RELAY

R-3

DECELERATION RELAY

R-6

TIMER UNIT

R-7

E/G STOP RELAY

R-8

CHARGE INDICATOR RELAY

R-9

CAB / CANOPY WORKING LIGHT

R-10

CONDENSER SPEED SHIFT RELAY

R-11

CONDENSER RELAY

24-70


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Group

Relay

Sensor

Solenoid

Code

Part Name

R-13

COOLER RELAY

R-14

SLEW/SWING SELECT RELAY

R-22

SW. SELECT RELAY

R-23

SLEW/SWING PRESER VATION RELAY

R-24

NIBBLER OPEN RELAY

R-25

NIBBLER CLOSE RELAY

SE-1

FUEL SENSOR

SE-2

ENGINE THERMO SENSOR

SE-5

ENGINE WATER TEMPERATURE

SV-1

LEVER LOCK SOL.

SV-2

2-SPEED SELECT SOL.

SV-3

E/G STOP SOL.

SV-5

POWER SHIFT SOL. (Cooler Spec)

SV-9

NIBBLER OPEN SOL.

SV-10 NIBBLER CLOSE SOL. SV-12 SLEW/SWING SELECT SOL.

SW-1

KEY SWITCH

SW-2

WORKING LIGHT SW.

SW-3

2-SPEED SELECT SW.

SW-4

WIPER WASHER SW.

SW-5

E/G COOLANT TEMP. SW.

SW-6

E/G OIL PRESSURE SW.

SW-7

HORN SW.

SW-9

LEVER LOCK SW.

SW-10 HEATER SW. (OPT) SW-11 DECELERATION SW. Switch

SW-15 HI,LOW PRESS SW. SW-16 CONDENSER SPEED SHIFT SW. SW-23 TRAVEL ALARM SELECT SW. (OPT) SW-24 TRAVEL RIGHT (FORWARD) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-25 TRAVEL RIGHT (REVERSE) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-26 TRAVEL LEFT (FORWARD) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-27 TRAVEL LEFT (REVERSE) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-28 SLEW/SWING SELECT SW. SW-30 SLEW/SWING LEVER PRESS. SW.(LEFT) SW-31 SLEW/SWING LEVER PRESS. SW.(RIGHT) SW-33 NIBBLER OPEN SW. SW-34 NIBBLER CLOSE SW.

24-71


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.2.2

SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

D-1, 2, 3, 4, 12~14 Diode

Horn E/G stop solenoid E/G stop relay Travel 1, 2 speed sol. Battery relay Slew/Swing Select relay E/G stop solenoid

Type 7321-9822-30 Current 3A Max rated Breakdown 400 V

Mating connector Maker 2 poles

YAZAKI SUIMI TOMO

4 poles YAZAKI

Housing

Terminal

7123-7729-40 6098-0017 7123-7144

7116-1181P 7116-1181P

E-1 Fuse box 10A 30A

Circuit protection

30A

Spare fuse

10A one, 30A two

30A 30A 30A 30A 10A

F1

Wiper

30A F2

Heater Relay Solenoid

10A F3 30A F4 30A F5 30A F6 10A

24-72

30A

Working light Horn Room lamp Engine stop Solenoid Battery relay Gauge cluster


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

E-2 Generator (Alternator) Generator

A 1 A

A - Connection 2

5 4

Voltage Rated revolution Current Weight

10A one, 30A two 5,000 r.p.m. 55A (13.5) 3.5 kg (7.7 lb)

5

3

No. 1 2 3 4 5

NAME KEY SWITCH MAX. 3.4W x 6 ALTERNATOR ASSY IC REGULATOR LOAD

E-3 Horn

T2 T1

Warning sound 2

COIL 3

1

Rated Voltage Rated current Basic frequency Sound level Insulation resistance

DC12V 3 ± 1A 350 ± 30Hz 113 ± 5dB 3MΩ or more/500V Megger

24-73

No. 1 2 3

NAME AIR SHAFT CONTACT COIL


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use E-4

Specifications

Allowable current

Description

45A

Fusible link 45A

Fuse 45A

E-6 Gauge Cluster Monitor Panel

A A

Operating voltage

12V

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A

24-74

Connection Illumination (+) E/G oil press (-) Charge (-) E/G coolant temp (-) Lamp power source -1 (+) [E/G coolant, Fuel, Travel 2 speed] Fuel (-) Travel 2 speed (-) Lamp power source-2 (+) [E/G oil press., Charge, Air cleaner clogging] Air cleaner clogging (-) F/T IGN (+) FUEL UNIT F/T illumination GND (-) TEMP UNIT NOT USE Connector


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

E-7 Power socket

Operating voltage

Description

DC 12V (Water-proof type)

Power souce

E-8 Air heater

1

E/G starter

2

Rated voltage Rated current Rated output Insulation resistance

DC 11V 36.5A 400 W

No. 1

NAME M6 TERMINAL TIGHTENING TORQUE 0.35 ∼ 0.5 kgf⋅m (2.5 ∼ 3.6 lbf⋅ft) EARTH

3MΩ or more/500V Megger

2

E-10 1

Tuner

2

Radio (OPT)

3

Maker Voltage

4

5

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

CLARION 12V

24-75

6

NAME Display button Display Speaker Preset button 1∼6 Tune/time adjust Power/volume


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

E-12 Heater Heating (OPT)

1

2

No. NAME 1 Machine side 2 Heater side

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT

E-13 Battery Power source

Type Rated voltage Capacity Amount of electrolyte

95D31L DC12V 64 Ah/5HR 5.3 L

E-14 Relay A

Sequence (Holding circuit) 4

1

GND

B

3

Rated voltage

C 2

No. 1 2 3 4 A B C

CLARION

24-76

NAME Decel SW Travel 1.2 speed SW Travel 1.2 speed solenoid Decel relay solenoid Imput / output operation Electric circuit Pin arrangement


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

E-15

Description

A

Fuse box (For cooler) Fuse (OPT)

Fuse

1 3

2

3

2

4

1

4

1

2

No. NAME 1 Bracket in the hatched area 2 Hole for M6 Arrangement of terminals and circuit A diagram

20A blade X 2

E-20 Travel alarm (Opt) Warning sound

1 2

A

3

Rated voltage (Usage range) Rated current

DC12V⋅24V (9∼36V) Max 50mA at rated voltage

No. 1 2 3 A

E-26

NAME Weep hole X 2 Power source (+) (Pink) Power source (-) (Black) Amp econo seal mark II water proof 2PM

1

Hour meter Service meter

Movement Rated voltage

No. NAME Terminal parts 1 Connector parts

Quartz 10∼80V CD

24-77


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

L-1 Light Room light (Cab Spec.)

1

2

Rated voltage Bulb

No. NAME 1 ON 2 OFF

12V 12V-10W

L-2 Light Boom working light (L.H.)

1 Bolt M12

Effesctive area of lens Bulb

82cm2 Halogen 12V-55W

24-78

2 CA104

No. NAME 1 M12 Bolt 2 CA104


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

L-5

4

Light Cab/Canopy working light

2 1

3

Effective area of lens Bulb

54cm2 Halogen 12V-55W

M-1 Motor

No. 1 2 3 4

NAME Water drain hole CA104 (Power) CB104 (Ground) M12 X 1.25

4 3

2

1

E/G starter

Z

Z

Rated voltage Output Rated time Rotating direction Weight

DC12V 2.3 kW 30 Sec Clockwise as seen from pinion 5.3 Kg (11.7 lb)

24-79

No. NAME 1 Pinion M8 B terminal tightening torque 2 7.4±9.8 N⋅m 3 M8 M terminal 4 S terminal 1.7±2.4 N⋅m


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

M-2 Motor Wiper (Cab Spec.) Y(S)

R(+1)

B(-)

L(+)

Rated voltage Wiping angle

12V 105° ± 3°

M-3 (+)

Motor Window washer (Cab Spec.)

Rated voltage

(-)

1

No. NAME 1 Window washer tank assy

DC 12V

24-80


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

M-4 Motor Deceleration

1

2

5 6

3 4

7 8

(-)

9

Rated voltage Stroke Working force Working time Working current

12V 36±2 mm (1.42”±0.08”) 11Kg or more 1 or less 8.5A or less

24-81

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A

A

NAME Amp connector AVS-0.85L AVS-0.85LR AVS-0.85LW Plug AVS-0.85B AVS-0.85LY Switch ON: P1 OFF: P2 PTC Thermistor Relay Circuit diagram

10


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

M-6 Fuel pump 3

Auto air bleed 1 2

4

Rated voltage Max. working current Delivery rate

DC 12V 1.5 A or less At open condition 400cc/min or more

No. 1 2 3 4 5

NAME AV 0.5B (Black) Vinyl tube (Blue) AV 0.5R (Red) Inlet Outlet

R-1,7 Relay Battery relay E/G stop relay

Rated voltage Coil resistance Insulation resistance

24-82

DC 12V 72Ω±10% 20MΩ (500V)

5


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

R-2 Safety relay Protection of starter

1

4

A

A

2 3 C

B

Rated voltage Rated Temperature range Rated load

DC 12V Continuous -30∼80°C (-22∼176°F) B terminal starter (Max 40A)

No. 1 2 3 4 A B C

NAME Key switch Battery Starter Controller Connector Connector Connection diagram

R3, 8, 9,14,22~25 Relay Deceleration relay Charge indicator relay Slew/swing relay etc.

4 3

5 1 2

1 C

Rated voltage Insulation resistance

5

4 2

DC 12V 1Ω or more/20A,20°C

24-83

No. NAME C Circuit diagram

3

B


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

R-6 Relay

z

Timer Unit 1

3

2

4 z

Rated voltage Exciting current Timer

12V 1A 1sec

SE-1

117.5 (4.63")

1 2

Fuel sensor

3

) (3.92" R99.6

4

5

44.3 121 (4.76") (1.74") 201 (7.91")

A

Sensor

B 9

6

10

7

8

Rated voltage Float position Resistance (Ω) Allowable (Ω)

12V FULL 10 0 -4

1/2 38 -

EMPTY 90 +10 0

24-84

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A B

NAME GND (Black) UNIT (Yellow) Themistor (Red) Gauge Waning lamp Thermistor Fuel unit Stay earth Low fuel warning Tank Connector Circuit diagram


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

SE-2

Description

17

M16 X 1.5

Sensor E/G thermo sensor

Temperature (°C) (50) 80 100 (153.9) 51.9 27.4 Resistance value (Ω) The figures in parentheses are reference values

Rated voltage Type

(120) (16.1)

DC 12V Thermistor type

SV-1,2 Solenoid Safety lever lock Travel 2-speed select

1

2

3

4 A

Rated voltage Relief valve set pressure Flow rate

DC 12V 3.5MPa (507 psi) 15L/min 3.96 gal/min (P port)

No. 1 2 3 4 A

24-85

NAME T=7.8±1.0 N⋅m T=44±3 N⋅m T=7.8±1.0 N⋅m Connector shape: AMP eco seal J mark ΙΙ (+) Hydraulic symbols


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

SV-3

S

Solenoid

4

1

E/G stop

3

Rated voltage

2

DC 12V Pull coil:36.5 Amps Hold coil:0.49 Amps

Rated current

No. 1 2 3 4 S

NAME GND (Black) Pull coil (White) Hold coil (Red) Connector Stroke: 7.4 mm

SV-5 P

Solenoid Power shift (Air-con spec.)

A

1

T

2 A

3 A 3-PF1/4 T

Rated voltage Capacity Operating pressure Max. flow

A

P

DC 12V 12 W 4.9 MPa (710psi) 160 L/min (42 gal/min)

24-86

No. 1 2 3 A

NAME Cord color: earth black Power source cord color: red Amp mark ΙΙ 2P Circuit diagram


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

SV-9,10 Solenoid 2

3 A1

Nibbler open SOL. Nibbler close SOL. (North America)

B1

1 3

2

T P G

Rated voltage Consumption Rated pressure

No. 1 2 3

DC 12V 12 W 4.9 MPa (710 psi)

NAME AMP Connector SOL. A SOL. B

SV-12 Solenoid T

A2 B2 A1 B1

Slew/Swing select (North America)

1 PP P2

P1

A

Rated voltage Consumption power Rated pressure

DC 12V 12W 4.9 MPa (710psi)

24-87

No. NAME 1 Amp mark ΙΙ 2P A Hydraulic circuit


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

SW-1 Switch

1 BR

Key switch

ACC

OFF

ACC

1

R1

R2 ST

C B

R1

No. NAME 1 Auto return

SW-2

OFF

Switch M

L

(E)

OFF

Working light

L ON A

B M

E

No. NAME A L: 70WX2 lamps B Unconnected

SW-3 Switch 1

Travel 1, 2 speed

Type

Buried in right travel lever

24-88

No. NAME 1 Switch & markes

ON


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

SW-4 Switch 1

Wiper washer (Cab only)

2

2

OFF O N

1

2A

2 3A (Peak10A) 3A (Peak10A)

2

5A (Peak10A)

A D

C B

Insulation resistance

1MΩ or more (DC500V Megger)

SW-5 Switch

M16 X 1.5

No. 1 2 A B C D

NAME Auto return Wash Wiper motor Washer, Motor Cam switch, Wiper Connector

21

E/G water temperature

Operating temperature Electric capacity Insulation resistance Tightening torque

24-89

ON: 110 ± 3°C OFF: 100°C or less DC 12V 1A 100MΩ or more / 500V Megger 27N⋅m (19.9 lbf⋅ft)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use SW-6

Specifications

Description

PT1/8

24

Switch E/G oil pressure

Rated voltage Rated load Operating pressure

DC 6V, 12V, 24V 5W (Lamp load) 49±1 kPa (7.1±1.4 psi)

SW-7 Switch Horn switch

Type Rated Insulation resistance

SW-9

1

OFF-(ON) momentary 125V 3A (AC) 100MΩ or more / 500V Megger

1

No. NAME 1 Sumitomo

M20 X 1.5

Switch Lever lock SW.

2

Rated voltage Rated current Insulation resistance Stroke

DC 12V 15A 1MΩ or more Switch ON: 2±1mm, (0.08”±0.04”)

24-90

No. NAME 1 CA104 (With sleeve) 2 CB104 (With sleeve)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

SW-10 Switch OFF

Heater switch (OPT) 1

M

2

E

L

No. NAME 1 Connector 2 Plug

SW-11 Switch

1 2

Deceleration switch (OPT)

Rated voltage Insulation resistance

DC 12V (MAX:DC16V) 1MΩ or more (500V Megger)

SW-23 Select Switch

b

c

e

No. NAME 1 Free 2 Push

1 5

a

2

6

Travel Alarm 3

4

Rated voltage Insulation resistance

DC 12V⋅24V 1MΩ or more (500V Megger)

24-91

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

NAME Symbol mark Connector (with lock) Red (R) Red/White Switch Terminal

d


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Code No. Parts Name Use

Specifications

Description

SW-24, 25, 26, 27,30,31 Switch

Travel alarm

1

Slew/Swing lever

Contact rating Insulation resistance

Voltage: 18∼30V 100MΩ or more / DC 500V Megger

No. NAME 1 Amp mark ΙΙ 2P

SW-28, 33, 34 Grip & Switch 1

LF03M01005F3 Nibbler open SW. Nibbler close SW. Slew / Swing select SW

2

No. NAME Grip assy 1 Handle assy (with switch) 2 Taping

24-92


31. GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TABLE OF CONTENTS 31.1 GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ................................................ 31-3 31.1.1 CONTENTS OF GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ............ 31-3 31.1.2 SPECIFICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUE ...................................... 31-3



31. GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

31-1


31. GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

31-2


31. GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

31.1

GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

31.1.1

CONTENTS OF GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This chapter is consist of three sections as follows. (1) ATTACHMENT ............................................................................................................Index No.: 32 Part I: Removing and Installing Assembly Part II: Disassembling and Assembling Components 1) Hydraulic cylinder (2) UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE.................................................................................Index No.: 33 Part I: Removing and Installing Assembly Part II: Disassembling and Assembling Components 1) Hydraulic pump 2) Control Valve 3) Pilot Valve (ATT) 4) Pilot Valve (Travel) 5) Slewing Motor 6) Swivel Joint (3) TRAVEL SYSTEM .........................................................................................................Index No.: 34 Part I: Removing and Installing Assembly Part II: Disassembling and Assembling Components 1) Travel Motor 31.1.2

SPECIFICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUE

Tightening torque is indicated as follows, for example; T= 100 N•m (73.8 lbf•ft) Tolerance is ± 10% unless otherwise specified. •Refer Index No. 11 TOOLS for standard tightening torque.

31-3


31. GENERAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

[MEMO]

31-4


32. ATTACHMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 32.1 REMOVING AND INSTALLING ...................................................................... 31-3 32.1.1 ATTACHMENT ASSEMBLY AND NAME ................................................ 31-3 32.1.2 BUCKET ................................................................................................... 31-4 32.1.3 ARM ......................................................................................................... 31-6 32.1.4 BOOM ...................................................................................................... 31-9 32.1.5 SWING ................................................................................................... 31-12 32.1.6 DOZER ................................................................................................... 31-14 32.2 DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ........................................................ 31-15 32.2.1 CYLINDER ............................................................................................. 31-15



32. ATTACHMENTS

32-1


32. ATTACHMENTS

32-2


32. ATTACHMENTS

32.1

REMOVING AND INSTALLING

32.1.1

ATTACHMENT ASSEMBLY AND NAME N

M

L L

A

C D B

F

E

Q K

I G

P

H

J

R

Fig. 32-1 Attachment name and position A. Boom foot pin

J. Bucket drive pin

B. Boom cylinder head pin

K. Bucket attaching pin

C. Boom cylinder rod pin

L. (L1 Upper) (L2 Lower) Swing center pin

D. Arm cylinder head pin

M. Swing cylinder rod pin

E. Arm cylinder rod pin

N. Swing cylinder head pin

F. Boom top pin

P. Dozer pin

G. Bucket cylinder head pin

Q. Dozer cylinder head pin

H. Bucket cylinder rod pin

R. Dozer cylinder rod pin

I.

Idler link pin

32-3


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.1.2 32.1.2.1

BUCKET REMOVAL OF BUCKET

(1) Operate the operating lever and place the bucket on the ground, so the bucket and arm connecting pins are not loaded. (2) Move the O-rings (3) toward the bucket bosses using a spatula. (3) In order to remove pin (K) which links arm and bucket, remove the ring (2) and the pin (1) by means of straight driver, and draw out pin (K). • If the pin does not come off easily, the pin is loaded. Take off the load by manipulating the operating lever.

Fig. 32-2 To place Bucket on ground

• Take care so the dust seal between the arm and the bucket bosses is not damaged.

3

(4) Adjust the bucket by manipulating the operating lever so the pin (J) between the bucket link and the bucket is not loaded.

J

B

2

(5) Remove the ring (2) and pin (1) then pull out the pin (J).

B

(6) Remove bucket assembly. Weight: 107 kg (236 lbs) — E40.2SR 112 kg (247 lbs) — E50.2SR

4 1

4 3

B-B B

K

B

Fig. 32-3 Assembly of pin (A-A) 4. Dast seal J. Pin for bucket link K. Pin for arm

32-4


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.1.2.2

INSTALLATION OF BUCKET

Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, including the following workings:

CAUTION When aligning the pin position, do not put your finger in the pin holes in any circumstances, but align them visually. (1) Clean the welded part of the structures and check that there is no crack on the part. (2) Check that the dust seal is not damaged, and replace a faulty one if necessary. (3) Replace the worn pins and bushings according to the Section "ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS" of "SPECIFICATIONS". (4) When inserting the pin, coat the shaft with grease. • The bucket can be mounted easily if the bucket link is installed in the beginning. Fig. 32-4 Installation of bucket

32-5


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.1.3 32.1.3.1

ARM REMOVAL OF ARM

(1) Making the arm cylinder and bucket cylinder (1) to the most retracting conditions, get touch the arm tip with the ground. (2) Shut off the engine and operate the arm control lever several times at the same moment, and the pressure in circuit is released. Then put the safety lock lever in the "Locked" position, and depress the air breather on the hydraulic oil tank, release the pressure in the tank.

Fig. 32-5 Arm removing posture

(3) Disconnect the 2 hoses connected to the bucket cylinder (1). Then apply plugs to the openings. E

: 27 mm (4) Lift up the arm cylinder body with a nylon sling in order not to exert any load to the pin (E). (5) Remove the capscrew and nuts that are preventing the pin (E) from coming out. Then remove the pin (E) and shims.

F

: 19 mm (6) Placing a square timber under the arm cylinder, get down the cylinder. (7) Install the pin (E) to the original position, and install the capscrew and nuts that prevents the pin (E) from coming out. Applying a rope to the pin (E) and the arm tip, slightly lift it up in order not to exert any load to the pin (F).

(E)

(F)

Fig. 32-6 Sectional view of Installing Pin

(8) Remove the capscrew that is preventing the pin (F) connecting the arm and boom, from coming out. Then pull off the pin (F).

1

: 36 mm H

(9) Remove the arm assembly paying attention to the stability of arm. Weight of arm assembly: approx. 170 kg (375 lbs) — E40.2SR 180 kg (397 lbs) — E50.2SR

G

Fig. 32-7 Removal of Arm assembly

32-6

E


32. ATTACHMENTS K

(10) Removal of Bucket Cylinder (1)

W

1) Remove the capscrew that is preventing the rod pin (H) from coming out, then pull off the pin (H). : 24 mm 2) Remove the capscrew and nuts that are preventing the head pin (G) from coming out, then pull off the pin (G). : 17 mm

(H)

(G)

Fig. 32-8 Sectional view of Installing Pin K. Shim W. Shim

3) Apply a nylon sling to the tube of bucket cylinder, and remove the cylinder. Weight: approx. 27 kg (60 lbs) 32.1.3.2

INSTALLATION OF ARM

Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, including the following workings.

CAUTION At the alignment of pin positions, never insert your finger into the pin holes. Make sure to align them with visual confirmation. (1) Make the welded area clean to inspect any cracks there.

P

(2) Check the dust seal (Q) for damages, and replace the faulty dust seal to new one (referring to Fig. 32-9 for the installing procedures). (3) Referring to the Section "ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS" of Specifications, replace the worn-out pin and bushing to new ones.

Q

(4) Before installing the pin, apply grease to the shaft area.

R

(5) Referring to Fig. 32-10, install the capscrew and nuts to prevent the pin from coming out.

Fig. 32-9 Dust seal installation Q. Dust seal

: 19 mm, 24 mm, 36 mm (6) Make sure to provide an appropriate clearance for thrust direction at the installation of pin referring to Fig. 32-10.

P. Boss R. Bushing

(7) For the adjustment for clearance, insert resin (plastic) shim first, then adjust the clearance with steel shims.

32-7


32. ATTACHMENTS

G H E

F

K

1.0

(H)

1.5

W

1.0

3.5 (0.14")

S

T

W

(G)

(F)

1.5

Z Z

Z

(E)

Fig. 32-10 Sectional view of Installing Pin K. Shim The sum of both clearances: To be from 0.6 mm (0.024 in) to 1.00 mm (0.039 in) after shim adjustment

S. Shim The sum of both clearances: To be from 0.1 mm (0.004 in) to 0.5 mm (0.02 in) after shim adjustment

W. Shim The sum of both clearances: To be from 0.5 mm (0.020 in) to 0.9 mm (0.035 in) after shim adjustment

T. Shim The sum of both clearances: Less than 0.5 mm (0.0020 in) after shim adjustment Z. Apply Loctite #262 equivalent

32-8


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.1.4 32.1.4.1

BOOM REMOVAL OF BOOM

(1) Get down the boom from which the arm was removed, and support the boom end with a stable stand.

D

(2) Disconnect all hoses from the bucket cylinder, arm cylinder and boom cylinder, and apply plugs to all the openings.

A C

: 27 mm

B

(3) Disconnect the wiring for working light at the connector. (4) Removal of Boom Cylinder 1) Temporarily lift up the boom cylinder with a nylon sling to prevent the boom cylinder from falling down.

Fig. 32-11 Removal of Boom Cylinder

2) Removing the capscrew and nuts that are preventing the rod pin (C) from coming out, remove the pin (C). : 19 mm

C

3) Retract the rod, then put the cylinder on a stable stand.

B

Fig. 32-12 Sectional view of Installing Pin

4) Removing the capscrew that is preventing the head pin (B) from coming out, remove the pin (B).

D

5) Remove the boom cylinder. Weight: 46 kg (101 lbs) — E40.2SR 57 kg (126 lbs) — E50.2SR

A

(5) Removal of Boom assembly 1) Temporarily lift up the boom assembly in order not to exert any load to the boom foot pin (A). Weight of boom assembly: approx. 230 kg (507 lbs) — E40.2SR 240 kg (529 lbs) — E50.2SR

Fig. 32-13 Removal of Boom assembly

2) Removing the capscrew that is preventing the boom foot pin (A) from coming out, pull off the pin (A). : 19 mm 3) Applying a sling to the boom assembly, remove the boom assembly.

32-9


32. ATTACHMENTS (6) Removal of Arm Cylinder 1) Removing the capscrew and nuts that are preventing the head pin (D) from coming out, remove the pin (D). : 19 mm

(D)

2) Applying a nylon sling to the tube of arm cylinder, remove the arm cylinder. Weight: 42 kg (93 lbs) — E40.2SR 49 kg (108 lbs) — E50.2SR 32.1.4.2

(A)

Fig. 32-14 Sectional view of Installing Pin

INSTALLATION OF BOOM

Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, including the following.

CAUTION At the alignment of pin positions, never insert your finger into the bores. Make sure to align them with visual confirmation.

(1) Make clean the welded area on each of structure to inspect any cracks there.

P

(2) Check the dust seal for damages, and replace the faulty dust seal to new one (referring to Fig. 32-15 for the installing procedures). (3) Referring to the Section "ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS" of Specifications, replace the worn-out pin and bush to new ones.

Q

(4) Before inserting the pin, apply grease to the shaft area.

R

(5) Referring to Fig. 32-16, install the capscrew and nuts to prevent the pin from coming out.

Fig. 32-15 Dust seal installation Q. Dust seal

: 19 mm

P. Boss

(6) Make sure to provide an appropriate clearance for thrust direction at the installation of pin referring to Fig. 32-16.

R. Bushing

(7) For the adjustment for clearance, insert resin (plastic) shim first, then adjust the clearance with steel shims.

32-10


32. ATTACHMENTS

D

C

A

V S

Z

B

(A)

W

S

S

1.0~1.5

Z

1.0~1.5 2.5

Z

Z

3.5

(D)

(B)

(C)

Fig. 32-16 Sectional view of Installing Pin W. Shim The sum of both clearence: to be from 0.5 mm (0.020 in) to 0.9 mm (0.035 in) after shim adjustment

S. Shim The sum of both clearence: to be from 0.1 mm (0.004 in) to 0.5 mm (0.02 in) after shim adjustment Z. Apply Loctite #262 equivalent V. Apply grease when install

32-11


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.1.5 32.1.5.1

SWING PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) To make the removing work easy, swing by around 30° for leftward. (2) Disconnect the hoses of bucket cylinder, arm cylinder and boom cylinder, and apply plugs to all the openings. 32.1.5.2

: 27 mm

REMOVAL OF SWING BRACKET AND CYLINDER

(1) Removal of swing bracket (A9)

C5

C11

1) Removing the capscrew (C4) that is preventing the rod side pin (M) of swing cylinder (C11) from coming out, remove the pin (M).

N

: 19 mm

M

2) Install the boom foot pin (A) to the original position on swing bracket (A9), then temporarily lift it up.

C4

3) Removing two capscrews (B8) (B9) those are preventing the pins (L1) (L2) from coming out, remove the pins (L1) (L2). : 19 mm

B8

4) Remove the swing bracket (A9). Weight of Swing Bracket: 112 kg (247 lbs). (2) Removal of Swing Cylinder (C11)

A

1) Disconnect 2 connecting hoses for the swing cylinder.

A9

: 22 mm

B9

2) Removing the capscrew (C5) that is preventing the head side pin (N) of swing cylinder from coming out, remove the pin (N). : 19 mm

A

3) Take out the swing cylinder (C11) from the front side. Weight of Swing Cylinder: 39 kg (86 lbs)

A9 L1

L2

B9

Fig. 32-17 Swing portion

32-12


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.1.5.3

INSTALLATION OF SWING BRACKET AND CYLINDER

Installation is performed in the reverse order of removal, including the following workings. (1) Check the dust seal for damages, and replace the faulty dust seal to new one. (2) Referring to the Section "ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS" of Specifications, replace the worn-out pin and bushing to new ones. (3) Before inserting the pin, apply grease to the shaft area. (4) Refer to Fig. 32-18 for the shim adjustment at pin installing portion.

T

B

U

B

A A C

C

C-C

W

Z

S

4

W

1.0~1.5 (0.04~0.06in)

Z Z

A-A

B-B Fig. 32-18 Sectional view of Pin Installing

S. Shim The sum of both clearances: less than 0.5 mm (0.02 in) after shim adjustment T. Set this washer with the oil groove side positioned downward (Thickness 2.3)

W. Shim The sum of both clearances: To be from 0.5 mm (0.020 in) to 0.9 mm (0.035 in) after shim adjustment Z. Apply Loctite #262 equivalent

U. Washer (Thickness 2.3)

32-13


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.1.6 32.1.6.1

DOZER REMOVAL

(1) Put a support (1) of appropriate height under the mounting side of dozer body, and make the dozer at a stable condition not to exert any load to the pin (P). (2) Disconnect the hydraulic hoses and apply a plug to the connecting portions. : 22 mm (3) Apply a nylon sling to the dozer cylinder (C1), and lift it up slightly not to exert any load to the pin (Q) of rod side.

B2, B3

Q C3, C4 C1

(4) Remove the capscrew (C3) and nuts (C4) that are preventing the pin (Q) from coming out, of rod side. Remove the pin (Q), and support (1) the cylinder (C1) with a wood block, etc.

R

: 19 mm (5) Remove the capscrew (B2) and nuts (B3) that are preventing the dozer body fixing pin (P) from coming out, and remove the two pins (P).

P

1

Fig. 32-19 Removing/Installing Dozer

(6) Gradually move the machine to backward to remove the dozer. Weight of dozer assembly: 170 kg (375 lbs) — E40.2SR 175 kg (386 lbs) — E50.2SR (7) If necessary, remove the dozer cylinder by means of removing the pin (R) of head side. Weight of dozer cylinder: 27 kg (60 lbs) 32.1.6.2

INSTALLATION

The installation is carried out with the reverse order of the removal paying attention for the following. (1) Referring to the Section "ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS" of Specifications, replace the worn-out bushings and dust seals to new ones. (2) Before installing pin (P), (Q) and (R), apply grease to their shaft area.

2

(3) Referring to Fig. 32-20, install the nuts (2) for capscrew (3) to prevent the pin from coming out. 3

: 19 mm

Fig. 32-20 Tightening Procedures for Nuts

32-14


32. ATTACHMENTS

32.2

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

32.2.1

CYLINDER

32.2.1.1

NECESSARY TOOLS

Though the required tools and jigs differ in types of cylinder, as a guide line, tools and jigs to be prepared are shown in Table 32-1. Tool/Jig Hammer

Remarks 1. Steel hammer 2. Wooden or plastic hammer

Screwdriver

Several kinds of minus driver of small and large sizes

Chisel

Flat chisel

Vise

Capable to hold outer dia. of cylinder head and tube installing pin portion.

Tool/Jig

Remarks

Gimlet

A sharp-point tool may be used in place of gimlet 1. For press-fitting rod bushing (A)

Jig

2. For press-fitting bushing (B) 3. For press-fitting dust seal (C) 4. For reforming seal ring (D) 1. Slide calipers

Wrench

1. Spanner, Plier, Torque wrench 2. Extension pipe for wrench

Measuring De- 2. Micrometer vice 3. Cylinder gauge 4. V-block

For the details of special jigs, refer to the end of this section.

32.2.1.2

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Carry out the disassembly and assembly works in a clean work shop, and always keep disassembled parts at clean conditions.

Prior to disassembly, thoroughly clean the cylinder externally.

Use caution not to give any damages to the parts while carrying out the disassembly / assembly works.

Thinly apply grease or hydraulic oil to seals prior to installation.

After the installation of O-ring, confirm there is no twist on it.

Apply clean hydraulic oil to each sliding portion before the installation.

Ensure each sliding portion for no burr and defect, and its smooth sliding operation.

This manual describes mainly for the boom cylinder as an typical example. Refer to 24.1.8 of COMPONENT SYSTEM for the construction of hydraulic cylinders when disassembling and reassembling the cylinders.

32-15


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.2.1.3 •

CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION (EXAMPLE OF BOOM CYLINDER)

See 24.1.8 CYLINDER for the others. 7

21

3 22

8 4

17

20

16

19

15

14

18

2

1

5

13

6

11

10

9

12

Fig. 32-21 Construction of boom cylinder No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Tube assembly

1

12

Seal ring

1

2

Rod assembly

2

13

Ring

1

3

Bushing

1

14

Rod bushing

1

4

Cylinder Head

1

15

Seal ring

1

5

Cushion bearing

1

16

Back-up ring

1

6

Piston

1

17

Dust seal

1

7

Pipe

1

18

O-ring

2

8

Pipe

2

19

Back-up ring

3

9

Lock nut

1

20

O-ring

1

10

Wear ring

1

21

Dust seal

4

11

Seal ring

1

22

Bolt

2

32-16


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.2.1.4 •

DISASSEMBLY

The numbers in ( ) following to each part name are the Items corresponding to those in Fig. 32-21 unless otherwise noted.

(1) Disassembly of cylinder assembly 1) Fix the clevis portion of tube with a vice, and hold the other end with a wooden stand to hold the cylinder in level. 2) Drain hydraulic oil remained in the cylinder. • Slowly move the piston rod so that the hydraulic oil does not spout out.

Fig. 32-22 Disassembling cylinder assembly 3) Make straight the locking fin for the cylinder head (4). • Use cautions bending / straightening of locking fin, because locking fin and cylinder tube are made with one-piece. 4) Loosen the cylinder head (4). • Prior to loosening the cylinder head, pull out the piston rod (2) by 100 ~ 200 mm (4 ~ 8 in). • Cover the rod with an appropriate material to prevent it from unexpected dents. 5) Pull off the piston rod assembly from the tube.

Fig. 32-23 Disassembling cylinder assembly

• Pull the piston rod in straight not to give any damages on the sliding surface.

Fig. 32-24 Disassembling cylinder head (2) Disassembly of piston rod assembly 1) Fix the piston rod assembly in level.

Fig. 32-25 Disassembling piston rod

32-17


32. ATTACHMENTS 2) Remove ring (25) using snap ring pliers, and remove plate ring (24) and cushion ring (23). (Only for arm cylinder) • If cushion bearing (23) is left, the lock nut cannot remove. Remove cushion bearing before loosening lock nut (9).

25

9

23

24

3) Loosen lock nut (9) by means of torque wrench, and remove lock nut (9).

4) Remove piston (6).

6

32-18


32. ATTACHMENTS 5) Remove cushion bearing (5). (Only for boom cylinder and arm cylinder)

5

6) Remove seal ring (12). (Only for boom cylinder and arm cylinder) • Expand the split on the seal ring as minimum as required to remove.

12

7) Remove the cylinder head (4) • Pull out the piston rod straightly not to give any damages on the rod surface.

4

(3) Disassembly of piston assembly:

10

1) Remove the wear ring (10) from the piston (6). • Expand the split on the wear ring (10) as minimum as required to pull it off for axial direction. (2 Points) 2) Remove the seal ring assembly (11). •

Cut off the seal ring (11) or remove it using a minus screw driver.

11

Fig. 32-26 Disassembling piston assembly

32-19


32. ATTACHMENTS (4) Disassembly of cylinder head assembly: 1) Remove the O-rings (18), (20) and back-up ring (19) from the outer periphery of cylinder head (4).

Fig. 32-27 Disassembling cylinder head assembly 2) Removal of seal ring Remove the seal ring (15) and back-up ring (16).

Fig. 32-28 Disassembling cylinder head 3) Remove the dust seal (17). • Alternately tap inside of the metal ring of dust seal at several positions, as shown in the figure, to push it out step by step from the groove.

Fig. 32-29 Removing wiper ring 4) Remove the ring (13) using a gimlet and remove the rod bushing (14) using a screw driver. • Take care to damage the head portion.

Fig. 32-30 Removing bushing

32-20


32. ATTACHMENTS (5) Disassembly of clevis portion: 1) Remove the dust seal (21) from the clevis portion of tube (1) and piston rod (2).

3

23

Fig. 32-31 Removing dust seal 2) Remove the pin bushing (3). • Using a metal block (28) , push it out with a press machine. 28

Fig. 32-32 Removing pin bushing

32-21


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.2.1.5

ASSEMBLY

(1) Assembling Clevis Portion 1) With the installing jig (B), press-fit the bushings (3) into the piston rod (2) and tube (1). • Prior to the work, apply hydraulic oil on the surface of parts.

B 3

Fig. 32-33 Installing pin bushing (3) 2) With the setting tool (29), install the dust seal (21). 29

Fig. 32-34 Installing dust seal z

(2) Assembling Cylinder Head 1) With installing jig (A), press-fit the bushing (14) and install ring (13). • Prior to the work, apply hydraulic oil on inner periphery of the cylinder head (4). • At press-fitting the bushing (14) into the cylinder head (4), make the top surfaces of them in level without step.

Fig. 32-35 Assembling cylinder head 2) Install the back-up ring (19) and O-rings (18) and (20).

Fig. 32-36 Installing back-up ring and O-ring

32-22


32. ATTACHMENTS 3) Installing seal ring Install the back-up ring (16) and seal ring (15). • Refer to article 32.2.1.3 CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION (EXAMPLE OF BOOM CYLINDER) and install the seal ring correctly.

Fig. 32-37 Installing seal ring 4) Using the setting tool (C), install the dust seal (17).

Fig. 32-38 Installing dust seal (3) Assembly of piston portion: 1) Install the O-ring for the seal ring assembly (11). In this case, stretch the O ring as minimum as required to install.

6

11

2) Install wear ring (10) for piston from rod side. (2 places) • Expand the split of wear ring as minimum as required.

32-23


32. ATTACHMENTS 3) The O-ring of seal ring was extremely stretched at the installation, insert the piston subassembly (E) from the taper side of reforming jig (D) to reform the ring.

E

D

(4) Assembly of piston rod 1) Keep clevis of piston rod (2) horizontal, and install the head sub-assembly (F).

2

• Apply hydraulic oil to seal slightly. • Take care not to hit the seal against the thread of piston rod. F

2) Face the slit of seal ring (12) to the thread, and install the seal ring into groove of piston rod. Install the cushion bearing (5) on the rod from taper (G) side as shown in the photo.

12

• Take care of the direction of seal ring and cushion bearing. If the direction is mistaken, the cushion effect is not obtained.

G 5

32-24


32. ATTACHMENTS 3) Install the piston sub-assembly (E) and lock nut (9).

E

H

• Insert the piston from the flat side of piston bore.

9

4) Tighten the lock nut (9) with torque wrench (I). Refer to the table of torque in the maintenance standard about the tightening torque for lock nut.

I

5) Install the cushion bearing (23) of rod retracting side, plate ring (24) and ring (25). (Arm cylinder only)

L

24

• Place the flat portion (L) (2 places) of cushion bearing (23) toward the direction as shown in the right photo. • Confirm that the cushion bearing is movable after ring fixing. 25 23

(5) Assembly of cylinder: 1) Fix the tube in level, and install the piston rod assembly into it. • At the installation, align the center of piston rod to the center of tube and install the piston rod in straight, paying attention not to damage seals.

Fig. 32-39 Inserting piston rod assembly

32-25


32. ATTACHMENTS 2) Install the cylinder head (4). • Apply hydraulic oil on the packings (seals) prior to install. • Tightening torque for cylinder head: See 32.2.1.6 (4) in MAINTENANCE STANDARDS .

Fig. 32-40 Installing cylinder head 3) Bend the locking fin on the tube to lock the cylinder head.

Fig. 32-41 Assembling cylinder assembly 32.2.1.6

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

(1) Inspection after disassembly 1) Inspection item Parts Name

Piston rod

Cylinder tube

Cylinder head

Inspecting Portion

Inspection Item

Remedy

1. Neck of rod

Presence of crack

Replace

2. Stepped part to which piston is attached

Presence of crack

Replace

3. Threads

Presence of seizure, etc.

Recondition or replace

4. Bend

Measure amount of bend

Refer to Rod Bend

5. Plated surface

1. Wearing off of plating

1. Replace

2. Rust on plating

2. Replace

3. Presence of defect

3. Recondition or replace

6. Rod

Wear of outside

Recondition or replace

7. Bushing at mounting part

Wear of inside

Replace

1. Welded part of bottom

Presence of crack

Replace

2. Tube at mounting part

Presence of crack

Replace

3. Tube inside

Presence of defect

Replace if oil leak is seen

4. Bushing at mounting part

Wear of inside

Replace

1. Bushing

1. Wear of inside

Replace

2. Defect of inside

(2) Repair procedure Replace sliding parts and seal parts according to the followings. 1

Bushing

Where 1/4 of circumference is worn in copper color.

2

Seals and slide rings

Replace them when cylinder is disassembled.

3

Pin bushing

Where severe scuffing is appeared.

4

Piston rod

Where the bent 0.5 mm/m (0.02 in/3.3 ft) or more is appeared.

32-26


32. ATTACHMENTS (3) Service limits Service limits represent the limits of wear on the sliding surfaces of the cylinder tube and the piston rod that have no such faults as may degrade the sealing effect. 1) Clearance between piston rod and rod bushing: Replace the bushing if the clearance between the piston rod and the rod bushing exceeds 0.25 mm (0.01 in). 2) Bend of piston rod: The allowable bend of the rod is maximum 0.5 mm / 1 m (0.02 in / 3.3ft). For measurement, support both ends of the parallel section of the piston rod with V-blocks, set a dial indicator in the center between the two V-blocks turn the piston rod, and read the difference between the maximum and minimum values on the dial indicator. •

Even if the bend is within the allowable limit, the cylinder may not operate smoothly because of localized bend. Beware of it during function test after installation. Replace the rod if the cylinder makes a squeaking noise or dose not operate smoothly.

Distance between Deflectional value of the dial gauge V-blocks (V)

Remedy

m (ft)

mm (in)

1 (3.3)

1 (0.04)

Replace

2 (6.6)

2 (0.08)

Replace

V

0

1/2

0

Fig. 32-42 Measuring method

(4) Tightening torque A. Cylinder head

A

B

B. Piston assy

Unit: N•m (lbf•ft) Model

E40.2SR

E50.2SR

Cylinder

Cylinder head A

Piston B

Boom

550 (406)

1500 (1110)

Arm

420 (310)

1500 (1110)

Bucket

390 (288)

830 (612)

Swing

550 (406)

1520 (1120)

Dozer

600 (443)

1520 (1120)

Boom

650 (480)

1860 (1370)

Arm

550 (406)

1500 (1110)

Bucket

390 (288)

830 (612)

Swing

550 (406)

1520 (1120)

Dozer

600 (443)

1520 (1120)

32-27


32. ATTACHMENTS

(5) Inspection after installation G

1) Unloaded performance test

E

a. Put the cylinder horizontally at unloaded condition.

F H

b. Apply pressure slowly and alternately through the ports at both ends to operate the piston rod 5 or 6 times. c. Check that the cylinder operates normally.

Fig. 32-53 Unloaded test E. Pump F. Tank G. Control valve H. Hydraulic cylinder

2) Leakage test •

G

External leakage

a. Apply test pressure for 3 minutes each to the rod retraction side and to the rod extension side of the cylinder.

E F

I H

b. Confirm that rod seals, cylinder head tightening part, and each weld are free from abnormalities, such as external leakage and permanent deformation. •

Fig. 32-54 Leakage test

Internal leakage

a. Disconnect the hose from the rod extension side of the cylinder.

E. Pump

b. Apply test pressure to the rod retraction side of the cylinder for 3 minutes.

G. Control Valve

c. Measure the leakage from the rod extension side.

I.

F. Tank H. Hydraulic cylinder Internal leakage

Leakage should be below 1 cc (0.06 cu•in) /min.

(6) Bleeding air from hydraulic cylinder Bleed air from the cylinder after removing or installing it, or after disconnecting a hydraulic pipe. 1) Start the engine, and let it idling for about 5 minutes. 2) Repeat the step of extending and retracting the cylinder 4 or 5 times at slow speed of engine. •

Move the piston rod 100 mm (4 in) short of its stroke end. Do not extend or retract the rod until the end to prevent the relief condition.

3) Perform the above 2) procedures at high idling speed, then move the piston rod to its stroke end at low idling speed to reach the relief condition.

32-28


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.2.1.7

JIG LIST

(1) Installing Jig (A) for Press Fitting of Rod Bushing. Applicable Cylinder E40.2SR

E50.2SR

(Rod dia; ØA45 (1.77)) Bucket P/N (Rod dia; ØA50 (1.97)) A

Boom Arm Arm Swing P/N (Rod dia; ØA55 (2.17)) Boom Dozer P/N (2) Installing Jig (B) for Press Fitting of Pin Bushing. Applicable Cylinder E40.2SR

E50.2SR

(Pin dia; ØB45 (1.77)) Bucket Arm B

Arm P/N (Pin dia; ØB50 (1.97)) Boom Boom Swing P/N (Pin dia; ØB55 (2.17)) Dozer P/N

32-29


32. ATTACHMENTS (3) Installing Jig (C) for press fitting of dust seal Applicable Cylinder E40.2SR

E50.2SR

(Rod dia; ØC45 (1.77)) Bucket P/N (Rod dia; ØC50 (1.97))

B

Boom Arm Arm P/N (Rod dia; ØC55 (2.17)) Boom Dozer P/N (4) Reforming Jig (D) for Seal Ring (18) Applicable Cylinder E40.2SR

E50.2SR

(Rob dia; Ø75 (2.95)) Bucket P/N (Rob dia; Ø80 (3.15)) Arm P/N (Tube dia; Ø90 (9.54)) Boom Arm

A

P/N (Tube dia; Ø95 (3.74)) Dozer P/N (Tube dia; Ø100 (3.94)) Boom P/N

32-30


32. ATTACHMENTS 32.2.1.8

POSSIBLE CAUSES FOR TROUBLE AND REMEDY

Trouble Conditions

Major Possible Causes

Remedy

• Foreign matter is caught by U-ring or wip- • Remove foreign matter. er ring at its inside periphery. • Scuffing or fault on U-ring or wiper ring at • Replace each part with new one. its inside periphery. Oil leakage from sliding face • Scuffing on sliding face of piston rod. of piston rod. (A ring shape oil is formed on piston rod and enlarged resulting dripping down of oil)

• Grind sliding face with a fine oil stone. (less than 1.6S) • If leakage is not stopped by grinding, replace seals such as U-ring, etc. with new ones. • If leakage is not stopped by replacing seals, replace piston rod.

• Peeling off of hard chrome plating. Oil leakage from outer periph- • Damages on O-ring. ery of cylinder head. • Damages on back-up ring. Oil leakage from welded por- • Damages on welded portion on tube. tion. Piston movement due to leak- • age. (For the case when static load • that is equivalent to product of multiplication of max. working • pressure and cylinder area, is applied to rod, max. move- • ment of piston is larger than 0.5mm (0.02 in)) per 10 minutes.

• Re-plating of hard chrome on piston rod. • Replace. • Replace. • Replace.

Foreign matter is caught by sliding face of • Remove foreign matter. slide ring. Scuffing or faulty condition on sliding face • Replace. of slide ring. Scuffing on sliding face of seal ring as- • Replace. sembly. Damages on O-ring.

32-31

• Replace.


32. ATTACHMENTS

[MEMO]

32-32


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE TABLE OF CONTENTS 33.1 REMOVING AND INSTALLING ...................................................................... 33-3 33.1.1 CANOPY / CAB ..................................................................................... 33-3 33.1.2

GUARD (COVER) ................................................................................. 33-5

33.1.3

FLOOR PLATE ASSEMBLY ................................................................. 33-7

33.1.4

BATTERY .............................................................................................. 33-9

33.1.5

COUNTERWEIGHT ............................................................................ 33-10

33.1.6

PUMP .................................................................................................. 33-11

33.1.7

CONTROL VALVE .............................................................................. 33-13

33.1.8

SOLENOID VALVE ............................................................................. 33-17

33.1.9

FUEL TANK ........................................................................................ 33-18

33.1.10 HYDRAULIC OIL TANK ...................................................................... 33-20 33.1.11 AIR CLEANER .................................................................................... 33-23 33.1.12 GENERATOR ..................................................................................... 33-24 33.1.13 MUFFLER ........................................................................................... 33-25 33.1.14 CONTROL STAND ............................................................................. 33-26 33.1.15 STARTER ........................................................................................... 33-31 33.1.16 RADIATOR .......................................................................................... 33-32 33.1.17 ENGINE .............................................................................................. 33-35 33.1.18 PILOT VALVE ..................................................................................... 33-37 33.1.19 SLEWING MOTOR ............................................................................. 33-39 33.1.20 SWIVEL JOINT ................................................................................... 33-41 33.1.21 UPPER FRAME .................................................................................. 33-44 33.2 DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ........................................................ 33-46 33.2.1 HYDRAULIC PUMP ............................................................................ 33-46 33.2.2

CONTROL VALVE .............................................................................. 33-70

33.2.3

PILOT VALVE (Attachment) ................................................................ 33-88

33.2.4

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL) .................................................................... 33-97

33.2.5

SLEWING MOTOR ........................................................................... 33-102

33.2.6

SWIVEL JOINT ................................................................................. 33-125



33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

33-1


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

33-2


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

33.1

REMOVING AND INSTALLING

33.1.1

CANOPY / CAB

33.1.1.1

CANOPY REMOVAL

(1)

Remove the floor mats (5) and (8).

(2)

Removing handrail (A3) Loosen the sems-bolt M16u65 (A4) and M16u100 (A5) to remove the handrail (A3).

8

5

: 24 mm (3)

Removing canopy assembly 1) Disconnect the light harness (B1) that runs inside the support (A1) and is connected to the main harness with a connector. 2) Loosen one capscrew M10u40 (A8) and four capscrews M12u55 (A7) to remove the canopy.

Fig. 33-1 Floor mat removal

: 17 mm and 19 mm Canopy weight: 85 kg (187 lbs) (4)

Install the canopy in reverse order of the removal. Tighten the capscrews at the torque specified below: M10: T= 46 N•m (34 lbf•ft) M12: T= 79 N•m (59 lbf•ft) M16: T= 191 N•m (141 lbf•ft)

A1 B2 B1

A2 A8 A3 A5 A4

A8

C

A9

A6

Fig. 33-2 Removal of canopy assembly and handrail C. Harness Outlet 33.1.1.2 33.1.1.2.1

CAB REMOVAL (Option) Cab removal preparation

(1)

Remove the floor mats (6) and (7).

(2)

Removing cab harness connector 1) Respectively disconnect 6P connectors of cab harness and cab connecting harness, 2P connector of washer motor, 3P connector of radio (optional) and so on. (See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

Fig. 33-3 Floor mat removal

33-3


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.1.2.2

Cab removal

(1)

Remove the fuel filler cap (A2) and rubber cover (20).

(2)

Removing cover installed on rear of cab Loosen three sems-bolt M6u25 (12) for installing the cover (B1). : Plus screwdriver

(3)

Removing cab mounting screws Loosen six capscrews for mounting the cab. Two capscrews (1) M16u100 One capscrew (2) M16u50 Three capscrews (3) M12u50

B

: 19 mm and 24 mm • An extension tool about 1 m (3’3.4") long is required for removing the capscrew item 1 (with mark *). 3

B1 12 A2 20

12

VIEW B Fig. 33-4 Outside of cab (4)

Lifting cab 1) Loosen the sems-bolt M10u20 (C6) to remove the seat belt assembly (C2) in advance to prevent it from interfering with the cab during lifting. : 17 mm

D

2) Put slings through the lifting eyes on the cab top and lift up. Cab weight: 220 kg (485 lbs) Fig. 33-5 Cab assembly fastening positions D. Adjust the clearance between guard and cab rear bracket with shims (t1.2,2.0,3.2)

33-4


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (5)

Installing cab Install the cab in reverse order of the removal. • In the fastening position of the capscrew (3), it is necessary to adjust the clearance with shims as shown in Fig. 33-5. Tighten screws to the torque specified below. M6: T = 4.4 N•m (3.3 lbf•ft) M10: T = 46 N•m (34 lbf•ft) M12: T = 79 N•m (59 lbf•ft) M16: T = 191 N•m (141 lbf•ft)

A

C2 C6

Fig. 33-6 Seat belt assembly removal 33.1.2

GUARD (COVER)

33.1.2.1

REMOVAL

• Fig. 33-7 shows the method for removing the cover of the canopy.

1 6 35

40

9

40

2

4

3 5 Fig. 33-7 Cover removal (1)

Removing bonnet assembly (3) Unlock and open the bonnet assembly (3). Loosen two sems-bolts M12u35 (35) of the hinge section (3-9) to remove the bonnet (3).

9

3-9

: 19 mm

35 3 Fig. 33-8 Bonnet assembly (3) removal

33-5


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (2)

Removing cover assembly (5) Loosen three M8u25 sems-bolts (33) to remove the cover assembly (5).

33 33

: 13 mm

5 33

Fig. 33-9 Cover assembly (5) removal (3)

Removing cover assembly (1)

1

1-8

1) Unlock the lock assy (1-8) to open the cover assembly (1). 2) Loosen fourcapscrews M16u50 (30) to remove the cover assembly (1). : 24 mm

30

Fig. 33-10 Cover assemblies (4) and (5) removal (4) Removing cover assembly (2) Loosen three M10u25 sems-bolts (37) to remove the cover assembly (2).

1

37

37

: 17 mm

2

(5) Removing cover assembly (4) Loosen two M10u25 sems-bolts (37) and two M14u30 (4) to remove the cover assembly (4). : 17 mm

2 37

(6)Removing guard assembly (6) 1) Loosen two sems-bolts (35) M12u35 and three sems-bolts (40) M10u20 and remove the guard.

4

: 17 mm, 19 mm (7) Removing cover assembly (9)

37

1) Loosen one sems-bolts (40) M12u20 and remove the cover.

47

: 17 mm Fig. 33-11 Cover assemblies (2) and (4) removal

33-6


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.2.2

Installation

Install the above assemblies in reverse order of the removal. Tighten the capscrews to the torque specified below: M8: T = 24 N•m (18 lbf•ft) M10: T = 46 N•m (34 lbf•ft) M12: T = 79 N•m (59 lbf•ft) M16: T = 191 N•m (141 lbf•ft) 33.1.3

FLOOR PLATE ASSEMBLY

Remove floor plate together with the travel pilot valve assembly and the swing pedal in one piece. 33.1.3.1 (1) (2) (3)

FLOOR PLATE REMOVAL PREPARATION

Remove the floor mats (5) and (8). (See Section 33.1.1.)

8 5

Remove the canopy or cab. (See Section 33.1.1.)

4

Remove the covers (2) and (4) as well as the plates (3).

2

: 13 mm (4)

Remove the cover assembly (4) of the deck under the floor [See Section 33.1.2.1-(4)].

(5)

Disconnect electrical wiring for travel 2-speed selector switch from the connector portion.

CAUTION

1 3

Fig. 33-12 Cover assembly (2) removal The figure is not for the standard canopy.

In advance, disconnect the minus terminal of the battery to prevent danger of short circuit, etc. (6)

Removing travel pilot piping (prior to this work, release the pressure in the piping) Disconnect hoses of the travel pilot valve (A10) at the valve side position marked with * and then plug their openings.

T

1

• Attach a tag recording the valve connecting port to each of the disconnected hoses. For installation, tighten the hose fittings at the following torque:

Thread size (PF) 1/4

A10

P A2 S/V

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Spanner O-ring type 30° flare type used (mm) fitting fitting 19 26.5 (20) 29.4 (22)

2

3 4

Pb6 Pa6 C/V C/V

Pb7 C/V Pa7 C/V

Fig. 33-13 Pilot piping disconnection

NOTE: Take care of the tightening torque as the pilot valve is made of aluminum.

33-7


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (7)

Removing cable of swing pedal

B11 B4

1) Loosen four M8u20 sems-bolts (B11) to pull out the support (B1) upward.

B1

: 13 mm

B2

2) Pull out the pin (B6) and loosen the adjusting nut (B2) to disconnect the control cable (B4).

123

B6

Fig. 33-14 Swing cable disconnection (8)

Removing N&B pilot piping (Optional) (prior to this work, release the pressure in the piping) Disconnect hoses of the travel pilot valve (B8) at the valve side position marked with * and then plug their openings.

B3

B8 T

• Attach a tag recording the valve connecting port to each of the disconnected hoses. For installation, tighten the hose fittings to the following torque:

T P/V

P 2 P P/V

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Thread Spanner O-ring type fit- 30° flare type size (PF) used (mm) ting fitting 1/4 19 26.5 (20) 29.4 (22)

C/V Pa4

C/V

1

Pb4

Fig. 33-15 Pilot piping removal

NOTE: Take care of the tightening torque as the pilot valve is made of aluminum.

33.1.3.2 (1)

FLOOR PLATE REMOVAL

Remove the M8u20 sems-bolt (6). : 13 mm

(2)

Remove the floor plate assembly (1).

Fig. 33-16 Floor plate (1) removal The figure is for the standard 33.1.3.3 (1)

ASSEMBLING FLOOR PLATE

Assemble the floor plate in reverse order of the disassembly. Sems-bolt (6) M8: : 13 mm Tightening torque: 23.5 N•m (17 lbf•ft)

33-8


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.4

BATTERY

33.1.4.1

REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1)

Remove the floor mats (5) and (8).

(2)

Remove the cover (4).

(3)

Remove the cover assembly (5) of the lower left side (See Section 33.1.2.1-(4)).7

Fig. 33-17 Floor section removal preparation 33.1.4.2

REMOVAL

(1)

Unclip and remove the rubber (5).

(2)

Disconnect the negative side terminal of the cable

(3)

Then, disconnect the positive side terminal of the cable

A5

: 12 mm

B1

CAUTION Follow the removal procedure of battery cable. Firstly disconnect the grounding side cable. Connect the grounding side finally. Failure to do so may result in dangerous situation due to spark. (4)

A3 A2 A1

Loosen the M8 nut (A3) to remove the plate (A2) and the rod (A1).

Fig. 33-18 Battery removal

: 13 mm (5)

Take out the battery (B1) holding the straps attached to it.

33.1.4.3

INSTALLATION

Install the battery in reverse order of the removal. Nut (7) M8: : 13 mm Tightening torque: 3.5 N•m (2.6 lbf•ft)

33-9


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.5

COUNTERWEIGHT

33.1.5.1 (1)

(2)

REMOVAL PREPARATION

Remove the cover assemblies (1), (3), (4), (5), (9) and guard assembly (6) as well as the bonnet assembly (3) (See Section 33.1.2).

A A

B

Lifting tools preparation • Lifting jigs for counterweight (C) (see Tool list) • Two M20u35 screws (A)

C

• Wire rope (Nylon sling (B))

33.1.5.2 (1)

REMOVAL

Remove the plate (B7) and attach the lifting jigs for counterweight.

(2)

Put a rope through the lifting lugs and temporarily lift up the counterweight so that the rope is not slack. Counterweight weight: 270 kg (820 lbs) for CX40B 580 kg (1.470 lbs) for CX50B

(3)

Loosen three M20u70 capscrew (B1)

B7 B7 A1

: 30 mm (4)

Remove the shims (B3), (B4) and (B5).

(5)

Remove counterweight (A1).

B3 B4 B5 B1 B2

B3 B4 B5 B1 B2

Fig. 33-19 Counterweight removal 33.1.5.3

INSTALLATION

(1)

Install the counterweight in reverse order of the removal.

(2)

Reinstall the shims (B3), (B4), and (B5).

(3)

Lifting counterweight Make sure that all the three fixing bolts can be manually screwed.

(4)

Apply Loctite #262 on the capscrews (B1) and tighten them together with the washer (B2). : 30 mm Tightening torque: 373 N•m (275 lbf•ft)

(5)

Remove lifting jigs.

Fig. 33-20 Counterweight installation

33-10


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.6

PUMP

33.1.6.1

REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1)

Remove the cover assembly (4) and (5) (See Section 33.1.2).

(2)

Remove the counterweight (See Section 33.1.5).

(3)

Depressurize the hydraulic oil tank and drain the hydraulic oil (See Section 33.1.11).

B1 B34 A1

B4

• Spread a vinyl sheet under the pump to prevent contamination due to oil leakage. (4)

Remove the filler neck (C1) of the fuel supply port to improve workability. Two capscrews M10 u 20 (C7) : 17 mm Tightening torque: 46 N•m (4.7 lbf•ft)

33.1.6.2 (1)

Fig. 33-21 Filler neck removal A1. Fuel tank

REMOVAL

Disconnecting hoses and fittings connected to the pump

8

• Attach a tag to each hose for identification.

10

1) Loosen four M12 u 35 capscrews (16) to remove the tube (14).

9

: 10 mm 2) Remove the pilot delivery hose (B25).

12

: 22 mm

14

3) Remove the main pump delivery hoses (8), (9) and (10).

16

: 27 mm (2)

20

Loosen two M12 u 30 capscrews (C4) to remove the pump (See Fig.33-23).

20

: Ball joint type 10 mm Pump weight: 35 kg (78 lbs)

20 13 B25

Fig. 33-22 Pump removal

33-11


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.6.3

INSTALLATION

Install the pump in reverse order of the removal according to the tightening torque and sealant instructions. (1)

Apply grease to the spline part of the pump input shaft. Grease: M62 or equivalent (Molybdenum disulfide extreme pressure multipurpose grease)

(2)

Insert the pump spline part to the coupling.

(3)

Fix the pump by the capscrew (C4).

C5 C8 C9

: Ball joint type 10 mm (4)

Install the main pump delivery hoses (8), (9), and (10), and the pilot delivery hose (B25) (See Fig. 33-22). C4

Thread size (PF) 3/8 1/2

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Spanner O-ring type 30° flare type used (mm) fitting fitting 22 73.5 (54) 49.0 (36) 27 108 (80) 78.5 (58)

C10

Fig. 33-23 Pump installation C4. T= 85.3 N•m C5. T= 85 ~ 94 N•m (63 to 69 lbf•ft)

(5)

Tighten the capscrew (19) to install the suction tube (14). : 10 mm

(6)

When the suction hose (12) is removed, apply sealant on the inserted portion of the hose and fix the tube with the clip (20).

Apply no Loctite as microcapsule coating has been applied. C8. Apply grease C9. Air bleed valve C10.T= 64.7 N•m (48 lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262

: Minus screwdriver T= 5.4 N•m (4.0 lbf•ft) (7)

Supply the tank with hydraulic oil (approx. 42 liters (11 gal)).

(8)

Loosen the air bleed valve of the pump to release air from the casing, and fill it with hydraulic oil (See Fig. 33-23). : 10 mm

(9)

Reinstall each component removed in the above removal preparation.

(10)

After starting the engine, release air (See Section 33.1.10.3).

33-12


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.7

CONTROL VALVE

33.1.7.1

REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1) Unlock and open the right upper cover (1). (2) Remove the right lower cover (4) (See Section 33.1.2.1-(3)). • Spread a vinyl sheet under the control valve to prevent contamination due to oil leakage. (3) Release the residual pressure in the circuit and the pressure in the hydraulic oil tank. 33.1.7.2

REMOVAL

(1) Disconnecting hoses Disconnect all the hoses connecting to the control valve, and attach blind plugs and tags recording the installation place. •Remove the return hose to the hydraulic oil tank to improve workability. S/M B

P2 P1

A17

S/J E

A R

A12

S/C R

B2

A18

A15 B3

S/J D S/J C

A14

B5 B6

B1

A14

BH

B7

A11

UH

A10

B8

B9

P A2

P3

10

8 P A1

S/M A

9

A20

P A3

A2

AH

A13

S/C H

A3

A16

S/J F

S/J B

A21

A5

A6

A19

S/J A

A17 A7

BR

A9 A8 UR

A1

A8

C/O A9

O/C IN 18 S/M T 21 H/T Fig. 33-24 Main hydraulic hose disconnection C/O. Cooler oil (upper)

S/C.Swing

A. Arm

H/P.Hydraulic pump

S/J.Swivel joint

B. Boom

H/T.Hydraulic Tank

S/M.Slewing motor

U. Bucket

33-13


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE A7 P/V 3

A7

P/V 5 D5

P/V 1 Pb2 Pb3

Pb6

P/V 7 D7

Pb7

D3 P/V 3 Pb8 Pb9

D1 P/V 1 Pa2 Pa3

P/V 6 D6

Pb6 Pb7

A8 P/V 4

D8 P/V 8

7

Pa9

A15 P/V 2

Pa8

P/V 2

D4 P/V 4

D2 P/V 2 Pa8’

Pb1

C/V Pa4C/V Pb4

B9

Pb4

C/V Pa8C/V Pa8’

B8

Pa8 Pa4 Pa1

8 P/V 1 Pa8

Fig. 33-25 Pilot hydraulic hose disconnection C/B. Control block P/V. Pilot valve S/V. Shuttle valve

33-14


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (2) Disconnecting cable

B14

Turn the rod end (B14) to disconnect the control valve C/V from the swing cable (B4).

B4 C/V

Fig. 33-26 Cable disconnection (3) Removing control valve 1) Loosen four M10u50 capscrews (2) and two M12x40 capscrew (13) to remove the control valve (A1) with the bracket (1).

C

4

: 17 mm, 19 mm Weight of removed parts: Approx. 46 kg (102 lbs)

11

2) Loosen three M10u25 capscrews (4) and one M8x80 to remove the control valve (A1).

1

: 13 mm, 17 mm Weight: Approx. 35 kg (77 lbs)

13 A1

2 3 5

7

6

8

9

Fig. 33-27 Control valve removal

33-15


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.7.3

INSTALLATION

(1)

Install the control valve in reverse order of the removal.

(2)

Attach the capscrews (4) and one capscrew (11).

2 1

CAUTION Clean the mounting surface and take care to prevent deformation of the valve.

A1

: 13 mm,17 mm Tightening torque: M8 - 24 N•m (18 lbf•ft) M10-65.7 N•m (48 lbf•ft) (3)

Attach the capscrew (2). : 17 mm, 19 mm Tightening torque: M10-65.7 N•m (48 lbf•ft) M12-79 N•m (58 lbf•ft)

(5)

Operate the attachment to check the performance.

(6)

Check the tank and piping for oil leakage and oil level.

U

T/L B

S

A S/E S/O T/R

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Thread size Spanner O-ring type 30° flare (PF) used (mm) fitting type fitting 1/4 19 36.3 (26) 29.4 (22) 3/8 22 73.5 (54) 49 (36) 1/2 27 108 78.5 (58) 3/4 36 162 (119) 118 (87) 1 41 255 (188) -

S/T

Tighten the hose fittings to the following torque: D S/C

(4)

Fig. 33-28 Control valve removal A. Arm section B. Boom section D. Dozer section S. Supply S/C.Slewing section S/T.Supply and travel straight S/E.Service section S/O.Swing section T/R.Travel (right) section T/L.Travel (left) section U. Bucket section

33-16


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.8

SOLENOID VALVE

33.1.8.1

REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1)

Unlock and open the right upper cover (1).

(2)

Remove the right lower cover (2) (See Section 33.1.2.1-(3).

33.1.8.2 (1)

REMOVAL

Disconnecting hoses Disconnect all the hoses connected to the solenoid valve (B1). Then attach a plug and a tag recording the connecting port to each of their openings.

A

• Item (B33) is a drain hose for the hydraulic oil tank. When disconnecting this hose, take care of oil leakage. (2)

(3)

B1

Disconnecting connector Disconnect two connectors connected to the main harness.

B24

Removing solenoid valve Loosen two M8u20 capscrews (B5) to remove the solenoid valve (B1). : 13 mm

B33

B34

B1

B5 B14

Fig. 33-29 Solenoid valve removal B14.Plug

33-17


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.8.3 (1)

INSTALLATION

Install the solenoid valve in reverse order of the removal. Tighten the fittings at the following torque:

Item

Name

B5

Capscrew (M8)

B24

Clip

B34

Capscrew (M10)

33.1.9

Tool (mm)

13

17

Torque N•m (lbf•ft)

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Thread Spanner used size (mm) (PF)

33.3 (25)

O-ring type fitting

30° flare type fitting

2.94 (2.2)

1/4

19

36.3 (27)

29.4 (22)

65.7 (48)

3/8

22

73.5 (54)

49 (36)

FUEL TANK

33.1.9.1

DISASSEMBLY PREPARATION

(1)

Remove the floor mats (5) and (8), the floor covers (2) and (4), and the floor plate (1) (See Section 33.1.3.1).

(2)

Remove the cover assembly (4) on the left lower side (See Section 33.1.2.1-(4)).

(3)

Remove the battery (See Section 33.1.4.2).

Fig. 33-30 Fuel drain A1. Fuel tank

33-18


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.9.2 (1)

(2)

(3)

DISASSEMBLY

Open the fuel filler cap (B2) and loosen the drain cock (B10) to drain fuel. Tank capacity: 52 liters (14 gal)

A13 3

Disconnect the hoses (2) and (3) for the fuel inlet and outlet, the hose (B4) for the fuel supply port, and two air bleed hoses (A3).

2

Loosen the M10u20 sems-bolt (B9) to remove the boss (B11) together with the drain hose (B12).

B9 B11

: 17 mm

A3

B12

(4)

Disconnect connector (A13) for the level sensor.

(5)

Remove two M10u20 capscrews (B7).

B2

: 17 mm (6)

Remove the fuel tank (A1) together with the bracket assembly (B14).

B14 B33 B4

B5

B7 B7

Fig. 33-31 Fuel tank removal 33.1.9.3

INSTALLATION

Assemble the fuel tank in reverse order of the removal and tighten the screws to the specified torque shown in the following table: Item

Name

Tool (mm)

B7 B9

Capscrew (M10) Sems-belt (M10)

17 17

B5 B33

Clip

(-) Screw driver

Torque N•m (lbf•ft) 46.1 (34) 34 (25) 0.49~0.78 0.36~0.58

33-19


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.10 33.1.10.1

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK DISASSEMBLY PREPARATION

(1)

Swing approximately 90 degrees to the right to facilitate to remove the tank.

(2)

Unlock and open the right upper cover (1).

(3)

Remove the right lower cover (2) (See Section 33.1.2.1-(3)).

(4)

Remove the floor cover (2) (See Section 33.1.3.1).

(5)

Remove the inspection cover (1-3) of the control stand. Six M8u20 sems-bolts (1-5)

1-5

: 13 mm (6)

1-3

Fig. 33-32 Cover removal

After releasing internal pressure of the hydraulic oil tank (A1), remove the plug (B14) below the solenoid valve to drain hydraulic oil. : 22 mm Tank capacity: 41 liters (11 gal) • Spread a vinyl sheet under the solenoid valve to prevent contamination around the valve due to oil leakage. • Releasing tank pressure Press the cap boot of breather assembly (A14) with a finger to release the internal pressure (See Fig. 33-34).

B1

CAUTION

B14

Press and hold the boot until air-relieving sound stops. (7)

Remove the control valve (See Section 33.1.7.2).

(8)

Remove the solenoid valve (See Section 33.1.8.2).

(9)

In addition, remove the harness and hose clamped on the tank.

Fig. 33-33 Draining hydraulic oil A1. Hydraulic oil tank B1. Solenoid valve B14.Plug

• Remove the multi-control valve (option) if it is equipped.

33-20


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.10.2 (1)

DISASSEMBLY

Disconnecting suction hose A15

1) Remove the clip (20). : Minus screwdriver

20

2) Remove the hose (11). : Minus screwdriver

11

Fig. 33-34 Suction hose removal A15.Cap boot (2)

Removing return oil hose and drain oil hose Disconnect each hose from the position marked with *.

17

20 S/M

23 S/M

: 19, 22, and 36 mm

11 P/V

: Minus screwdriver

12

D13

P/V

17 A13

6 P/V A14 C/V

S/V

33

B24

P/V

Fig. 33-35 Return oil hose removal

33-21


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3)

Removing hydraulic oil tank Loosen four M12u30 capscrews (B1) to remove the hydraulic oil tank (A1) and shim (B3). : 17 mm Weight: about 37 kg (82 lbs)

B1 B2 B3

A1 B1 B2 B3

Fig. 33-36 Hydraulic oil tank removal 33.1.10.3

ASSEMBLY

(1)

Clean hydraulic oil tank, hose, and components.

(2)

Install the tank in reverse order of the disassembly. The specified tightening torque is shown in the following table: • Apply Loctite #262 to B1. Item

Name

B1 B14

Capscrew (M12) Plug (PF 3/8)

16

Clip

17

Clip

Tool (mm)

Torque N•m (lbf•ft) 46 (34) 73.5 (54)

17 22 Minus 4.4 (3.3) screwdriver Minus 2.94 (2.2) screwdriver

(3)

After assembling, fill the tank with the specified hydraulic oil and check the oil level with the level gauge (A1-11) (See Fig. 33-36). Oil quantity: about 41 liters (11 gal)

(4)

Air bleeding

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Thread size (PF) 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4

1) Start the engine. 2) Run the engine in low idle condition for two or three minutes. Then extend and retract each cylinder several times to bleed air in the circuit.

33-22

Spanner used (mm) 19 22 27 36

O-ring type fit- 30° flare type ting fitting 36.3 (27) 73.5 (54) 108 (80) 162 (119)

29.4 49 (36) 78.5 (58) 118 (87)


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (5)

Rechecking oil level Stop the engine in the posture shown in Fig. 33-37 to recheck oil level. In addition, ensure no oil leakage is found on each part.

Fig. 33-37 Posture for stopping engine 33.1.11 33.1.11.1

AIR CLEANER DISASSEMBLY PREPARATION

Open the rear bonnet assembly. 33.1.11.2 (1)

DISASSEMBLY

Loosen the clip (9) and (10) to remove the air hoses (3) and (5). : Minus screwdriver

(2)

Loosen two M20u25 sems bolt (12) and a M10x30 sems-bolts (16), then to remove the air cleaner assembly (1).

10

: 13 mm

10 5

3 10

9

1 12

6

11 11

16

Fig. 33-38 Air cleaner removal 9. Control stand 33.1.11.3

ASSEMBLY

Assemble the air cleaner in reverse order of the disassembly. •

Tightening torque Sems-bolts (11): 23.5 N•m (17 lbf•ft) Sems-bolts (12) and (16): 46.1 N•m (34 lbf•ft)

33-23


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.12 33.1.12.1

GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY PREPARATION

(1) Remove the cover at the lower right of the seat (See Section 33.1.10.1-(5)). (2) Disconnect the negative side terminal of the battery. (3) Remove the guard assy (6) (See Section 33.1.2.1-(6)). 33.1.12.2

DISASSEMBLY

(1)

Disconnect the connector and remove the nut (M6) for the terminal B.

(2)

Remove the capscrews (1), (2), and (3). : 13 mm

(3)

Remove the V-belt and the generator.

3 2

1 Fig. 33-39 Generator removal

33-24


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.12.3

ASSEMBLY

(1)

Assemble the generator in reverse order of the disassembly.

(2)

V-belt tension Press the middle of the V-belt with a thumb to adjust the deflection within the following range: Deflection: 10 to 15 mm (0.39 to 0.59 inch)

Fig. 33-40 Generator terminal B. Nut for terminal B tightening torque 5.9~9.8 N•m (4.4~7.2 lbf•ft) C. Clip E. To fusible link 33.1.13 33.1.13.1

MUFFLER DISASSEMBLY PREPARATION

((1) Remove the bonnet assembly (3) (See Section 33.1.2.1-(1)). (2) Remove the cover assembly (5) (See Section 33.1.2.1-(2)). 33.1.13.2 (1)

DISASSEMBLY

Loosen three M8u20 sems-bolts (8) to remove the cover (16).

9-2

: 13 mm (2)

Remove M8 nut (19) to loosen the clamp (4), and loosen four M8 nuts (9-1) to remove U bolt (27) then disconnect the exhaust tube (3).

1 27

: 17 mm (3)

8

Loosen four M8 nuts (9-2) fastening the exhaust manifold for the engine to remove the muffler.

9-1 16

9-1 14

8

: 13 mm (4)

Loosen four M8u20 capscrews (14) to remove the muffler (1).

19 4 3

Fig. 33-41 Muffler removal

33-25


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.13.3

ASSEMBLY

Install the muffler in reverse order of the removal and tighten the screws and nuts to the specified torque shown in the following table:

Item

Name

8 Sems-belt (M8) 9-1 Nut (M8) for U-bolt 9-2 Nut (M8) for manifold 14 Capscrew (M8) 19 Nut (M8) 33.1.14 33.1.14.1

Tool (mm) 13 13 13 13 13

Torque N•m (lbf•ft) 23.5 (17) 10.8 (9.0) 23.5 (17) 23.5 (17) 23.5 (17)

CONTROL STAND DISASSEMBLY PREPARATION

(1) Remove the canopy and the handrail (See Section 33.1.1). (2) Remove the floor covers (2) and (4), and the plates (3) (See Section 33.1.3.1). (3) Remove the covers (1), (2), (4), (5), (6) and (9) for the guards, and the bonnet (3) (See Section 33.1.2). (4) Remove the counterweight (See Section 33.1.5). (5) Remove the negative terminal of the battery. 33.1.14.2

DISASSEMBLY

(1)

Remove the air cleaner (See Section 33.1.11).

(2)

Removing throttle cable (15)

12

1) Pull out the pin (10) and remove the pin (6).

8

M8

2) Loosen the adjusting nut (M8) to remove the cable. (3)

10

2

6

Removing deceleration motor (option) 1) Disconnect the connector. 2) Loosen the adjusting nut (M8) to remove the cable. 3) Loosen three M8u20 sems-bolts (12) to remove the deceleration motor (8).

Fig. 33-42 Control cable removal

: 13 mm (4)

Removing filler neck (fuel supply port)

B1

1) Pull out the hose (B4) connected to the fuel tank.

B34 A1

2) Loosen two M8u20 capscrews (B34) to remove the filler neck (B1). : 13 mm

B4

Fig. 33-43 Filler neck removal

33-26


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (5)

Disconnect the air bleed hose (A3) for the fuel tank (A1).

B9 B11

A3

B12

B2 B14 B33 B4

B5

Fig. 33-44 Air bleed hose disconnection (6)

PILOT VALVE REMOVAL FOR DOZER

8

1) Disconnecting hoses Disconnect all the hoses connected to the Pilot valve (10). Then attach a plug and a tag recording the connecting port to each of their openings.

S/V A2 P

10

2) Removing pilot valve Loosen two M8u20 capscrews (11) to remove the pilot valve.

1 2

T

6

C/V Pa1

7

C/V Pb1

9

T

P

Fig. 33-45 Pilot valve removal for dozer (7)

Removing seat and front stand cover Loosen four M8 u 20 sems-bolts (15) to remove the seat assembly (7) and the front stand cover (1) in one piece. : 17 mm

1 6

Fig. 33-46 Seat and cover removal

33-27


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

(8)

Removing heat insulation cover

11

Loosen two M6u12 sems-bolts (11) to remove the cover (4).

4

: 10 mm Loosen three M8u20 sems-bolts (16) to remove the cover (3).

16

3

: 13 mm

Fig. 33-47 Cover removal (9)

Disconnecting pilot hose

R

1) Disconnect the hose of the right pilot valve (R) under the pilot valve (See Section 33.1.18.2).

L

2) Disconnect the hose of the left pilot valve (L) from the control valve and solenoid (B1) valve (B1) sections (See Sections 33.1.7.2 and 33.1.8.2). • When a multi-control valve (option) is equipped, disconnect hose at the multi-control valve section.

B1

Fig. 33-48 Pilot hose disconnection (10)

Removing heater hose (option)

14

15

1)Loosen four sems-bolts (15) M8x20 to remove the cover (14). : 13 mm 2)Loosen five sems-bolts (15) M8x20 to remove the cover (20).

15

20 15

: 13 mm 3)Remove the engine side clips (5), and disconnect the hose (1) and 6).

12

6 1

4)Loosen four sems-bolts (12) M8x16 to remove the heater (2).

15

: 13 mm

5

Fig. 33-49 Heater hose disconnection

33-28

2


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (11)

Disconnecting harness

See below drawing to disconnect the harness connected to the instrument harness and main harness. 11 12 3

20 21

14

10 15

8 6

16

SV-1 E-13 SV-2

19 H-5

E-3

10

H-4

17

3.

To canopy light

19.

B (-)

6.

To boom

20.

Connect with cab harness (cab spec.).

8.

GND connector

21.

Connect with decel motor (OPT)

10.

Ground

E-3.

Horn

11.

Connection with a heater relay harness. (OPT)

E-13 Battery

12.

Connect main harness to eng. harness.

H-4. Starter cable

14.

Relay assy

H-5. Battery ground cable

15.

Connect with fuel sensor

SV-1. Operating lever lock sol.

16.

Connect with two speed select sw.

SV-2. Two speed select sol

17.

PB (+)

33-29


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (12)

Removing control stand

A12

Remove M8 (A12), M10 (A14) and M12 (A15) sems-bolts for fastening the stand in addition to the sems-bolts already removed to disassemble the canopy and floor covers.

A15

: 13 mm, 17 mm and 19 mm Weight of removed stand: approx. 55 kg (120 lbs)

A14

• Before lifting the control stand, ensure that harnesses and hoses are already disconnected. Fig. 33-50 Control stand removal (13)

Removing support

1) Remove the M8u16 capscrew (A10) for the clamp (A6) of the oil cooler hose (A2).

B1

: 13 mm 2) Loosen four capscrew M16u50 (30) and remove the support (11). : 24 mm Weight: approx. 45 kg (99 lbs)

30 31 32

11 Fig. 33-51 Support (7) removal 33.1.14.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Install the control stand in reverse order of the removal. Tighten the capscrews and sems-bolts at the torque specified below:

Thread size

Tool (mm)

Torque N•m (lbf•ft)

M6 M8 M10 M12 M16

10 13 17 19 24

4.4 (3.3) 23.5 (17) 46.1 (34) 79.4 (59) 191 (141)

Torque N•m (lbf•ft) Thread Spanner O-ring type fitsize used (mm) ting (PF) 1/4 19 36.3 (27) 3/8 22 -

33-30

30°flare type fitting 29.4 (22) 49 (36)


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.15 33.1.15.1

STARTER REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1)

Remove the floor cover (See Section 33.1.3.1).

(2)

Remove the seat and the front stand cover, loosen three M10u20 sems-bolts (15), and remove the seat assembly (7) and the front stand cover (1) in one piece. : 17 mm Tightening torque: 41.6 N•m (33 lbf•ft)

(3)

Disconnect the negative side terminal of the battery.

1 6

Fig. 33-52 Seat and cover removal 33.1.15.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove the M8 nut for the terminal B of the starter. : 13 mm (2) Disconnect connector on the terminal S of the starter. (3) Loosen two fastening bolts (1) to remove the starter. : 19 mm E-4

4 3

B

2 M-1

1 C H-4

Fig. 33-53 Starter removal 2. M8 B terminal tightening torque 7.4 ~ 9.8 N•m (5.4 ~ 7.2 lbf•ft) 3. M8 M terminal 4. S terminal 1.7 ~ 2.4 N•m (1.3 ~ 1.8 lbf•ft) 33.1.15.3

B. Fasten with a bolt for starter motor tightening torque 1.7 ~ 2.4 N•m (1.3 ~ 1.8 lbf•ft) C. Clip. Fix white taping part

INSTALLATION

Install starter in reverse order of the removal.

33-31


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.16 33.1.16.1 (1)

RADIATOR DISASSEMBLY PREPARATION

Remove the right side cover assemblies (1), (2), (6) and (9), and the bonnet assembly (3) (See Section 33.1.2).

(2)

Remove the counterweight (See Section 33.1.5).

(3)

Remove the duct (13) for the radiator. Three M8u20 capscrews (20)

(4)

Remove the fan guard (A15) Two M8x30 capscrew (A19)

(5)

Remove the support (11) (See Section 33.1.14.2-(13)) •In order to facilitate the work, remove the related covers and components if necessary.

11 20

13

Fig. 33-54 Duct removal

33-32


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.16.2 (1)

DISASSEMBLY

Draining water form radiator 1) Remove the radiator cap. 2) Loosen the clip (A8), then remove the plug (A14) to drain water. Volume: Approx. 2.6 litters (0.69 gal)

(2)

B1

A1

A19 A15

B6

A4

B2 B3

Draining hydraulic oil in oil cooler 1) Release the pressure in the hydraulic circuit. 2) Remove the oil cooler hoses (18) and (19) loosening two clip (16), and then plug the inlet/ outlet ports of the oil cooler and the openings of the hoses.

(3)

Disconnect the hose (A4) of reservoir (A5) by removing the clip (A8).

(4)

Remove the radiator hoses (A1) and (A2) fixed by clip (A7). Tools: Cutting pliers and minus screwdriver

(5)

A8

C1

B6

B3

A5

A7

B6

A7

Removing radiator Loosen three M10u30 (B3) and four M8u25 (B6) capscrews to remove the radiator assembly.

A2

A14

A8

Fig. 33-55 Radiator disassembly

16

: 13 mm and 17 mm Weight: 23 kg (51 lbs)

18 19

16

Fig. 33-56 Draining hydraulic oil in oil cooler 23. Cooler oil in (upper) 24.

Cooler oil out (lower)

25.

Cooler oil

33-33


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.16.3

Assembly the radiator in reverse order of the disassembly.

(2)

Apply Loctite #262 on the capscrews (B3) to fix the radiator by them.

(3)

Apply PERMATEX #98D to the fittings of radiator hoses (A1) and (A2) prior to the connection.

(4)

Install the fan and shroud, adjusting their positions according to Fig. 33-57.

26 27 27.5 (1.1") 15 (0.59")

(1)

ASSEMBLY

28

Tightening torque for related parts Item B6 B3

Name Capscrew (M8) Capscrew (M10)

Tool (mm)

Torque N•m (lbf•ft)

13

23.5 (17)

17

46.1 (34)

29

Fig. 33-57 Radiator installation (5)

Feed cooling water (LLC: Long Life Coolant) See Maintenance section of the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL for the mixing ratio of LLC.

26. Position the fan at a distance of 27.5 mm (1’.1”) from radaitor shroud. 27. Shroud 28. Adjust the clearance between the fan and radiator shroud so that it is set to 15 mm (0.59”) around the circumference. 29. Fan

33-34


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.17 33.1.17.1

ENGINE REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1)

Remove the side cover and the bonnet (See Section 33.1.2).

(2)

Remove the canopy (See Section 33.1.1).

(3)

Remove the negative side terminal of the battery.

(4)

Remove the counterweight (See Section 33.1.5).

(5)

Remove the control stand (See Section 33.1.14).

(6)

Remove the air cleaner (See Section 33.1.11).

(7)

Remove the muffler (See Section 33.1.13).

(8)

Remove the radiator (See Section 33.1.16).

(9)

Remove the pump or disconnect the hose connected to the pump (See Section 33.1.6).

33.1.17.2 (1)

REMOVAL

Disconnecting fuel hose Disconnect each hose from the position marked with

(2)

.

Disconnecting cable connector (for details, see ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

30 32

1) Disconnect the terminal B of the starter motor (M-1) on the positive cable of the battery (See Section 33.1.15.2). 2) Disconnect the grounding cable of the engine. (3)

Removing engine

31

CAUTION Prepare a worktable capable of enduring the weight of the engine and stably receiving the removed engine. 1) Loosen four M12u120 capscrews (12) fixing the engine on the rubber mount (6) and (7) to remove the engine. : 19 mm 2) Lifting engine Pass a wire rope through the two lifting eyes at the top of the engine and lift the engine. Weight: Approx. 170 kg (370 lbs)

Fig. 33-58 Fuel hose removal 30. Fuel filter 31. Fuel feed pump 32. Water separator

3) Place the engine stably on the worktable.

33-35


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.17.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Install the engine in reverse order of the removal. See the following table for the tightening torque and the sealant:

Tightening torque for related parts Item

Name

Tool (mm)

10 and 11

Capscrew (M10)

19

12

Capscrew (M12)

22

Torque N•m (lbf•ft) 46.1 (34) Apply Loctite #262 79.4 (59) Apply Loctite

Use the mount rubber (6) with identification color of "blue" (three Places).

Use the mount rubber (7) with identification color of "black" (one Place).

12 10

6, A 11

Fig. 33-59 Engine removal

33-36


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.18 33.1.18.1

PILOT VALVE PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

Since the same method applies to the right-hand and the left-hand pilot valve, only the method for the righthand is described. (1)

Disconnect the negative side terminal of the battery.

(2)

Release the residual pressure in the circuit and the pressure in the hydraulic tank.

(3)

Remove the right and left control boxes and the monitor panel.

(4)

Loosen sems-bolts (10) to remove the cover assembly (A3) and (A4) (See Fig. 33-60).

10 10 10 A4 10

A3

Fig. 33-60 Cover removal (Right control box)

: Torx driver (T25) 33.1.18.2 (1)

(2)

REMOVAL

Disconnect each hose at the position marked with * and attach a plug and tag to facilitate installation.

A2

Pb10

1

A1

TANK

Shift the boot and remove four capscrews (A2). 4

C/V

T

Pb8

: 10 mm (3)

C/V

3

Remove the pilot valve (A1).

C/V Pa8

P

2

S/V A2

C/V Pa10

Fig. 33-61 Hose removal

33-37


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.18.3 (1)

INSTALLATION

Install the pilot valve in reverse order of the removal to the following tightening torque:

4

P

2

1) Attaching sems-bolts (20). : Torx driver (T25) T= 0.27 N•m (0.2 lbf•ft)

1

Thread size (PF) 1/4 3/8

T

3

2) Installing hoses, etc. Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Spanner O-ring type 30° flare type used (mm) fitting fitting 19 36.3 (27 29.4 (22) 22 49 (36)

R 8

P

6 5 7

L

T

Fig. 33-62 Pilot valve port location NOTE: Take care of the tightening torque as the pilot valve is made of aluminum. (2)

Pressurize the hydraulic tank (See Section 33.1.10.3).

(3)

Operate the attachment to check the performance.

(4)

Check the tank and piping for oil leakage and oil level.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

33-38

Bucket (H) Bucket (R) Boom (H) Boom (R) Slewing (L)

6. 7. 8. L. R.

Slewing (R) Arm (H) Arm (R) Left side Right side


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.19 33.1.19.1

SLEWING MOTOR REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1) Remove the floor mat, the floor plate and the cover (See Section 33.1.3.1). (2) Release the residual pressure in the circuit and the pressure in the hydraulic tank. 33.1.19.2 (1)

REMOVAL

Disconnect six hoses (A17), (A20), (20 Tank), (21), (22) and (23) tank connected to the slewing motor.

A20 C/V

: 22 and 27 mm

C/V

A17

Fig. 33-63 Main hose disconnection

20 C/V 21 DR

T

23 S/J

22 Fig. 33-64 Main hose disconnection (2)

Remove three pilot hoses (B31), and (B37) connected to the slewing motor. : 19 mm

B31 S/V

C/V

B37

Fig. 33-65 Pilot hose removal

33-39


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3)

Loosen five M16u40 capscrews (1) to remove the slewing motor (A1).

A1 1

: 24 mm [a long type approx. 300 mm (11.8") in length required]. Weight: about 40 kg (88 lbs)

Fig. 33-66 Slewing motor removal 33.1.19.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Install the motor in reverse order of the removal according to the tightening torque shown below. 1) Apply Loctite #515 on the entire circumferential surface for mounting the slewing motor (1). 2) Install the capscrews (3) for fixing the motor. (A1) : 24 mm T= 216.6 N•m (160 lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262 to the capscrew. 3) Connect the hoses •

Fill the casing with hydraulic oil through the motor drain port prior to connecting drain piping.

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Thread size (PF) 1/4 3/8 1/2

Spanner used (mm) 19 22 27

O-ring type fitting 36.3 (27) 73.5 (54) 108 (80)

30° flare type fitting 29.4 (22) 49 (36 78.5 (58)

(2) Check the hydraulic oil tank for the oil level. Supply oil if necessary. (3) At the start, run the motor in the low idling condition of the engine for a few minutes to check for oil leakage and abnormal noise.

33-40


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.20 33.1.20.1

SWIVEL JOINT REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1)

Lift the machine by approx. 30 cm (1 foot) and insert support blocks at four places of the crawler shoes, namely, front, rear, right and left, to secure working space under the machine.

(2)

Remove the cover (2) of the floor plate (See Section 33.1.3.1).

(3)

Loosen four M10u25 capscrews (A5) to remove the under cover (A4).

Fig. 33-67 Lifting machine

: 17 mm (4)

Release the residual pressure in the circuit and the hydraulic tank.

(5)

Disconnect the hose of the slewing motor (See Section 33.1.19). • Remove the canopy to facilitate to remove the swivel joints.

A4

Fig. 33-68 Undercover removal

33-41

A5


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.20.2 (1)

REMOVAL

Remove the upper-side drain hoses (A22), connector (1) and elow (2).

2

S/M Dr

1

: 19 mm (2)

Disconnect all the other hoses connected to the swivel joint.

A22

• Attach a plug and tag to each of the openings.

Fig. 33-69 Drain hose disconnection A. To hydraulic oil tank

A21 C/V

A17

B32

S/J

S/V

C/V C/V

S/J

C

S/J

A18

S/J

Fig. 33-70 Upper side hose disconnection A4

A3 F B P

A5

A D P

E

A3

B

A2 P

C

G D2

A3

A A

A1

G

A2

A3 B

D1

A1

P

Fig. 33-71 Lower side hose disconnection A6-A7.Dozer cylinder

33-42


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3)

Removing stopper Loosen two M12u40 capscrews (A7) to remove the stopper (A2). : 19 mm [a long type approx. 300 mm (11.8") in length required].

Fig. 33-72 Stopper removal (4)

Removing swivel joint Loosen four M14u35 capscrews (C2) to remove the swivel joint (C1) downward.

C2 C1

: 22 mm Weight: 22 kg (49 lbs)

Fig. 33-73 Swivel joint removal 33.1.20.3 (1)

INSTALLATION

Install the swivel joint in reverse order of the removal to the tightening torque shown below.

L

R

1) Install the capscrews (C2). : 22 mm T= 181 N•m (75 lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262 on the capscrews.

P

P

AL

BR

BL

AR

D1

D2

2) Install the capscrews (A6). : 19 mm T= 115 N•m (85 lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262 to the capscrews.

TL

Fig. 33-74 Connecting port relation

3) Connect the hoses.

Thread size (PF) 1/4 3/8

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Spanner O-ring type 30° flare type used (mm) fitting fitting 19 36.3 (27) 29.4 (22) 22 73.5 (54) 49 (36)

(2)

Reinstall all the removed parts.

(3)

Pressurize the hydraulic tank.

(4)

Check the performance.

TR

AL. (Upper) forward AR.(Lower) reverse BL. (Upper) forward BR.(Lower) reverse L. Dozer (H) R. Dozer (R) TL. Travel motor (left) TR.Travel motor (right)

33-43


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.21 33.1.21.1

UPPER FRAME REMOVAL PREPARATION

(1) Remove the floor plate and the floor cover (See Section 33.1.3). (2) Remove the canopy (See Section 33.1.1). (3) Remove the guards (See Section 33.1.2). (4) Remove the counterweight (See Section 33.1.5). (5) Drain hydraulic oil from the hydraulic tank (See Section 33.1.10.2). (6) Disconnect the upper-side hoses for the swivel joint (See Section 33.1.19.2). (7) Remove the stopper for the swivel joint (See Fig. 33-72). (8) Remove the attachment (See the "BOOM" section of the Chapter of ATTACHMENT). (9) Needed Tools • Lifting device for upper frame. See section "Tools". • Two bolts M20×110 • Two nuts M20 • Two washers M20 33.1.21.2

REMOVAL

(1)

Providing match marks to slewing bearing Provide match marks between the upper frame (1) and the outer race of slewing bearing (2).

(2)

Lifting upper frame temporarily

4,5

1) Attach the upper frame lifting jigs to the rear end of upper frame using the counterweight mounting holes.

2

2) Temporarily lift the upper frame at three points applying wire ropes (1) on a position of the swing-bracket mounting hole for the front side and on two places of the rear end of the upper frame (1). (3)

1

Fig. 33-75 Slewing bearing and upper frame

Removing bolt for mounting upper frame (1) Loosen one reamer bolt (5) and nineteen capscrews (4) fixing the outer race of the slew bearing to the upper frame. : 22 mm

(4)

Removing upper frame (1) Lift the upper frame a little to ensure safety. Then remove it and place on a worktable capable of enduring the weight. Weight: Approx. 1420 kg (3140 lbs) for E40.2SR Weight: Approx. 1450 kg (3200 lbs) for E50.2SR

W

UL

Fig. 33-76 Lifting upper frame W. Wire rope UL. Upper frame lifting jig

33-44


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.1.21.3

INSTALLATION

(1)

Install the upper frame (1) in reverse order of the removal.

(2)

Cleaning contact surface Clean the bottom surface of the upper frame and the top surface of the slewing bearing. Fig. 33-76

4,5

3 1

• Apply Loctite #515 (3) over the entire circumference of the outer race inside of the capscrew. (3)

2

Lifting method 1) Apply wire ropes to the upper frame (1) and lift up horizontally.

Fig. 33-76 Slewing bearing installation

2) Check the match marks provided at the disassembly.

7

3) Slowly lower the upper frame while aligning the match marks and watching the engaging condition between the slewing pinion gear and the internal gear of the inner race of slewing bearing (2). (4)

6

Installing slewing bearing (2) and upper frame (1) 1) Apply Loctite #262 on a reamer bolt (5) and fifteen capscrews (4) and temporarily tighten them. 2) Tighten the reamer bolt (6) and capscrews to the specified torque at the front, rear, right and left positions facing each other in order alternately (7). : 22 mm, T= 181 N•m (135 lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262 to the bolt and capscrews.

Fig. 33-77 Reamer bolt position

3) Fill the grease bath portion surrounding the gear teeth of the slewing bearing with about 4.8 kg (5.5 lbs) of "NISSEK NEW MOLYKNOCK" (5)

Install the components removed in the above removal preparation to the original position and check the performance.

33-45


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

33.2

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

33.2.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP

33.2.1.1

1

CONSTRUCTION

2

3

No. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9

9

8

5

6

4

7

NAME Shaft assembly Swash plate assembly (Hanger assembly) Rotary group Cover assembly Spring assembly Gear pump assembly Housing assembly Trochoid pump assembly

NOTE: Refer to section 33.2.1 HYDRAULIC PUMP in COMPONENTS SYSTEM PH24 for detail.

33-46


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.1.2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

33.2.1.2.1 (1)

Tools and Jig

Tools Name

Q.ty

Plastic hammer Snap ring plier

One each 1 1

Snap ring plier

1

Torque wrench

1

Allen wrench

Socket wrench wrench Grease

Little

Adhesive agent

Little

1

Size (Nominal) 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 Medium Type For hole (for snap ring 22) For shaft (for snap ring 20) Possible to tighten to the specified torque 10 Possible to tighten to the specified torque Loctite higt tack sealant #98

(2) Jig 1. Working bench Plate which is used to place the pump facing downward If the shaft end does not contact with work bench, the square timber is available instead of it. 2. Bearing assembling jig<Assembly>

33.2.1.2.2

Cautions during Assembling and Dissembling

(1) Cautions for disassembling 1) Never attempt operating the adjusting screw unless absolutely necessary. 2) Take utmost care during disassembly not to knock or drop each part. (2) Cautions for assembling 1) Wash each part thoroughly. 2) During assembling, take utmost care not to damage the part or allow foreign materials to enter. 3) As a rule, the O-ring and oil seal should not be reused. 4) In our assembly work, the torque wrench is used to control the torque. Be sure to use the torque wrench.

33-47


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.1.2.3 (1)

Disassembly

Removing gear pump 1) Remove two capscrews (M10u25). : 8 mm

2) Remove the coupling.

(2)

Removing trochoid pump 1) Remove three M5u12 capscrews. : 4 mm

2) Remove the case, side plate (A) and gear. • Use two M5u50 screws.

33-48


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 3) Take the gear out of the casing.

4) Remove the side plate (A) from the casing.

5) Remove the side plate (B) from the cover.

6) Remove the key of the shaft

33-49


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3)

Disassembling main pump 1) Removing cover Remove three (M12u30) and one (M12u55) capscrews. : 10 mm

2) Removing the cover in a horizontal condition. • Be careful because the control plate is provided to the back side. When the cover is difficult to remove, knock lightly with a plastic hammer.

3) Removing control spring section a) Remove two springs (inside and outside) and the guide.

4) Remove the spring seat.

33-50


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 5) Lay the pump on the side and take out the rotary group from the shaft.

6) Remove the plate.

7) Remove shaft. Remove snap ring with plier. Snap ring plier (for hole: ø72)

8) Remove oil seal casing using two minus screwdriver.

33-51


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 9) Remove O-ring.

10) Tap lightly rear end of shaft with plastic mallet, and remove shaft.

11) Removing hanger. Remove four socket bolts (M6u16) and plate. : 5 mm

12) Remove distance piece.

33-52


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 13) Remove bearing.

14) Remove hanger.

15) Removing cover. Remove control plate.

16) Removing control piston. Remove two socket bolts (M8u25). : 6 mm • Loctite #270 is applied on the threaded part of socket bolt, so remove it only when required.

33-53


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 17) Remove cylinder and parallel pin. • Take care not miss those O-ring fitted on cylinder section. (2 pcs)

18) If equipped, remove piston for air-conditioner mode. NOTE: This parts may not to be equipped depending on pump type.

19) Remove piston.

20) Remove three disk springs and spring seats.

33-54


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 21) Removing control spring seat. Remove two socket bolts (M8u30) and remove cover. : 6 mm

22) Remove spring seat.

23) Removing shaft. Removing bearing. Remove snap ring from shaft, using snap ring plier. Snap ring plier (for shaft: ø28, ø30)

24) Place bearing in the vise, and lightly tap rear end of shaft with plastic mallet then remove bearing from shaft.

33-55


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (4) Disassembling gear pump (GSP2) 1) Loosen four socket bolts (M10u20). : 8 mm

2) Remove the cover.

3) Remove the square ring.

4) Remove plate, guide and O-ring.

33-56


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 5) Remove the drive gear, idle gear and side plate.

33.2.1.2.4

Assembly

Assemble the main pump in reverse order of the disassembly. (1) Assembly of main pump 1) Installing hanger assy. Install hanger in housing.

2) Install bearing.

3) Install distance piece and check the preload of bearing is 0.1 Âą 0.02mm(0.004"Âą0.0008") confirming the distance by means of micrometer and depth micrometer.

33-57


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

4) Install the plate with four socket bolts (M6u16). : 5 mm Torque: 1.35 N•m (9.8 lbf•ft)

5) Assembling shaft assy. a) Place bearing on the pedestal, and press-fit shaft with jig. When there is no press, drive the shaft with jig and plastic mallet in the same manner as the above. 10

11

b) Fix snap rings and bearing. Snap ring plier (for shaft: ø28, ø30)

c) Install shaft in housing and tap the spline end with a plastic mallet lightly to fit outer race of bearing into the hole of housing completely.

33-58


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 6) Apply grease on O-ring and fit it.

7) Install seal casing with oil seal in housing straight along axis. • Apply grease on oil seal lip.

8) Fix snap ring to housing and fix shaft.

9) Assembling rotary group. Install ten pistons in retainer of rotary group.

33-59


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 10) Apply grease on three parallel pins, fit it in the cylinder block.

11) Apply grease on sphere portion of guide.

12) Install guide between retainer and cylinder block and insert pistons in the holes of cylinder block.

13) Installing rotary group. Install plate in hanger. In this case, apply grease on the rear surface of plate to prevent dropping. R

A

A. Apply grease G. Ground site

F

G

F. Front R. Rear

33-60


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 14) Align rotary group with spline of shaft, and install it to inside of housing. • Apply grease on sliding surface of piston shoe and sliding surface to the control plate of cylinder block.

15) Apply grease on the sphere portion of spring seat and install it to hanger in housing.

16) Fit two springs, inner and outer.

17) Fit spring seat and three disk springs to cover assy.

D

D/S S/S D. Direction of fitting D/S.Disk spring

S/S.Spring seat

33-61


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 18) Install control piston.

19) If equipped, install piston for air-conditioner mode. NOTE: This parts may not to be equipped depending on pump type.

20) Apply grease on O-rings, and fit them to cylinder.

21) Apply grease on two parallel pins (ø10) and one parallel pin (ø7.5) and install them to cylinder.

33-62


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 22) Install cylinder with two socket bolts (M8u25). • Apply Loctite #270 to thread portion. : 6 mm Tightening torque: 3.25 N•m (23.5 lbf•ft)

23) Install spring seat in control spring section.

24) Install cover with two socket bolts (M8u30). : 6 mm Tightening torque: 3.25 N•m (23.5 lbf•ft)

25) Apply grease to rear surface of control plate and install it on the cover to align the hole with parallel pins.

33-63


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 26) Fit five O-rings (2 kinds), on mating face of cover.

27) Install cover parallel to the attaching surface of housing.

28) Install cover with three socket bolts (M12u30) and one socket bolt (M12u55). : 10 mm Tightening torque: 110 N•m (81 lbf•ft)

(2) Assembling trochoid pump 1) Insert the key in the shaft. T

R

C

C. Cover side R. Round side T. Trochoid pump side • Insert the key directing the round side to the trochoid pump side.

33-64


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 2) Install side plate (B) on the cover.

3) Install side plate (A) and the plate on the casing.

4) Place the gear in the casing. • Install directing the match mark face to side plate (B) side. M

I O

I. Inner rotor M. Matchmark O. Outer rotor 5) Install casing to cover.

33-65


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE c) Install the drive gear, (G) idle gear and side plate into the housing.

(3) Assembling gear pump 1) Fit the square ring to the plate on the assembling side of gear pump (GSP2). Then pay attention to the suction and delivery. S

D

S

D

S. Suction side D. Delivery side 2) Install the drive gear and idle gear in the side plate.

3) Install the drive gear, idle gear and side plate into the housing.

33-66


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 4) Insert O-ring into the guide, and install it to the plate. G

L

G. Guide L. Large champhered side 5) Install the plate, guide and O-ring into the housing. Then pay attention to the suction and delivery direction.

S

D

D. Delivery side S. Suction side 6) Fit the square ring.

7) Install the cover to the housing.

33-67


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 8) Fix the housing and the cover with four M10u20 capscrews. : 8 mm Tightening torque: 55~69 N•m (41~51 lbf•ft)

9) Install O-ring on attaching surface of gear pump.

(4) Installing gear pump 1) Fit the coupling to the shaft end on the main pump side.

2) Connect the gear pump to the main pump. Fix the gear pump with 2 socket bolts (M10u25). : 8 mm Tightening torque: 62 N•m (46 lbf•ft)

33-68


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.1.3

MAINTENANCE STANDARD

(1) Parts replacement standard Item Piston assembly (1) and cylinder block (2)

1

2

Replacement criterion Remedy • Visual inspection • Replace. To be free from flaw, galling and wear. (Especially the sliding section) • Check clearance between the piston (1) outer diameter and inner diameter of the cylinder block (2). D-d 0.06 mm (0.0024 in)

Piston shoe (3) and piston (4)

• Piston shoe (3) and piston (4) 4

3

• Replace.

• Check the play in the axial direction of the piston (4) and shoe shaft (3). 0.2 mm (0.0079 in)

Shaft

• Shaft

• Replace.

• Check the wear of the oil seal (5).

5

Wear amount

0.025 mm (0.0010 in)

5. Oil seal installing range

Control plate

• Check the sliding surface for • Replace it when flaw. the flaw is severe.

Guide (6) and retainer (7)

• Check if it is free form galling • Replace it in a and step wear. set if it is impossible to repair. • Check if it is free from slight gall- • After repairing ing and flaw. with lapping, clean it to remove the lapping compound.

6

7

33-69


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.2

CONTROL VALVE

33.2.2.1

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

1. Outside view 15

13

16

15

15

20

19 18

20 12

1

2

3

14

15

4

5

17

6

7

8

9

16

10

11

21

Fig. 33-79 Item Name

Q’TY

Item Name

Q’TY

1

Dozer section

1

12

End cover

1

2

Slewing section

1

13

P1, P2 Main relief valve supply

2

3

P3 inlet and travel straight conflux section 1

14

P3 Main relief valve

1

4

Arm section

1

15

Over load relief valve

4

5

Service section

1

16

Over load relief valve

2

6

Swing section

1

17

Anti cavitation valve

1

7

Travel (right) section

1

18

Tie bolt (L=303)

4

8

P1 and P2 inlet section

1

19

Tie bolt (L=143)

4

9

Travel (left) section

1

20

Nut

8

10

Boom section

1

21

Manual operate

1

11

Boom lock section

1

33-70


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 2. Cross section The control valve is roughly classified into the following four sections. •Manual operation section: Swing •Pilot operation section:

Travel right and left, boom, arm, bucket, slewing, travel straight conflux, dozer and service (Nibbler & breaker)

•Accessory section:

P1 and P2 inlets, and P3 inlet (common with travel straight and conflux)

•Accessory section (valve): P1, P2, P3 main relief, overload relief, anti cavitation, boom lock * For respective operation section, only typical example is described. (1) Manual operation: Swing (Item 6) No. 1 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f 2g 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Name Body Spool O-ring 1A P14.5 Dust wiper Oil seat retainer Spring seat Spring Spool end O-ring 1A P14.5 Dust wiper Oil seat retainer Socket bolt M6x12 Socket bolt M6x22 Cover Load check valve Spring (for check valve) Plug (for check valve) O-ring 1B P11 Plug PF3/8 O-ring 1B P14 Anti cavitation valve

Q’TY 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

15

12 11

9 10

14 13

7

8

2g 6

5

4

Fig. 33-80

33-71

3

1

2a

2b 2c 2d 2e 2f


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (2) Pilot operation: Slewing (Item 2) No. 1 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Name Body Spool Spring seat Spring Spool end Spring seat O-ring AS 1B 119 Pilot cover “A” Pilot cover ”B” Socket bolt M6x45 Load check valve Spring (for check valve) Plug (for check valve) O.ring 1B P11 Plug PF3/8 O-ring 1B P14

Q’TY 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1

10 9

7 8

12 11

6

4

6

5

1

2a

3

2b

2c

2d

2e

Fig. 33-81 (3) Main relief valve (P1, P2, P3) and overload relief valve No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Name Socket Pressure regulating valve Piston Body Poppet Adjust screw Lock nut M14 Spring (Adjust valve) Spring (Pressure regulating) O-ring 1A P7 Back up ring Seat (adjust section) O-ring AS 1B 15 O-ring 1B P10 O-ring 1B P22 O-ring 1B s10 Back up ring

Q’TY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1

17

13

3

1

11

2

Draw A .(Only for Overload relief valve & P3 main relief valve) Fig. 33-82

33-72

10

14

9

12

15

5

16

8

7

4

6


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (4) Anti cavitation valve No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Name Anti cavitation valve Body Plug Spring Back up ring O-ring 1A P10A O-ring 1B P14

Q’TY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

8

O-ring 1B P15

1

1

Fig. 33-83

33-73

7

5

6

2

4

3

8


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.2.2

PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY

CAUTION Precautions (These precautions must be observed for safety.) The disassembly and assembly is fundamentally to be carried out at the manufacturer’s plant, but when they are unavoidably necessary, observe the following precautions. (1) All hydraulic equipment is machined in precision and consequently the clearance of each part is very small. Therefore when disassembling and assembling, place the machine in the clean area to prevent it from the entry of dust, earth and sand. (2) Before disassembly, prepare the valve construction drawing to understand the construction clearly. (3) When removing the control valve from the machine, never forget to cap every port to prevent dust, etc. from entering. And before disassembly, recheck that every post is capped and clean the outer surface of the assembly. The work should be carried out on the appropriate work bench which is covered by clean paper or rubber mat. (4) When it is required to leave it in the removed condition, apply rust preventives or seal them to protect them from rusting. (5) The control valve should be transported or moved holding the main body. Especially, after removing the pilot cover, carefully handle it paying attention not to touch the exposed surfaces. (6) Even when the movement is not smooth, never strike it. (7) In addition, after assembly of equipment, various tests {relief setting, leak test, flow resistance (pressure loss) test} are required, but these tests require hydraulic test equipment. Therefore, don’t remove the equipment which is impossible to adjust through respective test, even if the disassembly is possible technically. 33.2.2.3

REQUIRED TOOLS AND OTHERS

Preliminary preparation of the following tools is required for the disassembly and the assembly of the control valve. In addition, the following tools are necessary for the disassembly and the assembly of this valve, but the tools necessary for the disassembly and the assembly of the port connection and the link joint are not included. Tools Allen wrench Spanner Socket wrench Torque wrench Torque wrench Magnet Pliers Screw driver (–) Tweezer

Q’TY One each One each One each 1 1 1 1 1 1

Remarks 4, 5, 8, 10 mm 13, 19, 21, 22, 30 mm 13, 19, 22 mm 1.96 ~ 19.6 N•m (1.4 ~ 14 lbf•ft) 19.6 ~ 117.7 N•m (14 ~87 lbf•ft)

Prepare wash oil, hydraulic oil, grease, Loctite #242, tag and marker (felt-tip pen) beforehand.

33-74


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.2.4

DISASSEMBLING

(1) Drawing the spool out Place the control valve on work bench directing the actuator port upward. 1) In case of hydraulic pilot switching type, How to take out the spool for slewing is as follows. (See Fig. 33-80 and Fig. 33-83.) First, loosen and remove 2 washer socket bolts (6) with Allen wrench of 5 mm. Then, remove pilot cover (9). The spring section of the slewing spool is disposed, so draw out and take out spool assembly (2a-2e) slightly and horizontally (parallel to the spool hole) from the body holding the spring section. Other pilot spools can be taken out from the same face by the same procedure. Then, check that the O-ring (3) on the flange bottom installing the pilot cover on the body side is not separated.

Fig. 33-83 Hydraulic pilot switching type 2) In case of manual switching type, How to remove this type as an example of the swing spool is as follows. (See Figures Fig. 33-79 and Fig. 33-84.) First, loosen and remove 2 socket bolts (7) with Allen wrench of 5 mm. Then, remove end cover (8). The spring section of the swing spool is disposed, so draw out and take out spool assembly (2a-2g) slightly and horizontally (parallel to the spool hole) from body (1) holding the spring section. Then, pull the spool assembly carefully, or the spool seal [dust wiper (2c) and O-ring (2b)] moves to the edge section of the spool and the lip section may be damaged. Replace the removed O-ring with new one. If it absolutely has to be used, check that it is free from flaw, deformation and foreign matter adhered.

Fig. 33-84 Manual switching type 3) Precautions when replacing spool When replacing the spool, in no case should the spool be disassembled, but replace it with the new spool assembly.

33-75


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 4) In case of independent travel spool (See Fig. 33-85) Firstly loosen and remove two sems-bolts (5) with an Allen wrench of 5 mm. Then remove the pilot cover (4). Remove the disposed spring section of the travel straight spool. Pull out the spool assembly (2a~2e) slowly and horizontally (in parallel to the spool hole axis) from the valve by holding the end of the independent travel spool. At this time, ensure that the O-ring (3) in the bottom of the flange installing the pilot cover on the main body side is in place without coming off. Further loosen three socket bolts (17) with an Allen wrench to remove the body assemblies (13~16) and the piston (10). At this time, ensure that O-rings (11) (12) in the installing surface of the body assembly on the main body side is in place without coming off.

Fig. 33-85 P3 supply and travel straight sections (2) Relief valve (Code: RV) How to remove overload relief valve (Code: ORV) First, fix the valve on the work bench or ask people to hold down the valve. Then, loosen the hexagonal section (opposing flat, 30, 22) of RV and ORV with spanner of 22 mm, 30 mm. At that time, don’t remove the valves applying spanner to the opposing flat, 19.

WARNING The set pressure of the RV and ORV differs at the position, so tag every valve with respective attaching position. And handle the removed RV and ORV paying attention not to damage the seat section. The RV and ORV are essential for the performance and safety, but don’t disassemble the RV and ORV because it is very difficult to reset the pressure. When there is a failure, replace the assembly.

33-76


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3) How to disassemble load check valve First, fix the valve on the work bench, or ask people to hold down the valve in order to keep it from moving. Loosen plug (9) at the center of the valve upper surface with allen wrench of 8 mm. It may be difficult to loosen the plug because O-ring (10) gets caught in the thread. Then, don’t force it to loosen, but tighten the plug once again and loosen it again. Take out spring (8), load check valve (7) through the hole used to remove the plug with tweezers or magnet. The item numbers in Fig. 33-86 correspond to that of the swing section in Fig. 33-79. The travel switching, boom lock valve and service switching sections having different forms can be disassembled in the same manner. 9 9

9

10

10

10 8 8 7

8 7 7

Fig. 33-87 Load check valve A. Load check valve (Dozer, Slew- B. Load check valve (Travel right C. Load check valve and left switching, P3 supply secswitching section) ing, Arm, Swing, Boom, Bucket tion) section)

(Service

(4) Disassembling lock valve If the lock valve became abnormal, replace it with new one as assembly. The disassembling procedures described below are for reference only to check the cause for abnormality. At first, loosen three socket bolts (27) with a 5 mm Allen wrench. Then remove the lock valve cover (14).

WARNING Pay attention not to damage the piston guide (12) that protrudes from the bottom of lock valve cover (14). Thereby lock valve (6~10) and needle valve (11) appear, and pull out them. Remove and store the needle valve firstly because it easily comes off. Do not disassemble the lock valve, store it as assembly (6~10).

Fig. 33-88

33-77


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE Fix the lock valve cover with a vise, loosen and remove the bush (18) with a 8 mm allen wrench.

WARNING Fix the lock valve cover with a vise at the side faces other than the port face. Remove the pistons C (17), A (15) and lock valve spring (16) with a pair of tweezers or a magnet through the bore for plug. Mark on the pistons (C) and (A) to identify the assembled direction. Do not disassemble the piston guide (12), and store it at assembly with the lock valve cover. Loosen the ball retainer (21) with a 4 mm Allen wrench. Remove the ø7steel ball (20) with a magnet through the bore for ball retainer.

Fig. 33-89 (5) Disassembling other parts Remove the other parts, not described in par. (1) through (3), in the following procedures: 1) Service section Plug for actuator part (See Fig. 33-89.) Fix the valve directing the actuator port upward. Loosen and remove plug (11) on both right and left sides of the upper surface of the service change section with spanner of 21 mm (or socket wrench).

Fig. 33-89 Service section 2) Pilot cover of hydraulic pilot switching section (See Fig. 33-83.) Loosen and remove two socket bolts (6) with an Allen wrench of 5 mm. Remove the pilot cover (5) horizontally. At the same time, ensure that the O-ring (3) in the bottom of the flange for securing the pilot cover on the main frame side is in place without coming off. 3) Spool seal of manual switching section (See Fig. 33-84.) Loosen and remove two socket bolts (6) with an Allen wrench of 5 mm. The oil seal retainer (5) is also removed simultaneously. Remove the spool seal [O-ring (3) and dust wiper

33-78


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (4)] through the spool hole on the side of the main frame, paying attention not to damage the spool seal and switching main frame. Don’t reuse the O-ring. When it is required to be used again, check that it is free from flaw, deformation, foreign matter adhered, and so on before installation. (6) Disassembling main frame of switching section The figures in parentheses following the part names in the description are the item numbers used in the outline view. Loosen and remove four M8 nuts (20) for fastening the main frame of the switching section on the valve side with a wrench (socket wrench) of 13 mm. Pull eight tie-bolts (18), (19) from the side and remove each main frame of the switching section. Then, care should be taken not to miss various O-rings fitted on the mating face of respective main frames. Do not remove a number of plugs screwed in the unnecessary holes for valve manufacturing of the main frame of the switching section unless required. (7) Precautions for disassembly

WARNING The removed parts should be carried and stored carefully to prevent damage and contamination. And when the removed parts are applied, stored, or carried in the removed condition, fill up the holes after the removal of parts with cap, tape, etc. to protect it from entry of dust, dirt, etc. (8) Disassembling anticavitation valve

WARNING Since the anticavitation valve is essential for the performance, replace it with the new assembly if necessary. Procedures for disassembling the valve to check for abnormality is shown below for reference. The figures in parentheses following the part names in the description are the item numbers in the cross-sectional drawing ( Fig. 33-82). Firstly, hold the hexagonal section having width across flats of 22 mm with a vise lightly. Loosen and remove the plug (3) with an Allen wrench of 8 mm. Remove the spring (4). Then push in the anti-cavitation valve (1) from the seat side while taking care not to damage the seat section. Pull out the O-ring (6) and back-up ring (5) from the side from which the plug (3) was removed while taking care so that the rings are not damaged by the internal thread of the body (2). (9) Relief valve (Code: RV) Disassembling overload relief valve (Code: ORV)

WARNING Since the overload relief valve is essential for the performance and safety and the resetting of the pressure is very difficult, replace it with the new assembly when an abnormality is detected. For reference, how to disassemble for checking the abnormality is shown below. The figures in parentheses following the part names in the description are the item numbers in the cross-sectional drawing ( Fig. 33-81). First, hold the body (5) with vise at the hexagonal section of the opposing flat, 22. Loosen and remove adjusting screw (7) with Allen wrench of 4 mm. Take out spring (9), poppet (6) and spring guide (16) with tweezers, etc. Then, loosen and remove plug (4) with spanner of 19 mm, and the remaining parts can be taken out at the same time. And take out socket (1), piston (3), spring (10) and pressure regulating valve (2) in order.

33-79


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.2.5

PRECAUTIONS WHEN ASSEMBLING

CAUTION Precautions (Observe the following for safety.) (1) The unevenness of tightening torque and the contamination by dust during assembly may cause a failure. And observe the tightening torque specified in the description. (2) When assembling, check up on the valve construction drawing, identify the number of part, and ensure that there is no installation error and omission of part, etc. (3) After cleaning the parts required to use with cleaning solvent, immerse them in hydraulic oil as required and reassemble them. (4) Before applying Loctite, clean and decrease the surface sufficiently, and apply it to two threads. (Over application may cause a malfunction due to the squeezing out.) 33.2.2.6

PRECAUTIONS WHEN FITTING SEALS

CAUTION Precautions (Observe the following for safety.) (1) Replace seals with new ones when assembling. (2) Ensure that seals are free from deformation and flaw coming about when handling them. (3) Apply grease or hydraulic oil to the seals and seal fitting section to make the sliding smooth, unless otherwise specified. (4) Do not stretch the seals too much. Otherwise they may be permanently deformed. (5) Pay attention not to roll the O-ring when fitting. Because it is difficult for the twisted O-ring to be restored naturally after fitting, and it may cause oil leakage. 33.2.2.7

ASSEMBLY WORK

(1) Perform assembling work referring to the drawings in "Disassembly" Section. (2) Assembling procedure 1) Assembling the main frame of the switching section (See Fig. 33-79.) Put all sections of main frame in order as shown in Table 33-2 directing the actuator port downward. SECTION (Block)

MARK AQ10

Dozer

SR

Slewing

AN

P3 inlet

ND

Arm

bB

Service

bC

B/Swing

bD

Travel RH

DG

P1, P2 inlet

FE

Travel LH

OC

Boom

QA

Bucket

AT

End cover

HD

33-80


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE NOTE: The symbols are engraved on the upper surface of the main frame of the switching section (Actuator port face)

CAUTION Then, check that the mating surface of the main frame of each switching section is free from dust, etc. and the O-ring is securely fitted in the groove. And, insert eight tie bolts (18)(19) through the main frame of the switching section from the side, and tighten eight M8 nuts to the specified torque with socket wrench of 13 mm. T= 19.6 N•m (14.5 lbf•ft) Observe the specified torque. When the lock nut is not tightened to the torque other than specified, it may cause a distortion and oil leakage of the main frame. At this time, don’t tighten the lock nuts at a time, but tighten eight lock nuts to make uniform in several times. Tighten the lock nuts making the upper and lower, and right and left sides uniform with a plastic hammer, etc. following the sketch drawing, or make them uniform with press, etc. after tightening. 2) Assembling load check valve Put the load check valve of the valve on the work bench directing the actuator port upward. a. Sections other than travel, P3 supply and service (See Fig. 33-87) Place load check valve (7) in the hole at the center of the valve in normal condition (direct the cap section downward.), and check that it is placed in at the center. Fit spring (8) on the guide of the load check valve. Tighten the plug by hand so that the guide of the load check valve can be fitted on the guide of plug (9), and the spring can be in place.

CAUTION Then, check that O-ring (10) is fitted on the plug. Screw in with a certain amount, and tighten it to the specified torque with allen wrench of 8 mm. T= 39.2 N•m (29 lbf•ft) b. Travel, P3 supply sections (See Fig. 33-87) Service section (See Fig. 33-87) Place the load check valve (7) in the hole at the center of the valve in the normal direction (direct the cap section downward.), and check that it is placed in at the center. Apply grease to the spring (8) and fit the plug (9) in the guide.s

CAUTION Then, ensure that the O-ring (10) is fitted on the plug (9). Tighten the plug by hand so that the guide of the load check valve installed on the main frame of the switching section can be fitted on the guide of the plug after checking that the check valve spring does not drop even when the plug is reversed up and down in this condition. Screw in with a certain amount, and tighten it to the specified torque with a allen wrench of 8 mm. T= 39.2 N•m (29 lbf•ft) Assemble it paying attention to the correct position where two types of the load check valve are installed. 3) Assembling RV and ORV

CAUTION Tighten the RV and ORV to respective port for installation to the specified torque. T= 39.2 N•m (29 lbf•ft) Observe the specified torque. When the respective valve is not tightened to the torque other than the specified, it may cause a distortion and oil leakage of the connection. Since the pressure settings of RV and ORV on each places differ, install them on the position as they were in order not to make a mistake referring to the tags attached when disassembling.

33-81


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 4) Assembling spool assembly a. In case of hydraulic pilot switching type, (See Fig. 33-84) Insert respective spool assembly in the spool holes of the main frame of the switching section paying attention to the positions and directions so as not to make a mistake, after checking that respective spool assembly and the spool holes of the main frame of the switching section are free from dust, etc. and also O-ring (3) is securely fitted on the bottom of the flange of the main frame of the switching section (2 places before and after the main frame of the switching section.) Then, apply a slight hydraulic oil to the spool before insertion.

CAUTION And, don’t force the insertion of the spool due to the difficulty to getting in, or it may cause malfunction, etc. Next, check that the spool moves smoothly by getting it in and out several times by hand, and be sure that there are no unsmooth movements or catching. Where there is no above feeling of the physical disorder, replace the set of the spool assembly and the main frame of the switching section. And, install pilot cover (4) on the flange section of the main frame of the switching section from the spring side of the spool assembly securely, and install it on the main frame of the switching section by tightening washer socket bolt (6) with Allen wrench of 5 mm. T=9.8~10.8 N•m (7.2~8.0 lbf•ft) Fit the flange section on the opposite end of the main frame of the switching section so that pilot cover (5) snaps into the flange section of the main frame of the switching section after checking that O-ring (7) is placed in, and then install it on the main torque of the switching section with flange socket bolt (6) tightening with Allen wrench of 5 mm to the specified torque. T=9.8~10.8 N•m (7.2~8.0 lbf•ft) b. In case of manual switching type (See Fig. 33-85) Insert respective spool in the spool holes of the main frame of the switching section paying attention to the position and direction after checking that respective spool assembly and the spool holes of the main frame of the switching section are free from dust, etc.

CAUTION Then, don’t force the insertion of the spool due to the difficulty to getting in, or it may cause malfunction, etc. Next, check that the spool moves smoothly by getting it in and out several times by hand, and be sure that there are no unsmooth movements or catching. And, install end cover (8) on the main frame of the switching section from the spring side of the spool assembly with socket bolt (7) tightening with Allen wrench of 5 mm. T= 9.8~10.8 N•m (7.2~8.0 lbf•ft)

CAUTION At the time, don’t tighten 2 socket bolts at a time, but tighten them slightly and alternately several times to make uniform. And, fit O-ring (3), dust wiper (4) and oil seal retainer (5) in order on the spool prevented from the opposite end of the main frame of the switching section, and tighten socket bolt (6) with Allen wrench of 5 mm. T= 9.8~10.8 N•m (7.2~8.0 lbf•ft) At this time, pay attention to the direction of the dust wiper (direct the lip outward.) And, don’t tighten socket bolts at one time, but tighten 2 socket bolts slightly so that oil seal presser is inserted in parallel.

33-82


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE c. In case of P3 supply and travel straight spools (See Fig. 33-86) Ensure that the travel straight spool, P3 supply and spool hole for the main frame of switching section are free from dust, and that the O-rings (3) is securely fitted in the flange bottom of the main frame of the P3 supply section (three places in front and back of the main frame of supply section). Then install the piston (10) in the flange section (the side of two O-ring grooves) of the main frame. Insert the socket bolts (17) to the pilot body assembly (16 - 19) to fix it temporarily to the main frame. At this time, roughly adjust the vertical and horizontal orientations of the pilot body against the main frame. Tighten three socket bolts with an Allen wrench of 5 mm to the specified torque equally. T= 9.8~10.8 N•m (7.2~8.0 lbf•ft) Apply a small amount of hydraulic oil to the travel straight spool assembly and insert it through the spool hole opposite to the side where the pilot body assembly was installed, without mistaking front and rear orientation.

CAUTION Do not use excessive force to push in the spool if it is sticking. Further fit the pilot cover (4) in the flange section of the main frame securely, and tighten the sems-bolt (6) with an Allen wrench of 5 mm at the specified torque to fix the install the cover to the main frame. T= 9.8~10.8 N•m (7.2~8.0 lbf•ft) Confirm the fact that the plug (18) has been surely installed to the port (G1/4) of the pilot cover (4). 5) Assembling lock valve If the lock valve became abnormal, replace it with new assembly. The assembling procedures described below are only for reference after disassembling to investigate the cause for abnormality. (See Fig. 33-88 and Fig. 33-89) At first, fix the lock valve cover (14) with a vise at the side faces other than the port face. After fixing, insert the piston A (15) into the bore on piston guide (12) paying attention to its direction. Then insert the lock valve spring (16) and piston C (17) into the bore on the lock valve cover paying attention for its direction. After that, tighten the plug (18) with 8 mm allen wrench to the specified torque. T= 39.2~49 N•m (29~36 lbf•ft)

CAUTION At that time, confirm the fact that the O-ring (19) has been surely installed to the plug. If the pistons (A and C) are difficult to insert, do not try to insert them by force. It may lead to malfunction. After the insertion of pistons (A and C), confirm smooth movement of them by taking them in and out with hand for several times. If the movement is not so smooth, replace the pistons (A and C) to new ones together with the lock valve cover as assembly. After setting the ø7 steel ball (20) to the place, tighten up the ball retainer (21) at the specified torque. T= 7.8~9.8 N•m (5.8~7.0 lbf•ft)

CAUTION At that time, confirm the fact that the O-ring (22) has been surely installed to the ball retainer. After confirmation for the fact that the flat O-ring (3~5) has been surely installed to the inserting side of lock valve of lock valve body, set the lock valve assembly (6~10) and needle valve (11), and insert it into the bore for lock valve. Set the lock valve cover to piston guide, which is protruding from the bottom of lock valve cover (14), slowly press the lock valve cover until getting touch with the lock valve body. At that time, confirm that the needle valve (11) is surely placed on the seat inside the lock valve cover. Then tighten the socket bolts (27) with the 5 mm Allen wrench to the specified torque. T= 9.8~10.8 N•m (7.2~8.0 lbf•ft)

33-83


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

CAUTION At the tightening, make sure to tighten up three socket bolts alternatively so that the lock valve cover does not incline. 6) Assembling relief valve and overload relief valve The relief valve is essential for the performance and safety, and it is very difficult to reset the pressure. Therefore, in case of the abnormality, replace it with a new assembly. The assembling procedures described below are only for reference after disassembling to investigate the cause for abnormality. The figures in parentheses following the part names in the description are the item numbers in the crosssectional drawing ( Fig. 33-82). First, place spring guide (16) in adjusting screw (7) and then place spring (9) in. Then, shake the adjusting screw lightly and be sure that the interference of spring guide (16) and spring (9) is sufficiently ensured. If the interference is insufficient, spring (9) pops out or the protrusion from adjusting screw (7) becomes larger. Thereafter fit poppet (6) in plug (4) and tighten adjusting screw (7) {spring guide (16), spring (9) are already fitted.} lightly. At that time, tighten lock nut M14 (8) lightly. And place spring (10) and piston (3) in poppet (2), and place it in socket (1). And tighten body (5) and plug (4) to the specified torque after checking that piston (3) is inserted in the hole of the top end of plug (4). T= 58.8 N•m (43 lbf•ft) And adjust the pressure by adjusting screw (7) with Allen wrench of 4 mm, and tighten lock nut M14 (8) to the specified torque. T= 19.6N•m (14 lbf•ft) Assemble the relief valves in the reverse procedure of the disassembly paying attention to the direction and order and observing the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in oil leakage or breakage. 7) Assembling anticavitation valve The anticavitation valve is essential for the performance and safety, so in case of abnormality replace it with a assembly. For reference, the procedure for disassembly and assembly is shown below. The figures in parentheses following the part names in the description are the item numbers in the crosssectional drawing ( Fig. 33-83). First, place anti cavitation valve (1) in body (2), and place spring (4) in it. Then tighten the plug to the specified torque. T=58.8 N•m (43 lbf•ft) Assemble the anti cavitation valve by the reverse procedure of the disassembly paying attention to the direction and order and observing the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in oil leakage or breakage.

33-84


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.2.8

Maintenance standard

Parts inspection Parts name Inspection item Main frame of 1) Existence of scratch, rust and corrosion switching section

Criterion and corrective action 1) Replace it when there is flaw on the following section. • Sliding section against the spool, especially land section where the hold pressure is applied. • Seal pocket section where the spool is placed in or flange section • Seal section of the port in contact with O-ring • Seat section of relief valve and overload relief valve failure it may cause malfunction, etc. Spool 1) Existence of scratch, rust and corrosion 1) Replace it when there is scratch on the peripheral sliding surface 2) Insert spool in the hole of the main frame 2) In case the spool is not smooth, repair or reof the switching section, stroke it while roplace it. tating. Load check valve 1) Damage of load check valve and spring 1) In case there are flaws and scratches on the seat section, repair or replace it. 2) Insert load check valve in plug and exper- 2) When it moves smoothly, normal, but if it imentally operate it. moves unsmoothly, replace it. Around spring 1) Rust, corrosion, deformation and break- 1) Replace it when the movement is unsmooth age of spring, spring seat, plug, and cover or there is damage causing poor durability. Around of seal of 1) Hardening, deformation and flaw of O-ring 1) Replace spool 2) Deformation and flaw of dust wiper 2) Replace 3) Rust, corrosion and deformation of oil seal 3) Repair or replace retainer Relief valve 1) Rust on outer surface 1) Replace Overload relief valve 2) Contact surface of valve seat 2) In case there are flaw and dent, replace it. 3) Spring in abnormal condition 3) Replace 4) O-ring, back-up ring 4) Replace all parts, as a general rule. 33.2.2.9

Cause of failure and corrective action

(1) When abnormal condition is detected, check on the control valve, pump, cylinder, and motor for abnormality or failure on the circuit. For that, measure the pilot pressure, delivery pressure of the pump, load pressure, etc. And when a part of them is required to disassemble for checking, follow the procedure of the disassembly and assembly in the above description. (2) Since dust is very harmful for hydraulic equipment, pay attention to the dust proof. When a part of them is required to disassemble, before starting the work take a measure for dust protection. (3) Handle the movable section carefully. Even if there is a slight flaw, repair it with oil stone or replace it. When replaced, clean them. (4) Handle O-ring, etc. carefully in order not to damage the gasket surface. These flaws will cause oil leakage.

33-85


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 1) Control valve Phenomenon 1. Each attachment does not function, or the actuation is slow. (Poor power) Or there is no response.

2. When spool is placed on the neutral position, the natural drop of the cylinder is large.

Cause 1) Malfunction of relief valve • Dust caught between pressure regulating valve and seat. * • Dust caught between poppet and seat. * • Pressure regulating valve is stuck. * • Breakage or permanent set in fatigue of spring. * • Loose of adjusting screw

Corrective action 1) Measure the pressure of relief valve • Replace the assembly. * • Replace the assembly. * • Replace the assembly. * • Replace the assembly. *

• Readjust it, and tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. 2) Dust caught between the main frame and 2) Disassemble and clean it. spool, or stuck In case of severe flaw, replace the main frame and spool. 1) The space between the main frame of the 1) Replace spool. switching section and the spool is too large. 2) The spool is not returned to the neutral po- 2) Measure pilot secondary pressure. sition completely. • Dust caught between the main frame and • Disassemble and clean, or when stuck, spool, or stuck replace the main frame and spool together. • Breakage or permanent set in fatigue of • Replace spring. spring 3) Malfunction of ORV 3) Measure the pressure of ORV. Refer to the description marked with *. Refer to the description marked with *. 4) Malfunction of lock valve 4) Replace with a new lock valve section assembly (including the lock valve main • Dust caught in the seat section of the lock body). valve or needle valve • Stick of the lock valve or needle valve

• Dust caught in the throttle of the lock valve 3. When the cylinder is 1) Malfunction of load check valve 1) set to the raise posi- • Dust caught between load check valve • Disassembly and cleaning. tion, the cylinder and main frame. In case of the severe damage, replace the moves downward remain frame and load check valve togethversely when starting er. the operation. • Load check valve is stuck. • Ditto • Breakage and permanent set in fatigue of • Replace spring. spring * In case of abnormality marked with *, do not fail to replace with the new relief valve assembly.

33-86


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 2) Relief valve The relief valve is essential for the performance and the safety, and it is difficult to reset the pressure other if there is no facility in service shop, so when abnormality occurs, don’t fail to replace the assembly. The handling method is for reference, replace the assembly as a rule. Phenomenon Cause Corrective action 1. Pressure does not The pressure adjusting valve of each relief • Check that the engagement valve of rerise. valve, poppet and piston are stuck, kept spective valve doesn’t get matters caught open, or got caught dust in the seat secin it. tion of the valve. • Each part slides freely. • Clean all parts completely. 2. Relief pressure is un- The adjusting valve of respective valve is • Replace the damaged part. stable. damaged, or the piston is stuck to the • Clean all parts completely. poppet. • Remove flaw on the surface. 3. The relief pressure is 1) Wear due to dust 1) Disassemble and clean not within the limit of 2) Lock nut and adjusting screw are loose. 2) Adjusting pressure set values. • Breakage and permanent set in fatigue of • Replace spring.

4. Oil leakage

spring 3) Malfunction of RV and ORV 1) Damage on each seat section Wear of O-ring

3) Measure the pressure of RV and ORV. 1) Replace the worn or damaged part. Check that respective part move smoothly before installing. 2) Respective part is stuck due to dust en- 2) Check that it is free from scratch, score tered. and foreign matter before installing.

33-87


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.3

PILOT VALVE (Attachment)

33.2.3.1

CONSTRUCTION

A

A

A

S

1 (3)

2 (4)

Fig. 33-91 Pilot valve (Attachment) A. Apply grease S. Shim for adjusting secondary pressure Item

Thread size

301 302, 312

M14 M14

Item 101 151 201 211 212–1 212–2

NAME CASING PLATE SPOOL PLUG PUSH ROD PUSH ROD

Tightening Torque Table N•m (lbf•ft) 47.1 (34.7) 68.6 (50.6)

Q’TY 1 1 4 4 2 2

Item 213 214 216–1 216–2 217 221

NAME SEAL O-RING; 1B P20 SPRING SEAT SPRING SEAT WASHER 2 SPRING

33-88

Q’TY 4 4 2 2 4 4

Item 241–1 241–2 301 302 312 501

NAME SPRING SPRING JOINT; M14 DISK ADJUSTING NUT; M14 BELLOWS

Q’TY 2 2 1 1 1 1


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.3.2 (1)

(2)

DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

Tools No.

Tool Name

Remarks

a

Torque wrench

b

Screw driver (-)

W = 2~3, 4~5

c d

Screw driver (+) Wrench

Drawing 22 mm and 32 mm

15 ~ 100 N•m (10~75 lbf•ft)

Jig Special jig: for disassembling and assembling the joint (301) (See Fig. 33-92).

Fig. 33-92 Special jig 33.2.3.3 33.2.3.3.1

Disassembling procedure General cautions for disassembly

(1) Since all the parts are very precisely manufactured, carefully handle them without causing collision with each other or dropping. (2) Perform the work carefully without hammering or using excessive force even if the part is sticking. Otherwise burrs may be produced or the part is damaged, leading to oil leakage or performance deterioration. (3) When leaving the parts in the disassembled condition, always take rust preventive and dust protective measures. Otherwise rust may be produced on the parts due to humidity or dust.

33-89


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.3.3.2

Disassembly

(1)

Remove the handle lever (1) assembly and boot (2) from the casing (101).

(2)

Clean the pilot valve with white kerosene. • Screw a blind plug in each port in advance.

(3)

1

Hold the pilot valve with a vise by applying a copper or lead sheet. 2

101

Fig. 33-93 Handle lever disassembly (4)

Apply wrenches to the adjusting nut (312) and the disk (302) across the flats to loosen and remove them.

Fig. 33-94 Adjusting nut (312) removal (5)

Turn the joint (301) counterclockwise with a jig to loosen.

CAUTION When pulling off the joint, be careful that the joint is no sooner loosened than the plate (151), plug (211) and push rod (212) may pop up if the return spring (221) is too strong.

Fig. 33-95 Joint (301) removal (6)

Remove the plate (151).

Fig. 33-96 Plate (151) removal

33-90


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (7)

If the return spring (221) is not strong, use a flat screwdriver to pull out the plug (221) which remains inside the casing (101) due to sliding resistance of the O-ring. • Apply the tip of the flat screwdriver to the external groove of the plug (211) while preventing damage to the plug due to eccentric load.

CAUTION Be careful that the plug (211) may pop up due to the return spring (221) force when removing the plug. (8)

Fig. 33-97 Spring (221) removal

Remove the push rod (212), plug (211), pressure reducing valve section assembly, and return spring (221) from the casing (101). • Record the relation between the casing hole positions and these parts.

Fig. 33-98 Push rod (212) removal (9)

In order to disassemble the pressure reducing valve, shift the spring seat (216) laterally while pushing in the spring seat (216) to make the secondary pressure spring (241) deflect, and remove the valve from the spool (201) through the larger hole. • Be careful not to damage the surface of the spool (201). • Do not push down the spring seat (216) by more than 6 mm (0.24"). Fig. 33-99 Pressure reducing valve disassembly

(10)

Separate the spool (201), spring seat (216), secondary pressure spring (241), and washer 2 (217).

• Handle these parts as an assembly until assembling.

Fig. 33-100 Pressure reducing valve disassembly

33-91


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

(11)

Pull out the push rod (212) from the plug (211).

Fig. 33-101 Pulling out plug (211) (12)

Remove the O-ring (214) and seal (213) from the plug (211). Remove the seal (213) using a small flat screwdriver and so on.

(13)

Cleaning parts

1) Clean the parts in a rough cleaning container containing white kerosene (rough cleaning). • Immerse the parts in the kerosene to facilitate the removal of dust and oil. Otherwise the parts may be damaged due to using excessive force. • Check the white kerosene for contamination and use clean one. Otherwise the parts may be damaged, leading to performance deterioration after reassembling.

Fig. 33-102 Seal (213) removal

• Do not dry the parts with compressed air. Otherwise the parts may be damaged by dust or moisture in air or rust may be produced. 2) Put a part in a finish cleaning container containing white kerosene and turn the part slowly to sufficiently clean the part including its interior (finish cleaning). Dry parts by wiping off kerosene with clean rag. 3) Rust prevention of parts Apply rust preventive agent to the parts. • Do not leave the parts without applying rust preventive agent. Otherwise rust may be produced, leading to malfunction after assembly.

33-92


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.3.4 33.2.3.4.1

Assembling procedures General cautions for assembling work

(1) General cautions for assembling work are almost similar to that for disassembling work. (2) Remove metal chips or foreign substances from all the parts and ensure that the parts have no burrs or flaw prior to assembly. Remove burrs or flaw if any, using oil stone. (3) Replace the O-rings and back-up rings with new ones in principle. (4) Be careful not to damage the O-rings and back-up rings when fitting them. (Apply a small amount of grease to fit them smoothly.) (5) Apply grease to the parts to be installed in order to prevent them from dropping. (6) Tighten screws at the torque specified in Table 33-3. Watch the torque using a torque wrench. (7) After finishing the assembly, screw blind plugs in all the ports to prevent dust intrusion. 33.2.3.4.2 (1)

Assembly

Insert the washer (217), secondary pressure spring (241), and spring seat (216) to the spool (201) in this order.

Fig. 33-103 Assembling spool (201) (2)

Shift the spring seat (216) laterally while pushing in the spring seat (216) to make the secondary pressure spring (241) deflect, and install the valve to the spool (201) through the larger hole. • Do not push down the spring seat by more than 6 mm (0.24").

Fig. 33-104 Assembling spool (201) (3)

Install the return spring (221) into the casing (101). Install the pressure reducing valve assembly into the casing (101). • Install these parts into the position before disassembling.

Fig. 33-105 Installing spool (221)

33-93


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

(4)

Insert the O-ring (214) and seal (213) into the plug (211). • Direct the lip of the seal (213) as shown below: 211 213 212 A

Fig. 33-106 Installing seal (213) (5)

Install the push rod (212) into the plug (211). • Apply hydraulic oil to the surface of push rod (A).

Fig. 33-107 Installing push rod (212) (6)

Install the plug assembly into the casing (101). If the return spring (221) is not strong, the assembly may stop due to sliding resistance of the O-ring (214). • Do not use excessive force with the spool (201) inclined. Otherwise the casing hole may be damaged.

Fig. 33-108 Installing plug assembly (7)

If the return spring (221) is too strong, install four assemblies at the same time using the plate (151) and temporarily fasten with the joint (301).

CAUTION Be careful to popping up of the plug assembly and plate (151).

Fig. 33-109 Installing plug assembly

33-94


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

(8)

Install the plate (151). Install the joint (301) to the casing (101) and tighten the joint to the specified torque using a jig.

Fig. 33-110 Installing joint (301) (9)

Install the disk (302) into the joint (301). Then install and tighten the adjusting nut (312) to the specified torque while holding the disk (302) across the flats with a wrench. • Do not change the position of the disk (302) during tightening.

CAUTION Screw in until the disk contacts with four push rods (212) equally. Carefully adjust the screwing position of the disk (302) because excessive screwing may result in secondary pressure generation at the neutral position of the lever, leading to malfunction of the actual machine. (10)

Apply grease to the rotating section of the joint (301) and the push rod (212).

(11)

Install the handle lever assembly and boot to the casing (101).

Fig. 33-111 Installing joint (301)

Fig. 33-112 Applying grease

33-95


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.3.5

Maintenance standard

Maintenance item Amount of leakage

Spool

Push rod

Standard Remarks Replace with a complete set of pilot valve when Condition: the amount of leakage reaches more than 1000 Primary pressure: 2.94 MPa (427 psi) cc/min (61 cu•in/min) or 2000 cc/min (122 cu•in/ Oil viscosity: 23 mm2/s min) at the neutral position of the handle or during operation, respectively. Replace with a complete set of pilot valve when an The wear condition to the left is considamount of wear at the sliding section is more than ered to correspond to the above amount 10 Pm (0.0004") in comparison with the non-slid- of leakage. ing section. Replace when a wear amount of the tip is more than 1 mm (0.04").

Unnecessary play in Replace when a play more than 2 mm(0.079") due A play generated by loosening of tightoperation section to wear and so on is found on the disk (302) or joint ening portion should be adjusted. section (301) of the operation section. Action stability Replace with a complete set of pilot valve when abnormal noise, hunting or primary pressure drop is generated during operation and the trouble cannot be remedied according to Section 33.2.3.6 TROUBLESHOOTING.

NOTE: Replace seal such as O-ring with new ones after every disassembly. 33.2.3.6

TROUBLESHOOTING

Phenomenon Secondary does not rise.

Possible Cause pressure 1) Primary pressure is insufficient. 2) Springs (241-1, 241-2) are broken or fatigued. 3) Clearance between spool (201-1, 201-2) and valve body (101) is abnormally large. 4) Play of handle portion is too much.

Secondary pressure is 1) unstable. 2) 3) Secondary pressure is 1) high. 2)

Sliding parts are caught. Tank line pressure varies. Air has contained into pipeline. Tank line pressure is high. Sliding parts are caught.

33-96

Corrective action 1) Secure primary pressure. 2) Replace with new ones. 3) Replace assembly. 4) Disassembly and reassembly or replace handle portion. 1) Correct. 2) Return directly to oil tank. 3) Release air. 1) Return directly to oil tank. 2) Correct.


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.4

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL)

33.2.4.1

CONSTRUCTION 472 501

A

471

A A

413

414

402

214 210 202 271 201 212 224

203

213

336 102 218

225

311 211 252

324 335

217 313 251 261 301 101

A. Apply grease to bearing Fig. 33-113 Pilot valve (Travel) Torque N•m (lbf•ft)

29.4 (22)

No.

NAME

Q’TY

101

CASING

1

102

CASING (DAMPER)

1

201

COVER

2

202

PLUG

203

Torque N•m (lbf•ft) 6.9 (5.1)

No.

NAME

Q’TY

252

PLUG

2

261

O-RING

3

271

SOCKET BOLT

4

4

301

SPOOL

4

GREASE CUP

4

311

SPRING SEAT

4

210

PACKING

4

313

WASHER

4

211

O-RING

4

324

SPRING

4

212

O-RING

4

335

SPRING

4

213

O-RING

2

336

SPRING

4

214

PUSH ROD

4

413

CAM SHAFT

2

217

SHIM

4

414

BUSHING

4

218

SPRING SEAT

4

420

CAM

2

224

PISTON

4

471

STEEL BALL

4

225

STEEL BALL

12

472

SET SCREW

2

251

RO PLUG

3

501

BELLOWS (BOOTS)

2

8.8 (6.5)

6.9 (5.1)

33-97


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.4.2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

(1) Special jig for disassembly and assembly Special jig 1 (for removal of bushing)

Fig. 33-114 Special jig 1 (2) Precautions for disassembly and assembly 1) Disassemble and assemble the pilot valve paying attention to the rust protection for dust, dirt, etc. in order not to allow them to enter in. 2) Handle parts carefully not to damage. 3) Write down the installing positions of respective part during disassembly, and assemble respective part to the position as they were before. (3) Disassembly 1) Stop respective port (P, T, 1, 2, 3, and 4) of the valve with plugs and clean the outer surface. 2) Fix the cleaned valve with vise. 3) Remove bellows (501) from cover (201). 4) Remove set screw (472). : 6 mm 5) Contact pry bar (ø7 or less) to one end of cam shaft (413), and strike it lightly with a hammer. 6) Remove cam (420). 7) Remove socket bolt (271). : 6 mm 8) Remove cover (201). 9) Remove the casing upper assembly and fix the assembly with vise, again. 10) Draw push rod (214) out of plug (202). 11) Remove plug (202) with grease cup (203), packing (210) and O-ring (212). 12) Remove piston (224). 13) Remove damping spring (336) from the casing. 14) Take out spring seat (218) from casing (102) with tweezers. 15) Take out steel ball (225) using magnet. 16) Fix the lower casing assembly with vise, and take out O-rings (211 and 213) from casing (101). 17) Remove reduction unit valve assembly and return spring (335) from casing (101). 18) Place cover (201) on the flat bench transverse, apply bushing (414) to special jig 1, strike it lightly with hammer, and pull the bushing out. 19) For disassembly of the reduction unit valve assembly first push spring seat (311) in and shift the spring seat crosswise making secondary pressure spring (324), remove it from spool (301) passing through the large hole.

33-98


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE •Handle the assembled unit as an assembly.

Fig. 33-115 20) Separate spool (301), spring (324) for secondary pressure setting, shim (217) and washer. •Handle the assembled unit as an assembly. And there may be unit on which washer is not installed. 21) Remove grease cup (203) from plug (202). 22) Remove O-ring (212) from plug (202). 33.2.4.3

ASSEMBLY

(1) Clean all parts before assembly, and dry them by means of compressed air. Don’t use rag. •

Repair the parts damaged when being disassembled, clean them, apply oil to the moving section, and install the same parts on the positions where they are before.

Replace every O-ring and packing with new ones.

(2) Install washer (313), shim (217), spring (324) for resetting the secondary pressure, and spring seat on spool (301) in order. (3) Pass spool (301) through the larger hole of spring seat (311), push the spring seat in, and install it making the spring for the secondary pressure deflect and shifting the spring seat laterally. (4) Fix casing (101) with vise, and place spring (335) for return in casing (101). (5) Place the reduction unit subassembly described above par. 2) and 3) in casing (101). •

Install them on the positions as they were before.

When placing the reduction unit subassembly in, pay attention to the spool lower end so as not to bring into contact with the corner of the casing (C).

C

Fig. 33-116 (6) Place O-rings (211, 213) in casing (101). (7) Fix upper casing (102) with vise and place the steel ball in it. (8) Place spring seat (218) in casing (102) with tweezers. (9) Place damping spring (336) in casing (102).

33-99


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (10) Install piston (224). (11) Place O-ring (212) in plug (202). (12) Place packing (210) in plug (202). •

Pay attention to the direction when placing the packing (P) in.

•

Apply grease slightly before placing packing (P) in.

Fig. 33-117 (13) Place grease cup (203) in plug (202). (14) Install push rod (214) on plug (202). (15) Place the push rod subassembly which is assembled by the procedures in par. 11) to 14) in casing (102). (16) Put cover (201) on the flat work bench, press bushing (414) with special jig 1, and press fit the bushing striking lightly. (17) Fix the lower cover assembly which is assembled by the procedures in paragraph 2) to 6) with vise, and install the upper cover assembly which is assembled by the procedures in paragraph 7 to 15) on it. (18) Install cover (201) on casing (102). (19) Tighten socket bolt (271) to the specified torque. (20) Install cam (420) on cover (201). (21) Insert cam shaft (413) from the outside pressing cam (420). (22) Apply Loctite #241 or equivalent to the thread of socket bolt. (23) Tighten socket set bolt (472) to the specified torque. (24) Incline cam (420), apply grease to the top end of push rod (214), and fill grease cup (203) of plug (202) with grease. (25) After fitting the top end of bellows (501) in cam (402), fit the lower side in the groove of cover (201).

33-100


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.4.4

TROUBLESHOOTING

Phenomenon Causes Secondary pres- 1) Insufficient primary pressure sure does not rise. 2) Permanent set in fatigue of spring (324) for setting of secondary pressure. 3) The gap between spool and casing is too large. 4) The control section is loosened. Secondary pres- 1) Sliding part is not smooth. sure is unstable. 2) Variation of pressure of tank line 3) Air contamination in piping Secondary pres- 1) Pressure of tank line is high. sure is high. 2) Sliding part is not smooth. Damping does not 1) Air is accumulated in piston chamber. work. 2) Sliding part is not smooth. 3) Permanent set in fatigue of damping spring (336) 4) Gap between damping piston (224) and casing (damper) (102) is too large. 5) Malfunction of check valve

Corrective action 1) Secure primary pressure. 2) Replace it with new one. 3) Replace it with complete remote control valve. 4) Replace parts of control section. 1) Repair unsmooth section. 2) Return oil to oil tank directly. 3) Bleed air by operating several times. 1) Return oil to oil tank directly. 2) Repair unsmooth section. 1) Bleed air by operating several times. 2) Repair unsmooth section. 3) Replace it with new one.

4) Replace it with complete remote control valve. 5) Disassemble and check on check valve section. 6) Orifice of damping piston (224) is too large. 6) Replace damping piston. Damping torque is 1) Sliding part is not smooth. 1) Repair unsmooth section. heavy. 2) Orifice of damping piston (224) is clogged. 2) Repair or replace damping piston.

33-101


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.5 33.2.5.1

SLEWING MOTOR CONSTRUCTION 242

A

510

B

B

411 409 407 405 404 410 406 412

403

408

402

412

401

301 302 304 305 244

303

A A-A 235 236 245 238 223 218 231 224

201 217 225 221 215 205 232 212 204

237

213

234

206

233

209 505

50

306

208 503

50

203

207 501

51

226

210 502

214

130 504

124

202

107

129

118

127

111

105

106

216

117

103

110

109 123

119

113

125

102

136

108 114 101 116 128 115 112 104

33-102

51

508 509

B-B


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

No. NAME

Q’TY

(reduction assy)

No. NAME

Q’TY

No. NAME

Q’TY

204 Cylinder

1

302 Check valve

2

101 Casing

1

205 Valve plate

1

303 Plug

2

102 Carrier 1

1

206 Piston

9

304 Spring

2

103 Carrier 2

1

207 Shoe

9

305 O-ring ; 1B P11

2

306 O-ring ; 1B P18

2

104 Pinion shaft

1

208 Shoe holder

1

105 Internal gear A

1

209 Cylinder holder

1

106 Spur gear 1

4

210 Swash plate

1

401 Seat

2

107 Spur gear 2

3

212 Retainer

2

402 Retainer

2

(Relief valve assy)

108 Sun gear 1

1

213 Pin

3

403 Poppet

2

109 Sun gear 2

1

214 Filter

2

404 Piston

2

110 Pin 1

4

215 Spring

1

405 Cap

2

111

3

216 Ball bearing

1

406 Spring

2

Pin 2

112 Seal ring

1

217 Ball bearing

1

407 Spacer

*

113 Thrust collar

1

218 O-ring ; 1B G120

1

408 O-ring ; 1B P14

2

114 Pre-load collar (semi-circular) 2

221 Snap ring

1

409 O-ring ; 1B P18

2

115 Taper roller bearing

223 Socket bolt ; M12u35

5

410 O-ring ; 1B P22

2

1

116 Taper roller bearing

1

224 Spring pin

1

411 O-ring ; 1B P28

2

117 Roller

68

225 Parallel pin ; ø6u14

1

412 Backup ring

4

118 Roller

69

226 Parallel pin

1

(Timer assy)

119 Thrust washer

14

231 Piston

1

501 Valve block

1

123 Snap ring (for shaft 30)

1

232 Spring B

12

502 Spool

1

124 Snap ring (for shaft 20)

7

233 Friction plate

2

503 Piston

1

125 Spring pin

7

234 Separator plate

2

504 Stopper

1

127 Pin

4

235 O-ring ; 1B G100

1

505 Spring (1)

1

128 Oil seal

1

236 O-ring ; 1B G110

1

506 Spring (2)

1

129 O-ring

1

237 Backup ring

1

507 Spring seat

1

130 Socket bolt ; M8u25

5

238 Backup ring

1

508 Plug ; PF1/4

4

136 Ring

1

242 Socket bolt ; M6u15

4

509 O-ring ; 1B P11

4

244 Socket bolt ; M8u50

4

510 O-ring ; 1B P7

2

201 Body

1

245 O-ring ; 1B P18

2

511 Plug

2

202 Housing

1

512 Plug

1

203 Shaft

1

(Motor assy)

(Valve assy) 301 Cover

1

33-103


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.5.2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

(1) General Precautions 1) Work at a clean place and take care so dirt, paint particles and water do not adhere to the parts. Prepare a container to put in removed parts. 2) Before removing it, clean the outside of the body to be free from dirt and remove paint at joints with a wire brush. 3) Put markings on jointing parts before removal so all parts are installed where they were. 4) Handle the removed parts carefully so as not to score them. 5) Clean the removed parts thoroughly in cleaning oil. 6) Inspect that the removed parts are not worn or seized abnormally and eliminate fins and burrs, using emery paper. 7) Replace seals and snap rings with new ones. (2) Tools No.

Tools required

1

Torque Wrench (Pre-set type)

45N {10.1 lbf•f} (JIS B4650)

2

90N {198 lbf•f} (JIS B4650)

3

180N {397 lbf•f} (JIS B4650)

4

Hexagon Wrench for Torque Wrench Opposing flat

6

5

Opposing flat

8

6

Opposing flat

10

7

Torque Wrench (For single use)

T=147.1±19.6N•m {108±14.5 lbf•m} Opposing flat 36

8

Allen Wrench

Opposing flat

6

9

Opposing flat

8

10

Opposing flat

10

11

Spanner

Opposing flat

36

12

Flat-Blade Screwdriver

Width

6~10

13

Snap Ring Pliers

ø 28 for hole ø 20, 30 for shaft

14

Hammer

15

Plastic Hammer

20

Others

Grease Oil (Specified hydraulic oil) Wire brush Emery paper Sealant (Three Bond #1305)

33-104


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3) Disassembling Of Hydraulic Motor 1) Loosen the socket bolts (130) fastening the hydraulic motor assy to the reduction and remove the hydraulic motor assy from the reduction unit. : 6mm • When removing the hydraulic motor assy from the reduction, open the drain port. • If it is hard to remove the assy, remove it by putting a flat-blade screwdriver into the mating surface of the body and remove burrs thoroughly. 2) Loosen socket bolt (244) and remove valve assy. : 5mm • Do not remove the valve assy except when necessary.

3) Remove the relief valve assy. : 36mm • Do not remove the relief valve assy except when necessary.

4) Remove plug (303), O-rings (305), spring (304) and check valve (302). : 8mm

33-105


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 5) Loosen socket bolt (223) and remove the body (201). : 10mm • Take care so valve plate (205) and spring (232) do not drop.

6) Remove valve plate (205), spring (232) and Orings (218), (245).

7) Remove brake piston (231) assy from housing (202). Then remove O-rings (235), (236) and backup rings (237), (238). • Brake piston (231) may be removed if air is blown slowly from brake release pressure port Pp. • On that occasion, blow air slowly so the brake piston does not pop up suddenly.

8) Remove two separator plates (234) and two friction plates (233).

33-106


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 9) Remove cylinder (204) as an assy.

10) Remove the piston (206) assy and shoe (207), shoe holder (208), barrel holder (209), pin (213). • The piston and the shoe can not be removed as they are caulked together. • Take care to miss the small parts. • When replacing the pistons because of the wear of the shoes, order nine pistons as a set.

207

11) Remove snap ring (221), retainer (212) and spring (215) from cylinder (204). 221 212 215 212

204

12) Remove shaft (203) and swash plate (210). • In case the shaft is hard to remove, tap it lightly from the end face of the opposite side by means of a plastic mallet. • Ball bearing (216) is press fitted to the shaft ; do not remove the shaft except where the ball bearing is replaced.

33-107

206

208

209

213

204


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 13) Remove two filters (214) and parallel pin (225).

(4) Disassembling of Reduction Unit 1) Remove sun gear 2 (109).

2) Remove carrier 2 assy (103) and carrier 1 assy (102). 103

113

CARRIER 2 ASSY

102

CARRIER 1 ASSY 3) Remove the thrust collar (113) installed back side of the carrier 2 assy (103).

33-108


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 4) Remove the snap ring (123) of the carrier 2 (103), then remove the thrust washer (119), spur gear 2 (107) and roller (118). • Number of rollers (118) : Twenty three rollers by one spur gear 2.

107

118

124 119

123

109

103

113

125

108 111

CARRIER 2 ASSY 5) Remove the snap ring (123), then remove sun gear 1 (108). • Pin 2 (111) is fixed by spring pin (125) after press-fitting. Do not remove it except where necessary.

6) Remove the snap ring (124) of the carrier 1 (102), then remove the thrust washer (119), spur gear 1 (106) and roller (117). • Number of rollers (117) : Seventeen rollers by one spur gear. • Pin 1 (110) is fixed to spring pin (125) after pressfitting. 106 117

124

119 102

119 125 110

CARRIER 1 ASSY

33-109


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 7) Remove ring (136) and split preload collar (114). • Place the tip of a flat-blade screwdriver in the clearance between two preload collars and remove them by striking them with a hammer. • Since the clearance of it to the taper roller bearing has been adjusted, do not separate the ring and the preload collars except when necessary.

8) Remove the pinion shaft (104). • In order to keep the removing distance of pinion shaft, place a support of about 150mm under the flange of the casing and remove the pinion shaft by pressing the end face of it by press. • Since the clearance of it to the taper roller bearing has been adjusted, do not remove it except when necessary.

9) Remove the outer race of the taper roller bearings (115), (116) and oil seal (128). • Since the taper roller bearing and the outer race are hard to remove, do not remove them except when necessary. • Do not reuse oil seal.

10) Remove the inner race of the taper roller bearing (115) and seal ring (112) from pinion shaft (104). • The taper roller bearing are fitted to the inner race by press-fitting ; do not separate them except when necessary. • Do not reuse seal ring.

33-110


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (5) Assembly of Motor 1) Drive the parallel pin (225) into housing (202).

2) Install two filters (214) and parallel pin (226) into the housing (202). • Direction of installing filter Hydraulic Motor Side

F

214

Reduction Unit Side F. Filter 3) Press-fit the ball bearing (216) into the shaft (203). • Direction of ball bearing to press-fit in 216

203

S

S. Shield side 4) Install the swash plate (210) into shaft (203) and install it to the housing (202). • Align the parallel pin (226) on the housing side with the pin hole of the swash plate.

33-111


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 5) Install the retainer (212) and spring (215) in the cylinder (204) and fix them with the snap ring (221). 221 212 215 212

204

6) Install the piston (206) assy and shoe (207) in the shoe holder (208) to make the shoe holder assy.

7) Install three pins (213) into cylinder (204). Fit two friction plates (233) and one separator plate (234) in that order of the figure. Make a cylinder assy by the shoe assy and cylinder holder (209). 207 206 208 209 213 204

8) Install the cylinder assy made up under para. 7) to housing (202) through shaft (203) till shoe (207) touches swash plate (210).

33-112


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 9) First of all, install one separator plate (234) to the groove of housing (202).

10) On that occasion, install one friction plate (233) on the outer circumference of the cylinder assy to the groove of housing (202).

11) Install one separator plate (234) to the groove of housing (202).

12) Install O-rings (235), (236) and backup rings (237), (238) to assemble the piston assy (231).

237 235 231 236 238

33-113


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 13) Installing the piston assy into the housing (202). • On that occasion, coat the O ring with a thin film of grease. Use care so the sealing material is not trapped in between.

14) Install spring pin (224) and ball bearing (217) to body (201).

15) Fit O-ring (218) on the cover (301).

16) Install the valve plate (205) on the cover (301). • Install the valve plate by directing the metal lining surface toward the cylinder. • Coat the cover of the valve plate with a thin film of grease so the valve plate does not fall.

33-114


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 17) Install twelve springs (232) into the hole of cover (301). • Coat the spring seat with grease so the spring does not fall.

18) Install housing (202) and cover (301) together. • Align the spring pin of cover (301) with the pin bore of housing (202). • Use care so the spring does not fall and is not bent.

19) Tighten the socket bolt (223). : 10 mm, Tightening torque: 88.3~112.8 N•m {65.1~83.2 lbf•ft}

20) Fit O-ring (305) to plug (303), install spring (304) and check valve (302) to cover (301), and tighten it. : 8mm Tightening torque: 58.8±2.9 N•m {43.4±2.1 lbf•ft}

33-115


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 21) Install the relief valve. : 36mm Tightening torque: 147.1±19.6 N•m {108.5±14.5 lbf•ft}

22) Install two O-rings (306) to valve assy.

23) Install the hydraulic timer to housing (202) of the hydraulic pump with four socket bolts (137). : 6mm Tightening torque: 25.5~32.4 N•m {18.8~23.9 lbf•ft}

24) Install timer valve assy. Tightening torque: 11.8±1.0 N•m {8.7±0.7 lbf•ft}

33-116


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (6) Assembly of Reduction Unit

128

1) Press-fit oil seal (128) into the casing (101). • Press the oil seal so it does not tilt by means of a circular plate, paying attention to the installing direction of the oil seal. 74.5

101

C R P

C. Circular plate R. Reduction side P. Pinion side 2) Install the seal ring (112) onto the pinion shaft (104). 104

• Direction of installation of seal ring.

P/H P/S

112

P/H.Pinion shaft side P/S.Pinion side 3) Press-fit the inner race of the taper roller bearing (115) into the shaft (104). • After press-fitting it, coat the roller surface of the taper roller bearing with grease and rotate it so grease spreads all over the roller.

104

115

4) Press-fit the outer race of the taper roller bearing (116) into the casing (101).

33-117

116


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 5) Press-fit the outer race of the taper roller bearing (115) into the casing (101).

6) Apply grease in the space in the casing (101) where the taper roller bearing (115) is to be installed. • Grease amount:Approx 80% of the empty capacity

7) Install the shaft (104) into the casing (101). • Take care that the oil seal lip is not damaged by the shaft.

8) Turn over the casing (101) and press-fit the inner race of the taper roller bearing (116).

33-118


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 9) Install two semicircular preload collars (114). • The thickness of the preload collar shall be plus 0 to 0.05mm (0.002") against actual value: L between the end face of the taper roller bearing and the end face of the groove on the shaft side. L P(114) T (116) S O(128)

L. Grove width O.Oil seal P. Preload collar S. Shaft T. Taper roller bearing 10) Install the thrust washer (119) on the pin 1 (110) of the carrier 1 (102).

11) Install the spur gear (106) and insert the roller (117). • Number of rollers: Seventeen rollers by one spur gear (106)

12) Install the thrust washer (119), then fix the snap ring (123).

33-119


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 13) Install the sun gear 1 (108) to back side of the carrier 2 (103) and fix it with the snap ring (123).

14) Install the thrust washer (119) on the pin 2 (111) of the carrier 2 (103).

15) Install the spur gear 2 (107) and insert the roller (118). • Number of rollers: Twenty three rollers by one spur gear (107)

16) Install the thrust washer (119), then fix the snap ring (124).

33-120


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 17) Install ring (136) between the outside of semicircular preload collar (114) and casing (101).

18) Install the carrier 1 assy (102) in the casing (101).

19) Install the thrust collar (113) to back side of the carrier 2 assy (103).

20) Install the carrier 2 assy (103) in the casing (101). • On that occasion, take care so the thrust collar on the rear face does not fall.

33-121


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 21) Install the sun gear 2 (109) in the center of the carrier 2 assy (103).

22) Fill hydraulic oil into the casing (101). • Oil level:Above the center of the tooth width of spur gear 2 (107) and below the upper end face of it. 107

• Oil type: ISO VG46

23) Fit O ring (129) to the spigot joint of the hydraulic motor housing. • Apply a thin film of grease to the O-ring.

24) Install the hydraulic motor in the casing (101), then tighten the socket bolt (130). : 6mm Tightening torque: 29.4±2.9 N•m {21.7±2.1 lbf•ft} • In this case, install the hydraulic motor shaft into the splined part of sun gear 2 (109). • Apply Three-Bond #1305 to the socket bolts.

33-122


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (7) Troubleshooting Problem

Location

Cause

Remedy

Not slewing (Pressure rises)

Relief valve

Oil pressure is low

Replace valve assy

Malfunction of motion Hydraulic motor

Seizure of sliding surface Replace motor assy Internal leakage

Reduction unit

Damaged gear

Overload Insufficient torque (Pressure rises)

Replace reduction unit assy Reduce overload

Relief valve

Pressure setting is low

Replace valve assy

Malfunction of motion Hydraulic motor

Wear of sliding surface

Replace motor assy

Internal leakage Reduction unit

Damaged gear

Replace pinion kit or carrier kit

Damaged bearing Abnormal noise

Noise in piping (Cavitation sound)

Insufficient flow-rate

Hydraulic motor

Damage of sliding sur- Replace motor assy face

Reduction unit

Damaged gear

Correct piping

Replace pinion kit or carrier kit

Damaged bearing Pinion Oil leaks

Mating valve

Damaged gear surface

of Damaged O-ring Loose bolt

Mating surface of mo- Damaged O-ring tor Loose bolt

Replace O-ring Retighten bolt Replace O-ring Retighten bolt

Mating surface of re- Damaged O-ring duction unit Loose bolt

Retighten bolt

Pinion

Damaged oil seal

Replace pinion kit

Malfunction of motion

Replace valve assy

Time-lag of starting and Relief valve stopping Check valve Abnormal heat

Replace pinion kit

Replace O-ring

Internal leakage

Hydraulic motor

Damaged or seized slid- Replace motor assy ing surface

Reduction unit

Abnormal gear teeth Abnormal bearing

33-123

Replace pinion kit or carrier kit


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (8) Maintenance Standards 1) Slewing Motor Parts

Judgment

Service limit

Remedy

Shaft

Abnormal wear of output shaft splines. Wear depth 25Pm (0.001") or more

Cylinder

Contact surface with valve plate.

Wear depth 20Pm (0.0008") or more Replace

Valve plate

Sliding surface of cylinder.

Wear depth 20Pm (0.0008") or more Replace

Piston and shoe

Caulked part of shoe. Sliding surface Play 0.3mm (0.012") or more of shoe.

Replace

Swash plate

Wear of sliding surface of shoe.

Replace

Wear depth 0.1mm (0.004") or more

Inside of the body Damage, rust

Replace

Replace

2) Reduction Unit Parts

Judgment

Gears in the casing Abnormal wear of gear.

Service limit

Remedy

Pitting extending Ratio of pitted area to tooth Replace it as a pinion kit. over 5 % or more surface. of tooth surface. PITTING

Carrier 1, 2

Deformed or damaged splined Visible damage part. Play of pin 1 (carrier 1) Play of pin 2 (carrier 2)

Sun gear 1, Sun gear 2 Spur gear 1, Spur gear 2

Replace carrier kit.

Eccentric wear of More than 0.005mm play pin bore. when checked by hand.

Abnormal wear of tooth sur- Pitting, extending over 5 % or more face. of tooth surface. Damaged tooth.

PITTING

Replace

Wear of rolling surface of nee- Visible flaking or dle bearing roller (spur gear 1, pitting. 2).

Replace

Pin 1, Pin 2

Wear of rolling surface of nee- Visible flaking or dle bearing roller. pitting.

Replace it as a carrier kit.

Each bearing.

Visible flaking or Pitting on roller needle. Pitting on rolling surface of in- pitting. ner and outer race.

Replace

Damage, abnormal rust. Other parts (Socket bolt and thrust washer and so on)

Replace

33-124


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.6

SWIVEL JOINT

33.2.6.1

CONSTRUCTION

14

5

1 11 10

16

8 6

P F E D C B A G

3

15 13 7, 17 4

12

9

2

Fig. 33-119 No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

STEM

1

10

DUST SEAL

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

STEM BODY FLANGE SPACER PIN SLIPPER SEAL NAME PLATE O-RING O-RING

1 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

DUST SEAL DUST SEAL SNAP RING BOLT (M10u30) PLUG (PF1/4) SPRING WASHER BACK-UP RING CLEVIS

1 1 1 4 3 4 1 2

33-125


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.6.2 33.2.6.2.1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY General precautions

For disassembly and assembly, select the clean area and prepare clean containers to put the removed parts.

Clean around the port and remove the paints of the joint with wire brush.

Clean the removed parts with cleaning solvent, like light oil, etc.

Replace seals with new ones every disassembly, and apply grease lightly.

Check every part for severe wear and seizure, and remove burr, etc. with emery paper.

Check that seal groove is free from foreign substances, dust, etc.

33.2.6.2.2 (1)

Disassembly

Loosen bolt and remove flange (3). Fix the body (2) with vise. : 17 mm

2

or

3

: 17 mm

(2)

Take out O-ring (9), snap ring (12) and spacer (4) from the body (2).

2 4

9 12

(3)

Remove shaft (1) from the body (2). • Apply the knock pin (K) to the end face of the shaft, and strike it with hammer. • Choose the knock pin (K) made of copper, plastic, etc. K. Knock pin K 2 1

33-126


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (4)

Remove dust seal (11) from the stern (1).

11

(5)

Remove seal, etc. from the inside of the body. • Be sure of the position of seal, etc. referring to the construction drawing. • Take out O-ring with the pointed tool like a gimlet.

33.2.6.2.3 (1)

Assembling

Insert seals in the body. • Check the seal position referring to the construction drawing. • Ensure that O-rings are free from twisting. • Don’t deform or bend the slipper seal extremely.

(2)

Install dust seal (11) to shaft (1). • Apply enough grease to the lip section of the dust seal.

33-127


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3)

Install shaft (1) to body (2). • Apply hydraulic oil or grease around the shaft lightly. • Strike the shaft with a plastic hammer carefully not to damage seal.

(4)

Fit thrust ring (4) and snap ring (12). • Fit the snap ring in the groove correctly.

" (5)

Fit O-ring (9) and install flange (3).

(6)

Install spring washer (15) and bolt (13). : 17 mm

!

or : 17 mm • Tightening torque: 46.5 N•m (34 lbf•ft) • Put pipe through the locking pin of the shaft, and check that the shaft rotates smoothly at a torque of approx. 78~108 N•m (58~80 lbf•ft)

33-128


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.6.3

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

33.2.6.3.1

Check Procedures and Remedy

Check Interval 2000 hr

Place Checked Seals which prevent external leakage of hydraulic oil. 4000 hr All seal parts. Disassemble and All sliding portion. check whether there is leakage or not When disassembling All parts. due to trouble

33.2.6.3.2

Check Procedure Check if oil is leaking out.

Remedy Replace the O-rings if there is leakage.

– Check for abnormal wear, defects, corrosion, etc. due to seizing, foreign material being caught, etc. Check for abnormal wear, defects, corrosion, etc. due to seizing, foreign material being caught, etc.

Replace all the seal parts Recondition in accordance with the service limit. Recondition in accordance with the service limit. Regarding the seal kit, replace

Parts Service Limit

(1) Body and Shaft Portion Judgment Criteria Seal Parts and Sliding Por- • Wearing of surface treated with induction hardening, tion and coming off of surface due to seizing, foreign material getting caught, etc. Body and shaft sliding por- • Abnormal wear or defects by 0.1 mm (0.004 in) deep or tion other than seals. deeper due to seizing or foreign material getting caught, etc. • Defects less than 0.1 mm (0.004 in) deep. Portions which slide against • Wearing by 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or more, or abnormal the thrust ring. wear. • Wear less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in). • Defects due to seizing or foreign material getting caught, etc. which are within the wear limit of 0.5 mm (0.020 in) and within repairable level.

Remedy Replace

Replace

Repair with an oil stone. Replace. Repair so that is smooth. Repair so that is smooth.

(2) Flange and Thrust Ring Portion Judgment Criteria • Portions of flange which • Wearing by 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or more, or abnormal slide against the shaft wear. end. • Wear less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in). • Defects due to seizing or foreign material catching, etc., • Thrust ring which are within the wear limit of 0.5 mm (0.020 in) and to within repairable level.

33-129

Remedy Replace Repair so that is smooth. Repair so that is smooth.


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE (3) Slipper Seal

1.5mm (0.059")

Judgment Criteria

Remedy

• Seal is excessively extruded from groove.

Replace

• Slipper seal width is 1.5 mm (0.059 in) or more small- Replace er than the width of the seal groove.

• Unequal wear of 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or more.

Replace

Judgment Criteria

Remedy

• O-ring is excessively extruded from groove.

Replace

• Unequal wear of 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or more.

Replace

Judgment Criteria

Remedy

0.5mm (0.02")

(4) O-ring

0.5mm (0.02")

(5) Backup Ring

• Thickness of 1.5 mm (0.059 in) or less Width of 4 mm Replace (0.16 in) or less.

4mm (0.16")

1.5mm (0.059")

33-130


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE 33.2.6.3.3

Inspection After Assembly

After assembly is completed, check for leakage of oil in each circuit using the equipment shown below.

(1) Connect a pipe (3) between the hydraulic pump (2) and the shaft (1) side port. (2) Connect a pressure gauge to the body (4) side. (3) Increase the pressure gradually to 22.6 MPa (3270 psi) adjusting the relief valve (6), then perform 1 minute leak test. •

Open the neighboring ports on both sides and check visually for leakage from the ports.

Check the body for crack, which may cause oil leakage, by a dye check.

33.2.6.4

TROUBLESHOOTING

Phenomenon External Oil Leakage Internal Oil Leakage

Shaft Sticks Flange Looseness

Cause • O-ring is defective. • Thrust ring is defective.

Corrective action • Replace all the seal parts. • Replace all the seal parts.

• Excessive wear on sliding • Replace the assembly. surfaces. • Shaft and body are stuck to- • Carry out grinding and honing. If excessive looseness gether. cause oil leakage, replace the assembly. • Capscrew tightening is insuf- • Retighten to the specified torque. ficient.

33-131


33. UPPER SLEWING STRUCTURE

[MEMO]

33-132


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 34.1 REMOVING AND INSTALLING ...................................................................... 34-3 34.1.1 NAME OF TRAVEL SYSTEM PARTS ..................................................... 34-3 34.1.2 CRAWLER ............................................................................................... 34-3 34.1.3 UPPER ROLLER .................................................................................... 34-12 34.1.4 MAINTENANCE STANDARDS .............................................................. 34-17 34.1.5 TOOLS AND JIGS .................................................................................. 34-18 34.1.6 LOWER ROLLER ................................................................................... 34-19 34.1.7 FRONT IDLER ....................................................................................... 34-27 34.1.8 IDLER ADJUSTER ................................................................................. 34-33 34.1.9 SPROCKET ........................................................................................... 34-37 34.1.10TRAVEL MOTOR ................................................................................... 34-38 34.1.11SLEWING BEARING .............................................................................. 34-40 34.2 DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ........................................................ 34-43 34.2.1 TRAVEL MOTOR ................................................................................... 34-43



34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

34-1


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM PREFACE (1) This manual covers all the procedures required for the dis/re-assembling of the machine in compilation by items. (2) This manual consists of 34.1;REMOVING AND INSTALLING , and 34.2;DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING. (3) Though general dis/re-assembling procedures are able to carry out nearly in the order of Table of Contents, some items may be omitted because of the circumstances at the actual repair work or the purpose of time saving. (4) Please understand that it is impossible to accord the descriptions with all cases of the actual process for the removal/installation of the assembled components, because of difference in the field conditions or defective section and the convenience in compilation of this manual. (5) Please be aware the importance to establish the working order. Prior to carry out the removal/installation and dis/re-assembling works, select the sections presumably required, fully understand the description, and itemize the working procedures, then start up the work.

34-2


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

34.1

REMOVING AND INSTALLING

34.1.1

NAME OF TRAVEL SYSTEM PARTS

9 5 2

6 3 4 8

7

Fig. 34-1 Name and location of parts 2. 3. 4. 5.

Craweler Upper roller Lower roller Front idler

34.1.2

6. 7. 8. 9.

Idler adjuster Sprocket Travel motor Slewing bearing

CRAWLER

34.1.2.1

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

34.1.2.1.1

Removing Rubber Crawler

(1) Lift the one side of machine with attachment, as shown in Fig. 34-2, and place support under lower frame to support machine (S). S

Fig. 34-2 Crawler removing posture (2) Loosen grease nipple for crawler adjuster, discharging grease in cylinder, and release tension of crawler. : 17 mm •

When loosening the grease nipple (G) of the adjuster, do not loosen it more than one turn.

Where grease does not come out well, drive the crawler forward / reverse. The over loosening of grease nipple will cause it to jump out incurring danger of injury. So be careful not to over loosen the grease nipple. Keep body and face away from the grease nipple for safety.

G

Fig. 34-3 Loosing crawler tension

34-3


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (3) Put steel pipes (P) in the rubber crawler, turn the sprocket in the reverse direction slowly and when the rubber crawler has floated off the idler stop the rotating. (4) Slide the rubber crawler sideways, and remove it.

P

Fig. 34-4 Removing rubber crawler 34.1.2.1.2

Installing rubber crawler

Installation work is performed in the reverse order of removal. (1) Engage the rubber crawler with the sprocket and mount it on the idler. (2) Put steel pipes (P) in the rubber crawler, turn the sprocket in the reverse direction slowly and then the rubber crawler has floated off the idler, stop the rotating. (3) Slide the rubber crawler to the position to be set on idler exactly.

P

Fig. 34-5 Installing rubber crawler

(4) Confirm that the rubber crawler is engaged securely with the sprocket, idler and lower roller. (5) Tighten the grease nipple for the crawler adjuster, and adjust tension by feeding grease. : 17 mm, T= 73.5 N•m (54.2 lbf•ft) Rubber shoe Appropriate tension A: 85~95 mm (3.35~3.74 in) Steel shoe Appropriate tension B: 130~150 mm (5.12~5.91 in)

Fig. 34-6 Feeding grease

B

Fig. 34-7 Crawler tension

34-4


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.2.2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES (STEEL: OPT)

(1) Removal 1) The crawler track link includes a set of master pin(6), which should be placed at the position front of the front idler.

6

Fig. 34-8 Position of master pin 2) Put square timbers A and B under the shoe at the top end of the crawler and between the crawler and the link over the track frame to reduce the load to the master pin.

B

A

Fig. 34-9 Removing of master pin 3) Loosen grease nipple (G) for track spring adjustment, discharge grease in the cylinder and slack the tension of the shoe.

B

: 17 mm

WARNING When loosening grease nipple for adjustment, don’t turn it more than one turn to loosen. When grease is remained, move the machine forward and backward slightly. Be careful that the grease nipple may be popped out.

G A

Fig. 34-10 Loosening grease nipple for adjustment

34-5


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 4) Straighten the curve of lock pin, and draw out it striking by hammer.

B

• Remove lock pin (8) with shoe plate. 5) Apply master pin drawing out jig (a) to the small diameter section of master pin (6), and draw it out striking by hammer.

WARNING

6 A

Especially Pay attention to the front idler which may spring out due to the force of spring when drawing out master pin (6) to repair broken parts relating to the front idler. Be careful not to be injured by scattering materials, when large hammer is used.

8

Fig. 34-11 Removing lock pin a

Fig. 34-12 Removing master pin

WARNING Don’t approach the machine because the end of the crawler may drop just before extending the track link assembly to the ground while rotating the sprocket. Put wooden block just in case.

A

6) Move the machine back slowly, and remove the crawler extending it to the ground. Weight of steel crawler (One side):

Fig. 34-13 Removing crawler

E40.2SR: 260 kg (570 lb) E50.2SR: 275 kg (610 lb) (2) Installation 1) Install the crawler to the position where the end of the track link engages with the sprocket placing the track link narrowing toward the end toward the front idler side as shown in the figure. Fig. 34-14 Direction of crawler

34-6


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 2) Move the machine forward slowly by inserting the bar in the master pin hole on the end of the crawler and assisting so that the sprocket engages with the track link, and also assist so that the crawler catches the normal position and engages with the front idler using pry-bar.

Fig. 34-15 Installing crawler 3) Hook chain block to the upper and lower parts of the shoe plate, and align the master pin hole pulling by the chain block.

B

A

Fig. 34-16 Alignment of pin holes 4) Align master link holes on the both ends of the crawler link with the link holes inserting pry-bar, apply master pin drawing out jig (a) used when removed and press fit master pin by hammer.

6 a

WARNING When large hammer is used, be careful not to be injured by scattering materials. Apply molybdenum grease to the master pin before press fitting. Fig. 34-17 Press fitting master pin 5) After press fitting master pin (6), insert lock pin (8) and bend the top end in advance. 6) After completion of installation, adjust the tension of crawler by the same procedure of the rubber crawler. : 17 mm G

Fig. 34-18 Extension of track link (Example for rubber crawler)

34-7


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.2.3

CONSTRUCTION

(1) Construction of rubber crawler No. 1

Q’TY per machine 2

NAME RUBBER CRAWLER ASSY

1

Fig. 34-19 Rubber crawler assy •

This standard machine provides rubber crawler.

(2) Construction of steel crawler

No. 1

NAME Track link (RH)

Q’ty (for one side) E40.2SR E50.2SR 35 37

2

Track link (LH)

35

37

3

Master link (RH)

1

1

4

Master link (LH)

1

1

5

Master pin

1

1

6

Lock pin

1

1

7

Track pin

35

37

8

Bushing

35

37

9

Bushing

1

1

10

Collar

2

2

11

Bolt

144

152

12

Nut

144

152

13

Shoe

36

28 Fig. 34-20 Construction of steel crawler

34-8


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.2.4

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

(1) Rubber crawler C

R

B B

L

M B-B

Fig. 34-21 Rubber crawler shoe L. Distance between the bottom of frame and top of rub- R Rubber cover ber crawler M. Center line of steel cord C. Core Unit: mm (in) ITEM Sag of rubber crawler L

STANDARD VALUE

REPAIRABLE LEVEL

85~95 (3.35~3.74)

— Where the depth of them does not reach to the steel cords. None Where 10 percent of cores are visible from outside. — —

Cracks and notch on rubber crawler

None

Breakage of steel cords

None

Contact surface of rubber crawler and lower roller

None

Height (H) Lug projection (h)

94 (3.7) 25 (0.98)

34-9

SERVICEABILITY LIMIT — Where the depth of them reaches to the steel cords. Exist Where half of cores are visible from outside. 70 (2.8) 0 (0)

REMEDY Adjustment Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (2) Steel crawler (Track link)

C. Collar D. Bushing

L. Distance between the bottom of frame and top of rubber crawler

F. Track pin

M. Master link

I.

P. Pin

Master pin

T. Track bushing

34-10


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM Unit: mm (in) Symbol

ITEM

A

Link pitch

B

Bushing O.D.

C

Link height

D

Interference of bushing and link

Reference value 135 (5.32) ø35 (ø1.38 ) 67 (2.64) Basic dimension Sha ft Hol e

E

F

Interference of track pin and link

Fitting of master pin and link

G

Clearance gap of link

H

Tightening torque of shoe bolt

L

Slack of iron crawler

Service Repairable level limit 139 (5.47) 143 (5.63)

Sha ft Hol e Sha ft Hol e

ø35 (ø1.38

)

ø34.85 (ø1.37

ø32 (ø1.26)

ø31 (ø1.22)

63 (2.48) Fit

62 (2.44) Fit

Interference 0.11~0.35 (0.0043~ 0.0138)

Interference 0

Remedy Parts over the critical value in use should be replaced with link assembly.

Replace

)

ø22.3 (ø0.878

)

ø22.16 (ø0.872

Interference 0.1~0.18 (0.004~0.007)

Interference 0

Clearance 0.0~0.07 (0.0~ 0.0028)

Replace link.

5 (both side) (0.197)

7 (both side) (0.276)

Replace

)

ø22.16 (ø0.872

)

ø22.16 (ø0.872

)

0.5 (One side) (0.02)

216 N•m {159 lbf•ft} 130~150 mm (5.12~5.91)

Repair weld. —

34-11

Adjust the tension.


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.3 34.1.3.1 34.1.3.1.1

UPPER ROLLER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Removal

(1) Loosen the grease nipple (G) for crawler adjusting within one turn to discharge grease and release tension on the crawler. : 17 mm

WARNING Turn the grease nipple slowly paying attention not to turn more than one turn, and be careful for the spouting out grease.

G

Fig. 34-22 Releasing crawler tension

(2) Push up the crawler with a hydraulic jack, and place suitable wooden block (A) to keep a clearance between the crawler and lower frame. (3) Remove the fixing capscrews and nuts, and remove the upper roller from the lower frame. A

: 17 mm Weight of upper roller assembly: 5 kg (11 lbs)

Fig. 34-23 Supporting with wooden blocks

34-12


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.3.1.2

Installation

WARNING Before installing the upper roller (A), make sure that sufficient oil is filled in and that the upper roller rotates smoothly by hand. If the oil volume is insufficient, refill oil, or if the upper roller does not rotate smoothly or oil is leaking, check the bearing and the seals and replace them where necessary. Oil: HYPOIDE 90 Volume: 20 cc (1.2 cu•in)

B

A

Fig. 34-24 Removing/Installing upper roller

(1) Insert the shaft of the upper roller (A) assembly into the lower frame. (2) Coat mounting capscrews with Loctite #262 and tighten it to the torque. : 17 mm, Tightening torque: 66 N•m (48.7 lbf•ft) •Install it so the nut is located on the idler side (B). •At installation, support the crawler with wooden blocks the same way as it was dismantled so it does not disturb the work. (3) After installing upper roller (A), tighten grease nipple for crawler adjuster, grease it, and adjust crawler tension. : 17 mm, Tightening torque: 73.5 N•m (54.2 lbf•ft) 34.1.3.2 No. 1

CONSTRUCTION NAME ROLLER

Q’TY 1

2

SHAFT

1

3

PLATE

1

4

COVER

1

5

BUSHING

1

6

FLOATING SEAL

1

7

O-RING: 1A G45

1

8

SOCKET BOLT: M8X22

2

9

SNAP RING

1

10

PLUG

1

11

COLLAR

1

10

7

8

1

5

6 2

9

4

3

11

Fig. 34-25 Construction of upper roller

34-13


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.3.3 34.1.3.3.1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling

(1) Remove plug (10) and drain out oil. 8 3

: 5 mm (2) Place the end face inside upper roller (1) on stand jig (f) and remove snap ring (9).

9 10 7 4 1

(3) Remove cover (4) upwards, using the threaded hole for the plug. (4) Remove O-ring (7) from cover (4).

f

(5) Loosen two socket bolts (8) and remove plate (3). : 6 mm

Fig. 34-26 Preparation for disassembly (6) Put the extusion jig (g) against the end face of shaft (2) and extrude shaft (2) with retainer for floating seal (6), using a press or hammer (D).

Fig. 34-27 Extruding shaft (7) Remove floating seal (6) from upper roller (7).

Fig. 34-28 Removing out floating seal

34-14


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (8) Remove the floating seal (6) from collar (11). D

WARNING 33.9 (1.34")

Collar is press fitted into shaft (2). Therefore do not disassemble it.

j

2

(9) When extruding bushing (5), place upper roller (1) on the stand jig (f), put the extrusion jig (j) against the end face of bushing (5) and extrude it by means of a press (D).

5 6 1

11 f

Fig. 34-29 Extruding bushing 34.1.3.3.2

Installing

Installing of the upper roller is performed in the reverse order of removing.

D h

(1) Place the upper roller (1) on the stand jig (f), and press the jig (D) against the end face of the bushing, and press it in a specified position.

5 1

WARNING

f

If you fail in this operation by pressing the bushing unevenly, the bushing is distorted and gets unserviceable. In that case, do not re-use the bushing.

6

2

(2) Two floating seals (6) make a pair. Attach one floating seal to retainer fixed in shaft (2), and another to the inside of upper roller (1).

6

1

11

• Prior to placing floating seal (6) in, apply engine oil lightly to seal surface. (3) Put shaft (2) in upper roller (1), and press-fit it.

Fig. 34-30 Fixing floating seal D

2

1

Fig. 34-31 Pressing shaft

34-15


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (4) Place upper roller (1) on the stand jig (f) and attach plate (3) to the end face of the shaft with socket bolts (8). In that case, coat the threaded part of socket bolts (8) with Loctite #242 beforehand.

9 7

8

4 3 1

: 6 mm Tightening torque: 34 N•m (25 lbf•m) (5) Fix O-ring (7) in the groove of cover (4). • Coat grease to O-ring. (6) Install cover (4) to upper roller (1). Use a press in this operation as a press fit is used.

f

Fig. 34-32 Installing cover (7) Fix snap ring (9) into upper roller (1). (8) Fill in 20cc of engine oil API grade CD #30 through the plug hole of cover (4).

10

(9) Place seal tape around plug (10) and tighten it into the plug hole of cover (4). 1

: 5 mm Tightening torque: 23 N•m (17 lbf•m) • After assembling the upper roller, confirm that oil is not leaking from it and that it rotates smoothly by hand.

f

Fig. 34-33 Filling oil

34-16


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.4

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

Fig. 34-34 Sectional view of upper roller Unit: mm (in) CODE

ITEM

STANDARD VALUE ø82 (3.23)

A

Tread dia.

B

Tread width

C

Basic Tolerance dimension Clearance between shaft and bushing ø32 +0.025 (+0.001) Shaft (1.26) +0.050 (+0.002)

D

E — —

Interference between roller and bushing Tightening torque of socket bolt Oil Roller rotation

102 (4.01)

ø36 (1.42)

Hole

+0.03 (-0.0012) 0

REPAIRABLE LEVEL

SERVICE LIMIT

ø73 (2.87)

ø70 (2.76)

95 (3.74)

92 (3.62)

Fit

Fit

Clearance 0.7 (0.03)

Clearance 1.0 (0.04 Clearance 0.01 (0.0004)

Interference 0 (0)

34 kgf•m (25 lbf•ft) Engine oil API grade HYPOIDE 90, 20 cc (1.2 cu•in) Roller rotates smoothly by hand

34-17

REMEDY

Replace

Replace bushing

Apply Loctite #242 Replenish Reassembly


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.5

TOOLS AND JIGS

34.1.5.1

Tightening tools Unit: mm Tools

Opposing flats 17

Socket

5.6

Allen wrench 34.1.5.2 SYMBOL

f

Jig JIG

SKETCH

SYMBOL

JIG

g

Fixing jig

h {j}

Fixing jig {Extruding jig}

Stand jig

34-18

SKETCH


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.6 34.1.6.1

LOWER ROLLER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

Q’ty on one side: 4 pcs. 34.1.6.1.1

Removing

(1) Slightly loosen capscrews (M16u35) (2) fastening lower roller assembly (1) to the lower frame.

1 2

: 24 mm (2) As same as the case for removal of the crawler, loosen the grease nipple for crawler adjusting within one turn to discharge the grease, and release the tension on the crawler. : 17 mm Fig. 34-35 Lower roller assembly

(3) Lift the lower frame good enough to remove the lower roller, using the attachment. (4) After lifting the lower frame to a proper height, place square lumber under the lower frame to stabilize the machine. (5) Remove the capscrews (2) fastening the lower roller, and remove the lower roller assembly. : 24 mm Weight of lower roller assembly: 8.7 kg (19.2 lbs)

Fig. 34-36 Crawler removing posture 34.1.6.1.2

Installing

(1) Installing position of lower roller Install the lower roller assembly so that the plug (3) directs outward from the machine.

1 4 3

(2) Coat the mounting capscrews (2) with Loctite #262 in advance. Place the roller assembly (1) between the crawler and lower frame (4). Fasten the capscrews (2) temporarily.

2

: 24 mm

Fig. 34-37 Installing lower roller

(3) Lower the machine in full contact with the ground and tighten the capscrews (2) as specified. : 24 mm, T= 208 N•m (207 lbf•ft) (4) Tighten the grease nipple of the crawler adjuster. Lift the machine, and adjust the crawler tension by feeding grease. : 17 mm, T= 73.5 N•m (54.2 lbf•ft)

34-19


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.6.2

CONSTRUCTION

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Roller

1

4

Shaft

1

5

Bushing

2

6

Snap ring

2

7

Seal

2

8

O-Ring

2

9

Plug: PT 1/8

2

12

Collar

1

13

Collar

1

9

12

4

5

7

1

13 8

6

Fig. 34-38 Lower roller construction 34.1.6.3 34.1.6.3.1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling

(1) Loosen the plug (9) to drain oil.

P

: 5 mm (2) Remove the stopper ring (6). (3) Removing collar (2) and O-ring (8) Place the lower roller on the jig (A) so that the shaft (4) stands vertically. Apply the extruding jig (P) to the upper shaft end. Push the shaft (4) with a press or a hammer until the O-ring comes out from the collar (2) to remove the upper collar (with seal) and O-ring (8).

12

4

m

(4) Removing shaft Push the shaft further to remove the shaft (4), the lower collar (with seal) (13), and O-ring (8) in one piece.

8 6

WARNING Prior to extruding the shaft, prepare a drain oil container to receive lubricating oil remaining in the lower roller. Otherwise the lubricating oil flows out to contaminate the work floor.

Fig. 34-39 Removing shaft (4), collar (2) and O-ring (8) P

13

(5) Removing collar (13) and O-ring (8) Place the shaft (4) with the collar (13) and O-ring (8) pulled out according to the above procedure on the jig (O). Apply the extruding jig (P) to the shaft to push it out using a press.

4 O

Fig. 34-40 Removing collar (13)

34-20


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (6) Removing the seal (7) Remove the seal (7) from the collars (12) and (13).

Fig. 34-41 Removing the seal (7) (7) Removing the seal (7) Take out the seal (7) from the roller (1).

7 1

7

Fig. 34-42 Removing the seal (7) (8) Removing bushing (5) Cut off the bushing (5) having very small thickness with a lathe or tear it off without damaging the bore. When an amount of wear of the bushing is small, place the roller (1) on the jig (m) and apply the tip of the extruding jig (D) to the end surface of the bushing (n) to hammer out the bushing.

n

5

5

WARNING

m

In order to avoid damage to the bore of the roller (1), hammer the bushing (5) lightly and change the jig applying position circumferentially little by little to push out the bushing slowly.

Fig. 34-43 Removing bush (5)

34-21


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.6.3.2

Assembly

(1) Attach O-ring (8) to one side. Install O-ring (8) to shaft groove. • Grease O-ring. • Replace O-ring with new one without fail at reassembling.

Fig. 34-44 Attach O-ring (8) to one side (2) Press fitting bushing (5) Align the center of the bushing (5) with that of the bore of the roller (1) with the bushing press fit jig (q) inserted to the bushing (5) to push the bushing in with a press vertically. (Press load: 35300N (3600kgf)) Press fit the opposite side bushing (5) too. •

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the press fit section of the bushing to press fit the bushing at a normal temperature.

If the press fit failed due to eccentric pushing and so on, always replace the bushing with new one.

q 5

1

Fig. 34-45 Press fitting bushing (5)

(3) Press fitting collar (13) Fit O-ring to the one side of shaft (4) mating pin hole of collar (3) on which floating seal (7) is fit with pin hole of shaft (4) in advance. •

Care should be taken not to damage O-ring (8) while press-fitting collar (13) to shaft (4).

Fig. 34-46 Press fitting collar (13)

34-22


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (4) Installing snap ring (6) (5) Attach floating seal (7) of roller side Fit floating seal (7) to inner holes on both ends of roller (1). •

Check that the seal surface is free from flaws, rusts, etc. before reusing the floating seal.

(6) Inserting roller (1) Insert roller (1) from the side where collar (13), Oring (8) is not press-fitted to the shaft (4).

Fig. 34-47 Installing roller (1) (7) Installing O-ring (8) Install the O-ring (8) to the shaft groove. •

Apply grease to the O-ring.

Always replace the O-ring with new one prior to reassembling.

6

8

(8) Installing collar (12) Insert the collar (12), into which the seal (7) is built in advance, into the shaft (4).

12

1

7

Insert it until the snap ring groove of the shaft (4) is in alignment with the end surface of the collar (12).

(9) Installing snap ring (6) Fit the snap ring (6) in the snap ring groove of the shaft (4).

Fig. 34-48 Installing the collar (12)

34-23


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 10) Oil supply Supply 70 cc (4.2 cu•in) of engine oil (HYPOIDE 90) through the plug (9) hole.

9

(11)Leakage test Perform leakage test at an air pressure of 2.0 kgf/ cm2 (14 psi) prior to tightening the plug (9). (12)Installing plug (9) Apply oil resistant sealing agent to the plug (9), and screw it in the plug hole in the end surface of the collar (13). : 5mm Tightening torque: 16.7 N•m (12.3 lbf•ft)

WARNING

Fig. 34-48 Installing oil supply plug (9)

After assembling the lower roller as a single unit, ensure that it shows no oil leakage and can be manually rotated.

34-24


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.6.4

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS C

20 (0.787")

D

E

B

A

9

Fig. 34-50 Lower roller

Code A B C

ITEM

STANDARD VALUE

Flange O.D. Tread O.D. Flange width

ø130 (5.12) ø100 (3.94) 40 (1.58) Basic dimensi on

D

Clearance between shaft and bushing

E

Interference between roller and bushing

— —

Oil Roller rotation

Unit: mm (in) REPAIRABLE SERVICE REMEDY LEVEL LIMIT — — Welding repair or ø94 (3.70) ø92 (3.62) replacement 36 (1.42) 34 (1.34)

ø35 (1.38)

ø39 (1.54)

Tolerance

Fit

Fit

0 (0) Clearance Shaft –0.025 0.10 Clearance (–0.001) (0.004) 0.5 (0.02) +0.25 ~ (+0.01) 0.275 Bushing +0.10 (0.011) (+0.004) +0.16 Interfer(+0.0063) ence Bushing +0.12 0.095 Interference (+0.0047) (0.0037) 0 ~ +0.025 0.16 Roller (+0.0010) (0.0063) 0 (0) Engine oil HYPOIDE 90 class 70 cc (4.2 cu•in) Rollers rotate smoothly by hand

34-25

Fit

— Replace bushing

Replenish Reassembly


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

Unit: mm (in) SYMBOL

JIG

n

m {o}

SKETCH

SYMBOL

JIG

Bushing extrusion rod

p

Shaft extrusion jig

Stand jig

q

Bushing fixing jig

34-26

SKETCH


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.7 34.1.7.1 34.1.7.1.1

FRONT IDLER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Removing

(1) Remove the crawler assembly. (2) Remove idler together with idler adjuster assembly, rolling it, using a pry-bar or equivalent. (3) Loosen capscrews (M10u50) (c), and separate idler assembly (a) from idler adjuster assembly (b). : 17 mm Weight of idler assembly: 37 kgf (82 lbs) (one side) Weight of idler adjuster assembly: 33 kgf (73 lbs) (one side)

Fig. 34-51 Removing idler assembly

WARNING The separated idler assembly (a) is easy to fall down. Lay it down so it does not fall down on your feet, utilizing wooden blocks. 34.1.7.1.2

Fig. 34-52 Disassembling idler assembly

Installing

(1) Install idler assembly (a) to the idler adjuster assembly (b) by means of capscrews (c) in the reverse order of removing the idler assembly. Coat the threaded part of capscrews (c) with Loctite #262 beforehand. : 17 mm, T= 66 N•m (48.7 lbf•ft) (2) The assembly of the idler and idler adjuster is to be installed to the lower frame so that the grease feeding plug (1) is positioned to upside, and the grease nipple (2) is facing to outside.

Fig. 34-53 Installing idler assembly

(3) Following procedures of section 2, install the crawler assembly, and adjust the crawler tension. •

On that occasion, confirm the lubrication through the grease nipple is proper and that grease is not leaking from the grease cylinder.

34-27


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.7.2

CONSTRUCTION 8

1

3

2

4

4

7

5 5

6

Fig. 34-54 Idler assembly construction No.

NAME

Q’TY

No.

NAME

Q’TY

1

Idler

1

5

Pin

2

2

Bushing

2

6

Shaft

1

3

Collar

2

7

O-ring

2

4

Seal

2

8

Plug: PT 1/8

2

34.1.7.3 34.1.7.3.1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly

(1) Remove plug (8) on the side of collar (3) and drain oil. 5mm (2) Apply pin push bar (jig R) to the top of pin, and take out striking lightly by hammer. (3) Put idler (1) on repair stand (U), apply pushout jig (S) on shaft (6), push out shaft (6) with collar (3), then remove collar (3). Fig. 34-55 Extruding pin

Fig. 34-56 Extruding shaft

34-28


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (4) With idler (1) placed on the stand, tap bushing (2) lightly by hammer, while placing the bushing extruding rod (T) against the end face of bushing (2) evenly all round, till it comes out. (5) Take out floating seals (4) from idler (1), collar (3). If you intend to re-use floating seals (4), confirm that there is no scoring and rusting on the contact surface and store the floating seals in pairs by placing thick paper between the sealing faces. (6) Remove O-ring (7) from shaft (6).

Fig. 34-57 Removing bushing 34.1.7.3.2

Assembly

(1) Align inner hole of idler (1) and bushing (2) and press fit it vertically with press.

Fig. 34-58 Pressing in bushing (2) (2) Fit O-ring (7) to O-ring groove on shaft (2). • Apply grease to O-ring (3) Installing collar (3) (See 32.2.1.3) Press fit the O-ring installed side of shaft into collar (3), and drive pin (5). (4) Fit one piece of two (2) pieces type floating seal (4) on each side of collar (3) and idler (1).

Fig. 34-59 Pressing in shaft (6) (5) Insert shaft (6) into idler (1). • Apply gear oil to shaft. (6) Fit floating seal (4) on the other side of idler (1).

Fig. 34-60 Inserting floating seal (4)

34-29


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (7) Fit floating seal (4) on the other collar (3), press fit it in shaft, and drive pin (5) in with mallet. (8) Filling oil / Inspection Fill in 70~80cc (4.3~4.9 cu•in) of gear oil HYPOIDE 90 through the plug hole of collar, place the screwed part of plug (8) with seal tape and put in plug (8). : 5mm •

After installing the idler assy to the idler adjuster assy, make certain that no oil leaks from floating seal and plug (8) and that idler (1) rotates smoothly.

Fig. 34-61 Pressing in collar (3)

Fig. 34-62 Driving pin (5)

34-30


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.7.4

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

Fig. 34-52 Idler assembly Unit: mm (in) Code

ITEM

STANDARD VALUE

A

Dia. of idler projection

ø364 (14.3)

B

Tread dia.

ø320 (12.6)

C

Flange width

D

F

Clearance between shaft and bushing Interference between idler and bushing Oil Idler rotation

40 (1.57) Basic dimension

ø50 (1.97)

— ø312 (12.3) 36 (1.42)

Fit Clearance

ø45 (1.77)

REPAIRSERVICE ABLE LEVLIMIT EL

0.278~0.183 (0.0109~0.0072) Interference 0.093~0.015 (0.0037~0.0006)

Fit

— ø310 (12.2)

Replace

34 (1.34) Fit

Clearance Clearance Replace bush1.5 (0.059) 2.0 (0.079) ing Clearance Interfer0.01 ence (0.0004) 0 (0)

Gear oil HYPOIDE 90, 70~80cc (4.3~4.9 cu•in) Idler rotates smoothly by hand

34-31

REMEDY

Replenish Reassembly


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.7.5

TOOLS AND JIGS

(1) Tools Unit: mm Tools

Opposing flats

Socket

19, 24

Allen wrench

5, 6

(2) Jigs Unit: mm (in) Symbol

Jig

R

Pin extruding jig

Sketch

Symbol

Jig

U

Re pair stand

S

Shaft extruding jig

V

Bushing press fitting jig

T

Bushing striking rod

W

Collar press fitting jig

34-32

Sketch


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.8

IDLER ADJUSTER

34.1.8.1

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

34.1.8.1.1

Removing

(1) Idler adjuster assembly assembled with idler assembly (a) is removed from the lower frame. Do this work by referring to 34.1.7.1.1 Removing front idler. (2) Loosen capscrews (c) and separate idler assembly (a) from idler adjuster assembly (b). Fig. 34-53 Disassembling idler assembly

: 17 mm Weight of idler assembly: 37 kg (82 lbs) (one side) Weight of idler adjuster assembly: 33 kg (73 lbs) (one side)

WARNING The separated idler assembly is easy to fall down. Lay it down so it does not fall down on your feet, utilizing wooden blocks. 34.1.8.1.2

Installing

(1) Installation is done in the reverse order of removal: First of all, assemble idler assembly (a) to idler adjuster assembly (b), and tighten them together with capscrews (c). In that case, coat the threaded part of capscrews (c) with Loctite #262 beforehand. : 17 mm, T= 66 N•m (48.7 lbf•ft) (2) Before installing the idler adjuster to the crawler frame, assemble it with the idler assembly. For the procedure, refer to 34.1.7.1.2 Installing front idler. 34.1.8.2

CONSTRUCTION

No. NAME 1 Piston

Q’TY 1

2

Grease cylinder

1

3

Rod

1

4

Spring

1

5

Plate

1

6

Nut

1

7

Pin

2

8

Oil seal

1

9

O-ring

1

10 Split pin

1

11 Spring pin

1

12 Grease nipple

1

A

10

6

5

4

3

11

2

Fig. 34-54 Idler adjuster assembly

34-33

8

9

1

7

12


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.8.3

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

(1) Disassembly H

1) Before disassembling and assembling the idler adjuster assembly, prepare spring setting jig (V). Capacity of hydraulic jack: more than 5 tons (11000 lbf)

R

WARNING

S

Large power is needed to set the spring. Prepare a special jig before disassembly and assembly.

J

2) Place a hydraulic jack between the jig base and the stand.

B

Fig. 34-66 Spring set special jig (V)

3) Loosen the holding-down nuts of the jig and draw out the retainer upward. 4) Draw out piston (1) from grease cylinder (2) of the idler adjuster assembly. 5) Taken out oil seal (8) and O-ring (9) from grease cylinder (2). 6) Set the idler adjuster assembly on the stand of the jig (V), with its plate (5) side facing up. 7) Fit retainer plate (R) to plate (5) tighten holdingdown nuts alternately, and secure idler adjuster assembly. B. Base H. Holding-Down nut

Fig. 34-67 Slinging work of idler adjuster

R. Retainer plate S. Spring setting jig V J. Hydraulic jack

Fig. 34-68 Fixing Holding-down nut (H) 8) Remove split pin (10), press spring (4) lifting it with jack so that nut (6) can be turned freely, and remove nut (6).

Fig. 34-69 Compression of spring

34-34


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 9) Allow the hydraulic jack to retract slowly till the spring is extended to its free length. Remove the retainer plate (R) and take off plate (5). The free length of the spring: Approx. 412 mm (16.2 in)

R

10) Hook lifting eye nut (W) to screw M30 u P3 on grease cylinder (2) top end and hoist it. Lifting nut: M30 u P3

5

11) Remove the grease cylinder (2) and from the spring (4).

Fig. 34-70 Removing retainer plate (2) Assembly Perform assembly in the reverse order of disassembly. 1) Insert grease cylinder (2) into spring (4) and erect it in the center of the jig stand upright. 2) Install the plate (5) on top of spring (3). Center the rod of grease cylinder (2) and the holes in bracket (4). Attach the retainer plate (R) and four holding-down nuts (H). Fasten the nuts evenly all round fix the idler adjuster assembly to the jig body. 3) Extend the hydraulic jack, compress spring (4) to a set length and screw in nut (6) to the screwed part at the tip of grease cylinder (2). Set length of the spring: 335 mm (13.2 in) 4) Tighten nut (6) till the holes for locking split pins (9) are aligned, then fit split pin (10).

Fig. 34-71 Removing and installing of idler adjuster assembly

H

: 46 mm

R

5) Remove the idler adjuster assembly from the jig. 6) Fit oil seal (8) and O-ring (9) to grease cylinder (2). •Apply grease on oil seal (8) and O-ring (9). 7) Fill up grease in grease cylinder (2), remove the grease nipple from piston (1) and press the piston by hand to discharge the inside air.

Fig. 34-72 Attach idler adjuster assembly to the jig

• Push the piston in while directing the grease nipple hole downward to make it easier to release air. 8) Tighten grease nipple to piston (1). : 17 mm Tightening torque: 73.5 N•m (54.2 lbf•ft)

34-35


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.8.4

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

Code ITEM A Installed length of spring B Free length of spring C Stroke

D/R Rubber crawler 335 (13.2) 412 (16.2) 28 (1.1) E40.2SR: 661 (2’2.0”)

D

Set length

E F

Outside view of piston Tightening torque of grease nipple

E50.2SR: 674 (2’2.5”) No scoring and rusting 73.5 N•m (54.2 lbf•ft)

Unit: mm (in) D/S Steel shoe m m m 631 (24.8) m m

D/S D/R A, B

E

F

Fig. 34-73 Idler adjuster assembly

34-36


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.9

SPROCKET

34.1.9.1 34.1.9.1.1

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Removing

(1) Remove the crawler assembly.

1

(2) Place wooden block (3) under the lower frame (1) so the sprocket (2) is off the ground. (3) Loosen capscrew (M12) for the mounting of the sprocket by means of an Allen wrench and remove the sprocket (2). : 22 mm Single weight of sprocket (2): 14 kg (31 lbs)

3

2

Fig. 34-74 Making sprocket free 34.1.9.1.2

Installing

(1) Check the fixing parts of the travel motor (5) and the sprocket (2), eliminate burrs and dirt thoroughly, and install the sprocket (2).

4

(2) Apply Loctite #262 to the threaded portion of capscrew to mount the capscrews (4) and fasten then temporarily. (3) Remove the wooden block (3) under the lower frame (1) and tighten capscrews (4) to specified torque to fix sprocket (2) and travel motor (5).

2

Fig. 34-75 Removing sprocket

: 22 mm, T=181 N•m (133 lbf•ft) (4) Install crawler.

5

Fig. 34-76 Tightening capscrew 34.1.9.2

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS A

P, C, D37 6.6 (14.83")

B

Fig. 34-77 Sprocket Unit: mm (in) Code A B

ITEM Width of sprocket teeth O.D. of sprocket

STANDARD VALUE 32 (1.26) ø435.8 (17.16)

REPAIRABLE LEVEL 29 (1.14) ø429 (16.9)

34-37

SERVICE LIMIT

REMEDY

27 (1.06) ø427 (16.8)

Replace Welded repair, or replace


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.10

TRAVEL MOTOR

34.1.10.1 34.1.10.1.1

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Removing

(1) Remove the crawler assembly.

1

(2) Place wooden block (3) under the lower frame (1) so the sprocket (2) is off the ground. (3) Remove the capscrews (A4) located inside the lower frame and remove the covers (A1). : 17 mm (4) Push the air bleeding cap with boots on hydraulic oil tank to release air in the tank.

3

(5) Disconnect the joint of hydraulic piping connected with the travel motor, and plug the joints in order to prevent outflow of oil and entering of dust.

2

Fig. 34-78 Making sprocket free

)

: 19 mm, 22 mm and 32 mm

)#

(6) Loosen the capscrew M14u35 (B2) that fasten the travel motor to the lower frame. On that occasion, put a matching mark between the lower frame and the travel motor.

*!

: 22 mm (7) Apply a wire rope to a part near the sprocket of the travel motor for balancing, and remove the unit out of the lower frame. Weight of travel motor (5) (with sprocket (2): 79 kg (174 lbs)

Fig. 34-79 Removing cover and travel motor

3

Fig. 34-80 Removing and installing travel motor 34.1.10.1.2

Installing

(1) If there are burrs and dirt on fitting part with which the travel motor are fastened, eliminate it beforehand. Place a wire sling in the travel unit with the same way as in the removing, and install it to the lower frame.

4

5

(2) Coat the threaded part of the mounting capscrews (4, B3) with Loctite #262 and tighten them. : 22 mm, T= 181 N•m (133 lbf•ft)

B3

Fig. 34-81 Installing travel motor

34-38


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

(3) Reconnect the hydraulic pipings as before, and tighten the joints to the specified torque. •

Fill the casing with hydraulic oil prior to perform drain piping.

Port

A,B P DR

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Thread Spanner O-ring size (PF) used type fitting (mm) 108 (80) 27 1/2 36.3 (27) 17 1/4 73.5 (54) 22 3/8

DR P A

30° flare type fitting

B

78.5 (58) 29.4 (22) 49.0 (36)

(4) Install the covers (A1) located inside the lower frame, and tighten capscrews (A4). (See Fig. 3479)

Fig. 34-82 Installing hydraulic pipings (LH-travel motor)

: 17 mm (5) Remove the wooden block (3) supporting the lower frame and install the crawler. (6) Check the oil level in the reduction unit of travel motor [See Item (7) below] and replace or replenish oil as required. Oil: GEAR OIL HYPOIDE 90 Volume of oil: 900 cc (55 cu•in)

7 6

: 8 mm (7) Checking oil level in reduction unit

GL

a.Stop the machine so that the drain plug (8) of the reduction unit is located in the lowest position.

90 8

b.Remove the level plug (7) and check the oil level and contamination. The oil level is proper if it is close to the plug bore. Replenish oil if necessary. •

Fig. 34-83 Checking oil level

When starting operation, operate motor in low idling and at low speed for several minutes, and check it for possible oil leakage and noise.

34.1.10.2

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

OIL

TIGHTENING TORQUE

ITEM

SPEC.

Sprocket fixing Capscrew M14 Apply Loctite #262 181 N•m (133 lbf•ft)

Travel motor fixing Capscrew M14

Spec. and grade Volume

Gear oil HYPOIDE 90 900 cc (55 cu•in)

34-39


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.11

SLEWING BEARING

34.1.11.1

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

34.1.11.1.1

Removing

(1) Remove the upper slewing structure. (See detail of "Upper Slewing Structure")

B

A

(2) Remove capscrews (B) that fix the inner race of slewing bearing (A) : 22 mm (3) Remove the grease in the inner race of slewing bearing. (4) Screw lifting-bolts in the slewing bearing (A), and lift it by crane. Weight of slewing bearing assembly: 76 kgf (168 lbs)

Fig. 34-84 Slewing bearing

Fig. 34-85 Lifting slewing bearing 34.1.11.1.2

Installing

(1) Before installing the slewing bearing, clean thoroughly the bearing and the mating surface of the lower frame to be free from dirt, oil and other foreign materials.

B

A

(2) Lift up the bearing and place it on the lower frame, aligning the "S" mark engraved on the inner race as shown in Fig. 34-86.

L

A-A

(3) Coat the threads of the capscrews (B) with Loctite #262 and tighten all capscrews temporarily. (4) Tighten the capscrews at 180° intervals alternately, and tighten them up to the specified torque. : 22 mm, T= 181 N•m (133 lbf•ft) (5) Replenish 4.8 kg (10.6 lbs) of "HYPOIDE 90" to the grease bath. (6) After installing the slewing bearing on the lower frame, install upper slewing structure. L. Lower frame S. Slewing bearing inner “S” Zone (S-MARK)

S

Fig. 34-86 Location of "S" mark to install slewing bearing

34-40


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.11.2 No. 1

CONSTRUCTION NAME Inner race

Q’TY 1

2

Outer race

1

3

Ball

95

4

Spacer

70

5

Spacer (Adjusting)

25

6

Plug

1

7

Taper pin

1

8

Seal A

1

9

Seal B

1

10

Grease nipple

1

34.1.11.3 34.1.11.3.1

2

3, 4, 5

81

6 10 7

9

Fig. 34-87 Cross-section of slewing bearing

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembling

(1) Take off seal A (8) fitted in the groove on lower circumference of inner race (2), and place the bearing in level on a wooden block (W).

8

1

7 2

(2) Remove taper pin (7), using a hammer and a push rod.

W

(3) Remove plug (6) with an puller bolt making use of the threaded bore in the center of the plug (6).

6

(4) After removing plug (6), take out balls (3) and spacers (4), (5) from the bore in order, while rotating outer race (2) slightly.

9

Fig. 34-88 Disassembling slewing bearing

34-41


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.11.3.2

Assembling

(1) Degrease thoroughly the groove for seal A (8) located in the inner circumference of outer race (2) and the groove for seal B (9) located in the outer circumference of inner race (1). Coat the grooves with adhesive (Cyanoacrylate instant glue), fit seal B (9), and place inner race (1) on a surface plate.

2

(2) Lift and lower outer race (2) slowly till the top surface of inner race (1) matches the bottom of the sealing groove of outer race (2). Place an adjusting washer under outer race (2) in order to support the outer race so the track surface of ball (3) is aligned.

1 4 5 3

Fig. 34-89 Removing balls / spacers

(3) Insert balls (3) and spacers (4) (5) coating with grease (HYPOIDE 90) alternately through the hole for plug (6) on outer race (2). 2

WARNING

8

When inserting balls (3) and spacers (4) (5), the ball tracks must be aligned completely. To achieve it, outer race (2) should be adjusted. It is very dangerous to put your finger into the plug bore directly; always use a push rod (P) or a hooked rod (H).

9

3

1

Fig. 34-90 Installing balls

(4) Install plug (6) to outer race (2), confirming the direction and the position of the bore for taper pin (7). (5) Push taper pin (7) into bore, and caulk the head of the taper pin with a punch. (6) Confirm that grease nipple (10) is useful. Apply grease (HYPOIDE 90) and confirm that the outer race rotates smoothly and that the lip of the seal is not scored. Grease amount: Approx. 90g (3.2oz) Fig. 34-91 Installing spacer

(7) Confirm that grease nipple (10) is useful. Apply grease (NLGI-2 MoS2) and confirm that the outer race rotates smoothly and that the lip of the seal is not scored. Grease amount: 180 g (6.3 oz) 34.1.11.4

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

Regarding the maintenance standards for the wear of the slewing bearing, refer to the section Maintenance Standards and Test Procedures, Article Measuring Slewing Performances.

34-42


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

34.2

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

34.2.1

TRAVEL MOTOR

34.2.1.1

SUMMARY

(1) General View OL OF

X

DP

X OF. Oil filling port OL.Oil level check port DP. Drain port The relation between rotating direction of reduction unit and oil inlet and outlet port (View from X side) Rotating direction Clockwise Counterclockwise

Oil inlet port A B

34-43

Oil outlet port B A


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (2) Hydraulic circuit diagram No. A B D1 D2 P P2 P3

NAME

SIZE

Oil inlet port • Oil outlet port

PF1/2

Drain port

PF1/4

HS

PF1/8 Pressure detecting port

PT1/8

HS.High speed LS. Low speed

34-44

LS


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (3) EXPLODED VIEW OF TRAVEL MOTOR AND REDUCTION UNIT

Travel motor

Reduction unit

34-45


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM No.

NAME

Q’TY

No. 102 103 107 108 109 110 112 113 114 115 116 132 135 139 145 149 150 151 167 177 190

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 11 12 13 14 22 24 27 28 29 30

Hub Spindle Carrier Sun gear (1) Planetary gear (1) Sun gear (2) Planetary gear (2) Thrust washer (1) Thrust collar (4) Thrust washer (3) Cover Coupling Ring nut Ball bearing Needle roller bearing with retainer Needle roller bearing with retainer Inner race Inner race

1 1 1 1 3 1 4 2 4 7 1 1 1 2 3 4 3 4

31

Floating seal kit Floating seal

1 2

33 35 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 47

Plug with flange O-ring O-ring Plug Hexagon head screw Steel ball Parallel pin O-ring O-ring Ring Hexagon socket set screw

1 1 3 2 7 1 2 2 1 1 2

104

Cylinder and piston kit Cylinder block

1 1

105 106

Piston kit Piston assembly Piston Shoe

1 9 1 1

161 162 163

Piston kit Piston assembly Piston Shoe Seal ring

1 1 1 1 1

NAME

Q’TY

Shaft Swash plate Retainer plate Thrust ball Timing plate Washer Piston Spring Spring Friction plate Separator plate Oil seal O-ring O-ring Snap ring Ball bearing Ball bearing Roller Pivot Parallel pin Spring

1 1 1 1 1 2 1 8 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1

263 264 221 224 225 226 227 228 230 236

Rear flange assembly Rear flange kit Rear flange Spool Spool kit Spool Oil stopper Plug Plug Stopper Plug Valve Spring Spring O-ring

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

237 252 254 266 268 273 275 276 279 280 299 241 243

O-ring Hexagon socket plug Hexagon socket plug Spring Steel ball O-ring Orifice Orifice Filter Plug with flange Name plate Parallel pin Capscrew

2 4 6 1 1 2 5 1 1 1 1 2 6

201 223

34-46


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.2

TOOLS AND JIGS

(1) Standard tools No. NAME 1 Allen wrench 2 Socket wrench (Ratchet handle) 3 Torque wrench

4

Torque wrench adaptor

5 6 7 8 9 10

Hexagon socket Extension bar Hammer Plastic hammer Flat screwdriver Snap ring pliers

11 12

Cutting pliers Lifting tool

13 14

Container Leather gloves

SIZE 3 (For M6), 6 (For M8 & PF1/4), 8 (For PF3/8) Barrel type

Q’TY 1 each 1

Dial type, about 12 N•m (8.7 lbf•ft) Dial type, about 90 N•m (65 lbf•ft) Dial type, about 560 N•m (406 lbf•ft) Nominal socket size 13 and 30 Nominal rod size 3, 6 and 8 For width across flats of 3 mm 150 mm (6") Nominal size 12 L= about 300 mm (12") about 150 mm (6"), 50 mm (2") For shaft For hole 200 mm (8") Lifting capacity: 300 kg (660 lbs) or over Lifting eye (for M14) Lifting eye (for PF 3/8) Wire with hooks Vat for general use: W450uD300uH120 (W17.7"uD11.8"uH4.7")

1 each

1 each 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 set (2) (2) (1) 2 1 pair

(2) Bolts No. 1

Name Hexagon socket head cap screw (JIS B1176)

Description Approx. M6 (P1.0)x50 Approx. M16 (P2.0)x40 Approx. M16 (P2.0)x150

APPLICATION ITEM NAME (Item in cross-sectional or exploded view) Disassembly and assembly General workbench Parts cleaning Cleaning bath 104 and 149 Workbench for press 149 Heating bath

Drying after cleaning

Compressed air

34-47

SIZE

Q.ty 1 2 3 REMARKS Q’TY 1 set

For rough and finish cleaning Pressing capacity: 1.96 kN [440 lbs] or over Heating capacity: 100 C or over (212 F) Volume 500u500u500 mm (20"u20"u20") Pressure (294~490 kPa) (43~71 psi)

1 set 1 set 1 set


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (3) Jigs No. NAME 1 Working bench for travel motor (WB) No.

No. NAME 2 Fixing metal (FM) No.

3

This is used to carry out the work for assembly and disassembly of travel motor easy and safe. Retainer metal (RM1) (RM) No.

5

This is used to insert spring (114), washer (110), snap ring (145) into cylinder block (104), and also used to remove spring (114) from cylinder block (104). Oil seal press fit tool (RM3) No.

7

For press fitting the oil seal (132) in the oil seal hole of the spindle (2). Jig for adjusting the preload to the bearing (JB) No.

This is used to connect the spindle (2) and hub (1). 4

Retainer metal (RM2) No.

This is used to pull out bearing (149) from drive shaft (102).

6

Bearing press fit tool (BB) No.

For press fitting the ball bearing (24) in the hub (1). 8

For installing the ring nut (22) to the spindle (2).

34-48

Steel rod (1) (SR) No.

This is used to remove the ring (45) from the hub (1).


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM No. NAME 9 Long lifting eye (LE) No.

Application Hub Spindle Travel motor

No. 10 Spatula (SP) No.

NAME

“A� M12 M12 M12

"A"

12

This is used to remove the timing plate (109) from rear flange (201). Jig for cover removal (JC) No.

14

This is used to remove the cover (13) from the hub (1). Floating seal (F/S) inserting jig (II) (FS2)

This lifting eye is used to sling up travel motor, the spindle (2) and the hub (1). 11

Pin punch (PP) No.

13

This is used to remove the outer race of floating seal (31). Floating seal (F/S) inserting jig (FS1) No.

For building the floating seal (31) into the hub (1). 15

Floating seal (F/S) inserting jig (FS3) No.

For building the floating seal (31) into the spindle (2).

34-49

For building the floating seal (31) into the hub (1) and spindle (2).


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.3 34.2.1.3.1

DISASSEMBLY PREPARATIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY

Prior to disassembling, carry out the following preparations: (1) Workbench preparation •

Prepare workbench for travel motor.

Prepare workbench which is rigid enough to disassemble or assemble internal parts of travel motor and has a wide area for placing them to prevent them from moving or dropping during the work.

Cover workbench with rubber, vinyl, etc.

(2) Preparations of tools and materials Prepare materials shown in 34.2.1.2. 34.2.1.3.2

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR WORKING

WARNING Internal parts during disassembly are slippery as they are smeared by hydraulic oil. Handle them with extreme care not to drop them. Otherwise, you may be injured or they may be damaged. Combustible material such as kerosene is used to clean the parts. Handle it with extreme care not to cause fire or burns, as it catch fire easily. (1) Prior to disassembly, make a good judgment on the features etc. of the generated abnormalities to work according to the disassembling procedure. (2) All parts are manufactured in high precision. Therefore handle them with care not to bump them each other or drop them. (3) Work patiently not to forcibly strike or pry the sticking parts during disassembly. Otherwise it may result in generating burrs, damages, and performance deterioration. (4) Be careful not to leave the disassembled parts without appropriate protection. Otherwise they may be rusted by moisture and or contaminated by dust. (5) Put a match mark on each mating surface of part during disassembly. (6) Carry out the work putting every removed part in order, and taking care not to cause damage or loss. (7) Sealing parts shall be replaced in principle, even though no damage is found on them. Keep them on hand prior to disassembly. (8) Photos and figures of typical models are shown. Any partial difference between them and the product in use does not affect the disassembling procedure.

34-50


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.3.3

DISASSEMBLING

(1) Cleaning travel motor LE

1) Tighten the lifting eyes (LE) into the tapped holes of the spindle (2).

2

WARNING Screw two lifting eyes into the tapped holes of the spindle diagonally located with each other. 2) Pass a wire sling through the lifting eyes, lift up the travel motor by hoist, and carry into the cleaning bath.

Fig. 34-92 Mounting lifting eye

3) Clean the travel motor with a car brush.

WARNING Since soil and sand are accumulated in the clearance (where the floating seal is fixed) between the hub (1) and the spindle (2), clean it with particular care.

Fig. 34-93 Cleaning travel motor (2) Installing travel motor 1) Place travel motor on a workbench.

WARNING While aligning the threaded holes of the hub (1) and the workbench, place the travel motor in fixing holes of the workbench slowly. 2) Fix the travel motor with two socket bolts (F) on the workbench (WB).

WARNING Tighten the hexagon socket bolts securely. Failure to do so could result in injury cased by the travel motor falling when it is inverted.

Fig. 34-94 Placing travel motor on workbench

WB

F

Fig. 34-95 Fixing travel motor on workbench

34-51


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (3) Draining lubricating oil 1) Turn over the travel motor. 2) Loosen a plug (33) and two socket plugs (39). • If the plug (33) and the socket plugs (39) are removed and the travel motor is reversed, oil spills. Loosen them to such an extent that they can be turned by hand. 3) Turn over the travel motor and extract the lubricating oil. (Turn up the side of motor) 4) Remove the O-ring (37) from the plug (33) and two socket plugs (39)

Fig. 34-96 Removing plug (33)

• Do not reuse O-ring (37) which have been removed.

1

Fig. 34-97 Draining oil (4) Removing cover (13) 1) Turn over the travel motor. (The side of reduction gear is turned up.) SR

2) Remove the ring (45) with tool (SR). 3) Loosen two capscrews in the middle of the cover removal jig in the thread holes from which the plugs (33) and (39). (Two places) 4) Apply a block to two capscrews in the middle of the cover removal jig and tighten the screws to remove the cover (13) with tool (JC). • If it is difficult to remove the cover (13) due to resistance of the O-ring (35), lift the cover while lightly tapping the external periphery of the cover with a plastic hammer.

Fig. 34-98 Removing ring (45)

JC

5) Remove the O-ring (35) from the hub (1) • Do not reuse the removed O-ring (35).

Fig. 34-99 Removing cover (13)

34-52


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (5) Removing sun gear 1 (4) 1) Pull out the sun gear 1 (4) by hand. 2) Remove the steel balls (41) from the sun gear 1 (4). •The coupling (14) may come off at the same time.

Fig. 34-100 Removing sun gear 1 (4) (6) Removing carrier assembly 1) Take out the carrier assembly from the hub (1). 2) Take out the sun gear 2 (6) from the hub. 3) Remove the coupling (14) from the shaft (102).

Fig. 34-101 Removing carrier assembly 4) Disassembling carrier assembly 1.Loosen the hexagonal head screws (40) to remove them from carrier (3). 2.Remove three thrust washers (12), three planetary gears 1 (5), three needle roller bearings with retainers (27) and three bearing inner races (29) from the carrier (3).

Fig. 34-102 Disassembling carrier assembly 5) Remove the thrust washer 1 (9) from the carrier (3).

Fig. 34-103 Removing thrust washer (9)

34-53


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (7) Removing planetary gear 2 (7) 1) Loosen four hexagonal head screws (40) and remove them from spindle (2).

Fig. 34-104 Unscrewing hexagonal head screw (40) 2) Remove four planetary gears 2 (7), four needle roller bearings with cages (28) and four inner races (30). 3) Remove four thrust collars 4 (11) from the spindle (2). 4) Remove the thrust washer 1 (9) from the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-105 Removing planetary gear 2 (7) (8) Removing rear flange 1) Turn over the travel motor, so rear flange (101) is on the top. • Follow the procedures below to make it easy to remove the plug when disassembling the interior of the rear flange (201). • Do not loosen the plugs unless disassembling the interior of the rear flange. 2) Loosen two plugs (224).

Fig. 34-106 Unscrewing plug (224) 3) Loosen two plugs (226).

Fig. 34-107 Unscrewing plug (226)

34-54


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

4) Loosen six socket bolts (243) and remove them from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-108 Removing socket bolt (243) 5) Remove the rear flange (201) from the spindle (2). • Hold the rear flange by both hands, hold it up gently upright to remove it. Perform the work with care not to forcibly pry or strike the flange. Otherwise it may cause the timing plate (109) to drop and be damaged.

Fig. 34-109 Removing rear flange (201) 6) Remove the parallel pins (42) from the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-110 Removing parallel pin (42) 7) Remove the O-rings (43) and (44) from the spindle (2). • Do not reuse the removed O-rings (43) and (44).

Fig. 34-111 Removing O-rings (43) and (44)

34-55


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

(9) Removing rear flange fittings 1) Place the rear flange (201) on the workbench, with the mating surface for the spindle (2) facing up. 2) Remove the timing plate (109) from the rear flange (201). • It may be hard to remove the rear flange as the mating surface of it is stuck with oil. Insert a spatula (SP) into the draft groove of the mating surface on the rear flange side and hold the timing plate up. Then the rear flange comes off. If a sharp tool like a screwdriver is put into the mating surface, the mating surface may be damaged to cause an oil leakage. Do not use sharp tools.

Fig. 34-112 Removing timing plate (109)

3) Remove the parallel pins (241) from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-113 Removing parallel pin (241) 4) Remove bearing (150) from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-114 Removing bearing (150) (10) Removing brake valve parts from rear flange 1) Remove two plugs (224) from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-115 Removing plug (224)

34-56


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 2) Remove two stoppers (225) and two springs (228) from the rear flange (201). 3) Remove the spool (223) from the rear flange (201). • To remove the spool (223), place your hand on one part of the plug port of the rear flange (201) and tilt it down. Then the spool (223) falls down. Hold the tip and remove it.

Fig. 34-116 Removing stopper (225), spring (228) and spool (223) 4) Remove two plugs (226) from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-117 Remove the plug (226) 5) Remove two springs (230) and two valves (227) from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-118 Removing spring (230) and valve (227) 6) Remove O-ring (236) from plug (224). • Do not reuse the removed O-ring (236).

Fig. 34-119 Removing O-ring (236)

34-57


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 7) Remove the O-ring (237) from the plug (226). • Do not reuse the removed O-ring (237).

Fig. 34-120 Removing O-ring (237) (11)Removing two-speed switching spool 1) Remove the plug (221) from the rear flange (201). 2) Remove the O-ring (273) from the plug (221). • Do not reuse the removed O-ring (273).

Fig. 34-121 Removing plug (221) 3) Remove the spool (263) and spring (266) from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-122 Removing spool (263)

34-58


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (12)Removing the parking brake section

WARNING

PC

Install a protection cover (PC) on the piston (112). Otherwise the piston may fly out suddenly from the spindle (2) due to compressed air to cause injury.

AH

1) Blow compressed air (AH) into the passage hole for the parking brake of the spindle (2) and take out the piston (112) from the spindle (2). 2) Remove the O-rings (135) and (139) from the piston (112). Fig. 34-123 Removing piston (112)

• Do not reuse the removed O-rings (135) and (139).

Fig. 34-124 Removing piston (112) (13)Disassembling hydraulic motor section • When placing the travel motor on its side, place an oil pan under the travel motor to receive oil flowing out from the travel motor. 1) Incline travel motor 90 degrees. 2) Drain oil out of the travel motor. 3) Remove two separator plates (116) and, one friction plate (115). Fig. 34-125 Lifting cylinder block (104)

4) Hold the cylinder block (104) by hand and turn it 2 or 3 times alternatively to separate the shoe (106) adhered on the swash plate (103). • Note that, if the cylinder block (104) is pulled out without separating the shoe (106), the shoe (106) left on the swash plate (103) may allow the parts (piston, shoe, etc.) on the cylinder block (104) to come off and drop into the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-126 Removing cylinder block (104)

34-59


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 5) Remove the cylinder block (104) from the drive shaft (102). 6) Remove piston assembly [piston (105) and shoe (106) ] and the retainer plate (107) ) from the cylinder block (104). • When removing the cylinder block, hold the retainer plate (107) by both hands to remove it with the piston assembly. Fig. 34-127 Removing retainer plate (107)

• The piston (105) and the shoe (106) are squeezed at the spherical portion of the piston to make them one piece. It is not possible to remove the piston from the shoe without damaging the shoe. When replacement is required, replace the piston and shoe by a set (hereafter referred to as the piston assembly). 7) Remove the retainer plate (107) from piston assembly (105) and (106) [seven sets].

Fig. 34-128 Removing piston assembly (105) and (106) 8) Remove the thrust ball (108) from the cylinder block (104).

Fig. 34-129 Removing thrust ball (105) 9) Remove three rollers (151) from the cylinder block (104).

Fig. 34-130 Removing roller (104)

34-60


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (14)Removing spring inside cylinder block 1) Place the cylinder block (104) on the press bench. • Remove the spring, only when its replacement is necessary. • When removing the spring, align the center of the retainer metal (RM1) with the washer center in order to prevent the cylinder block from being damaged by contact.

RM1

• Put a vinyl sheet (VS) over the cylinder block so as not to damage the surface of the cylinder block. VS

Fig. 34-131 Removing spring (114) 2) Place the retainer metal ( I ) against the washer (110), remove the snap ring (145) from the snap ring groove of the cylinder block (104) with a snap ring plier.

RM1 110 145

WARNING

114

Release pressing force slowly. Otherwise the spring may fly out to cause injury.

104

Fig. 34-132 Removing spring (114) 3) Remove the snap ring (145), washer (110), spring (114), and washer (110) out of the cylinder block.

Fig. 34-133 Removing internals of cylinder block (104) (15)Removing swash plate 1) Remove the swash plate (103) from the drive shaft (102). • When removing the swash plate (103), ensure that pivot (167) is not adhered on the swash plate (103).

Fig. 34-134 Removing swash plate (103)

34-61


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 2) Pull the drive shaft (102) out of the spindle (2). Then the ball bearing (149) is removed together. • Be careful to lightly strike the tip of the shaft on the reduction side using a plastic hammer to allow the shaft to come off easily. Otherwise the shaft may pop out. 3) Remove two pivots (167) and two the parallel pins (177) from the spindle (2). 4) Take out the 2-speed switching piston kit (piston assembly and seal ring) and the spring (190) from the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-135 Removing drive shaft (102)

Piston assembly: Piston (161), Shoe (162) Seal ring (163) (16)Removing ball bearing • Remove the ball bearing, only when its replacement is necessary. 1) Place the retainer metal (RM2) on the press bench and put the drive shaft (102) into it. 2) Hold down the tip of the drive shaft (102) by a press and remove the bearing (149) from the shaft. • Do not reuse the ball bearing. CA.Compressed air (Air gun)

CA

Fig. 34-136 Removing 2-speed switching piston kit

149 102 RM2

Fig. 34-137 Removing ball bearing (149) (17)Removing spindle 1) Apply the clamp plates (FM) to the spindle (2) in the equally spaced positions, and fasten three M16u2.0u150 (approx.) to the workbench.

FM

2) Turn over the travel motor. (Direct the reduction unit side upward.)

Fig. 34-138 Fixing spindle (2)

34-62


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 3) Remove two hexagon set screws (47).

Fig. 34-139 Removing hexagon set screw (47) 4) Loosen the ring nut (22) using a tightening jig (JB). • Do not reuse the removed ring nut (22) of which tooth flank may be damaged.

Fig. 34-140 Loosen ring nut (22) JB

1 22

2

Fig. 34-141 Installing jig 5) Remove the ring nut (22) from the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-142 Removing ring nut (22)

34-63


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (18) Removal of the ring nut 1) Turn over the travel motor. (Direct the motor side upward.) 2) Remove the clamp plates from the workbench. 3) Tighten two M16 eyebolts in the mounting thread holes of the spindle (2) in the diagonal position. 4) Hook a wire rope with hook to M16 eyebolts, and lift by a crane to remove the spindle (2) from the hub (1). At this time, the floating seal (31) and oil seal (132) will be removed together with the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-143 Removing spindle (2)

(19) Removing main bearing 1) Remove the floating seal (31) from the hub (1). • Do not reuse the removed floating seal (31). 2) Apply a punch between the inside periphery of the hub (1) and the main bearing (24) to remove the main bearing using a hammer. • When the fit section of the outer race of ball bearing (24) comes out of hub (1), the ball bearing drop from the hub. Therefore place a receptacle under the workbench and spread a rubber mat on the receptacle so as not to damage the parts.

Fig. 34-144 Removing floating seal (31)

3) Turn over the travel motor. 4) Tapping the end face of outer race of ball bearing (24) with aluminum rod (pin punch) (PP) and hammer, remove the ball bearing from hub (1)

PP

• Remove ball bearing (24) little by little, tapping evenly the end face of outer race of the ball bearing at 3 or 4 points of the from the hub so that the ball bearing is not suck.

Fig. 34-145 Removing ball bearing (24) (20) Removing spindle fittings 1) Remove the floating seal (31) from the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-146 Removing floating seal (31)

34-64


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 2) Remove the oil seal (132) from the spindle (2) • Never reuse the removed oil seal (132).

2

132

Fig. 34-147 Removing oil seal (132) (21) Rough washing of parts 1) Separate the four parts, namely the hub (1), spindle (2), cover (13), and rear flange (201), from the other parts (hereafter referred to as built-in parts). 2) Put the hub, spindle, cover, and rear flange in a cleaning bath and clean them. • Carefully remove dust accumulated on the surfaces of parts to make them completely clean.

WARNING Kerosene is combustible. Be careful not to cause fire, burns, and injury.

Fig. 34-148 Cleaning each part

• Before cleaning stained parts, immerse them in kerosene until dust and stain become soft and are floated so as to prevent damage when cleaning. 3) Put the built-in parts in a rough cleaning bath containing kerosene and clean them.

Fig. 34-149 Cleaning each section

34-65


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (22) Finish cleaning 1) Put parts in a finish cleaning bath containing kerosene and clean them well, turning them slowly. 2) Wipe off kerosene adhered to the parts using a clean waste cloth. • Dry the inner surfaces of the hub (1) and the spindle (2) in the dust-free and dry conditions by blowing compressed air on them. After drying, apply hydraulic oil to every part. • Dry the inner surface of the rear flange (201) and the hydraulic motor components in the dust-free and dry conditions by blowing compressed air on them. After drying, apply hydraulic oil to every part.

Fig. 34-150 Finish cleaning

Fig. 34-151 Finish cleaning

34-66


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.4

ASSEMBLY

Perform assembly basically in reverse order of disassembly. 34.2.1.4.1

PREPARATION

Prepare a workbench, tools and jigs as in the case of Section 34.2.1.3; DISASSEMBLY. 34.2.1.4.2

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY

(1) For assembly also, take the general precautions described in Section 34.2.1.3; DISASSEMBLY. (2) For assembly, remove any metallic dust or foreign material from all parts and make sure that the parts are free of burrs and dents which should be ground off using an oilstone. (3) Replace the O-rings, oil seals, and floating seals with new ones. (4) Bonding adhesive is applied to the threaded portions and tapped holes of spindle (2) and carrier (3) when assembling. Remove their grease by using the tap (M8 1.25), and wash with solvent. After that, degrease solvent of the holes by spraying with compressed air. Replace hexagon head bolt (40) with new ones. (5) Be careful not to damage the O-rings, oil seals, and floating seals at installation (Lightly apply grease to them for smooth installation). (6) Prior to assembly, apply clean hydraulic oil (HYPOIDE 90) to movable and sliding portions of hydraulic motor components and valves. (7) Use no cloth gloves during assembly to prevent malfunctions due to textile lint. (8) On completion of assembly, plug every opening to prevent the entry of dirt. (9) Photos and figures of typical models are shown. Any partial difference between them and the product in use does not affect the assembling procedure. 34.2.1.4.3 ASSEMBLING PROCEDURE NOTE: After replacing any of the following parts with new ones, adjust the preload of the ball bearing and thickness of the snap ring without fail: (1) Parts requiring preload adjustment of the ball bearing after their replacement: hub (1), the spindle (2) and ball bearing (21) NOTE: When replacing any of the above parts, use the parts previously adjusted. Otherwise, the travel motor may malfunction resulting in premature breakage.

34-67


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (1) Assembling hub section 1) Place the hub (1) on the press workbench on a support (S).

1

2) Insert the main bearing (24) in the hub (1). Place the main bearing press fit jig (BB) on the outer race of the main bearing (24). Push down the jig by a press to press fit the bearing into the hub (1).

BB

24

3) Turn over the hub (1).

S

4) Press fit the main bearing (24) into the hub (1) in the same way as the above item 2).

Fig. 34-152 Inserting bearing (24)

• Be careful not to mistake orientation of the main bearing (24) when press fitting.

FS2

5) Apply grease to the O-ring of the floating seal (31). Build the floating seal into the floating seal groove of the hub (1).

FS1

• Apply a small amount of grease to the entire surface of the O-ring after removing it from the floating seal.

31

• Place the FS inserting tool (FS1), the floating seal and the FS inserting tool (FS2) in this order, and press in until the FS inserting tool (FS2) contacts with the FS inserting tool (FS1). Remove the FS inserting tools and ensure that the end surface of the hub is in alignment with the face of the floating seal at an accuracy of 1 mm (0.04") or less.

1

Fig. 34-153 Installing floating seal (31)

LE

6) Attach two lifting eyes (LE) to the tapped holes of the hub (1) in diagonal position. 7) Attach a wire with hooks to the lifting eyes, lift the hub (1) by a crane and then install the hub (1) on the workbench.

1

• While aligning the tapped hole in the hub (1) with the fixing hole (F) in the workbench (WB), carefully insert the hub (1) into the fixing hole (F) in the workbench.

Fig. 34-154 Lifting hub (1)

8) Attach the hub (1) to the workbench (WB) by tightening the socket bolts in diagonal position.

1

WARNING Fully tighten the socket bolts. Otherwise, the travel motor may fall down to cause injury when it is turned over.

F

WB

Fig. 34-155 Installing hub (1) to the workbench

34-68


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (2) Assembling spindle section

FS2

1) Apply grease to the O-ring of the floating seal (31), and fit the floating seal in the groove of the spindle (2). • Place the FS inserting tool (FS3), the floating seal and the FS inserting tool (FS2) in this order, and press in until the FS inserting tool (FS2) contacts with the FS inserting tool (FS3). Remove the FS inserting tools and ensure that the end surface of the hub is in alignment with the face of the floating seal at an accuracy of 1 mm (0.04") or less.

FS3

31 2

Fig. 34-156 Installing floating seal (31)

2) Attach two lifting eyes to the spindle (2) in diagonal position. 3) Attach a wire with hooks to lifting eyes, lift the spindle (2) by crane and then insert the spindle (2) in the hub (1) slowly. 4) Fix the hub (1) and the spindle (2) with fixing plate in diagonal position. Tightening torque: 59 ± 20 N•m (43 ± 14 lbf•ft) 5) Turn over the travel motor. 6) Apply Loctite #638 to the spindle with the bearing preload adjuster. Tightening torque: 392 ± 39 N•m (289 ± 29 lbf•ft)

Fig. 34-157 Inserting spindle (2)

JB 1

2

Fig. 34-158 Installing ring nut (22) 7) Tighten two hexagon socket set screws (47). Tightening torque: 4.9 ± 1.0 N•m (3.7 ± 0.7 lbf•ft) 8) After tightening up the screw, deform the entrance of the threaded holes for avoiding loosening screw

Fig. 34-159 Attaching hexagon set screw (47)

34-69


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 9) Turn over the travel motor. (Direct the motor side upward.) 10)Remove the clamp plates from the workbench. FM

Fig. 34-160 Removing fixing plate (3) Assembling motor parts inside spindle 1) Press fit the oil seal (132) into the spindle (2) using the oil seal press fit tool (RM3) and a hammer.

RM3

• Apply MG2 grease to the lip of the oil seal before installing.

132

• Be careful not to mistake the orientation of the oil seal.

2

2) Insert two parallel pins (177) into the pin holes of the spindle (2). 3) Apply Moly NLGI 2 grease to the semi-spherical surface of two pivots (167) and fit them to the parallel pins (177) installed to the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-161 Installing Oil seal (132)

4) Apply grease to the spring pin (190) to install to the piston kit consisting of piston (161), shoe (162) and seal ring (163). 5) Apply grease to the sliding surface of the piston assembly to install to the piston hole of the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-162 Installing piston kit (4) Inserting shaft

WARNING Carefully carry out the insertion work using leather gloves to prevent possible burns. 1) Put the ball bearing (149) in a heating bath to heat it at 100 ± 10 °C (212 ± 18 °F) for 10 minutes and then insert it onto the drive shaft (102).

Fig. 34-163 Inserting bearing (149)

34-70


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 2) Incline the travel motor by 90 degrees. 3) Insert the shaft (102) into the spindle (2). • Insert the shaft (102) into the spindle (2) slowly and carefully. Otherwise the lip of the oil seal (132) fitted inside the spindle (2) may be damaged. Damage to the lip may cause oil leakage, leading to premature failure of the travel motor. 4) Install the swash plate (103) into the spindle (2). • Apply grease to an interface between the swash plate (103) and the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-164 Inserting shaft

• Align two pivots (167) installed in the spindle (2) with the pivot mounting holes of the swash plate to fit the swash plate (103) into the spindle (2). (5) Installing cylinder block 1) Place the washer (110), spring (114), washer (110), and snap ring (145) in this order, into the cylinder block (104). • Direct the sharp edge side of the snap ring (145) toward the inlet side. • Direct the sharp edge side of the washer (110) contacting the snap ring (145) toward the snap ring (145) side.

Fig. 34-165 Installing swash plate (103)

2) Place the cylinder block (104) on the press bench.

CAUTION When mounting the snap ring, if the tip of the pliers slips out of the hole of the snap ring, the snap ring could jump out Fig. 34-166 Assembling cylinder block

3) Place the retainer metal (RM1) against the washer (110). While holding down the retainer metal (RM1) by press, fit the snap ring (145) into the snap ring groove of the cylinder block (104) with a snap ring plier. • Pressing force of the spring (114) is more than 1180 N•m (265 lbf). • Cover the cylinder block (104) with a vinyl sheet (VS) to prevent damage to the contact plane between the cylinder block (104) and the timing plate (109).

104 VS RM1 110

145

Fig. 34-167 Installing snap ring (145)

34-71


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (6) Assembling hydraulic motor section 1) Put three rollers (151) into the holes of the cylinder block (104). 2) Place the thrust ball (108) on the cylinder block (104).

Fig. 34-168 Installing rollers (151) 3) Fit seven piston assemblies to the retainer plate (107). • After assembling, immerse the whole unit in hydraulic oil. 4) Fit the retainer plate (107) and the seven piston assemblies to the cylinder block (104). • Carefully match the retainer plate (107) with the spherical part of the thrust ball (108) for installation. 5) Insert the cylinder block (104) onto the drive shaft (102). • For installation, align the spline hole in the cylinder block (104) with the spline shaft of the drive shaft (102).

Fig. 34-169 Assembling piston assembly into retainer plate

• After installing the cylinder block, turn it by hand to make sure that it fits properly. If not, inspect it. • Do not take up the cylinder block (104). Otherwise the thrust balls (108) may come off, leading to abnormality in rotation.

Fig. 34-170 Inserting cylinder block (104)

34-72


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (7) Installing parking brake • Prior to installing, immerse the friction plate (115) in hydraulic oil. 1) Incline the workbench by 90 degrees. 2) Assemble one friction plate (115) and two separator plates (116) into the cylinder block (104) alternately one by one. 3) Lightly coat the O-rings (135) and (139) with grease and install them into the O-ring grooves of the piston (112). 4) Install the piston (112) into the spindle (2). • If it is hard to fit the piston (112) into the spindle (2) due to the resistance of the O-rings (135) and (139), lightly tap the end face of the piston (112) with a plastic hammer.

Fig. 34-171 Installing friction plates (115) and separator plates (116)

• Take care not to damage the O-rings when installing the piston (112). (8) Assembling brake valve parts inside rear flange 1) Fit two O-rings (237) to two plugs (226). • Coat the O-rings (237) with grease. 2) Install the valve (227) and spring (230) onto the plug (226), applying grease to them so as to connect all of them by adhesion of grease. Fig. 34-172 Installing piston (112)

3) Insert the plug (226) with the valve (227) and spring (230) assembled in one piece, into the rear flange (201). • For insertion of the plug (226), place the rear flange (201) on the workbench, facing the tapped hole for plug mounting of the rear flange (201) upward and align the center of tapped hole with the plug center. This is intended to prevent the O-ring from being damaged and spring (230) from coming out of valve (227) due to contact between the bore of the rear flange and the valve. 4) After installing two plugs (226) to the rear flange (201), temporarily tighten them using an Allen wrench.

Fig. 34-173 Inserting plug (226)

Fig. 34-174 Temporarily tightening plug (226)

34-73


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 5) Insert the spool (223) into the rear flange (201). • Apply hydraulic oil to the spool and insert the spool into the rear flange. • To install the spool, align the hole of the rear flange with the spool shaft center so as to prevent the inner surface of the rear flange and the outer surface of the spool from being damaged due to interference. • Otherwise internal leaks will occur after reassembly, resulting in performance deterioration of the travel motor. Fig. 34-175 Inserting spool (223)

6) Install the O-ring (236) to the plug (224). 7) Install the spring retainer (225) and spring (228) into the plug (224). 8) Tighten two plugs (224) into the rear flange (201). 9) Temporarily tighten two plugs (224) to the rear flange (201) with a wrench.

Fig. 34-176 Installing O-ring (236) (9) Assembling rear flange fittings 1) Installing two-speed switching spool inside rear flange 1. Insert the spring (266) and the spool (263) into the rear flange (201). 2. Fix the O-ring (273) to the plug (221). • Apply grease to the O-ring (273). 3. Tighten the plug (221) into the rear flange (201). 4.Tighten the plug (221) in the rear flange (201) at the specified torque with a hexagonal wrench key. Tightening torque: 59 ± 9.8 N•m (43±7 lbf•ft)

Fig. 34-177 Temporarily tightening plug (224)

Fig. 34-178 Inserting spool (263)

34-74


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 2) Coat the ball bearing (150) with hydraulic oil and fit it to the rear flange (201). 3) Put two the parallel pins (241) into the pin holes in the rear flange (201). 4) Apply grease to the mating face of the timing plate (109) in contact with the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-179 Installing bearing (150) 5) Install the timing plate (109) into the rear flange (201), using the parallel pin (241) as a guide. • Install the timing plate (109) until it comes in close contact with the rear flange (201). This close contact prevents the timing plate (109) from falling out of the rear flange (201) when the rear flange (201) is installed into the spindle (2). 6) Install eight springs (113) into the rear flange (201). • Sufficiently coat the springs (113) with grease and fix them so as not to allow them to drop from the rear flange (201).

Fig. 34-180 Installing timing plate (109)

(10) Connecting rear flange with the spindle 1) Insert the O-rings (43) and (44) into the O-ring groove of the spindle (2). • Fit the O-rings (43) without applying grease. Otherwise grease may ooze out of the contact face between the rear flange (201) and the spindle (2) as if oil leakage occurred.

Fig. 34-181 Installing O-rings (43) and (44) 2) Fix two the parallel pins (42) to the spindle (2). 3) Fill 0.3 L (0.08 gal) of hydraulic oil into the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-182 Installing parallel pin (42)

34-75


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

4) Align two parallel pins (42) set in the spindle (2) with the pin holes of the rear flange and install the rear flange (201) into the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-183 Installing rear flange (201) 5) Screw six hexagonal bolts (243) into the spindle (2) and tighten them at the specified torque. Tightening torque: 29.4 ± 4.9 N•m (22 ± 4 lbf•ft)

Fig. 34-184 Tightening socket bolts (243) 6) Tighten the plug (226) at the specified torque. Tightening torque: 78.5 ± 9.8 N•m (58 ± 7 lbf•ft)

Fig. 34-185 Tightening plug (226) 7) Tighten the plug (224) at the specified torque. Tightening torque: 196 ± 14.7 N•m (145±11 lbf•ft)

Fig. 34-186 Tightening plug (224)

34-76


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

(11) Installing carrier assembly 1) Insert three thrust washers (9), three bearing inner races (29), three needle roller bearings with cage (27) and three planetary gears 1 (5) in this order into the column section of the carrier (3). NOTE: If the tapped hole of carrier (3) is smeared oil or grease, degrease it by using the tap (M8 1.25). After that clean it with solvent, and degrease the solvent of the holes by spraying with compressed air. Otherwise axial-force dose not occur enough, and it may cause bole to loosen.

Fig. 34-187 Installing planetary gear 1 (5)

2) Tighten three hexagon head screws (40) with three thrust washers 3 (12) to fasten the carrier assembly to the column section of the carrier to the specified torque. Tightening torque: 33.3 ± 4.9 N•m (25 ± 4 lbf•ft) [Carrier assembly finished]

Fig. 34-188 Tightening hexagon head screw (40) (12) Tightening planetary gear 2 1) Turn over the travel motor. (Direct the reduction unit side upward.) 2) Install the thrust washer 1 (9) to the spindle (2) 3) Insert four thrust collars 4 (11) and four inner races (30) into the column section of the spindle (2). 4) Insert four needle roller bearings with retainer (28) into the column section of the spindle (2). 5) Make four planetary gears 2 (7) intermesh with the internal teeth of the hub (1) to insert them into the column section of the spindle (2).

Fig. 34-189 Installing planetary gear 2

• If the tapped hole of spindle (2) is smeared oil or grease, degrease it by using the tap (M8 1.25). After that clean it with slovent, and degrease the solvent of the holes by spraying with compressed air. Otherwise axial-force does not occur enough, and it may cause bolt to loosen.

34-77


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 6) Tighten four thrust washers 3 (12) into the column sections of the spindle (2) with four hexagon screws (40) at the specified torque. Tightening torque: 33.3 ± 4.9 N•m (25 ± 4 lbf•ft)

Fig. 34-190 Tightening hexagon head screw (40) (13) Installing sun gear 2 1) Install the coupling (14) to the shaft (102). 2) Make the sun gear 2 (6) mesh with the planetary gear 2 (7) to install.

Fig. 34-191 Installing sun gear (102) (14) Installing carrier assembly 1) Install the carrier assembly assembled in Item (11) while making it intermesh with the sun gear 2 (6) and the internal teeth of the hub (1). (15) Installing sun gear 1 1) Insert the sun gear 1 (4) into the coupling (14). Assemble the steel balls (41) into the sun gear 1 (4) in advance. • Apply grease to the steel balls (41) to prevent them from dropping before assembling them into the sun gear 1 (4). Fig. 34-192 Installing carrier assembly

2) Install the sun gear 1 (4) while making it mesh with three planetary gears 1 (5).

Fig. 34-193 Installing sun gear 1 (4)

34-78


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (16) Installing cover 1) Supply 0.6 liters of lubricating oil to the hub (1). • Apply grease to the O-ring (35) 2) Fit the O-ring (35) into the O-ring groove of the hub (1). 3) Install the cover (13) to the hub (1). • When it is difficult to fit the cover (139) into the hub (1), tap the periphery of the cover (13) lightly and uniformly with a plastic hammer. Otherwise the O-ring (35) may be damaged to cause oil leakage. Lubricating oil may also gush out through the thread hole.

Fig. 34-194 Supplying lubricating oil

4) Fit the ring (45) into the ring groove of the hub (1). • Avoid the position in which the mating port of the ring (45) faces the notch of the hub (1). 5) Install the O-rings (37) to two plugs (33) and (39). • Apply grease to the O-ring (37) lightly. 6) Tighten the plugs (33) and (39) into the cover (13) to the specified torque. Tightening torque: 58.8 ± 9.8 N•m (43 ± 7 lbf•ft) (17) Removing travel motor

Fig. 34-195 Installing cover (13)

1) Turn over the travel motor. (Direct the motor side upward.) 2) Remove the travel motor mounting screws from the workbench. 3) Screw two eyebolts into the thread holes of the spindle (2). • Arrange the two eyebolts in the diagonal position. 4) Hook the wire rope with hook to the eyebolts to remove the travel motor from the workbench using a crane. Fig. 34-196 Removing travel motor

34-79


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.5

34.2.1.5MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

After disassembling GM motor, follow these standards to perform maintenance. Handle every part with care and, in particular, avoid damaging the moving and sliding portions. (1) Replace any seal (O-ring, oil seal, and floating seal) once used even if no damage is found. (2) Wear parts maintenance standard 1) Replace any part heavily damaged visually. 2) Replace a part that shows the following abnormalities.

Item No.

Part name

Phenomenon

Standard value Allowable value (Standard (Criteria) dimension)

• Severe visual damage (1)

(2) (3) etc. (4) (6) (5) (7) (9) (11) (12)

Hub

Spindle Carrier assembly Sun gear 1 Sun gear 2 Planetary gear 1 Planetary gear 2 Thrust washer 1 Thrust collar 4 Thrust washer 3

• Pitting recognized on ring gear tooth flank • Abnormal wear such as galling • Severe visual damage • Abnormal wear such as galling. • Abnormal wear such as galling

Clearance 0.05 mm (0.002")

Clearance 0.15 mm (0.006")

• Pitting recognized on tooth flank • Flaking recognized on bearing rolling surface • Sliding surface discolored and/or abnormally worn • Dent recognized

(24)

Main bearing

(27) (28)

Needle roller bearing

(29) (30)

Bearing inner race

(201)

Rear flange

(102)

Shaft

(103)

Swash plate

(104)

Cylinder block

(105) (106)

Piston assembly Piston Shoe

(107)

Retainer plate

• Flaking recognized • Uneven wear recognized • Pitting recognized on roller • Abnormal wear on cage end surface • Flaking recognized on bearing rolling surface • Scratch recognized on valve (263) sliding surface • Oil seal (132) contacting surface worn • Spline worn • Seizure is recognized • Spline worn • Bore severely worn • Scratch and uneven wear recognized on timing plate (109) sliding surface • Clearance exists between piston (105) and shoe (106) • Abnormal and uneven wear recognized on shoe surface • Uneven wear recognized on shoe (106) sliding surface • Scratch and uneven wear recognized on thrust ball (108) sliding surface

34-80


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

Item No.

Part name

(108)

Thrust ball

(109)

Timing plate

(115)

Friction plate

(116)

Mating plate

(105)

Piston

(149) (150)

Ball bearing

(161) (162) (163) (223) (263)

Two-speed piston kit Piston Shoe Seal ring Spool

Phenomenon

Standard value Allowable value (Standard (Criteria) dimension)

• Uneven wear recognized on retainer plate – (107) sliding spherical surface • Seizure and uneven wear recognized on sliding surface • Uneven wear recognized on both end surBraking torque faces 32.4 N•m • Specified torque nor attained (23.9 lbf•ft) • Seizure recognized • Scratch recognized on periphery – • Dent recognized • Flaking recognized

Braking torque 32.4 N•m (23.9 lbf•ft) –

• Wear recognized • Abnormal wear recognized on periphery • Abnormal and/or uneven wear recognized on shoe surface • Abnormal wear recognized on Seal ring • Uneven wear recognized on periphery • Scratch recognized on periphery

34-81


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.6 •

Performance verification test

After finishing maintenance of the GM motor, carry out performance verification tests according to the procedures below:

(1) Measuring instruments to be used 1 2 3

Pressure gauge for 35 kgf/cm2 (500 psi) Measuring cylinder (for 5 liters) (1.32 gal) Stop watch

2 1 1

(2) Test procedure

1

Mount the GM motor on the body (frame section) and connecting piping. Hower, do not install the crawlers. (Because the performance test (no-load run)

Mounting and piping of GM motor

Note: 1. Connecting piping so that a pressure gauge can be installed ( in the main circuit) and an amount of drain of the hydraulic motor can be measured. 2. Mount the GM motor carefully using bolt holes without hammering.

2

3

GM motor speed

Running-in of GM motor 1

10 rpm

2

20 rpm

Pressure

Rotating direction

Operating time

No load

Right and left

One minute or more each

Performance verification test of GM motor

1

2

Preparation operation before testing ... Run the machine for preparation until the following temperatures are approximately achieved: • Hydraulic oil temperature 45-55 °C (113-131 °F) • External temperature of reduction unit hub 40-80 °C (104-176 °F) Verification test ... Acceptance criteria -

Mesaure the following values to decide acceptance or rejection. GM motor drive pressure 1.57 MPa (228 psi) or lower at 10 rpm Drain amount of hydraulic motor 0.5 L/min (0.13 gal) or less at 10rpm

Accept

Reject

Install crawlers

Disassemble and adjusting again

34-82


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) TABLE OF CONTENTS 42.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................ 42-3 42.1.1 CONFIRM ACTUAL TROUBLED CONDITIONS AT SITE ....................... 42-3 42.2 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS: HYDRAULIC ............................................................ 42-4 42.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................... 42-5 42.3.1 ATTACHMENT ......................................................................................... 42-5 42.3.2 TRAVEL OPERATION ............................................................................. 42-7 42.3.3 SLEWING OPERATION ......................................................................... 42-10 42.3.4 PUMP ..................................................................................................... 42-11



42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM)

42-1


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM)

42-2


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM)

42.1

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Troubleshooting provides the process to investigate the cause of trouble in order when a trouble occurred. This manual describes the way how to solve the specific phenomenon systematically as quick as possible. For the troubleshooting concerning the inside of equipment, refer to the troubleshooting for each manual of the equipment. 42.1.1

CONFIRM ACTUAL TROUBLED CONDITIONS AT SITE

(1) Get to the site as quickly as possible. Verify the machine model, serial number, situation of trouble and field, and notify possible arrival time to the user.

Fig. 42-1 Make field investigation (2) Verify background of trouble occurred. 1) Model name and serial number. 2) Kind of attachment. Check that the combination of attachments was proper and that the operating manner was not unreasonable. 3) Operating time on the hour-meter. 4) Record of troubles. First trouble or repeated trouble. 5) History of the trouble and additional modifications. Reoccurrence of the same trouble in the past or trouble due to additional modification.

Fig. 42-2 Verifying background of trouble occurred.

(3) How to diagnose trouble 1) Verify defective part. 2) Reproduce the troubled conditions. 3) Where the defective part can not be verified, surmise the possible causes systematically. 4) Verify the surmised cause. Fig. 42-3 Diagnosing trouble by means troubleshooting.

5) Report estimated repairing method, procedures and term to the user. (4) Explanation of the cause of trouble 1) Explain the cause of trouble to the user. For example, explain the oil leakage through the piston is caused by defect on the piston rod. And the proper operating manner of the machine should be explained to the user to prevent reoccurrence of the same kind of trouble. 2) Handling of damaged parts The damaged parts to be claimed and returned are the evidence, so they should be handled with care. For example, protect them from invasion of water, soil, etc., into ports on a hydraulic equipment, etc., at the returning them. And also use care not to give any damages and breakage for transport.

42-3


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS: HYDRAULIC

Attachment

(1) 1

Attachment operational failure (excluding swing operation)

(2) Travel speed is slow. (3) Attachment operating power is low.

Pump Slewing operation Travel operation

(4) Malfunction of attachment (1) Travel operational failure (2) Travel speed is slow. 2 (3) Travel operating power is low. (4) It deviates in travel independent operation. (1) Slewing operational failure (2) Slewing speed is slow. 3

(3) Slewing operating power is low. (4) Malfunction of slewing operation (1) Engine speed is reduced due to pump load.

4 (2) Malfunction of pump

Abbreviation E/G: Engine SOL: Solenoid SW: Switch ATT: Attachment C/V: Control valve R/V: Relief valve V:

Valve

42-4

Hydraulic cylinder

Travel motor unit

Slewing motor unit

Shuttle valve

Check valve

Actuator Attachment spool

Travel spool

Travel straight valve

Each overload R/V

Main gear pump R/V

Travel & ATT main R/V

Phenomenon

Valve Gear pump

Reference No.

Classification

Pump Main pump

Causes

Trochoid pump

42.2


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM)

42.3

TROUBLESHOOTING

42.3.1

Attachment

42.3.1.1

Attachment operational failure (Excluding swing operations)

Boom arm, bucket, doz- YES er and travel can be operated?

One or more of them can not be operated?

YES

NO

Primary pilot pressure normal?

YES

Spool stick of C/V exists?

Check C/V spool

Secondary pressure normally generated by pilot valve?

Check pilot valve

Check lever lockSOL or lever lock SW. (To troubleshooting for Electric system)

Lever lock SOL or lever lock S/W is failed

NO YES

Pump delivers oil?

Failure of pilot relief valve

NO Failure of pilot pump

42.3.1.2 (1)

Attachment speed is slow

Attachmentoperating speed is slow. Is each operating speed NO of boom, arm and bucket within the reference value?

Is the speed of travel sprocket within the reference value?

YES Failure of Cylinder

NO YES

Failure of pump

Does C/V spool out of NO reference funcion?

Failure of C/V spool

YES Set cylinder to stroke end, disconnect hose NO on the return side, apply pressure, and check that leaking inside of piston is within the reference value.

(2)

Failure of cylinder

Arm actuated slowly. Swing actuation speed NO normal?

Travel sprocket speed YES within reference value?

YES

NO

Failure of cylinder

Failure of P2 pump

Dozer actuation speed NO normal?

Failure of P3 pump

YES When pressurised with return side hose dis- NO connected and with cylinder at stroke end, leakage inside piston normal?

Failure of cylinder

YES

Failure of arm flow conflux valve

42-5


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) 42.3.1.3

Attachment operating power is low

Is main relief pressure within refer- NO ence value?

Failure of main relief V

YES Is overload relief pressure within ref- NO erence value?

Failure of overload relief V

YES Set cylinder to stroke end, disconnect hose on the NO return side, apply pressure, and check that leaking inside of piston is within reference value.

42.3.1.4 (1)

Failure of cylinder or failure of cylinder side V

Malfunction of attachment

Natural drop of attachment is large

YES

Is oil tightness of each YES cylinder is within reference value?

Is leaking inside of cylin- NO der within reference value?

Failure of cylinder

YES Port relief pressure normal?

YES

NO

(2)

(3)

Failure of C/V spool or failure of lock valve (only for boom) Failure valve

Travel normal, but boom, arm, bucket or swing im- YES possible to actuate together with travel

of

port

relief

Flow conflux valve does not switch

Failure of swing cylinder

Operational failure

YES Does swing spool in C/V NO move?

Adjust wire

YES Swing cylinder pressurised?

YES

Impossible to hol

YES Leakage in pressurised cylinder sec- YES tion within reference value? NO

42-6

NO

Failure of C/V swing spool.

Failure of swing cylinder

Check the check valve in C/V for dust, etc.

Failure of swing cylinder


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) 42.3.2 42.3.2.1

Travel operation Travel operational failure

Is travel pilot pressure normal?

NO

Is pilot pump delivery pressure is ap- NO prox. 35.5 kgf/cm2 (505 psi) or over.

Failure of pilot pump

YES YES

Does travel spool move?

Failure of travel pilot V

NO

Failure of C/V travel spool

YES Is much wear metal powder accumu- YES lated on hydraulic oil return filter?

Failure of travel motor

NO Is much wear metal powder mixed in YES lubricating oil for travel reduction unit?

Failure of travel reduction unit

42-7


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) 42.3.2.2

Travel speed is slow

Is travel sprocket speed within reference value?

YES

Is much wear metal pow- YES der accumulated on hydraulic oil return filter?

Travel sprocket speed YES changes between 1st and 2nd speed.

NO

NO

NO Is much wear metal pow- YES der mixed in hydraulic oil for travel reduction unit?

Does 2-speed change spool of travel motor move? NO

Failure of travel motor

YES

Failure of travel reduction unit

NO Is amount of travel motor NO drain within reference value?

Failure of travel motor spool

Failure of travel motor

Check on travel 2nd speed SOL.V. (To troubleshooting for Electric System) Is ATT operating speed YES other than travel speed within reference value?

Is travel pilot pressure normal?

NO

YES

NO Does C/V spool move?

Failure of C/V travel spool

NO YES

Primary pressure of trav- NO el pilot normal?

Failure of pilot pump

Failure of pilot relief valve

YES Failure of pump

Failure of travel pilot valve Is E/G speed within ref- YES erence value?

Failure of pump

NO E/G speed error

42.3.2.3

YES

Adjust accel wire.

NO

Adjust E/G speed.

Travel power is low

Is the power of boom, NO arm and bucket normal? YES

Is main relief pressure NO normal?

Failure of main relief V

YES C/V travel spool shows YES abnormality such as stick?

Failure of C/V travel spool

NO Abnormal wear metal YES powder accumulated on hydraulic oil return filter?

Failure of travel motor

NO Abnormal wear metal YES powder mixed in lubricating oil for travel reduction unit?

42-8

Failure 0f travel reduction unit


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) 42.3.2.4

It deviates in travel independent operation

There is a big different NO between right and left sprocket speed at travel idling. YES

NO Is tension of shoe within reference value?

Adjust shoe tension.

YES It may be caused by dflection of construction like lower frame,etc.

Is it free from bent of YES hose of travel line and oil leakage?

Replace hose.

NO Travel pilot normal?

NO

Check or replace travel pilot valve.

YES Does the flow change in YES reverse by changing the connection of pump delivery hose?

Check on pump or replace it.

NO Does the deviation YES change in reverse by changing the connection of right and left hoses between C/V and travel motor? NO

YES There is flaw on the outer surface of the travel spool.

Replace travel spool assembly.

NO Replace C/V.

Is much wear metal pow- YES der accumulated on hydraulic oil return filter?

Check travel motor or travel reduction unit, or replace it.

NO Is amount of travel motor YES drain within reference value?

Replace travel spool assembly.

NO Check travel motor or travel reduction unit, or replace it.

42-9


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) 42.3.3 42.3.3.1

Slewing operation Slewing operational failure

Dozer operable?

NO

Failure of P3 pump

YES Failure of P3 relief valve

Slewing relief valve nor- NO mal?

Replace slewing relief valve

YES Does slewing spool for NO C/V move?

Failure of C/V slewing spool

YES Is much wear metal pow- YES der accumulated on hydraulic oil return filter?

Failure of slewing motor when it is gun metal

Failure of slewing reduction unit when it is steel powder

42.3.3.2

Slewing speed is slow

Is slewing speed within YES reference value at no load? NO

Is slewing relief pressure within reference value?

NO Failure of slewing relief V

YES Is amount of slewing mo- NO tor drain within reference value?

Is dozer operating speed YES within reference value?

Failure of slewing motor

Failure of C/V slewing spool

NO Is engine speed within YES reference value?

Failure of gear pump

NO Improper E/G speed

42-10


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) 42.3.3.3

Slewing power is low

It is difficult to perform NO slewing motion and boom load operation. It is impossible to carry out diagonal pulling operation of swing and arm. It is impossible to slewing because of poor slewing power at slope.

NO

Is gear pump main relief pressure within reference value?

YES

Improper gear pump main relief pressure

YES

Is slewing relief pressure NO within reference value?

Failure of slewing relief V

YES

Is much wear metal pow- YES der accumulated on hydraulic oil return filter?

Failure of slewing motor when it is gun metal

Failure of slewing reduction unit when it is steel powder

42.3.3.4

Malfunction of slewing operation YES

(1)

It is imposible to stop slewing operation at slope.

(2)

Slewing drift after slew- YES ing inertia exerted on it is large.

Is slewing parking brake power within reference value?

NO

Parking brake spring failure in slewing motor, or friction plate failure for parking brake

Is slewing brake power within reference value? NO Is swing relief pressure NO within reference value?

42.3.4 42.3.4.1

Failure of slewing relief V

Pump Engine speed is reduced due to pump load

E/G speed lowers by YES performing slewing, boom and arm operations simultaneously, or dozer, travel and boom operations simultaneously.

YES Is E/G speed lowered and finally is it stopped?

Malfunction of control unit of pump

NO OK

42-11


42. TROUBLESHOOTING (HYDRAULIC SYSTEM) 42.3.4.2

(1)

Malfunction of pump

Oil leaks between E/G YES and pump installing flange.

Is coupling worn severely?

YES

Replace coupling and seal for pump shaft

NO Is pump internal pres- NO sure within reference value?

NO Is return filter normal?

Replace return filter

Replace seal for pump shaft.

Does hydraulic oil in tank NO satisfy NAS 9 class?

Flush hydraulic oil, or replace return filter.

Is the hydraulic oil in hy- YES draulic tank cloudy white?

Shortage of hydraulic oil

YES

YES (2)

Noise from pump

NO

YES Replenish hydraulic oil.

NO Check for air intake through piping on the suction side.

Is mich wear metal pow- YES der on return filter in hydraulic tank?

Replace parts inside of pump.

NO Check coupling for severe wear. (Refer to Article before mentioned.)

42-12


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM) TABLE OF CONTENTS 43.1 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS: ELECTRIC SYSTEM ............................................... 43-3 43.2 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................... 43-4 43.2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 43-4 43.2.2 ATTACHMENT OPERATION ................................................................... 43-8 43.2.3 TRAVEL OPERATION ............................................................................. 43-9 43.2.4 DECELERATION ................................................................................... 43-10



43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

43-1


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

43-2


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS: ELECTRIC SYSTEM

Classification

Reference No.

Causes

Phenomenon

Gauge cluster Generator Working light Deceleration motor Horn Coolant temp sensor Fuel level sensor Travel 1,2 speed SOL Lever lock SOL Engine stop SOL Horn switch Working light switch Travel 1,2 speed switch Lever lock limit switch Deceleration switch Engine stop SOL relay Charging indicator relay Safety relay Timer unit Holding circuit unit Fuse, Disconnect, Short circuit, Looseness Others

43.1

Electrical equipment

(1) Engine does not start.

Deceleration Travel operation Attachment operation

General

(2) Horn does not sound.

1

(3)

Working light does not light up.

(4)

Hourmeter does not actuate.

(5)

Fuel gauge does not actuate.

(6)

water temperature meter does not actuate.

2

All controls does not func(1) tion. (Excluding swing operations)

3

(1)

Travel 1 & 2 speed can not be changed.

4

(1)

Deceleration switching can not be carried out.

Abbreviation Decel: Deceleration SOL:

Solenoid

43-3

SenSolenoid sor

Switch

Relay


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

43.2

TROUBLESHOOTING

43.2.1

GENERAL

43.2.1.1

Engine does not start.

(1) Started does not rotate.

Check voltage of battery.

Check battery fluid and NO specific gravity.

Charge battery, or replace it

Voltage of B terminal of NO starter motor (M-1) is 12V

Replace starter cable.

OK Check starter motor of IN side. OK Voltage of B terminal of key switch is 12 V.

NO

Replace fusible link 45A.

OK Voltage of C terminal of key switch is 12V.

NO

Replace key switch.

OK Check safety relay of IN side.

Voltage of black-white NO harness (C terminal) at connector (CN-7F) of safety relay (R-2) is 12V.

Check harness.

OK Check safety relay of OUT side.

Voltage of withe red her- NO ness (S terminal) at connector (CN-7F) of safety relay (R-2) is 12V.

NO

OK

Check starter motor of IN side.

OK Malfunction of safety relay

Voltage of S terminal of NO starter motor (M-1) is 12V.

Breakage of harness between safety relay (R-2) and starter motor

Replace safety relay.

Check generator.

Check harness.

OK Replace starter motor.

43-4


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM) (2) Starter functions, but engine does not start.

(When key is ON position)

Voltege between green- YES red and black harness of connector (CN-303) of engine stop solenoid valve (SV-3) is 12V wen key is ON position. NO Voltage between yellowgreen and red-white harness of connector (CN9F) of engine stop relay (R-7) is 12V for 1 second after keying on.

Failure of engine stop solenoid valve(SV-3)

Replace engine stop solenoid valve.

Breakage of harness between engine stop relays and engine stop solenoid valve (SV-3),.

Check harness.

Failure of timer unit (R-6)

Replace timer unit.

Breakage of harness between engine stop relay (R-7) and timer unit (R-6)

Check harness.

NO Breakage of harness between timer unit (R-6) and fuse box

Check harness.

YES

NO

Voltage of white-black line of connector (CN22F) of timer unit (R-6) is 12V.

YES

Voltage between white YES and black harness of connector (CN-303) of engine stop solenoid valve (SV-3) is 12V

Engine stop (SV-3) error

solenoid

Replace engine stop solenoid valve.

NO YES

Breakage of harness between engine stop solenoid valve (SV-3) and fuse box

Voltage of white harness of fuse box is 12V.

Check harness.

NO YES No.5 fuse box is blown.

Check harness placed on the short-circuited sections.

Harness is shortcircuited to frame.

Check that harness in fuse box are free from breakage.

NO

Voltage of key switch ACC is 12V.

YES

Harness is broken between key switch and fuse box.

Check harness.

NO Check switch.

43-5


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM) 43.2.1.2

Horn does not sound.

When horn switch is pressed, Voltage between pink-black and black harness is 12V.

YES

Failure of horn

Replace horn.

Breakage of harness between horn (E-3) and horn switch (SW-7)

Check harness.

Failure of horn switch (SW-7)

Replace horn switch.

Breakage of harness between horn switch (SW-7) and fuse box

Check harness.

Harness is short-circuited to frame.

Check harness of short-circuited section.

NO Voltage of red-green harness of horn switch (SW-7) is 12V.

YES

NO

Voltage between red-green harness of fuse box is 12V.

YES

NO YES

No.4 fuse is blown.

Check that line in fuse box is free from breakage.

Check diode (D-1) for short circuiting.

43.2.1.3

Working light does not light up.

When KEY IS switched ON, Voltage between light green-red and black harness of working light (L-2) is 12V.

YES Working light error

Replace working light.

Breakage of harness between working light switch (SW-2) and working light (L-2)

Check harness.

Failure of working light switch (SW-2)

Replace working light switch.

Breakage of harness between working light switch (SW-2) and fuse box

Check harness.

Harness is short-circuited to frame.

Check harness of short-circuited section.

NO Voltage between yellow and green harness of working light switch (SW-2) is 12V.

YES

NO

Voltage of yellow-green harness of fuse box is 12V.

YES

NO No.3 fuse is blown.

YES

Check that line in fuse box is free from disconnection.

43-6


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM) 43.2.1.4

Hourmeter does not actuate.

While engine is starting, Voltage between white YES and pink harness of hourmeter (E-26) 12V? NO

Defective hourmeter

Voltage between white and black har- YES ness of connector (CN-16F) of charge indicator relay (R-8) 12 V?

NO

Check generator (E-2)

NO

NO Voltage of white-green harness of fuse box is 12V.

YES

Check charge indicator relay Breakage of harness between hourmeter (E-26) and charge indicator relay (R-8)

Breakage of harness between hourmeter (E-26) and fuse box

43.2.1.5

YES

Check harness

Check harness of the short-circuited sections.

NO No.6 fuse is blown.

Replace hourmeter

Harness is shortcircuited to frame.

Check that harness in fuse box is free from breakage.

Fuel gauge does not actuate.

When key is switched ON, Voltage between whitegreen and black harness of connector (CN-27F) of gauge cluster (E-6) is 12V.

YES

NO

Voltage of white-green line of fuse box is 12V.

YES

When sensor moved, re- YES sistance between yellow and black harness of connector (CN-27F) of gauge cluster (E-6) changes (approx.10 : at NO full and approx. 90 : at empty)

Breakage of harness between gauge cluster (E6) and fuel sensor (SE-1)

replace

Check harness.

Breakage of harness between gauge cluster (E6) and fuse box Check harness placed on short-circuited section.

NO No.6 fuse of fuse box is blown.

Check and gauge cluster

YES

Harness is shortcircuited to frame.

Check that harness in fuse box is free from breakage.

43-7


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM) 43.2.1.6

Water temperature meter does not actuate.

When key is switched ON, Voltage between whitegreen and black harness of connector (CN-27F) of gauge cluster (E-6) is 12V.

YES

NO

Voltage of white-green line of fuse box is 12V.

YES

Resistance between yel- YES low and red harness of connector (CN-27F) of gauge cluster (E-6) changes depending on waqter temperature (apNO prox. 80 : at 67 °C and approx. : 24 at 105 °C

Check and gauge cluster

Breakage of harness between gauge cluster (E6) and fuel sensor (SE-1)

Check harness placed on short-circuited section.

No.6 fuse of fuse box is blown.

43.2.2.1

Check harness.

Breakage of harness between gauge cluster (E6) and fuse box

NO

43.2.2

replace

YES

Harness is shortcircuited to frame.

Check that harness in fuse box is free from breakage.

Attachment operation All controls do not function (Excluding swing operations)

When key is switched ON, When lever stand was lowered, Voltage between green-white and black harness of connector (CN-108F) of lock lever solenoid valve (SV-1) is 12V.

YES Check lock lever solenoid. (To Troubleshooting for Hydraulic System)

YES NO Voltage of pink-blue harness of plug (F-2) of the left lock lever switch (SW9) is 12V.

Breakage of harness between lock lever switch (SW-9) and lock lever solenoid valve (SV-1)

Check harness

Failure lock lever switch (SW-9)

Replace lock lever switch (SW-9).

Breakage of harness between lock lever switch (SW-9) and lock lever solenoid valve (SW-8)

Check harness.

Failure lock lever switch (SW-8)

Replace lock lever switch (SW-8)

Breakage of harness between fuse box and lock lever switch (SW-8)

Check harness.

Harness is short-circuited to frame.

Check harness of short-circuited sections.

NO YES Voltage of yellow-black harness of plug (F-1) of the right lock lever switch (SW-8) is 12V.

NO Voltage of yellow harness of fuse box is 12 V.

YES

NO No.2 fuse of fuse box is blown.

YES

Check that line in fuse box is free from breakage.

43-8


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM) 43.2.3 43.2.3.1

Travel operation Travel 1 & 2 speed change can not be carried out.

(1) When key is switched ON, Voltage of yellow-black harness of connector (CN-109F) of travel 2speed solenoid valve (SV-2) is 12V.

(regardless of 1,2 speed mode) NO

Breakage of harness between fuse box and travel 1&2-speed solenoid valve (SV-2)

Check harness.

Breakage of harness between fuse box and holding circuit unit (E-14)

Check harness.

YES Voltage of white-green harness of connector (CN-1F) of holding circuit unit (E-14) is 12V.

NO

YES

No.6 fuse of fuse box is blown. YES harness is short-circuited to frame.

To “after selector switch was switched ON�

Check harness of the short-circuited section. Check that line in fuse box is free from disconnection.

(2) After selector switch was switched ON, Voltage of light green harness of connector (CN-109F) of travel 1&2-speed solenoid valve (SV-2) is 0V.

YES Check harness.

NO Voltage of light green line of connector (CN-1F) of holding circuit unit (E-14) is 0V.

YES

Breakage of harness between fuse box and holding circuit unit (E-14)

Check harness.

NO Voltage of white-black harness of connector (CN-1F) of holding circuit unit (E-14) when travel 1&2-speed selector switch is pressed.

NO

Check harness of travel 1&2-speed switch, and between travel 1&2-speed switch and holding circuit unit.

YES Check holding circuit unit.

43-9


43. TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM) 43.2.4

Deceleration

43.2.4.1

Decel change operation in option can not be carried out.

When key is switched ON, Voltage of yellow-green harness of connector (CN-113F) of decel motor (M-4) is 12V.

NO

Breakage of harness between fuse box (E-1) and decel motor (M-4)

Chech harness.

No.3 fuse of fuse box is blown.

Check harness of the short-circuited section.

YES

Check that harness in fuse box is free from disconnection Voltage of yellow-black line of connector (CN-6F) of decel relay (R-3) is 12V.

NO

Breakage of harness between fuse box (E-1) and decel relay (R-3)

Check harness of the short-circuited section.

YES Check that line in fuse box is free from disconnection. When decel operation is off, Voltage betwen blue-white and greenyellow harness of connector (CN113F) of decel motor (M-4) is 0V.

NO

Failure of decel motor (M-4)

Adjust decel motor.

Breakage of harness between decel motor (M-4) and decel relay (R-3)

Adjust harness.

Failure of decel relay (R-3)

Replace decel relay.

Failure of holding circuit unit

Replace holding circuit unit.

Failure of decel switch (SW-11)

Check decel switch

Breakage of harness between decel switch (SW-11) and holding circuit unit (E-14)

Check harness

When decel operation is on, Voltage betwwen black-yellow and green-yellow harness of connector (CN-113F) of decel motor (M-4) is 0V. NO When decel operation is on,

YES

Voltage of blue-black harness of connector (CN-6F) of decel relay (R-3) is 0V. NO When decel pressed,

switch

(SW-11)

is

Voltage of black-white harness of connector (CN-1F) of holding circuit (E14) is 0V. NO

YES

43-10


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) TABLE OF CONTENTS 44.1 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS: ENGINE ................................................................... 44-3 44.2 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................... 44-6 44.2.1 STARTING TROUBLE ............................................................................. 44-6 44.2.2 E/G ROTATION TROUBLE ...................................................................... 44-8 44.2.3 OUTPUT DROPS DOWN ........................................................................ 44-9 44.2.4 OTHER TROUBLE ................................................................................. 44-10 44.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 44-13 44.3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LIST .......................................................... 44-13



44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE)

44-1


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE)

44-2


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS: ENGINE Serviceman Inspection

Visual check

Starting trouble

(1) Starter not rotate 1 (2) Starter rotates but hard to start (1) Idling not smooth

Rotation trouble

(2) Medium speed hunting 2 High speed not smooth (3) Not reach max. speed Engine output not enough

Output drops down

(1) 3

Overheat (2) Knocking at high temperature Large amount of black exhaust (1) gas White exhaust gas (2) Excessive oil consumption

Other trouble 4

(3) Excessive fuel consumption (4)

Engine not stop when key turned OFF

When key is turned OFF, power (5) supply disconnected but engine not stop

44-3

Improper battery electrolyte level

Excessive amount of engine oil

Poor quality fuel or heavy oil used

Gas/fluid

Improper viscosity or level of engine oil, or leakage

Improper specific gravity of battery electrolyte

Poor quality fuel or leakage

Coolant level

Breather hose clogged or depressed

Fan belt slip

Fluid

Fuel filter clogged

Primary fuel filter clogged

Air cleaner clogged

Oil filter clogged

Trouble

Air or water entered fuel system

No fuel or leakage

Group No.

Classification

Filters

Gas leakage through valve gasket

Cause

Large amount of blowby gas

44.1


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE)

Engine

Electric

Electric

(2) Starter rotates but hard to start

(2) Medium speed hunting 2

High speed not smooth (3) Not reach max. speed

Output drops down

(1) 3

Engine output not enough Overheat

(2) Knocking at high temperature Large amount of black exhaust (1) gas White exhaust gas (2) Excessive oil consumption Other trouble 4

(3) Excessive fuel consumption (4)

Engine not stop when key turned OFF

When key is turned OFF, power (5) supply disconnected but engine not stop

44-4

Suction/ Fuel system exhaust system

Air cleaner and muffler

Valve spring fatigue

Valve clearance

Injection pump

Check nozzle

Check injection timing

Feed pump function

Generator current limiter

Starter motor

Stop solenoid valve

Glow plug

Glow relay

Connector and wiring

Safety relay

Starter key

(1) Starter not rotate 1 (1) Idling not smooth

Rotation trouble

Engine dealer

Mechanism

Fuse

Trouble Starting trouble

Serviceman

Group No.

Classification

Cause


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) Cause

Engine dealer

Starting trouble

(1) Starter not rotate 1

(2) Starter rotates but hard to start (1) Idling not smooth

Rotation trouble

(2) Medium speed hunting 2

High speed not smooth (3) Not reach max. speed Engine output not enough

Output drops down

(1) Overheat

3

(2) Knocking at high temperature Large amount of black exhaust (1) gas White exhaust gas (2) Excessive oil consumption Other trouble 4

(3) Excessive fuel consumption (4)

Engine not stop when key turned OFF

When key is turned OFF, power (5) supply disconnected but engine not stop

44-5

Flywheel gear damaged

Defective head gasket

Check fuel feed

Internal part seizure

Valve spring fatigue

Piston ring worn

Piston liner worn

Crank shaft oil seal defective

Governor spring fatigue

Control rack movement not smooh

Mechanical

Compression pressure low

Oil cooler element damaged

Check thermostat

Fuel mixed

Trouble

Check relief valve

Oil gets into comb. chamber through piston / valve guide

Group No.

Classification

LubricaCooltion sysing tem


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE)

44.2

TROUBLESHOOTING

44.2.1

STARTING TROUBLE

44.2.1.1

Starter does not rotate

Check voltage of battery.

Check battery fluid and NO specific gravity.

Charge battery, or replace it.

Voltage of B terminal of NO starter motor (M-1) is 12V.

Replace starter cable.

OK Check on starter motor IN side. OK NO

Voltage of B terminal of key switch is 12V.

Replace fusible link 45A.

OK NO

Voltage of C terminal of key switch is 12V. OK

Replace key switch.

(Hereafter when key is in start position.)

Check safety relay of IN side.

Voltage of black-white NO harness (C terminal) at connector (CN-7F) of safety relay (R-2) is 12V.

Check harness.

OK Check safety relay of IN side.

Voltage of white-red har- NO ness (S terminal) at connector (CN-7F) of safety relay (R-2) is 12V.

OK Malfunction of safety ralay

Replace safety relay.

NO OK

Check starter motor of IN side.

Check generator.

Voltage of S terminal of NO starter motor (M-1) is 12V.

OK

Breakage of harness between safety relay (R-2) and starter motor

Check harness.

Replace starter motor.

44-6


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) 44.2.1.2

Starter rotates but hard to start Less

Check starter power

Check battery electrolyte level and specific gravity

Charge or replace battery.

OK Check compression pressure Valve clearance Valve spring fatigue Piston liner worn

Check engine itself

Piston ring worn Defective head gasket Flywheel gear damaged Check radiator and thermostat

Check air suction system

Air cleaner clogged Check indicator

OK Check fuel meter Check fuel feed system

Check electrical system

OK

Feed pump performance

Check water separator

Check injection pump

Check fuel filter

Check injection nozzle

Check fuel quality

Check injection timing YES

12 V detected for glow plug

Defective glow plug

NO

Chek engine oil viscosity

Improper ground connection

NO

Check if engine oil viscosity suitable for ambient temperature

NO

Defective harness between key switch and glow

Change engine oil

NOTE: Check with the engine start key being in ON position.

44-7


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) 44.2.2

E/G ROTATION TROUBLE Check injection pipe Check injection nozzle Idling not smooth

Cylinder compression pressure not even Check injection pump Check thermostat

(1)

Idling

Idling speed too high

(2)

Medium speed

Adjust engine speed

Check control rack

Medium speed hunting

Check governor spring

YES

Check if air mixed in fuel

(3)

High speed

Release air

OK Check air suction system

Check if air cleaner clogged

OK Check fuel meter Check water separator

Check fuel feed system

Check fuel filter Check fuel quality

OK Check injection nozzle Check injection pump Check injection timing

Not reach max. speed

Adjust engine speed

NOTE: Check the above items in the condition of coolant temperature at more than 50°C. (122°F)

44-8


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) 44.2.3 44.2.3.1 (1)

OUTPUT DROPS DOWN Engine output not enough

Overheat

Engine coolant temperature lamp lighted

OK

Check shovel work condition

NO Check engine coolant temperature switch

Check electrical system

Check gauge cluster Check wiring and connector

OK Check coolant level Check fan belt slip

Check cooling system

Check radiator clogging Check thermostat

OK Check fuel quality Check fuel system

Check injection timing Check fuel injection valve

OK Check engine oil system

(2)

Check air suction system

Air filter clogging Check indicator

Check engine oil filter

OK

Check air cleaner filter

OK Check fuel feed system OK

Check if air mixed in fuel OK Check water separator Check fuel filter Check fuel quality

Check engine oil

Release air

Check if engine oil viscosity suitable for ambient temperature

Check feed pump performance Check injection pump Check injection nozzle Check injection timing

Change engine oil

OK Check compression pressure Large amount of blowby gas Gas leakage through gasket Check engine mechanical

Check if engine oil gets into comb. chamber through piston / valve guide

Check valve clearance Valve spring fatigue Control rack not smooth Piston ring worn Failure of head gasket

NOTE: Check in the condition of operating at high speed.

44-9


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) 44.2.3.2

Knocking at high temperature

Check fuel system

Check fuel quality

Change fuel

Check engine mechanical

Check if engine oil gets into comb. chamber

Check oil adhering condition at exhaust port

OK Large amount of blowby gas Gas leakage through gasket

Check compression pressure Check injection timing Check injection nozzle

NOTE: Check in the condition at engine coolant temperature of more than 50째C. (122째F)

44.2.4 44.2.4.1

OTHER TROUBLE Exhaust trouble

Large amount of black exhaust gas

Check air cleaner

Replace air element

OK Check engine oil viscosity Check if engine oil too much OK Check injection nozzle Check injection timing Check gas leakage through head gasket

Check injection pump Check valve clearance Valve spring fatigue Check piston ring defect

Large amount of white exhaust gas

Check if water mixed in fuel

Check water separator

OK Check if engine oil gets into comb. chamber through piston / valve guide

Check compression pressure

Large amount of blowby gas

Check injection timing

Gas leakage through gasket

NOTE: Note: Check in the condition at engine coolant temperature of more than 50째C. (122째F)

44-10


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) NOTE: A breather mechanism of blow-by gas reduction system is applied to the engine as shown in the right drawing. Remove and plug the suction manifold to check blow-by gas. 1. 2. 3. 4 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Diaphragm cover Spring Center plate Diaphragm Remove this side Bonnet Breather baffle Breather pipe Baffle plate Plug Suction manifold

4

3

2 1

5

6

8 10

7 11

9

Costruction of breather mechanism

44-11


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) 44.2.4.2

Excessive oil consumption Check ground under engine and oil pan

Check engine oil leakage (Check if engine oil too much)

Tighten packing and seal or replace if necessary

OK Check if breather hose depressed or clogged

Replace breather hose

OK Check fuel quality

Instruct to feed proper fuel

OK Instruct to feed proper engine oil

Check engine oil viscosity OK

Defective crank shaft oil seal

Check if engine oil gets into comb. chamber through piston / valve guide.

Piston liner worn Piston ring worn

NOTE: Check in the condition of no engine oil leakage. 44.2.4.3

Excessive fuel consumption

Check fuel leakage

Check fuel quality

Instruct to feed proper fuel

OK Large amount of blowby gas Check nozzle function

Check gas leakage through gasket

OK Check injection timing

Check compression pressure

NOTE: Check in the condition the proper fuel is used. 44.2.4.4

Engine not stop when key turned OFF NO

Engine stop solenoid valve (SV-3) normally energised

Engine stop solenoid valve incorrectly installed

Correct engine stop solenoid valve installation

YES

YES Check resistance of starter key terminal (between terminals B and ACC)

Resistance 0 : detected between terminals B and ACC

Replace Key switch

NO

NOTE: Check with the engine start key being in OFF position.

44-12

Check harness


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE)

44.3

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

44.3.1

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LIST Group

Diode

Electical Fittings

Light

Motor

Relay

Code

Part Name

D-1

DIODE

D-2

DIODE

D-3

DIODE

D-4

DIODE

D-12

DIODE

D-13

DIODE

D-14

DIODE

E-1

FUSE BOX

E-2

GENERATOR (ALTERNATOR)

E-3

HORN

E-4

FUSIBLE LINK (45A)

E-6

GAUGE CLUSTER

E-7

POWER SOCKET

E-8

AIR HEATER

E-10

RADIO (OPT)

E-12

HEATER (OPT)

E-13

BATTERY

E-14

SEQUENCE BOX

E-15

FUSE BOX (OPT) (FOR COOLER)

E-16

COOLING UNIT

E-17

CONDENSER MOTOR

E-18

COMPRESSOR

E-20

TRAVEL ALARM (OPT)

E-26

HOUR METER

L-1

ROOM LAMP

L-2

BOOM WORKING LIGHT (55 W)

L-5

CAB / CANOPY WORKING LIGHT

M-1

STARTER MOTOR

M-2

WIPER MOTOR (CAB)

M-3

WASHER MOTOR (CAB)

M-4

DECELERATION MOTOR

M-6

FUEL PUMP

R-1

BATTERY RELAY

R-2

SAFETY RELAY

R-3

DECELERATION RELAY

R-6

TIMER UNIT

R-7

E/G STOP RELAY

R-8

CHARGE INDICATOR RELAY

R-9

CAB / CANOPY WORKING LIGHT

R-10

CONDENSER SPEED SHIFT RELAY

R-11

CONDENSER RELAY

R-13

COOLER RELAY

44-13


44. TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE) Group

Relay

Sensor

Solenoid

Code

Part Name

R-14

SLEW/SWING SELECT RELAY

R-22

SW. SELECT RELAY

R-23

SLEW/SWING PRESER VATION RELAY

R-24

NIBBLER OPEN RELAY

R-25

NIBBLER CLOSE RELAY

SE-1

FUEL SENSOR

SE-2

ENGINE THERMO SENSOR

SE-5

ENGINE WATER TEMPERATURE

SV-1

LEVER LOCK SOL.

SV-2

2-SPEED SELECT SOL.

SV-3

E/G STOP SOL.

SV-5

POWER SHIFT SOL. (Cooler Spec)

SV-9

NIBBLER OPEN SOL.

SV-10 NIBBLER CLOSE SOL. SV-12 SLEW/SWING SELECT SOL.

SW-1

KEY SWITCH

SW-2

WORKING LIGHT SW.

SW-3

2-SPEED SELECT SW.

SW-4

WIPER WASHER SW.

SW-5

E/G COOLANT TEMP. SW.

SW-6

E/G OIL PRESSURE SW.

SW-7

HORN SW.

SW-9

LEVER LOCK SW.

SW-10 HEATER SW. (OPT) SW-11 DECELERATION SW. Switch

SW-15 HI,LOW PRESS SW. SW-16 CONDENSER SPEED SHIFT SW. SW-23 TRAVEL ALARM SELECT SW. (OPT) SW-24 TRAVEL RIGHT (FORWARD) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-25 TRAVEL RIGHT (REVERSE) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-26 TRAVEL LEFT (FORWARD) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-27 TRAVEL LEFT (REVERSE) PRESSURE SW. (OPT) SW-28 SLEW/SWING SELECT SW. SW-30 SLEW/SWING LEVER PRESS. SW.(LEFT) SW-31 SLEW/SWING LEVER PRESS. SW.(RIGHT) SW-33 NIBBLER OPEN SW. SW-34 NIBBLER CLOSE SW.

44-14


51. ENGINE TABLE OF CONTENTS

ENGINE MODEL: 4TNV88-XYB 51.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 51-10 51.2 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................................... 51-28 51.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................. 51-63 51.4 DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AND REASSEMBLY OF ENGINES ............ 51-71 51.5 LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................................................................ 51-125 51.6 COOLING SYSTEM .................................................................................... 51-130 51.7 FUEL INJECTION PUMP/GOVERNOR ...................................................... 51-132 51.8 TURBOCHAGER: DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AND REASSEMBLY ... 51-138 51.9 STARTING MOTOR .................................................................................... 51-161 51.10ALTERNATOR ........................................................................................... 51-187 51.11ELECTRIC WIRING ................................................................................... 51-191 51.12SERVICE STANDARDS ............................................................................. 51-201 51.13TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR BOLTS AND NUTS .................................... 51-212



51. ENGINE

3TNV82A

4TNV94L

4TNV106

3TNV84(T)_E4TNV84(T)

4TNV98

4TNV106T

3TNV88_E4TNV88

4TNV98T

51-1


51. ENGINE PREFACE

SAFETY LABELS

This manual describes the service procedures for the TNV series engines of indirect injection system that have been certified by the US EPA, California ARB and/or the 97/68/EC Directive for industrial use. Please use this manual for accurate, quick and safe servicing of the said engine. Since the explanation in this manual assumes the standard type engine, the specifications and components may partially be different from the engine installed on individual work equipment (power generator, pump, compressor, etc.). Please also refer to the service manual for each work equipment for details. The specifications and components may be subject to change for improvement of the engine quality without notice. If any modification of the contents described herein becomes necessary, it will be notified in the form of correction information each time.

Most accidents are caused by negligence of basic safety rules and precautions. For accident prevention, it is important to avoid such causes before development to accidents. Please read this manual carefully before starting repair or maintenance to fully understand safety precautions and appropriate inspection and maintenance procedures. Attempting at a repair or maintenance job without sufficient knowledge may cause an unexpected accident. It is impossible to cover every possible danger in repair or maintenance in the manual. Sufficient consideration for safety is required in addition to the matters marked CAUTION. Especially for safety precautions in a repair or maintenance job not described in this manual, receive instructions from a knowledgeable leader. Safety marks used in this manual and their meanings are as follows:

DANGER-indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, WILL result in death or serious injury.

WARNING-indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, COULD result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION-indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, MAY result in minor or moderate injury. NOTE: indicates that if not observed, the product performance or quality may not be guaranteed.

51-2


51. ENGINE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (1) SERVICE AREA

WARNING

Sufficient Ventilation Inhalation of exhaust fumes and dust particles may be hazardous to ones health. Running engines welding, sanding, painting, and polishing tasks should be only done in well ventilated areas.

CAUTION

Safe / Adequate Work Area The service area should be clean, spacious, level and free from holes in the floor, to prevent “slip” or “trip and fall” type accidents.

CAUTION

Bright, Safely Illuminated Area The work area should be well lit or illuminated in a safe manner. For work in enclosed or dark areas, a “drop cord” should be utilized. The drop cord must have a wire cage to prevent bulb breakage and possible ignition of flammable substances.

CAUTION

Safety Equipment Fire extinguisher(s), first aid kit and eye wash / shower station should be close at hand (or easily accessible) in case of an emergency.

(2) WORK – WEAR (GARMENTS)

CAUTION

Safe Work Clothing Appropriate safety wear (gloves, special shoes/boots, eye/ear protection, head gear, harness’, clothing, etc.) should be used/worn to match the task at hand. Avoid wearing jewelry, unbuttoned cuffs, ties or loose fitting clothes around moving machinery. A serious accident may occur if caught in moving/ rotating machinery.

51-3


51. ENGINE (3) TOOLS

WARNING

Appropriate Lifting / Holding When lifting an engine, use only a lifting device (crane, jack, etc.) with sufficient lifting capacity. Do not overload the device. Use only a chain, cable, or lifting strap as an attaching device. Do not use rope, serious injury may result. To hold or support an engine, secure the engine to a support stand, test bed or test cart designed to carry the weight of the engine. Do not overload this device, serious injury may result. Never run an engine without being properly secured to an engine support stand, test bed or test cart, serious injury may result.

CAUTION

Appropriate Tools Always use tools that are designed for the task at hand. Incorrect usage of tools may result in damage to the engine and or serious personal injury.

(4) GENUINE PARTS and MATERIALS

CAUTION

Genuine Parts Always use genuine YANMAR parts or YANMAR recommended parts and goods. Damage to the engine, shortened engine life and or personal injury may result.

(5) FASTENER TORQUE

WARNING

Torqueing Fasteners Always follow the torque values and procedures as designated in the service manual. Incorrect values, procedures and or tools may cause damage to the engine and or personal injury.

(6) ELECTRICAL

WARNING

Short Circuits Always disconnect the (-) Negative battery cable before working on the electrical system. An accidental “short circuit� may cause damage, fire and or personal injury. Remember to connect the (-) Negative battery cable (back onto the battery) last. Fasten the terminals tightly.

51-4


51. ENGINE

WARNING

Charging Batteries Charging wet celled batteries produces hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is extremely explosive. Keep sparks, open flame and any other form of ignition away. Explosion may occur causing severe personal injury.

WARNING

Battery Electrolyte Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Do NOT allow it to come in contact with clothing, skin and or eyes, severe burns will result.

(7) WASTE MANAGEMENT

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions with regard to hazardous waste disposal. Negligence of these will have a serious impact on environmental pollution concerns. 1. Waste fluids such as lube oil, fuel and coolant shall be carefully put into separate sealed containers and disposed of properly. 2. Do NOT dispose of waste materials irresponsibly by dumping them into the sewer, overland or into natural waterways. 3. Waste materials such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvents, filter elements and batteries, must be disposed of properly according to local ordinances. Consult the local authorities or reclamation facility.

(8) FURTHER PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

Fueling / Refueling Keep sparks, open flames or any other form of ignition (match, cigarette, etc.) away when fueling/refueling the unit. Fire and or an explosion may result.

F1457

WARNING

Hot Surfaces Do NOT touch the engine (or any of its components) during running or shortly after shutting it down. Scalding / serious burns may result. Allow the engine to cool down before attempting to approach the unit.

WARNING

Rotating Parts Be careful around moving/rotating parts. Loose clothing, jewelry, ties or tools may become entangled causing damage to the engine and or severe personal injury.

51-5


51. ENGINE

WARNING

Preventing burns from scalding 1. Never open the radiator filler cap shortly after shutting the engine down. Steam and hot water will spurt out and seriously burn you. Allow the engine to cool down before attempt to open the filler cap. 2. Securely tighten the filler cap after checking the radiator. Steam can spurt out during engine running, if tightening loose.

51-6


51. ENGINE PRECAUTIONS FOR SERVICE WORK

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

1. Precautions for Safety Read the safety precautions given at the beginning of this manual carefully and always mind safety in work. 2. Preparation for Service Work Preparation is necessary for accurate, efficient service work. Check the customer ledger file for the history of the engine. • Preceding service date • Period/operation hours after preceding service • Problems and actions in preceding service • Replacement parts expected to be required for service • Recording form/check sheet required for service 3. Preparation before Disassembly • Prepare general tools, special service tools, measuring instruments, oil, grease, non-reusable parts, and parts expected to be required for replacement. • When disassembling complicated portions, put match-marks and other marks at places not adversely affecting the function for easy reassembly. 4. Precautions in Disassembly • Each time a parts is removed, check the part installed state, deformation, damage, roughening, surface defect, etc. • Arrange the removed parts orderly with clear distinction between those to be replaced and those to be used again. • Parts to be used again shall be washed and cleaned sufficiently. • Select especially clean locations and use clean tools for disassembly of hydraulic units such as the fuel injection pump. 5. Precautions for Inspection and Measurement Inspect and measure parts to be used again as required to determine whether they are reusable or not. 6. Precautions for Reassembly • Reassemble correct parts in correct order according to the specified standards (tightening torques, and adjustment standards). Apply oil important bolts and nuts before tightening when specified. • Always use genuine parts for replacement. • Always use new oil seals, O-rings, packing and cotter pins. • Apply sealant to packing depending on the place where they are used. Apply of grease to sliding contact portions, and apply grease to oil seal lips. 7. Precautions for Adjustment and Check Use measuring instruments for adjustment to the specified service standards.

1. Range of Operation Explanation This manual explains the troubleshooting, installation/removal, replacement, disassemble/reassembly, inspection, adjustment and adjusting operation procedures for the TNV series engines with direct injection system. Refer to the manufacturer’s manual for each of the fuel injection pump, governor, starting motor and alternator except for their installation. 2. How to Read the Explanations • An exploded view, sectional views, a system diagram, etc. are shown at the beginning of each section as required for easy understanding of the mounted states of the components. • For the removal/installation of each part, the procedure is shown with the procedural step No. in the illustration. • Precautions and key points for disassembly and reassembly of parts are described as points. In the explanation for each point, detailed operation method, information, standard and precautions are described.

51-7


51. ENGINE Description Example This figure shows the 3TNV84.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Camshaft driving gear Cooling water pump Crankshaft pulley Gear case Fuel injection pump Idle gear Crankshaft gear Starter

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Flywheel Camshaft Gear case flange Oil seal Fuel pump spacer Flywheel housing Don’t disassemble: pumpe flange, fuel pump drive gear, flange bolt

The job contents are described in the disassembly procedure for Nos. not shown in the illustration. • Disassembly procedure 1. Follow steps (1) to (15) of the cylinder head disassembly procedure. 2. Remove the cooling water pump. 3. Remove the crankshaft pulley. (Point 1) ←Operation point to be explained on a later page. • Operation points Disassemble: Service point for removal Reassemble: Service point for installation Disassemble-Reassemble: Service point required in both removal and installation. • Contents omitted in this manual Though the following jobs are omitted in the explanation in this manual, they should be conducted in actual work: 4. Jacking up and lifting 5. Cleaning and washing of removed parts as required 6. Visual inspection

51-8


51. ENGINE 3. Definition of terms NOTE: Instruction whose negligence is very likely to cause an accident. Always observe it. Standard: Allowable range for inspection and adjustment. Limit: The maximum or minimum value that must be satisfied during inspection or adjustment. 4. Abbreviations Abbreviation Assy Sub-Assy a.T.D.C b.T.D.C STD IN EX

Meaning assembly sub-assembly after top dead center before top dead center Standard Intake Exhaust

Abbreviation T.D.C. B.D.C. OS US Min-1 PS T

51-9

Meaning top dead center bottom dead center oversize undersize revolutions per minute Output (metric horsepower) Bolt/nut tightening torque


51. ENGINE

51.1

GENERAL

51.1.1

ENGINE NOMENCLATURE

Destination Nominal engine speed or output T: with turbocharger None: Natural aspirated engine The subdivion code of the model name Cylinder bore (in mm) Model series Number of cylinders

The engine specification class Classification

Load

Engine speed

CL VM

Constant load Variable load

Constant speed Variable speed

Available engine speed (min-1) 1500/1800 2000-3000

*The engine specification class (CL or VM) is described in the specifications table. 51.1.2

SPECIFICATIONS

1. The information described in the engine specifications tables (the next page and after) is for "standard" engine. To obtain the information for the engine installed in each machine unit, refer to the manual provided by the equipment manufacturer. 2. Engine rating conditions are as follows (SAE J 1349, ISO 3046/1) • Atmospheric condition: Room temp. 25°C, Atmospheric press. 100 kPa (750 mmHg), Relative humidity 30% • Fuel temp: 25°C (Fuel injection pump inlet) • With cooling fan, air cleaner, exhaust silencer (Yanmar standard part) • After running-in hours. Output allowable deviation: ± 3%

51-10


51. ENGINE (1) 3TNV82A Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall Engine length Dimensions ** (with flyw Crank- Overall shaft V pulley di- width ameter & heel Overall housing) height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

3TNV82A CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 3 82 x 84 1.331

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

9.9 (13.5)

12.0 (16.3)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

11.0 (14.9) 1600

13.2 14.6 16.0 17.5 18.2 19.0 20.4 21.9 (17.9) (19.9) (21.8) (23.8) (24.8) (25.8) (27.8) (29.8) 1895 2180 2375 2570 2675 2780 2995 3180 1-3-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 15W-40 SUPER GOLD 10W-30 3.6 5.5 1.2 2.2

L

1.8

mm

553

528

mm

489

mm

565

kg mm mm

138

128

335 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type 120 x 90 110 x 110

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-11


51. ENGINE (2) 3TNV84 Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

3TNV84 CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 3 84 x 90 1.496

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

11.3 (15.3)

13.5 (18.3)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

14.8 16.4 18.1 19.7 20.5 21.3 23.0 24.6 (20.1) (22.3) (24.6) (26.8) (27.9) (29.0) (31.3) (33.5) 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2690 2810 2995 3210 1-3-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 15W-40 SUPER GOLD 10W-30 6.7 1.9

12.4 (16.8)

L mm

1.8 589

564

mm

486

mm

622

kg

161

mm mm

155 335 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

120 x 90

110 x 110

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-12


51. ENGINE (3) 3TNV84T Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

3TNV84T CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 3 84 x 90 1.496

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

14.0 (19.0)

16.5 (22.5)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

18.8 25.0 25.9 26.8 29.1 30.9 (25.5) (34.0) (35.2) (36.5) (39.5) (42.0) 1600 1895 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210 1-3-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 15W-40 SUPER GOLD 10W-30 6.7 1.9

15.8 (21.5)

L mm

2.0 589

564

mm

486

mm

622

kg

161

mm mm

155 350 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

120 x 90

110 x 110

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-13


51. ENGINE (4) 3TNV88 Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

3TNV88 CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 3 88 x 90 1.642

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

12.3 (16.7)

14.8 (20.1)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

13.5 (18.4) 1600

16.3 18.0 19.9 21.6 22.6 23.5 25.2 27.1 (22.1) (24.5) (27.0) (29.4) (30.7) (31.9) (34.2) (36.8) 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210 1-3-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 15W-40 SUPER GOLD 10W-30 4.7 7.2 1.8 3.5

L

2.0

mm

589

564

mm

486

mm

622

kg

155

mm

350 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

mm

120 x 90

120 x 90

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-14


51. ENGINE (5) 4TNV84 Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of x cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV84 CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 84 x 90 1.995

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

14.9 (20.3)

17.7 (24.1)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

19.5 21.9 24.1 26.3 27.4 28.5 30.7 32.9 (26.5) (29.8) (32.8) (35.8) (37.3) (38.7) (41.7) (44.7) 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 15W-40 SUPER GOLD 10W-30 7.4 2.3

16.4 (22.3)

L mm

2.7 683

658

mm

498.5

mm

617

kg

183

mm mm

170 370 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

120 x 90

110 x 110

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-15


51. ENGINE (6) 4TNV84T Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV84T CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 84 x 90 1.995

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

19.1 (26.0)

24.3 (33.0)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

2000

2200

2400

2600

2800

3000

26.9 27.9 30.5 33.5 35.7 38.6 41.2 (36.5) (38.0) (41.5) (45.5) (48.5) (52.5) (56.0) 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2810 2995 3210 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 15W-40 SUPER GOLD 10W-30 7.4 3.4

21.3 (29.0)

L mm

2.7 683

649

mm

498.5

mm

713

kg

183

mm mm

170 370 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

120 x 90

110 x 110

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-16


51. ENGINE (7) 4TNV88 Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV88 CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 88 x 90 2.190

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

16.4 (22.3)

19.6 (26.7)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

18.0 (24.5) 1600

21.6 24.1 26.5 28.8 30.1 31.3 33.7 35.4 (29.4) (32.7) (36.0) (39.2) (40.9) (42.5) (45.8) (48.1) 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 15W-40 SUPER GOLD 10W-30 5.8 8.6 2.3 4.2

L

2.7

mm

683

658

mm

498.5

mm

618

kg

183

mm mm

170 370 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

120 x 90

110 x 110

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-17


51. ENGINE (8) 4TNV94L Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV94L CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 94 x 110 3.053

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

26.1 (35.5)

31.3 (42.5)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

2000

2200

2400

34.6 35.3 38.2 41.6 (47.0) (48.0) (52.0) (56.5) 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 10W-30 SUPER GOLD 15W-40 10.2 4.5

29.1 (39.5)

L

4.2

mm

719

mm

498

mm

717

kg

245

235

mm

410 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

mm

130 x 130

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-18

2500 43.0 (58.5) 2700


51. ENGINE (9) 4TNV98 Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV98 CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 98 x 110 3.318

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

30.9 (42.0)

36.8 (50.0)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

2000

2200

2400

41.2 41.9 45.6 49.3 (56.0) (57.0) (62.0) (67.0) 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 10W-30 SUPER GOLD 15W-40 10.2 4.5

34.6 (47.0)

L

4.2

mm

719

mm

498

mm

717

kg

248

235

mm

410 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type

mm

130 x 130

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-19

2500 51.1 (69.5) 2700


51. ENGINE (10) 4TNV98T Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) ** (with flywheel housing) Cooling fan (std.) Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV98T CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 98 x 110 3.318

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

37.9 (51.5)

45.6 (62.0)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

2000

2200

2400

2500

50.4 50.7 55.5 60.3 62.5 (68.5) (69.0) (75.5) (82.0) (85.0) 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 10W-30 SUPER GOLD 15W-40 10.2 4.5

41.9 (57.0)

L

4.2

mm

715

mm

575

mm

779

kg

258

245

mm

430 mm O/D, 8 blades suction type

mm

130 x 130

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-20

2600 64.0 (87.0) 2810


51. ENGINE (11) 4TNV106 Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) **

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV106 CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 106 x 125 4.412

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

41.2 (56.0)

49.3 (67.0)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

2000

2200

2400

54.4 56.6 61.4 65.5 (74.0) (77.0) (83.5) (89.0) 1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 10W-30 SUPER GOLD 15W-40 14.0 9.0 7.5

45.6 (62.0)

L

6.0

mm

808

776

mm

629

629

mm

803

803

kg

345 500 mm O/D, 7 blades pusher type

330 500 mm O/D, 7 blades suction type

Cooling fan (std.)

mm

Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

mm

150 x 150

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-21

2500 67.7 (92.0) 2700


51. ENGINE (12) 4TNV106T Engine name Engine specification class Type Combustion chamber Number of cylinders Cylinder bore x stroke Displacement Revolving speed Continuous rating Output

Rated output

Revolving speed Output

Max. no-load speed (Âą25) Ignition order Power take off Direction of rotation Cooling system Lubrication system Starting system Applicable fuel Applicable lubricant Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan)* Effective Coolant water capacity (engine only) Overall length Engine Overall Dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) **

Unit mm x mm L

4TNV106T CL VM Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine Direct injection 4 106 x 125 4.412

Min-1

1500

1800

-

kW (hp)

51.5 (70.0)

61.8 (84.0)

-

Min-1

1500

1800

kW (hp) Min-1 L L

56.8 (77.2) 1600

2000

2200

68.0 69.9 72.0 (92.5) (95.0) (97.9) 1895 2180 2400 1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side) Flywheel Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel) Radiator Forced lubrication with trochoid pump Electric Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT SUPER GOLD 10W-30 SUPER GOLD 15W-40 14.0 9.0 7.5

L

6.0

mm

808

mm

629

628.6

mm

866

866

kg

355 500 mm O/D, 7 blades pusher type

340 500 mm O/D, 7 blades suction type

Cooling fan (std.)

mm

Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.)

mm

776

150 x 150

* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator.

51-22


51. ENGINE 51.1.3

FUEL OIL, LUBRICATING OIL AND COOLANT WATER

51.1.3.1 Fuel oil

IMPORTANT: Only use the recommended fuel to obtain the best engine performance and prevent damage of parts, also prevent air pollution.

1. Selection of fuel oil Use the following diesel fuels for best engine performance: Diesel ASTM N. 2-D tipo TT

2. Fuel handling • Water and dust in the fuel oil can cause operation failure. Use containers which are clean inside to store fuel oil. Store the containers away from rain water and dust. • Before supplying fuel, let the fuel container rest for several hours so that water and dust in the fuel are deposited on the bottom. Pump up only the clean fuel. • Pump up only the fuel in the upper half to leave dregs (A) near the bottom.

3. Fuel tank • The fuel tank is equipped with a filler port (1), a fuel return connection (3) and an outlet (to engine) (4). Be sure to attach drain cock (5), precipitation trap and primary strainer (2) to the fuel tank.

51-23


51. ENGINE 51.1.3.2 Lubricating oil IMPORTANT: Use of other than the specified engine oil may cause inner parts seizure or early wear, leading to shorten the engine service life. 1. Selection of engine lube oil Use the following engine oil • API classification ..... 4/56 or CF (Standards of America Petroleum Institute) • SAE viscosity ..........10W-30 or 15W-40 (Standard of Society of Automotive Engineering) Engine oil with 10W30 or 15W40 can be used throughout the year. (Refer to the right figure.) 2. Handling of engine oil • Carefully store and handle the oil so as to prevent dust or dirt entrance. When supplying the oil, pay attention and clean around the filler port. • Do not mix different types of oil as it may adversely affect the lubricating performance.

CAUTION When touching engine oil by hand, the skin of the hand may become rough. Be careful not to touch oil with your hands without protective gloves. If touch, wash your hands with soap and water thoroughly.

51-24

Selection of viscosity (SAE Service grade)

Atmospheric temperature (°C) 15W-40/10W-30 can be used almost throughout the year.


51. ENGINE 51.1.3.3 Coolant water Use clean soft water and be sure to add the Long Life Coolant Antifreeze (LLC) in order to prevent rust built up and freezing. If there is any doubt over the water quality, distilled water or pre-mixed coolant should be used. IMPORTANT: Be sure to add Long Life Coolant Antifreeze(LLC) to soft water. In cold season, the LLC is especially important. Without LLC, cooling performance will decrease due to scale and rust in the coolant water line. Without LLC, coolant water will freeze and expand to break the cooling line. Be sure to use the mixing ratios specified by the LLC manufacturer for your temperature range. Do not mix different types (brand) of LLC, chemical reactions may make the LLC useless and engine trouble could result. Replace the coolant water every once a year.

CAUTION When handling Long Life Coolant Antifreeze, wear protective rubber gloves not to touch it. If LLC gets eyes or skin, wash with clean water at once.

51-25


51. ENGINE 51.1.4

ENGINE EXTERNAL VIEWS

. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.

Filler port (engine oil) Turbocharger Air intake port (from air cleaner, optional) Lifting eye Cooling water pump Cooling fan Crank shaft V-pulley V-belt Filler port (engine oil) Drain plug (engine oil) Engine oil cooler (4TNV98T, 4TNV106, 4TNV106T) Engine oil filter Dipstick (engine oil) Fuel injection pump Governor lever Fuel filter Fuel oil inlet Fuel filter mounting Lifting eye Engine name plate Rocker arm cover Flywheel Starter motor Exhaust manifold Alternator

NOTE: This illustration shows the 4TNV98T engine (with turbocharger). The drain plug (engine oil) location depends on the engine installed on the machine unit to be on the fuel injection pump side (above illustration) or starter motor side.

51-26


51. ENGINE 51.1.5

STRUCTURAL DESCRIPTION

1. Emissione reduction New fuel injection pressure • Mono plunger • Higher injection pressure • Injection timing control, speed timer, load timer, cold start timer 2. Noise reduction Higher stiffness cylinder block Higher stiffness gear-case 3. Emission reduction Injection nozzle • Low suck volume • Multi injection holes 4. Emission reduction Cylinder head • Optimal nozzle angle • Optimal swirl ratio • Optional valve timing 5. Emission reduction Piston • New combustion chamber - Noise reduction New Lub. Oil pan • Change rotor shape for low pulsation • Driven by crankshaft directly 6. Emission reduction Cylinder head • 4 valve / cylinder (intake-2, exhaust-2) • Optimal installation of the injection nozzle vertical installation and location of the center of cylinder • Optimal valve timing 7. Emission reduction New fuel injection nozzle • Low suck volume • Multi injection holes 8. Emission reduction New fuel injection pump • Mono plunger • Higher injection pressure • Mechanical control of injection timing, speed timer, load timer, cold start timer 9. Emission reduction Piston • New combustion chamber - Noise reduction (only applied for 4TNV84T) New Lub. Oil pan • Change rotor shape for low pulsation • Driven by crankshaft directly

51-27

2 - valve cylinder head

4 - valve cylinder head

4TNV84T, 4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T)


51. ENGINE

51.2

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

51.2.1

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The engine periodic inspection timing is hard to determine as it varies with the application, load status, qualities of the fuel and lubricating oils used and handling status. General rules are described here. P: User-maintenance E: Parts replacement O: Shop-inspection Maintenance period Every Every Every Every Classifica2000 500 Every 250 Item Daily 1000 tion hours or 50 hours or hours or hours or two 6 hours 3 one year years months months Whole Visual check around engine P Fuel tank level check and fuel supply P Fuel tank draining P Water separator (Option) draining P Fuel oil system Bleeding the fuel system P Water separator cleaning P Fuel filter element replacement E Lube oil level check and replenishment P Lube oil replacement E Lubricating 2nd time E oil system and st time 1 Lube oil filter replacement thereafter Coolant water level check and replenishment P Radiator fin cleaning P P 2nd time Cooling waP V-belt tension check and ter system 1st time thereafter Coolant water replacement E Coolant/water path flushing and maintenance O Rubber Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection P O hoses and maintenance Inspection and adjustment of governor lever Governor P P and accelerator Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement P E O Air intake Diaphragm assy inspection (2 years) system Turbocharger blower cleaning* O* Warning lamp & instruments function check P Electrical Battery electrolyte level check and battery resystem P charging Intake/exhaust valve head clearance adjustO Cylinder ment head Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping O Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection O* Fuel injecFuel injection timing adjustment tion pump O* and nozzle Fuel injection pump inspection and adjustment *EPA allows to maintain the emission related parts every 1,500 or 3,000 hours.

51-28


51. ENGINE 51.2.2

PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

51.2.2.1 Check before Daily Operation Be sure to check the following points before starting an engine every day. No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Inspection Item Visual check around engine Fuel tank level check and fuel supply Lube oil level check and replenishment Coolant water level check and replenishment Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator Warning lamp & instruments function check

1. Visual check around engine If any problem is found, do not use before the engine repairs have been completed. • Oil leak from the lubrication system • Fuel leak from the fuel system • Coolant water leak from the cooling water system • Damaged parts • Loosened or lost bolts • Fuel, radiator rubber hoses, V belt cracked, loosened clamp

2. Fuel tank level check and fuel supply Check the remaining fuel oil level in the fuel tank and refuel the recommended fuel if necessary.

3. Lube oil level check and replenishment (a) Checking oil level Check the lube oil level with the dipstick, after adjusting the posture of the machine unit so that an engine may become a horizontality. Insert the dipstick fully and check the oil level. The oil shall not be contaminated heavily and have appropriate viscosity. No coolant water or diesel fuel shall be mixed. When lube oil is supplied after the engine running, check the lube oil level after about 10 minutes pass after the engine shutdown so that the lube oil is retuned to the oil pan. Standard The level shall be between the upper and lower limit lines on the dipstick.

A. Dipstick AU. Upper limit AL. Lower limit

51-29

B. Filler cap C. Filler port (engine oil)


51. ENGINE (Unit: liter) Model 3TNV82A 3TNV84(T) 88 4TNV84(T) 88 4TNV94L 98(T) 4TNV106(T) (CL class) 4TNV106(T) (VM class)

Total volume (L) 5.5 6.7 7.4 10.5 14.0 14.0

Effective volume (L) 1.9 2.8 3.4 4.5 9.0 7.5

Lube oil capacity may differ from the above volume depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. (b) Replenishing oil pan with lube oil If the remaining engine oil level is low, fill the oil pan with the specified engine oil to the specified level through the filler port. NOTE: The oil should not be overfilled to exceed the upper limit line. Otherwise a naturally-aspirated engine may intake lube oil in the combustion chamber during the operation, then white smoke, oil hummer or urgent rotation may occur, because the blowby gas is reduced in the suction air flow. In case of turbo-charged engine oil may jet out from the breather or the engine may become faulty.

4. Coolant water Inspection Daily inspection of coolant water should be done only by Coolant recovery tank.

WARNING • Never open the radiator filler cap while the engine and radiator are still hot. Steam and hot water will spurt out and seriously burn you. Wait until the radiator is cooled down after the engine has stopped, wrap the filler cap with a rag piece and turn the cap slowly to gently release the pressure inside the radiator. • Securely tighten the filler cap after checking the radiator. Steam can spurt out during operation, if the cap is tightened loosely. (a) Checking coolant water volume Check the coolant water level in the Coolant recovery tank. If the water level is close to the LOW mark, open the Coolant recovery tank cap and replenish the Coolant recovery tank with clean soft water to the FULL mark. Standard The water level of the Coolant recovery tank shall be between the upper and lower limit lines.

51-30


51. ENGINE

(b) Replenishing radiator with water If the Coolant recovery tank water level is lower than the LOW mark, open the radiator cap (R) and check the coolant water level in the radiator. Replenish the radiator with the coolant water, if the level is low. • Check the coolant water level while the engine is cool. Checking when the engine is hot is dangerous. And the water volume is expanded due to the heat. • Daily coolant water level check and replenishing shall be done only at the Coolant recovery tank. Usually do not open the radiator cap to check or replenish.

R. Radiator cap T. Tighten L. Loosen

IMPORTANT: If the coolant water runs short quickly or when the radiator runs short of water with the Coolant recovery tank level unchanged, water may be leaking or the air tightness may be lost. Increase in the Coolant recovery tank water level during operation is not abnormal. The increased water in the Coolant recovery tank returns to the radiator when the engine is cooled down. If the water level is normal in the Coolant recovery tank but low in the radiator, check loosened clamping of the rubber hose between the radiator and Coolant recovery tank or tear in the hose.

Standard Engine: The radiator shall be filled up. (Unit: liter) Model 3TNV82A 3TNV84(T) 3TNV88 4TNV84(T) 4TNV88 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T)

Coolant water volume In an engine 1.8 2.0 2.7 4.2 6.0

Engine coolant water capacity may differ from the above volume depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. 5. Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance Check the rubber hoses for fuel and coolant water pipes cracked. If the cracked hose is found, replace it with new one. Check the loosened clamp. If found, tighten it.

51-31


51. ENGINE 6. Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator. Make sure the accelerator of the machine unit can be operated smoothly before starting the engine. If it feels heavy to manipulate, lubricate the accelerator cable joints and pivots. Adjust the accelerator cable if there is a dislocation or excessive play between the accelerator and the governor lever. Refer to 3.2.3. 7. Warning lamp & instruments function check Before and after starting the engine, check to see that the alarm function normally. Failure of alarm cannot warn the lack of the engine oil or the coolant water. Make it a rule to check the alarm operation before and after starting engine every day. Refer to each manual for machine units in details.

51.2.2.2 Inspection after initial 50 hours operation Be sure to check the following points after initial 50 hours operation, thereafter every 250 hours or 3 months operation.

No. 1 2

Inspection Item Lube oil and filter replacement V-belt tension check

1. Lube oil and filter replacement (1st time)

CAUTION When an engine is still hot, be careful with a splash of engine oil which may cause burns. Replace engine oil after the engine oil becomes warm. It is most effective to drain the engine oil while the engine is still warm.

51-32


51. ENGINE

In early period of use, the engine oil gets dirty rapidly because of the initial wear of internal parts. Replace the engine oil earlier. Lube oil filter should also be replaced when the engine oil is replaced. The procedure of lube oil and lube oil filter replacement is as follows. (a) Drain engine oil • Prepare a waste oil container collecting waste oil. • Remove the oil filler cap to drain easily while draining the lube oil. • Loosen the drain plug using a wrench (customer procured) to drain the lube oil. • Securely tighten the drain plug after draining the lube oil. NOTE: Use a socket wrench or a closed wrench when removing or tightening a drain plug. Don’t use a spanner because it has the possibility that the spanner will slip and it will get hurt.

D. Dipstick DP. Drain plug. The location depends on the engine installed on the machine unit. O. Oil pan

(b) Replacing oil filter • Turn the lube oil filter counter-clockwise using a filter wrench (customer procured) to remove it. • Clean the mounting face of the oil filter. • Moisten the new oil filter gasket with the engine oil and install the new engine oil filter manually turning it clockwise until it comes into contact with the mounting surface, and tighten it further to 3/4 of a turn with the filter wrench. Tightening torque: 20~24 Nm (c) Filling oil and inspection • Fill with new engine oil until it reaches the specified level. IMPORTANT: Do not overfill the oil pan with engine oil. Be sure to keep the specified level between upper and lower limit on the dipstick. • Warm up the engine by running for 5 minutes while checking any oil leakage • Stop the engine after warming up and leave it stopping for about 10 minute to recheck the engine oil level with dipstick and replenish the engine oil. If any oil is spilled, wipe it away with a clean cloth.

E. T. L.

51-33

Engine oil filter Tighten Loosen


51. ENGINE

2. V-belt tension check When there is not enough tension in the V-belt, the V-belt will slip making it impossible for the alternator to generate power and cooling water pump and cooling fan will not work causing the engine to overheat. Check and adjust the V-belt tension (deflection) in the following manner. NOTE: Be especially careful not to splash engine oil on the V-belt, because it will cause slipping, stretching and aging of the belt. A. C. D. P.

Alternator Crankshaft V-pulley Deflection Press with thumb

A 10~14 8~12

B 7~10 5~8

1. Press the V-belt with your thumb [approx. 98N (10kgf)] at the middle of the V-belt span to check the tension (deflection). Available positions to check and adjust the Vbelt tension (deflection) are at the A, B or C direction as shown in the illustration right. You may choose a position whichever you can easily carry out the check and adjustment on the machine unit. • "New V-belt" refers to a V-belt, which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine. • "Used V-belt" refers to a V-belt, which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more. The specified deflection to be measured at each position should be as follows.

Direction For used V-belt For new V-belt

S. R. P. V.

Selt bolt Radiator fan Press with thumb V-belt

(Unit: mm) C 9~13 7~11

2. If necessary, adjust the V-belt tension (deflection). To adjust the V-belt tension, loosen the set bolt and move the alternator to tighten the V-belt. After replacing with a new V-belt and adjusting it, run the engine for 5 minutes and readjust the deflection to the value in the table above. 3. After replacing with a new V-belt and adjusting it, run the engine for 5 minutes and readjust the deflection to the value in the table above. 4. Visually check the V-belt for cracks, oiliness or wear. If any, replace the V-belt with new one. A. Alternator AD. Adjuster AV. Adjust the V-belt tension inserting a bar

51-34


51. ENGINE 51.2.2.3 Inspection every 50 hours Be sure to check the following points every 50 hours operation.

No. 1 2 3 4

Inspection Item Fuel tank draining Water separator draining Bleeding the fuel system Battery electrolyte level check and battery recharging

1. Fuel tank draining 1. Prepare a waste oil container. 2. Remove the drain plug (D) of the fuel tank (F) to drain (water, dust, etc.) from the fuel tank bottom. 3. Drain until fuel with no water and dust flow out. Then tighten the drain plug firmly.

2. Water separator draining Drain off the water separator whenever there is a lot of drain collected in the water separator at the bottom of the cup even if not the time for periodic inspection hour. The cup of the water separator is made from semi-transparency material and in the cup, the red colored float ring which rises on the surface of the drain is installed to visualize the amoun of drain. Also, the water separator with sensor to detect the drain for warning device on a controle panel is provided as the optional. Drain off the water separator in the following manner. 1. Prepare a waste oil container. 2. Close the fuel cock. 3. Loosen the drain cock at the bottom of the water separator, and drain off any water collected inside. 4. Tighten the drain cock with hand. 5. Be sure to bleed air in the fuel system.

A. C. CL. DC FC.

NOTE: If no drain drips when the drain cock is opened, loosen the air bleeding bolt on the top of the water separator by turning counter-clockwise 2~3 times using screw driver. (This may occure in case of the water separator position is higher than the fuel oil level in the fuel tank). After draining, be sure to tighten the air bleeding bolt.

51-35

Air bleeding bolt Cup Close Drain cock Fuel cock

FR. I. O OP. W.

Float ring Inlet Outlet Open Water separator


51. ENGINE

3. Bleeding the fuel system Bleed the fuel system according to the following procedures. When there is air in the fuel system, the fuel injection pump will not be able to function. 1. Check the fuel oil level in the fuel tank. Refuel if insufficient. 2. Open the cock of the water separator. 3. Loosen the air bleeding bolt on the water separator by turning 2~3 times to the counter-clockwise using screw driver or spanner. 4. When the fuel coming out is clear and not mixed with any bubble, tighten the air bleeding bolt. 5. Feed the fuel with the fuel priming pump or electro-magnetic fuel feed pump. • In case of the engine using the electro-magnetic fuel feed pump. Turn the starter switch to the ON position and hold it in the position for 10~15 seconds to operate the fuel feed pump. • In case of the engine installed the fuel filter mounting with the fuel priming pump. The priming pump is on the top of the fuel filter mounting. Move the priming pump up and down to feed fuel until feel your hand slightly heavy. - Water separator (Installed on the pipe line) - Fuel filter (Mounting with fuel priming pump) (Option)

A. Air bleeding bolt CL. Close DC. Drain cock FC. Fuel cock FF. Fuel filter FI. Fuel injection pump

51-36

FP. FR. I. O. OP. W.

Fuel priming pump Fuel return hose Inlet Outlet Open Water separator


51. ENGINE

4. Battery electrolyte level check and battery recharging

WARNING Fire due to electric short-circuit • Make sure to turn off the battery switch or disconnect the negative cable (-) before inspecting the electrical system. Failure to do so could cause short-circuiting and fires. • Always disconnect the (-) Negative battery cable first before disconnecting the battery cables from battery. An accidental "Short circuit" may cause damage, fire and or personal injury. And remember to connect the (-) Negative battery cable (back onto the battery) LAST. Proper ventilation of the battery area Keep the area around the battery well ventilated, paying attention to keep away any fire source. During operation or charging, hydrogen gas is generated from the battery and can be easily ignited. Do not come in contact with battery electrolyte Pay sufficient attention to avoid your eyes or skin from being in contact with the fluid. The battery electrolyte is dilute sulfuric acid and causes burns. Wash it off immediately with a large amount of fresh water if you get any on you.

Battery structure AP. Anode plate BC. Battery case C. Cap CO. Cover CP. Cathode plate G. Glass mat S. Separator T. Terminal

51-37


51. ENGINE

1. Electrolyte level • Check the level of fluid in the battery. When the amount of fluid nears the lower limit, fill with battery fluid (available in the market) to the upper limit. If operation continues with insufficient battery fluid, the battery life is shortened, and the battery may overheat and explode. • Battery fluid tends to evaporate more quickly in the summer, and the fluid level should be checked earlier than the specified times. • If the engine cranking speed is so slow that the engine does not start up, recharge the battery. • If the engine still will not start after charging, replace the battery. • Remove the battery from the battery mounting of the machine unit after daily use if letting the machine unit leave in the place that the ambient temperature could drop at -15°C or less. And store the battery in a warm place until the next use the unit to start the engine easily at low ambient temperature.

EL. Electrolyte level EX. Excessive GR. Grease

2. Battery charge Use a battery tester or hydrometer and check the battery condition. If the battery is discharged, recharge it. (a) Measurement with a battery tester (BT) When checking the battery with the battery tester, connect the red clip of the tester to the battery positive (+) terminal and black clip to the battery negative (-) terminal by pinching them securely, and judge the battery charge level from the indicator position. Green zone: Normal Yellow zone: Slightly discharged Red zone: Defective or much discharged

51-38

LL. Lower limit TL. Too low UL. Upper limit


51. ENGINE

(b) Measurement with hydrometer When using a hydrometer, the measured specific gravity must be corrected according to the temperature at the time of measurement. The specific gravity of battery electrolyte is defined with 20째C as the standard. Since the specific gravity increases or decreases by 0.0007 when the temperature varies by 1째C correct the value according to the equation below.

F.

Float

Electrolyte temperature at measurement Specific gravity at measurement Converted specific gravity at 20째C

(c) Specific gravity and remaining battery charge Discharged quantiSpecific gravity Remaining ty of electricity (20째C) charge (%) (%) 1.28 0 100 1.26 10 90 1.24 20 80 1.23 25 75

F. Float GT. Glass tube

3. Terminals Clean if corroded or soiled. 4. Mounting bracket Repair or replace it if corroded. Retighten if loosened. 5. Battery appearance Replace the battery if cracked or deformed. Clean with fresh water if contaminated.

51-39

RB. Rubber bulb


51. ENGINE 51.2.2.4 Inspection every 250 hours or 3 months Be sure to check the following points every 250 hours or 3 months operation, whichever comes first.

No. 1 2 3 4 5

Inspection Item Lube oil and filter replacement Radiator fin cleaning V-belt tension check Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement

1. Lube oil and filter replacement (The second replacement and after) Replace the engine oil every 250 hours operation from 2nd time and on. Replace the engine oil filter at the same time. Refer to 51.2.2.1 (1).

2. Radiator fin cleaning

CAUTION Beware of dirt from air blowing Wear protective equipment such as goggles to protect your eyes when blowing compressed air. Dust or flying debris can hurt eyes. Dirt and dust adhering on the radiator fins reduce the cooling performance, causing overheating. Make it a rule to check the radiator fins daily and clean as needed. • Blow off dirt and dust from fins and periphery with compressed air (0.19MPa) (2 kgf/cm2) or less] not to damage the fins with compressed air. • If contaminated heavily, apply detergent, thoroughly clean and rinse with tap water shower.

AB. Air blow DD. Dust, dirt RF. Radiator fins

IMPORTANT: Never use high pressure water or air from close by fins or never attempt to clean using a wire brush. Radiator fins (RF) can be damaged.

3. V-belt tension check (The second time and after) Check and adjust the V-belt tension. Refer to 51.2.2.2 (2).

51-40


51. ENGINE 4. Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator The governor lever and accelerating devices (accelerating lever, pedal, etc.) of the machine unit are connected by an accelerating wire or rod. If the wire becomes stretched or the connections loose, the deviation in the position may result and make operation unsafe. Check the wire periodically and adjust if necessary. Do not strongly move the accelerating wire or accelerating pedal. It may deform the governor lever or stretch the wire to cause irregular engine speed control. Checking and adjusting procedure are as follows. • Check that the governor lever of the engine makes uniform contact with the high idling and low idling limiting bolt when the accelerating devices is in the high idling speed or low idling speed position. • If either the high or the low idling speed side does not make contact with the limiting bolt, adjust the accelerating wire. Loosen the accelerating wire fixing nut and adjust the wire to contact with the limiting bolt.

AB. Accelerating wire bracket AF. Accelerating wire fixing nut AW. Accelerating wire bracket GL. Governor lever H. High idle limiting bolt LI. Low idle limiting bolt

CAUTION Never release the limiting bolts. It will impair the safety and performance of the product and functions and result in shorter engine life.

5. Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement

CAUTION Beware of dirt from air blowing Wear protective equipment such as goggles to protect your eyes when blowing compressed air. Dust or flying debris can hurt eyes. The engine performance is adversely affected when the air cleaner element is clogged by dust. So periodical cleaning after disassembly is needed. • Undo the clamps on the dust pan and remove the dust pan. • Loosen the wing bolt on the element and pull out the element.

AC. Air cleaner case AM. Arrow mark AR. Arrow mark AL. Air blow

51-41

DP. Dust pan E. Element L. Latch


51. ENGINE

• Blow air (0.29~0.49 MPa) (3.0~5.0 kgf/cm2) from inside the element to blow dust off as shown in the illustration right. Apply the air blowing pressure as low as possible so as not to damage the element. If having the air cleaner with double elements, never remove and clean the inner element. The aim of installing the inner element is for back up protecting from intaking dust during engine running when leaving the outer element to reinstall after removing it or when damaging the outer element unexpectedly during engine running. • Replace the element with new one, If the element is damaged, excessively dirty or oily. • Remove the inside dust cover of the dust pan, and clean inside of the dust pan. • Reinstall the element with the wing bolt. (do not leave the gasket.) Reattach the inside dust cover to the dust pan and install the dust pan to the air cleaner case placing the TOP mark upward.

AC. Air cleaner case AM. Arrow mark AR. Arrow mark DI. Dust indicator (optional)

IMPORTANT: When the engine is operated in dusty conditions, clean the element more frequently. Do not run the engine with removed air cleaner or element, as this may cause foreigh material to enter and damage the engine.

51.2.2.5 Inspection every 500 hours or 6 months Be sure to check the following points every 500 hours or 6 months operation, whichever comes first.

No. 1 2 3

Inspection Item Water separator cleaning Fuel filter element replacement Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement

51-42

DP. Dust pan IE. Inner element L. Latch OE. Outer element


51. ENGINE

1. Water separator cleaning Periodically wash the water separator element and inside cup with clean fuel oil. • Prepare a waste oil container. • Close the fuel cock. • Loosen the drain cock and drain. Refer to 51.2.2.3 (2). • Turn the retaining ring counter-clockwise and remove the cup. (Disconnect the coupler of the lead wire for drain sensor before removing the cup if it is with drain sensor). • Wash the element and inside cup with clean fuel oil. Replace the element with new one if any damaged. • Insert the element to the bracket (O-ring) and after putting the float ring in the cup, install it to the bracket by tightening the retaining ring clockwise. Tightening torque: 15 20Nm • Close the drain cock (connect the coupler if with drain sensor). • Bleed the fuel system. Refer to 51.2.2.3 (3).

2. Fuel filter element replacement Replace the fuel filter at specified intervals, before it is clogged with dust to adversely affect the fuel flow. Also, replace the fuel filter after the engine has fully been cooled. • Close the fuel cock of the water separator. • Remove the fuel filter using a filter wrench (customer procured). When removing the fuel filter, hold the bottom of the fuel filter with a piece of rag to prevent the fuel oil from dropping. If you spill fuel, wipe such spillage carefully. • Clean the filter mounting surface and slightly apply fuel oil to the gasket of the new fuel filter. • Install the new fuel filter manually turning until it comes into contact with the mounting surface, and tighten it further to 1/2 of a turn using a filter wrench. Tightening torque for 3TNV82A to 4TNV106(T): 20~24 Nm • Bleed the fuel system. Refer to 51.2.2.3 (3)

A. Air bleeding bolt C. Cup CL. Close DC. Drain cock FC. Fuel cock

FR. I. O. OP. W.

Float ring Inlet Outlet Open Water separator

L.

T.

Tighten

IMPORTANT: Be sure to use genuine Yanmar part (super fine mesh filter). Otherwise, it results in engine damage, uneven engine performance and shorten engine life.

51-43

Loosen


51. ENGINE

3. Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement Replace the air cleaner element periodically even if it is not damaged or dirty. When replacing the element, clean inside of the dust pan at the time. If having the air cleaner with double elements, do not remove the inner element. If the engine output is still not recover (or the dust indicator still actuates if having the air cleaner with a dust indicator) even though the outer element has replaced with new one, replace the inner element with new one.

51.2.2.6 Inspection every 1,000 hours or one year Be sure to check the following points every 1,000 hours or one year operation, whichever comes first.

No. 1 2 3 4 5

Inspection Item Coolant water replacement Diaphragm assy inspection Turbocharger blower cleaning* Intake/exhaust valve clearance adjustment Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection

1. Coolant water replacement Coolant water contaminated with rust or water scale reduces the cooling effect. Even when antifreeze agent (LLC) is mixed, the coolant water gets contaminated due to deteriorated ingredients. Replace the coolant water at least once a year. • Remove the radiator cap. • Loosen the drain plug at the lower portion of the radiator and drain the coolant water. • After draining the coolant water, tighten the drain plug. • Fill radiator and engine with coolant water.

C. Coolant recovery tank D. Drain plug (drain plug location depends on the machine unit)

51-44

F. Full (max limit) L. Low (min. limit) R. Radiator cap RH. Rubber hose


51. ENGINE

CAUTION Beware of scalding by hot water Wait until the temperature goes down before draining the coolant water. Otherwise, hot water may splash to cause scalding.

D. Drain plug (drain plug location depends on the machine unit) R. Radiator cap

2. Diaphragm assy inspection Inspect the diaphragm assy on the rocker arm cover every 1000 hours or 2 years. Refer to 51.4.2.4 point 6 for the function of the diaphragm. • Loosen screws, and remove a diaphragm assy, and check whether oil and so on doesn’t enter between the diaphragm and the cover. If oil and so on enters into the diaphragm assy, the diaphragm doesn’t work well. • Check the damages of the diaphragm rubber and the spring. If necessary, replace with new ones. NOTE: • When a diaphragm is damaged, pressure control inside the crankcase becomes insufficient, and troubles such as combustion defect and so on occur. • At lubricating oil replacement or lubricating oil supply, the amount of lubricating oil isn’t to be beyond the standard upper limit. If the lubricating oil quantity is beyond the upper limit or an engine is operated beyond the allowable maximum angle of an engine, the amount of oil mist may be inducted in the combustion chamber and the oil hammer sometimes may occur.

BB. BP. BR. C. D.

51-45

Breather baffle Baffle plate Breather pipe Center plate Diaphragm

DC. Diaphragm cover IM. Intake manifold RA. Rocker arm cover S. Spring


51. ENGINE

3. Turbocharger blower cleaning* When engine speed seems sluggish or the exhaust color looks poor, the blades of the turbochargerblower may be dirty. Wash the turbine blower in such a case. (a) General items • As for washing, use washing liquid and clear water. • Washing time is the time when about 10% of the boost pressure decreases more than that of usual operation state as a standard. • Disassemble and clean a turbocharger periodically because the whole of the turbocharger can’t be cleaned in this method. (b) Washing point • A specified quantity of washing liquid/water is poured with a filler (ex. Oil sprayer) from the air inlet of the blower gradually (about then seconds) at the normal load (3/4-4/4) of an engine. And, perform this work at no-load after load running of the engine, if it is difficult to pour the liquid into the blower at load running. Specified quantity of washing liquid/water Turbocharger model

RHB31, RHB51

Injection amount, one time

20 cc

CAUTION It causes an accident when large quantity of washing liquid is poured rapidly into a turbocharger. • Pour the same amount of clear water as washing liquid/water into the blower about 3-5 minutes later after the washing liquid/water injection and wash it.

CAUTION It causes an accident when large quantity of water is poured rapidly into a turbocharger. • Repeat the washing after ten minutes when there is no change with the boost pressure or the exhaust gas temperature after washing. When there is no change at all even if it repeats 3-4 times, disassemble and maintain the turbocharger because of the cruel dirt of the blower or other causes. • Operate the engine at load for at least 15 minutes after washing, and dry.

51-46


51. ENGINE

4. Intake/exhaust valve clearance adjustment Make measurement and adjustment while the engine is cold. (a) Valve clearance measurement • Remove the rocker arm cover above cylinder head. • Set the No.1 cylinder in the compression TDC Turn the crankshaft to bring the piston of the No.1 cylinder to its compression top dead center while watching the rocker arm motion, timing scale and the top mark position of the crankshaft pulley. (Position where both the intake and exhaust valves are closed.)

NOTE: • The crankshaft shall be turned clockwise as seen from the radiator side. • The No.1 cylinder position is on the opposite side of the radiator and the ignition order shall be 1-34-2-1 at 180° intervals. • Since the intake and exhaust valve rocker arms are operated the same and there is a clearance between the arm and valve generally at the top dead center, the position can be checked by means of the play when the arm head is held with a hand. Also see that the crankshaft pulley top mark is positioned at zero on the timing scale. If there is no valve clearance, inspection in the disassembled state is necessary since the valve seat may be worn abnormally.

C. Crankshaft pulley N. No. 1 cylinder

R. Rotational direction T. Top mark

A. L.

RA. Rocker arm V. Valve clearance

51-47

Adjusting screw Lock nut


51. ENGINE

• Valve clearance measurement In case of 2-valve cylinder head insert a thickness gauge between the rocker arm and valve cap, and record the measured valve clearance. In case of 4valve head insert a thickness gauge between the rocker arm and the valve bridge, and record the measured valve clearance. (Use it as the data for estimating the wear state.) • Adjusting other cylinders In case of 4-cylinder engines, turn the crankshaft 180° and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.4 and No.2 cylinders in this order. The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 180° each time. In case of 3-cylinder engines, turn the crankshaft 240° and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.2 cylinder in this order.

RA. Rocker arm V. Valve clearance VB. Valve bridge

The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 240° each time. The adjustment method of reducing the flywheel turning numbers (for reference): For 3 cylinder engines Set No.1 cylinder to the compression T.D.C.and adjust the clearance of the O mark of the below table. Next, turn the flywheel once (the suction / exhaust valve of No.1 cylinder is in the position of the overlap T.D.C. at this time), and adjust the clearance of the P mark. Ignition order of 3 cylinder engines: 1 3 2 Cylinder No. 1 Valve Suction Exhaust No.1 compression O O T.D.C No.1 overlap T.D.C

2 Suction

3 Exhaust

Suction

Exhaust

O

O

P

The first time The second time

P

For 4 cylinder engines Set No.1 cylinder to the compression T.D.C. and adjust the clearance of the O mark of the bottom table. Next, turn the flywheel once, and adjust the clearance of the P mark. Ignition order of 3 cylinder engines: 1 3 4 2 Cylinder No. 1 2 Valve Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust No.1 compression O O O T.D.C No.4 compression P T.D.C

51-48

3 Suction

4 Exhaust

Suction

Exhaust The first time

O

P

P

P

The second time


51. ENGINE

(b) Valve clearance inspection and adjustment • Loosen adjusting bolts In case of 2-valve cylinder head loosen the lock nut and adjusting screw, and check the valve for any inclination of valve cap, entrance of dirt or wear.

AB. Abnormal NO. Normal

VC. Valve cap

AD. Adjusting bolt L. Loosen

VB. Valve bridge W. Wrench

In case of 4-valve cylinder head loosen the lock nut and adjusting screw of rocker arm. Be careful that excessive tension isn't applied to the valve bridge, and loosen a locknut of valve bridge. NOTE: When loosening a locknut of a valve bridge, loosen the locknut while fixing the valve bridge with a wrench so that the valve may not lean.

Push the bridge head so that a valve bridge and two valve stem heads may contact each other uniformly, and adjust an adjusting bolt so that a gap of the valve stem head may become 0. Tighten a locknut after a valve bridge is fixed with a wrench.

AC. Adjust clearance to 0 H. Hold AJ. Adjusting bolt RN. Rock nut CL. Clearance 0 VB. Valve bridge

• Measuring valve clearance Insert a 0.2 or 0.3 mm thickness gauge between the rocker arm and valve cap / valve bridge, and adjust the valve clearance. Tighten the adjusting screw. mm Model

Standard valve clearance

3TNV82A~98

0.15~0.25

4TNV106(T)

0.25~0.35

51-49


51. ENGINE

NOTE: When tightening a valve bridge locknut of 4-valve head, tighten a locknut after fixing a valve bridge with a wrench so that a bridge may not rotate and a valve may not lean. • Apply oil to the contact surface between adjusting screw and push rod. • Adjusting other cylinders In case of 4-cylinder engines turn the crankshaft 180° then and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.4 and No.2 cylinders in this order. The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 180° each time. In case of 3-cylinder engines turn the crankshaft 240° then and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.2 cylinder in this order. The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 240° each time.

AD. Adjusting bolt T. Tighten

5. Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection

CAUTION Wear protective glasses when testing injection from the fuel injection valve. Never approach the injection nozzle portion with a hand. The oil jetting out from the nozzle is at a high pressure to cause loss of sight or injury if coming into careless contact with it.

51-50

VB. Valve bridge W. Wrench


51. ENGINE

(a) Injection pressure measurement Model

Standard MPa (kgf•cm2)

3TNV82A TNV88 (CL )

19.6-20.6 (200-210)

3TNV82A TNV88 (VM) 4TNV94L 4TNV106 (T)

21.6-22.6 (220-230)

NOTE: As for the opening pressure of the brand-new fuel nozzle, about 0.5Mpa (5kgf/cm) declines by the engine operation for about 5 hours because of the initial wear-out of a spring etc. Therefore, adjust 0.5 MPa (5 kgf/cm2) higher than the standard value of the above table when adjusting a new fuel nozzle of a spare part. Remove carbon deposit at the nozzle hole thoroughly before measurement. • Connect the fuel injection valve to the high pressure pipe of the nozzle tester (NT). • Operate the nozzle tester (NT) lever slowly and read the pressure at the moment when the fuel injection (IN) from the nozzle starts. • If the measured injection (IN) pressure is lower than the standard level, replace the pressure adjusting shim with a thicker one. Thickness of pressure adjusting shims

Injection pressure adjustment

mm 0.13, 0.15, 0.18, 0.4, 0.5, 0.8

The injection pressure is increased by approx. 1.9 MPa, when the adjusting shim thickness is increased by 0.1 mm.

51-51


51. ENGINE Informative: Fuel injection valve structure

NS. NV. NZ. PA. VS.

F. F.O. return pipe joint N. Nozzle NB. Nozzle body NC. Nozzle case nut Tightening: 39.2 to 44.1 Nm NH. Nozzle holder (b) Spray pattern inspection After adjustment to the specified valve opening pressure, use a nozzle tester and check the spray pattern and seat oil-tightness. Seat oil tightness check • After injecting a few times, increase the pressure gradually. Hold the pressure for about 5 seconds at a little before the valve opening pressure of 1.96 MPa (20 kgf/cm2), and check to see that oil does not drip from the tip end of the nozzle. • If extreme oil leak from the overflow joint exists during injection by the nozzle tester, check after retightening. If much oil is leaking, replace the nozzle assembly.

51-52

Nozzle spring Nozzle valve Nozzle spring seat Pressure adjusting shim Valve stop spacer

Normal Uniform spray pattern from each nozzle


51. ENGINE

Spray and injection states • Operate the nozzle tester lever at a rate of once or twice a second and check no abnormal injection. • If normal injection as shown below cannot be obtained, replace the fuel injection valve. • No extreme difference in angle (θ) • No extreme injection angle difference (α) • Finely atomized spray • Excellent spray departure Abnormal Extreme difference in angle (θ) Extremely difference injection angle (α) Non atomized spray Stagnant spray

• (c) Nozzle valve sliding test Wash the nozzle valve in clean fuel oil. Place the nozzle body vertically and insert the nozzle into the body to about 1/3 of its length. The valve is normal if it smoothly falls by its own weight into the body. In case of a new nozzle, remove the seal peel, and immerse it in clean diesel oil or the like to clean the inner and outer surfaces and to thoroughly remove rust-preventive oil before using the nozzle. Note that a new nozzle is coated with rust-preventive oil and is pasted with the seal peel to shut off outer air.

(d) Nozzle punch mark (P)

Design code Number of hole (4 hole) Diameter of hole (ø 0.24) Size: size P, size S Injection angle Nozzle insertion angle Code A: angled No code: no angle

51-53


51. ENGINE 51.2.2.7 Inspection every 2000 hours or 2 years Be sure to check the following points every 2000 hours or two years operation, whichever comes first. No. 1 2 3 4

Inspection Item Coolant water path flushing and maintenance Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping Fuel injection timing adjustment Fuel injection pump inspection and adjustment

1. Coolant water path flushing and maintenance Rust and water scale will accumulate in the cooling system through many hours of operation. This lowers the engine cooling effect. Oil coolers (attached to turbocharged engines and some of naturally aspirated engines) quickly deteriorate the lube oil. The cleaning and maintenance of the following parts are necessary in accordance with the coolant water replacement. Cooling system parts: radiator, cooling water pump, thermostat, cylinder block, cylinder head, oil cooler. 2. Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance Regularly check the rubber hoses of the fuel system and cooling water system. If cracked or degraded, replace them with new one. Replace the rubber hoses at least every 2 years even if 2000 hours doesn’t come. 3. Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping The adjustment is necessary to maintain proper contact of the valves and seats. Refer to 51.4.2.6. 4. Fuel injection timing adjustment / Fuel injection pump inspection and adjustment The fuel injection timing and the fuel injection pump are adjusted so that engine performance may become the best condition. As for the inspection and adjustment of the fuel pump, it is based on the service manual of the MP pump of the separate volume. The fuel injection timing is adjusted by the following procedure.

51-54


51. ENGINE

As for the engine, which adopts a MP type fuel injection pump, the fuel injection angle (θi) (note) is adjusted for the fuel injection timing adjustment, because the adjusting method of fuel injection timing like an inline fuel pump can’t be applied. NOTE: The fuel injection angle (θi) (cam angle) is the difference from the injection valve opening angle while the fuel injection pump being driven by a motor and the angle at the plunger lift 2.5 mm of the fuel pump. And, as for the actual fuel injection angle (θi), the measured value is recorded on the pump body by each every fuel pump.

A.

Angle at plunger lift 2.5 mm C. Cam angle

I. Injection start angle NL. Nozzle lift θi. Injection angle

The adjustment of fuel injection angle (θi) In case that a fuel pump cover, installed with a gear case cover and the fuel pump are removed, and reassembled, the procedure of fuel injection angle adjustment is as follows. (As for the disassembly of a fuel injection pump, refer to 51.7.2.3.) NOTE: Never loosen four flange bolts, which fasten a pump flange and a fuel pump drive gear at the time of the removal of the fuel pump. When it is loosened, the adjustment of the fuel injection timing becomes very difficult.

D. Fuel pump driving gear GI. Gear installation nut F. Fuel injection pump don’t loosen G. Idle gear F. Fuel injection pump M. I.D. mark

51-55


51. ENGINE

• Before removing a fuel pump drive gear, make ID marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so on. • Make the mark-off line to the gear case precisely in accordance with the position of mark-off line o the fuel pump. • Before removing a fuel pump, put the standard mark of a sticker for fuel injection angle adjustment in accordance with the mark-off line of the fuel pump and paste it on the gear case. • Remove a fuel pump, and read the fuel injection angle recorded in that fuel pump. • Read the injection angle recorded on a reassembled fuel pump and calculate the difference from the injection angle of the disassembled fuel pump. (When re-installation does the same fuel pump, the angular difference is zero.) Fuel injection angle difference (cam angle) = (the fuel injection angle of a reassembled fuel pump) - (the fuel injection angle of a disassembled previous fuel pump)

FS. Fuel pump side GS. Gear case side M. Marking

MG. Mark-off line on gear case MP. Mark-off line on fuel pump

SM. Standard mark

NOTE: Tell the fuel pump number to Yanmar, and inquire the injection angle of the pump when it is hard to find out. • Put the fuel pump on the gear case temporarily and install the drive gear on the camshaft with checking the ID marks, which were put on the fuel pump drive gear and the idle gear at the time of the disassembling.

FJ. Fuel injection pump GC. Gear case

Tighten the installation nut of a pump drive gear. Tightening torque Model Nm 3TNV82A~TNV88 78~88 4TNV94L/98/106(T) 113~123

51-56

MO.Mark-off line MS. Mark sticker

Lubricating oil application (thread portion, and seat surface) Not applied


51. ENGINE

• Adjust the injection angle difference, calculated in the above 5), at 0.25° in the unit in the installation angle of the fuel pump while reading the mark (minimum 0.5° and cam angle) of the adjustment sticker. NOTE: Push down the fuel pump in the outside direction of the cylinder block at +1 degree when a injection angle difference is +1 degree. And, push it down to the cylinder block side when a difference is –1 degree. MP. Mark-off ling on fuel pump

• Tighten the fuel pump installation nuts.

MS. Mark sticker S. Standard mark

(Supplementary explanation 1) The installation angle of the fuel pump is as follows. Installation angle Model θ (deg.) 3TNV82A~TNV88

25

4TNV94L/98/106(T)

13

4TNV106(T)

11.5

CB. Cylinder block side

(Supplementary explanation 2) When fuel injection timing is advanced or delayed, the installation angle of the fuel pump is adjusted. When fuel injection timing is advanced for example at 2 degrees, loosen the nuts, which fix the fuel pump on the gear case, and turn the fuel pump body in the outside direction of the cylinder block at 1 degree, and tighten the pump installation nuts. And, when fuel injection timing is delayed, a pump is turned in that reverse direction.

A. Advanced CB. Cylinder block side

51-57

D. Delayed P. Pump installation bolts


51. ENGINE 51.2.3

ADJUSTING THE NO-LOAD MAXIMUM OR MINIMUM SPEED

1.

After warming the engine up, gradually raise the speed and set it at the no-load maximum revolution. 2. If the no-load maximum revolution is out of the standard, adjust it by turning the high idle limiting bolt. 3. Then set the no-load minimum speed by adjusting the low idle limiting bolt.

MP2 Fuel injection pump

AB. Accelerating wire bracket AF. Accelerating wire fixing nut AW. Accelerating wire bracket GL. Governor lever H. High idle limiting bolt LI. Low idle limiting bolt

Standards Engine application class

(Unit: min-1) No-load minimum 1200 or more

Rating speed No-load maximum 1500 1575-1625 CL 1800 1870-1920 2000 2180-2230 800 or more (1100 or more for 4TNV106(T) ) 2200 2395-2445 2400 2590-2640 VM 2500 2700-2750 2600 2785-2835 2800 2970-3020 3000 3185-3235 Note) The engine speed may differ from the above standard depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.

51-58


51. ENGINE 51.2.4

SENSOR INSPECTION

51.2.4.1 Oil pressure switch Disconnect the connector from the oil pressure switch (O). Keep the voltammeter probes (T) in contact with the switch terminal and cylinder block (C) while operating the engine. It is abnormal if circuit is closed.

Continuity test

51.2.4.2 Thermo switch Place the thermo switch in a container filled with (H) antifreeze or oil. Heat it while measuring the fluid temperature. The switch is normal if the voltammeter shows continuity when the fluid temperature is 107~113 °C.

H. Hot water or oil TH. Thermometer

51-59

TP. Tester probes TS. Thermo switch


51. ENGINE 51.2.5

WATER LEAK CHECK IN COOLING WATER SYSTEM

Check coolant water leakage from the cooling water system visually. If any problem is found, Inspect as follows. 1. Fill coolant water to the normal level in the radiator, and install the cap tester (CT) on the radiator. 2. Operate the manual pump to set the pressure to 0.09±0.015 MPa (0.9 ± 0.15 kgf/cm2). If the cap tester (CT) pressure gauge reading drops then, water is leaking from the cooling water system. Check the water leaking point.

51.2.6

RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION

Install the radiator cap (RC) on the cap tester. Set the tester pressure to 0.09 ± 0.015 MPa (0.9 ± 0.15 kgf/cm2) and see that the cap is opened. If the cap does not open, replace the cap since it is abnormal.

51-60


51. ENGINE 51.2.7

THERMOSTAT INSPECTION

Place the thermostat in a container filled with water. Heat it while measuring the water temperature, and see that the thermostat is actuated at temperature of following table. Valve opening Full open lift Temperature (Temperature) Model (°C)* (mm) All models

69.5~72.5

8 or more (85 °C)

* Valve opening temperature is carved on the flange.

51.2.8

TR. To radiator TE. Thermostat

CO. Cover TS. Thermo switch

TH. Thermometer

TE. Thermostat

ADJUSTING OPERATION

Perform the adjusting operation of a engine as follows after the maintenance job: 1. Supply the fuel oil, lubricating oil and coolant water. NOTE: Check the levels of the lubricating oil and coolant water again after test running (for about 5 minutes) and add as required. 2. Start the engine, and carry out idling at a low revolution (700 to 900 rpm) for a few minutes. 3. Run in the engine for about five minutes at the rated revolution (no-load). Check any water, fuel or oil leak and existence of abnormal vibration or noise. Also check the oil pressure, coolant water temperature and exhaust gas color. 4. Adjust the no-load minimum and maximum revolutions according to the specifications. 5. Perform loaded operation as required.

51-61


51. ENGINE 51.2.9

LONG STORAGE

Observe the following instructions when the engine is to be stored for a long period without operation: 1. Always drain coolant water in a cold season or before a long storage.(This is unnecessary when antifreeze is used.) NOTE: Negligence of water draining will cause the coolant water remaining inside the engine to be frozen and expanded to damage the engine parts. Water draining procedure

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

• Remove the radiator cap. • Loosen the water draining cock under the radiator to drain water from the inside. • Loosen the drain cock on the side surface of the cylinder to drain water from the inside. • After draining water, tighten the radiator cap and drain plug and cocks. Remove the mud, dust and oil deposit and clean the outside. Perform the nearest periodic inspection before the storage. Drain or fill the fuel oil fully to prevent condensation in the fuel tank. Disconnect the battery cable from the battery negative (-) terminal. Cover the silencer, air cleaner and electric parts with PVC cover to prevent water and dust from depositing or entrance. Select a well-ventilated location without moisture and dust for storage. Perform recharging once a month during storage to compensate for self-discharge.

51-62


51. ENGINE

51.3

TROUBLESHOOTING

51.3.1

PREPARATION BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING

If the signs of a trouble appear, it is important to lecture on the countermeasure and treatment before becoming a big accident not to shorten the engine life. When the signs of a trouble appear in the engine or a trouble occurs, grasp the trouble conditions fully by the next point and find out the cause of sincerity according to the troubleshooting. Then repair the trouble, and prevent the recurrence of the trouble. 1. What’s the occurrence phenomenon or the trouble situation? (e.g. Poor exhaust color) 2. Investigation of the past records of the engine Check a client control ledger, and examine the history of the engine. • Investigate the engine model name and the engine number. (Mentioned in the engine label.) Examine the machine unit name and its number in the same way. • When was the engine maintained last time? • How much period and/or time has it been used after it was maintained last time? • What kind of problem was there on the engine last time, and what kind of maintenance was done? 3. Hear the occurrence phenomenon from the operator of the engine in detail. 5W1H of the occurrence phenomenon: the investigation of when (when), where (where), who (who), what (what), why (why) and how (how) • When did the trouble happen at what kind of time? • Was there anything changed before the trouble? • Did the trouble occur suddenly, or was there what or a sign? • Was there any related phenomenon. ...(e.g. Poor exhaust color and starting failure at the same time) 4. After presuming a probable cause based on the above investigation, investigate a cause systematically by the next troubleshooting guide, and find out the cause of sincerity.

51-63


51. ENGINE 51.3.2

QUICK REFERENCE TABLE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING

Improper clearance of intake/exhaust valve

P

During work

During idling

Uneven combustion sound

Black

White

Black

Corrective action

P

Adjust the valve clearance. (See 51.2.2.6)

P

P

P

Lap the valve seat. (See 51.4.2.6)

P P

P

P

P

P Correct or replace. Replace the gasket. (See 51.4.2.2-11)

P P

P

P

Worn piston ring, piston or cylinder P

P

P

P

Seized crankpin metal or bearing

Hunting

P

P

Seized or broken piston ring

Engine system

During work

P

Blowout from cylinder head gasket

P

P

P

P

P P Repair or replace. Correct the ring joint positions. (See 51.4.4.4-6)

P P

Reverse assembly of piston rings

Replace the piston ring. (See 51.4.2.2-5-10) Perform honing and use oversize parts. (See 51.4.4.5-1-4 and 51.4.4.6)

P P

Improper arrangement of piston ring joints

Reassemble correctly. (See 51.4.4.4-6)

P

P

Worn crankpin and journal bearing

P

P P

Measure and replace. (See 51.4.4.5-2)

Loosened connecting rod bolt

P

Tighten to the specified torque. (See 51.4.4.4-2)

Foreign matter trapped in combusP tion chamber

P

Disassemble and repair.

Excessive gear backlash

P

Adjust gear meshing. (See 51.4.3.4-2)

P

Defective governor Improper open/close timing of intake/exhaust valves

P

P P Make adjustment P P P P P P

Fouled blower Waste gate malfunction Worn floating bearing

Measure and replace. (See 51.4.2.5-2 and 4.2.7)

P

Worn intake/exhaust valve guide

Turbocharger

White

Much

Little

P P

Compression leakage from valve seat Seizure of intake/exhaust valve

Exhaust color

Exhaust smoke

None

Cause

Engine does not start.

Engine starts but stops soon

Insufficient Poor exhaust engine outcolor put

Abnormal engine sound

Starting failure

Ordinary

Trouble symptom

High knocking sound during combustion

The following table summarizes the general trouble symptoms and their causes. If any trouble symptom occurs, take corrective action before it becomes a serious problem so as not to shorten the engine service life.

P

P P P

51-64

P

Adjust the valve clearance. (See 51.2.2.6) Wash the blower. Disassemble and inspect. Disassemble and inspect.


Improper clearance of intake/exhaust valve

P

Compression leakage from valve seat Seizure of intake/exhaust valve

P

P

Seized or broken piston ring

P

Engine system

Worn piston ring, piston or cylinder Seized crankpin metal or bearing

Exhaust temperature rise

Pressure rise

Pressure drop

Corrective action

P

Adjust the valve clearance. (See 51.2.2.6)

P

P

P

Lap the valve seat. (See 51.4.2.6)

P

P

Correct or replace. Replace the gasket. (See 51.4.2.2-11)

P P

Replace the piston ring. (See 51.4.2.2-5-10)

P P

P P

P P

P

Perform honing and use oversize parts. (See 51.4.4.5-1-4 and 51.4.4.6)

P

Repair or replace.

P

Improper arrangement of piston ring joints

P

P

Correct the ring joint positions. (See 51.4.4.4-6)

Reverse assembly of piston rings

P

P

Reassemble correctly. (See 51.4.4.4-6)

Worn crankpin and journal bearing

P

P

Measure and replace. (See 51.4.4.5-2)

Loosened connecting rod bolt

P

P

Tighten to the specified torque. (See 51.4.4.4-2)

Foreign matter trapped in combustion chamber

P

P

P

Worn intake/exhaust valve guide Defective governor

Disassemble and repair. Adjust gear meshing. (See 51.4.3.4-2)

Excessive gear backlash

Turbocharger

Air intake

P

P

Blowout from cylinder head gasket

Low water temperature

Much blow-by gas

Low L.O. pressure

Mixture with water

Dilution by fuel oil

Excessive consumption

Overheat

Cooling water

Lubricating oil Excessive fuel consumption

Cause

Large engine vibration

Trouble symptom

Difficulty in returning to low speed

51. ENGINE

P

P P

Measure and replace. (See 51.4.2.5-2 and 51.4.2.7) Make adjustment

Improper open/close timing of intake/ exhaust valves

Adjust the valve clearance. (See 51.2.2.6)

Fouled blower

Wash the blower.

Waste gate malfunction

Disassemble and inspect.

Worn floating bearing

Disassemble and inspect.

51-65


Cooling Water System

During work

During idling

Black

Corrective action

Defective thermostat (kept closed) (See 51.2.2.7)

P

Insufficient cooling effect of radiator

P

Defective thermostat (kept opened) (See 51.2.2.7) or slipping fan belt (See 51.2.2.2-2)

Insufficient coolant water level

P

Check water leakage from cooling water system. (See 51.2.2.1-4)

Cracked water jacket

Repair or replace.

Slackened fan belt

P

Adjust the belt tension. (See 51.2.2.2-2)

Defective thermostat

P P

Check or replace. (See 51.2.2.7)

Improper properties of lubricating oil Lubricating System

White

Black

White

Much

Little

Excessive cooling effect of radiator

P P

Use proper lubricating oil. (See 51.1.3.2)

P

Leakage from lubricating oil piping system

Repair.

Insufficient delivery capacity of trochoid pump

Check and repair. (See 51.5.5)

Clogged lubricating oil filter

Clean or replace.

Defective pressure regulating valve

Clean, adjust or replace. Add proper lubricating oil. (See 51.2.2.1-3)

P

Insufficient lubricating oil level Too early timing of fuel injection pump

Check and adjust. (See 51.2.2.7-4)

P P P

Too late timing of fuel injection pump

Check and adjust. (See 51.2.2.7-4)

P P P P P P P P P

Improper properties of fuel oil

Fuel system

During work

Hunting

Uneven combustion sound

Exhaust color

Exhaust smoke

None

Cause

Engine does not start.

Engine starts but stops soon

Insufficient Poor exhaust engine outcolor put

Abnormal engine sound

Starting failure

Ordinary

Trouble symptom

High knocking sound during combustion

51. ENGINE

P

P

Use proper fuel oil. (See 51.1.3.1)

P P P

Perform draining from the fuel filter. (See 51.2.2.3 and 51.2.2.5)

Water entrance in fuel system

P

Clogged fuel filter

P P

P

Clean or replace. (See 51.2.2.5)

Air entrance in fuel system

P P

P

Perform air bleeding. (See 51.2.2.3)

Clogged or cracked fuel pipe

P P

P

Clean or replace.

Insufficient fuel supply to fuel injection pump

P P

P

Check the fuel tank cock, fuel filter, fuel pipe, and fuel feed pump.

Uneven injection volume of fuel injection pump

P

P

P P P P

P P P Check and adjust.

P

Check and adjust.

Excessive fuel injection volume Poor spray pattern from fuel injection nozzle Priming failure Clogged strainer at feed pump inlet

P P P P

P P P

Check and adjust. (See 51.2.2.6) Foreign matter trapped in the valve inside the priming pump. (Disassemble and clean.)

P P

Clean the strainer.

51-66


P

Excessive cooling effect of radiator

Exhaust temperature rise

Pressure rise

Air intake

Pressure drop

Low water temperature

Much blow-by gas

Low L.O. pressure

Mixture with water

Dilution by fuel oil

Excessive consumption

Overheat

Cooling water

Lubricating oil Excessive fuel consumption

Cause

Large engine vibration

Trouble symptom

Difficulty in returning to low speed

51. ENGINE

Corrective action

Defective thermostat (kept closed) (See 51.2.2.7)

P

Lubricating System

Cooling Water System

Defective thermostat (kept

P

Insufficient cooling effect of radiator

fan belt (See 51.2.2.2-2) Check water leakage from cooling

P

Insufficient coolant water level

P water system. (See 51.2.2.1-4)

P P

Cracked water jacket

P

Slackened fan belt

P

Defective thermostat

P P

Repair or replace.

P

Adjust the belt tension. (See 51.2.2.2-2) Check or replace. (See 51.2.2.7)

Improper properties of lubricating oil

P

P P

Use proper lubricating oil. (See 51.1.3.2)

Leakage from lubricating oil piping system

P

P

Repair.

P

Check and repair. (See 51.5.5)

Insufficient delivery capacity of trochoid pump Defective pressure regulating valve

P P P

Insufficient lubricating oil level

P

Clogged lubricating oil filter

Too early timing of fuel injection pump

Clean or replace. Clean, adjust or replace. Add proper lubricating oil. (See 51.2.2.1-3) Check and adjust. (See 51.2.2.7-4)

P P

Too late timing of fuel injection pump

Fuel system

P opened) (See 51.2.2.7) or slipping

P

Check and adjust. (See 51.2.2.7-4)

Improper properties of fuel oil

Use proper fuel oil. (See 51.1.3.1)

Water entrance in fuel system

Perform draining from the fuel filter. (See 51.2.2.3 and 51.2.2.5)

Clogged fuel filter

Clean or replace. (See 51.2.2.5)

Air entrance in fuel system

Perform air bleeding. (See 51.2.2.3)

Clogged or cracked fuel pipe

Clean or replace.

Insufficient fuel supply to fuel injection pump

Check the fuel tank cock, fuel filter, fuel pipe, and fuel feed pump.

Uneven injection volume of fuel injection pump

P P P

Excessive fuel injection volume Poor spray pattern from fuel injection nozzle

P Check and adjust.

P

P P

P P Check and adjust. Check and adjust. (See 51.2.2.6)

P

Priming failure

Foreign matter trapped in the valve inside the priming pump. (Disassemble and clean.)

Clogged strainer at feed pump inlet

Clean the strainer.

51-67


P

P

P

P

Clogged exhaust pipe

P

P

During work

During idling

P

Clean. (See 51.2.4) Study output drop and load matching.

P

Clean.

P

Repair or replace. (See Chapter 51.8)

Alternator defect

P

Repair or replace. (See Chapter 51.9)

Open-circuit in wiring

P

Repair. (See Chapter 51.10.)

Battery voltage drop

P

Inspect and change the battery. (See 51.2.2.3)

Clogged air filter Engine used at high temperatures or at high altitude

P

P

Exhaust temperature rise

Pressure rise

Air intake

Pressure drop

Low water temperature

Much blow-by gas

Low L.O. pressure

Mixture with water

Dilution by fuel oil

Excessive consumption

Overheat

Cooling water

Lubricating oil Excessive fuel consumption

Large engine vibration

Cause Air/Exhaust Gas System

Corrective action

Starting motor defect

Trouble symptom

Electrical System

Hunting

Uneven combustion sound

Black

White

Black

White

P

Difficulty in returning to low speed

Air/Exhaust Gas System

During work

Engine used at high temperatures or at high altitude

Clogged air filter

Electrical System

Much

Little

Cause

Exhaust color

Exhaust smoke

None

Engine does not start.

Engine starts but stops soon

Insufficient Poor exhaust engine outcolor put

Abnormal engine sound

Starting failure

Ordinary

Trouble symptom

High knocking sound during combustion

51. ENGINE

Corrective action

P

Clean. (See 51.2.2.4)

P

Study output drop and load matching.

P Clean.

Clogged exhaust pipe

Starting motor defect

Repair or replace. (See Chapter 51.8)

Alternator defect

Repair or replace. (See Chapter 51.9)

Open-circuit in wiring

Repair. (See Chapter 51.10.)

Battery voltage drop

Inspect and change the battery. (See 512.2.3)

51-68


51. ENGINE 51.3.3

TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEASURING COMPRESSION PRESSURE

Compression pressure drop is one of major causes of increasing blowby gas (lubricating oil contamination or increased lubricating oil consumption as a resultant phenomenon) or starting failure. The compression pressure is affected by the following factors: • Degree of clearance between piston and cylinder • Degree of clearance at intake/exhaust valve seat • Gas leak from nozzle gasket or cylinder head gasket In other words, the pressure drops due to increased parts wear and reduced durability resulting from long use of the engine. A pressure drop may also be caused by scratched cylinder or piston by dust entrance from the dirty air cleaner element or worn or broken piston ring. Measure the compression pressure to diagnose presence of any abnormality in the engine.

1. Compression pressure measurement method • After warming up the engine, remove the fuel injection pipe and valves from the cylinder to be measured. • Crank the engine before installing the compression gauge (1) adapter. 1. *Perform cranking with the stop handle at the stop position (no injection state). 2. *See 51.12.2-18 for the compression gauge and compression gauge adapter. • Install the compression gauge and compression gauge adapter at the cylinder to be measured. 1. Never forget to install a gasket at the tip end of the adapter. • With the engine set to the same state as in 2,*1, crank the engine by the starter motor until the compression gauge reading is stabilized.

2. Standard compression pressure Engine compression pressure list (reference value) Compression pressure Engine mode 3TNV82A 3/4TNV84 3/4TNV84T TNV88 106(T)

Standard 3.16 ± 0.1 (31 ± 1) 3.24 ± 0.1 (33 ± 1) 2.94 ± 0.1 (30 ± 1) 3.43 ± 0.1 (35 ± 1)

at 250 min-1 MPa (kgf/cm2) Limit 2.45 ± 0.1 (25 ± 1) 2.55 ± 0.1 (26 ± 1) 2.45 ± 0.1 (25 ± 1) 2.75 ± 0.1 (28 ± 1)

51-69

Deviation among cylinders MPa (kgf/cm2)

0.2~0.3


51. ENGINE

3. Engine speed and compression pressure (for reference)

CP. Compression pressure (Mpa)

ES. Engine speed (min-1)

4. Measured value and troubleshooting When the measured compression pressure is below the limit value, inspect each part by referring to the table below. No. Item Cause • Air cleaner element • Clogged element • Broken element 1 • Defect at element seal portion 2 • Valve clearance • Excessive or no clearance 3 • valve timing • Incorrect valve clearance • Cylinder head gasket • Gas leak from gasket 4

5

6

• Intake/exhaust vale • Valve seat

• Piston • Piston ring • Cylinder

Corrective action • Clean the element. • Replace the element.

• Adjust the valve clearance. • Adjust the valve clearance. • Replace the gasket. • Retighten the cylinder head bolts to the specified torque. (See 51.4.2-2). • Lap the valve seat. (See 51.4.2-6). Replace the intake/exhaust valve.

• Gas leak due to worn valve seat or foreign matter trapping • Sticking valve • Gas leak due to scratching or • Perform honing and use an oversized part. wear (See 51.4.4(5)-(5-1), (5-4) and (6).

51-70


51. ENGINE

51.4

DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AND REASSEMBLY OF ENGINES

51.4.1

COMPLETE DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

51.4.1.1 Introduction Make preparation as follows before starting engine inspection and service: 1. Fix the engine on a horizontal base. CAUTION: Be sure to fix the engine securely to prevent injury or damage to parts due to falling during the work. 2. Remove the coolant water hose, fuel oil pipe, wire harness, control wires etc. connecting the driven machine and engine, and drain coolant water, lubricating oil and fuel. 3. Clean soil, oil, dust, etc. from the engine by washing with solvent, air, steam, etc. Carefully operate so as to prevent any foreign matter from entering the engine. CAUTION: Always wear glasses or other protectors when using compressed air or steam to prevent any foreign matter from getting in the eyes.

NOTE: Any part which is found defective as a result of inspection or any part whose measured value does not satisfy the standard or limit shall be replaced. Any part predicted to dissatisfy the standard or limit before the next service as estimated from the state of use should be replaced even when the measured value then satisfies the standard or limit.

51-71


51. ENGINE 51.4.1.2 Special service tools 1. Special Tools No. Tool name Valve guide tool (for extracting valve guide)

Applicabile model and tool size Part number

Model 3TNV82A 4TNV94L 98(T) 4TNV106(T) 4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 4TNV84T

1

Illustration mm

L1

L2

d1

d2

20

75

5.5

9

380001329

380000181

* Locally manufactured

Valve guide tool (for inserting valve guide)

mm Part L1 number 380000133 12

Model 3TNV82A 4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 4TNV84T 4TNV94L·98(T) 4TNV106(T)

2

L2

d1

d2

60

13

19

65

14

20

8.5 60 7 60 13.6 65

11 13 13

17 16 16

380000182 15

* Locally manufactured

3

Connecting rod bushing replacer (for reModel moval /installation of connecting rod bush3TNV82A ing) TNV84~88 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106 (T)

mm Part L1 L2 number 380001337 25 85 380001338 20 100 20 100 20 100 -0.3

d1

d2

23 26 30 37

26 29 33 40

-0.3

Allowance: d1 -0.6

d2 -0.6

* Locally manufactured

4

Stem seal inserter (for inserting stem seal)

5

Part number

Valve spring compressor (for removal / installation of valve spring)

380000184

Model 3TNV82A 4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 4TNV88 4TNV84T 4TNE94L·98 4TNE106 (T)

d1 d2 15.2 21

d3 L1 L2 12 15.8 65

mm L3 4

16.2 22

13.5 18.8 65

4

12.9 19 15.2 21 15.2 21

11.5 10.0 65 12 11.8 65 12 15.5 65

4 4 4

* Locally manufactured

51-72


51. ENGINE No.

6

Tool name Filter wrench (for removal / installation of L.O. filter)

Camshaft bushing tool (for extracting camshaft bushing)

Applicabile model and tool size Standard tool Available on the market mm Part L1 number 380000180 18 18 18

Model TNV82A~88 4TNV94L¡98 4TNV106 (T)

7

Illustration

-0.3

L2

d1

d2

70 70 70

45 50 58

48 53 61

-0.3

Allowance: d1 -0.6

d2 -0.6

* Locally manufactured

Flex-Hone (For re-honing of cylinder liner)

8 Not used

Model

Parts No.

TNV82A TNV88~ 4TNV94L 4TNV98

Cylinder bore mm 78~84 83~95 89~101

4TNV106 (T)

9

95~108

Part number: 380000220 Piston insertion tool (for *The above piston insertion tool is applicable to 60inserting piston) 125 mm diameter pistons.

Piston ring replacer (for Part number: 380000221 10 removal / installation of Available on the market piston ring)

Crankshaft pulley in11 stalling tool Locally manufactured

Standard tool Locally manufactured (For 4TNV94L)

51-73


51. ENGINE

2. Measuring instruments No. Tool name

Applicabile model and tool size

1

Dial gauge

Standard tool Measurements of shaft bending, and strain and gap of surfaces

2

Test indicator

Standard tool Measurements of narrow or deep portions that cannot be measured by dial gauge

3

Magnetic stand

Standard tool For holding the dial gauge when measuring using a dial gauge, standing angles adjustable

4

Micrometer

Standard tool For measuring the outside diameters of crankshaft, pistons, piston pins, etc.

5

Cylinder gauge

Standard tool For measuring the inside diameters of cylinder liners, rod metal, etc.

6

Calipers

Standard tool For measuring outside diameters, depth, thickness and width

7

Depth micrometer

Standard tool For measuring of valve sink

8

Square

Standard tool For measuring valve spring inclination and straightness of parts

9

V-block

Standard tool For measuring shaft bend

10

Torque wrench

Standard tool For tightening nuts and bolts to the specified torque

51-74

Illustration


51. ENGINE

No.

11

12

Tool name

Applicabile model and tool size

Standard tool Thickness gauge For measuring gaps between ring and ring groove, and shaft joints during assembly

Standard tool Cap tester

For checking water leakage

13

Standard tool Battery coolant tester

For checking concentration of antifreeze and the battery electrolyte charge status

14

Standard tool Nozzle tester

For measuring injection spray pattern of fuel injection nozzle and injection pressure

15

Standard tool Digital thermometer

16

17

18

For measuring temperatures

Contact type

For measuring revolution by contacting the mortise in the revolving shaft

Photoelectric type

For measuring revolution by sensing the reflecting mark on the outer periphery of the revolving shaft

Standard tool Speedometer

Circuit tester

Standard tool

For measuring resistance, voltage and continuity of electrical circuits

Part number: 380000303 Compression gauge kit

For measuring compression pressure

51-75

Illustration


51. ENGINE 51.4.1.3 Complete disassembly Peripheral parts such as air cleaner, muffler and radiator differ in installation and types for each application. Therefore, description in this Chapter is started with the steps to be taken just after the peripheral parts have been removed.

Step

1

2

3

4

Removal Parts 1. Thoroughly remove sand, dust, dirt and soil from the surface of the engine. 2. Drain coolant water and lubricating oil from the engine. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Remove turbocharger and exhaust manifold. Remove intake manifold and surge tank. Close the fuel cock valve of the fuel tank. 1. Remove high-pressure fuel pipe. Remove fuel return pipe. 2. Loosen the tightening nut on fuel injection nozzle retainer and extract the retainer and fuel injection nozzle. *) Fuel injection nozzle for Indirect injection sys- 3. tem is screwed type. 1. Remove rocker arm cover assembly. 1. Remove valve rocker arm shaft assembly. 1. 2. Remove push rod. 2.

5

1.

6

7 8

2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 1. 2.

Remarks

If nozzle seat is left on the cylinder head, remove the cylinder head before extracting nozzle seat. To prevent dust from entering fuel injection nozzle, fuel injection pump and high-pressure fuel pipe, seal their respective threads with a tape or the like. Whenever extracting fuel injection nozzle, replace nozzle protector with a new one.

Attach a tag to push rod for each cylinder No. to put the push rod in order. Remove valve cap from the intake/exhaust valve head. 3. Note that tappet of the indirect injection system can be removed at the same time when push rod is extracted. 4. Attach a tag to tappet for each cylinder No. to put the tappet in order. Remove fan mounting bolt, and then remove 1. Never turn down alternator vigorously toward fan. the cylinder block. Otherwise, your finger may be Loosen adjusting bolt for the V-belt adjuster, and nipped and alternator broken. then remove V-belt. Remove alternator. Remove the spacer for cooling fan and V-pulley. Remove lubricating oil filter assembly. Extract dipstick form the oil dip-stick hole. Disconnect fuel return pipes to. Remove fuel filter.

51-76


51. ENGINE

Step

9

Removal Parts Remarks 1. Disconnect coolant water pipe from the cooling water pump. 2. Remove thermostat assembly. 3. Remove cooling water pump. 1. Remove cylinder head tightening bolt. 1. Lay a cardboard or the like on the floor and place 2. Remove cylinder head assembly. cylinder head assembly on it so as not to dam3. Remove cylinder head gasket. age the combustion surface. 2. Order of loosening the cylinder head tightening bolts.

Head bolt disassembly order 1B. Disassembly 4 cylinder head 1D. Disassembly 3 cylinder head 2C. Camshaft side 3F. Fan side

10

11

12

1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 1.

13

3. To remove the intake/exhaust valves from cylinder head assembly, take the following steps. • Using a valve spring compressor (see Chapter 51.5, 51.5-1), compress valve spring and remove valve cotter. • Remove valve retainer and valve spring. • Remove intake valve and exhaust valve. Remove crankshaft V-pulley clamping bolt. 1. Extract crankshaft V-pulley by hitting the bolt of Using a puller, extract crankshaft V-pulley. the puller using a plastic hammer or the like. Remove oil pan mounting bolt under gear case. 1. Never fail to removes stiffner bolt at the center of Remove gear case mounting bolt. the gear case. Remove gear case 2. When removing the gear case, carefully protect oil seal from damage. Remove the nut from fuel injection pump drive 1. Before removing fuel injection pump, make sure gear. Extract fuel injection pump drive gear using of the position of the arrow of the pump body for a puller. adjusting fuel injection timing as well as the position of the scribed line of the gear case flange. (Applies only to direct injection system.)

51-77


51. ENGINE

Step 14 15 16

17

18

19

20 21

22

Removal Parts 1. Remove lubricating oil pump.

Remarks

1. Remove starting motor from flywheel housing sing. 1. Remove flywheel mounting bolt. 1. Carefully protect the ring gear from damage. 2. Remove flywheel. 1. Remove flywheel housing. 1. Carefully protect the oil seal from damage. 2. Remove oil seal case with a screwdriver or the like by utilizing grooves on both sides of oil seal case. 1. Remove oil pan and spacer. 1. Put the cylinder block with the attaching surface of the cylinder head facing down. 2. Carefully protect the combustion surface of the cylinder block from damage. 3. For indirect injection system, be careful to the possibility of the tapped to drop off when the cylinder block is turned upside down, because the tappet is cylindrical in shape. 1. Remove idle gear shaft, and then remove idle 1. Turn the cylinder block aside and carefully pregear. vent tappet from jamming on the cam. 2. Remove mounting bolt of thrust bearing through 2. Preheat camshaft gear and camshaft assembly the hole of the camshaft gear. to 180° 200° which are shrink fitted, before reRemove camshaft assembly. moving them. 1. Remove gear case flange. 1. Remove lubricating oil strainer. 1. Remove crankpin side cap of the connecting 1. Before extracting piston, remove carbon deposrod. its from the upper wall of the cylinder using fine While turning crankshaft, place piston in the bottom sandpaper, while taking care not to damage the dead center (BDC). inner surface of the cylinder. 2. Make sure than cap No. of connecting rod agrees with cylinder No. 3. Take care not to let crankpin metal fall when removing connecting rod crankpin side cap.

51-78


51. ENGINE Step

Removal Parts Remarks 1. Remove main bearing cap bolt. While shaking 1. Before extracting crankshaft, measure the side main bearing cap, remove main bearing cap togap around it. gether with lower main bearing metal. 2. Extract crankshaft, taking care not to damage it. 3. Remove upper main bearing metal.

23

1. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly.

24

25

1. Remove tappet.

51-79

Apply a dial gauge (D1) to the end of crankshaft (C2). Force the crankshaft on both sides in the axial direction to measure the thrust gap. Alternatively, insert a thickness gauge directly between the base thrust metal and the thrust surface of the crankshaft to measure the gap. If the limit size is exceeded, replace the thrust metal with a new one. Thrust gap (All models) 2. Notice on the removal of thrust metal. • When removing thrust metal, ascertain the position and direction where thrust metal is installed in relation to the cap. • Make sure that the thrust metal groove is outward in relation to the cap. 1) To selectively remove a desired piston and connecting rod assembly without extracting crankshaft, take the steps itemized below: • Remove carbon deposits from the upper wall of the cylinder using fine sandpaper, taking care not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder. • While turning the crankshaft, with the connecting rod cap removed, raise the piston up to the top dead center (TDC). • Extract the piston/connecting rod assembly while tapping the connecting rod at the large end with the handle of a plastic hammer or the like.


51. ENGINE 51.4.1.4 Precautions before and during reassembly To reassemble engine components, reverse the procedure of disassembly. However, follow the precautions below and the precautions from in chapter 51.4 to in chapter 51.7 particularly before and during reassembly. 1. Cleaning the component Use particular care to clean the cylinder block, cylinder head, crankshaft, and camshaft. Ensure that they are free from chips, dust, sand, and other foreign matter. 2. Parts to be replaced during reassembly Be sure to replace the following parts with new ones during assembly. • Valve stem seal • Head gasket packing • Nozzle protector and nozzle seat of the fuel injection valve • Various copper packing, O-rings and gasket packing.

51.4.1.5 Adjusting operation Make sure to perform adjusting operation after completing reassembly. Refer to section 51.2.5 for the operation procedure.

51-80


51. ENGINE 51.4.2

CYLINDER HEAD: DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AND REASSEMBLY

51.4.2.1 Components (2-valve cylinder head) NOTE: This figure show the 3TNV84

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Oil cooler Fan Thermostat Fuel filter V-pulley Oil filter Fuel injection pipe Intake manifold Exhaust manifold Rocker arm cover

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

51-81

Spacer Oil / water separator Cooling water pump Gear case Cylinder block Head gasket Thermo switch Cylinder head Joint


51. ENGINE 51.4.2.2 Disassembly procedure: Disassemble in the order of the numbers shown in the illustration. • Remove the alternator assy. (Point 1) • Remove the fan, pulley and V belt. • Remove the thermostat case. (Point 2) • Remove the fuel filter and fuel oil piping. (Point 3) • Remove the oil level gauge assy. • Remove the oil filter. (Point 4) • Remove the fuel injection pipes. (Point 5) • Remove the intake manifold assy. • Remove the exhaust manifold assy. • Remove the rocker arm cover Assy. • Remove the rocker shaft assy, push rods and valve caps. (Point 6) • Remove the cylinder head assy and head gasket. (Point 7) • Remove the fuel injection valves and fuel return pipe. (Point 8) • Remove the intake/exhaust valves, stem seals and valve springs. (Point 9) • Remove the rocker arms from the rocker shaft.

51-82


51. ENGINE 51.4.2.3

Reassembly procedure:

Reverse order of the disassembly procedure. 1. Rocker arm cover 2. Rocker arm shaft 3. Adjusting 4. Rocker arm 5. Rocker arm support 6. Suction valve 7. Exhaust valve 8. Cylinder head 9. Cotter 10. Spring holder 11. Valve spring 12. Stem seal 13. Valve guide 14. Valve bridge 15. Valve cap

51-83


51. ENGINE 51.4.2.4 Servicing points Point 1 Disassemble • Loosen the mounting bolt while supporting the alternator.

CAUTION Do not tilt the alternator toward the cylinder block in haste since it may damage the alternator or pinch a finger. Reassemble • The belt deflection shall be checked according to 51.2.2.2. Reassemble

A. Alternator AD. Adjuster AV. Adjust the V-belt tension inserting a bar

• Replace the belt with a new one if cracked, worn or damaged. • Carefully prevent the belt from being smeared with oil or grease.

1. Set bolt 2. Deflection 3. Alternator

Point 2 Reassemble Check the thermostat function. (See 51.2.7)

Point 3 Reassemble • Replace the fuel filter element with a new one. Disassemble • Cover the fuel pipe opening with tape to prevent intrusion of foreign matters.

51-84

4. V-belt 5. C.W. pump 6. Crank pulley


51. ENGINE

Point 4 Reassemble • Replace the oil filter with a new one. • After fully tightening the filter manually, retighten it with a filter wrench (see 51.11.1-6) by 3/4 turn.

Point 5 Disassemble • Cover the fuel injection pipe and pump inlets and outlets with tape or the like to prevent intrusion of foreign matters.

Point 6 1. Removing pipe seals of 4 valve head. Disassemble • Take off a rocker arm cover in case of 4 valve head after removing fuel injection pipes and pipe seals. NOTE: Attention is necessary because a fuel nozzle is caught in a pipe seal and the pipe seal is damaged when a rocker arm cover is lifted with a pipe seal sticking to the rocker arm cover.

7. Pipe seal 8. Fuel injection pipe

9. Fuel nozzle

10. Slit of bonnet 11. Pipe seal

12. Minus driver 13. Cap nut of fuel injection pipe

• Insert a minus driver in the slit part of the rocker arm cover, and remove it when removing a pipe seal. Reassemble • Replace the used pipe seal with a new one when removing a pipe seal.

51-85


51. ENGINE

2. Breather system (A reductor to intake air system of blowby gas) Emitting blowby gas is harmful to natural environment. Therefore blowby gas reductor is adopted to TNV series naturally- aspirated engines as breather system (Turbocharged engines emitblowby gas). The system of model 3/4TNV84 is shown as a representative of that breather system in the right figure. Some of the combustion gas passes through the clearance between the cylinder and the piston, piston ring, and flows to the crankcase. This is said as blowby gas. While it passes into the cylinder head and the rocker arm cover, the blowby gas mixes with splash oil, and becomes oil mistblowby gas with passing through the baffle plate inside a rocker arm cover. And it passes through a diaphragm assy, and a intake manifold, and is reduced in the combustion chamber. Pressure inside a crankcase is controlled by the function of the diaphragm assy, and suitable amount of blowby gas is reduced in intake air system. Disassemble When a rocker arm cover is taken off, check whether oil or the like enter the diaphragm space from a small hole on the side of a diaphragm cover or not without disassembling the diaphragm.

BB. BP. BR. C. D.

Breather baffle Baffle plate Breather pipe Center plate Diaphragm

BP. Baffle plate D. Diaphragm RA. Rocker arm cover S. Spring 14. Cover 15. Center plate

51-86

DC. Diaphragm cover IM. Intake maniforld RA. Rocker arm cover S. Spring

16. Blowby gas flow 17. Blowby gas flow to diaphragm space 18. Diaphragm part


51. ENGINE

NOTE: 1. When a diaphragm is damaged, pressure control inside the crankcase becomes insufficient, and troubles occur. When the internal pressure of the crankcase decreases too much due to the damage of a spring, much blowby gas containing oil is reduced in intake air system, and it may cause the combustion defect by the early dirt of the intake valve or the urgent rotation of the engine by the oil burning. When pressure progresses in the crank case too much due to the wrong operation of the diaphragm and so on, it is considered that oil leakage from the joint of a oil pan, a oil seal and so on will occur. When a diaphragm is damaged, blowby is discharged from the breathing hole on the side of diaphragm cover, and not reduced in the intake manifold. Therefore, be careful of the diaphragm trouble. 2. At lubricating oil replacement or lube oil supply The amount of lubricating oil isn't to be beyond the standard upper limit (in the engine horizontality, the up per limit mark of the dip stick). Since the blowby gas reductor is adopted, be careful that the amount of oil mist may be inducted in the combustion chamber and the oil hammer sometimes may occur, when the lubricating oil quantity is beyond the upper limit or an engine is operated beyond the allowable maximum angle of an engine. Reassembly Replace the diaphragm with new one, when it is damaged.

51-87


51. ENGINE

Point 7 Disassemble • Keep the removed push rods by attaching tags showing corresponding cylinder Nos. Reassemble • Always apply oil to the contact portions of the push rods and clearance adjusting screws. Point 8 Disassemble • Loosen the cylinder head bolts in two steps in the illustrated order. • Place the cylinder head assy on a paper board to prevent the combustion face from any damage. Reassemble • Remove the head gasket with a new one. • Uniformly install the head bolts manually after applying oil on the threaded and seat portions • They shall be tightened in two steps in the reverse of the order for disassembly. • Tightening torque Nm (kgf•m) TNV82A TNV84-88 First step 30.0~34.0 41.1~46.9 (3.1~3.5) (4.2~4.8) Second step 61.7~65.7 85.3~91.1 (6.3~6.7) (8.7~9.3)

First step Second step

4TNV94L/98

4TNV106(T)

49.0~58.8 (5.0~6.0) 103.1~112.9 (10.5~11.5)

88.3~98.1 (9.0~10.0) 188.0~197.8 (19.0~320.0)

19. Fan side 20. Camshaft side

Point 9 Disassemble • Carefully remove the fuel injection valve so as not to leave the top end protector from being left inside the cylinder. Reassemble • Replace the fuel injection valve protector with a new one.

51-88

21. Assembly 22. Disassembly


51. ENGINE

Point 10 Disassemble • When removing each intake/exhaust valve from the cylinder head, use a valve spring compressor (see 51.11.1-4) and compress the valve spring and remove the valve cotter.) • Keep each removed intake/exhaust valve after attaching a tag showing the corresponding cylinder No. • If cotter burr is seen at the shaft of each intake/exhaust valve stem, remove it with an oilstone and extract the valve from the cylinder head. Reassemble • Replace the stem seal with a new one when an intake/exhaust valve is disassembled. • Carefully install each valve after oil application so as not to damage the stem seal. • Different stem seals are provided for the intake and exhaust valves. Do not confuse them since those for exhaust valves are marked with yellow paint. • After assembling the intake/exhaust valve, stem seal, valve spring, seat, and cotter, tap the head of the valve stem lightly for settling. • Do not forget to install the valve cap.

51.4.2.5 Parts Inspection and measurement 1. Cylinder head Clean the cylinder head, mainly the combustion surface, valve seats and intake/exhaust ports, remove carbon deposit and bonding agent, and check the surface state. (a) Appearance check Check mainly discoloration and crack. If crack is suspected, perform color check. (b) Combustion surface distortion Apply a strait-edge in two diagonal directions and on four sides of the cylinder head, and measure distortion with a thickness gauge. mm Standard Limit Distortion 0.05 or less 0.15

1. Drain plug

51-89

2. Tickness gauge


51. ENGINE

(c) Valve sink Measure with the valve inserted to the cylinder head. mm Standard Limit 3TNV82A Intake 0.35~0.55 0.8 (2-valve head) Exhaust 0.30~0.50 0.8 4TNV84 Intake 0.30~0.50 0.8 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 0.30~0.50 0.8 (2-valve head) Exhaust 4TNV84(T) 4TNV94/ 98(T) (4-valve head)

Intake

0.36~0.56

0.8 3. Depth micrometer

Exhaust

4TNV106(T) Intake (4-valve head) Exhaust

0.35~0.55

0.8

0.5~0.7 0.7~0.9

1.0 1.2

4. Valve sinking depth

(d) Seat contact Apply a thin coat of minium on the valve seat. Insert the valve in the cylinder and push it against the seat to check seat contact. Standard: Continuous contact all around

5. Seat

51-90


51. ENGINE

2. Valve guide Mainly check damage and wear on the inside wall. Apply the service part code when replacing a part.

6. Measuring positions

7. Measuring positions

Valve stem clearance Model

Part name Intake value

3TNV82A (2-valve head) Exhaust value

4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 (2-valve head)

Intake value

Exhaust value

Intake value 4TNV84T (4-valve head) Exhaust value

4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) (4-valve head)

4TNV106(T) (4-valve head)

Intake value

Exhaust value

Intake value

Exhaust value

Place Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance

51-91

Standard 7.000~7.015 6.945~6.960 0.040~0.070 7.000~7.015 6.940~6.955 0.045~0.075 8.010~8.025 7.955~7.975 0.035~0.070 8.015~8.030 7.955~7.970 0.045~0.075 6.000~6.015 5.960~5.975 0.025~0.055 6.000~6.015 5.945~5.960 0.040~0.070 7.000~7.015 6.945~6.960 0.040~0.070 7.000~7.015 6.940~6.955 0.045~0.075 7.008~7.020 6.960~6.975 0.033~0.060 7.008~7.020 6.945~6.960 0.048~0.075

Limit 7.08 6.90 0.18 7.08 6.90 0.18 8.10 7.90 0.18 8.10 7.90 0.18 6.08 5.90 0.15 6.08 5.90 0.17 7.08 6.90 0.17 7.08 6.90 0.17 7.08 6.92 0.16 7.08 6.90 0.18


51. ENGINE

3. Intake/exhaust valve Mainly clean and check damage and wear at the valve stem and seat. (a) Seat contact: See (1)-(d) above. (b) Stem outside diameter: See (2) above. (c) Valve head thickness mm Model Part Standard Limit Intake 1.34 0.50 TNV82A~88 Exhaust 1.45 0.50 Intake 1.71 1.00 4TNE94·95 Exhaust 1.65 1.00 Intake 2.00 1.30 4TNE106(T) Exhaust 2.00 1.30

8. Thickness

(d) Valve stem bend mm Limit

0.01

(e) Overall length Standard 3TNV82A

Intake/Exhaust

TNV84~88

Intake/Exhaust

4TNV94·98 Intake/Exhaust 4TNV106(T) Intake/Exhaust

115 126

mm Limit

114.5 125.5

9. Length

4. Valve spring Mainly inspect damage and corrosion. Free length standard 3TNV82A 44.4 TNV84~88 42.0 4TNV94·98 47.5 4TNV106(T) 50.6

mm Inclination limit 1.2 1.2

11. Free length

12. Inclination

51-92

10. Stool


51. ENGINE

5. Valve rocker arm Mainly inspect valve head cap contact surface, inside surface defects and wear. Slight surface defects shall be corrected with an oilstone. mm Model Part Standard Limit Arm hole di16.00~16.02 16.07 ameter TNV82A~88 Shaft O.D. 15.97~15.98 15.94 Clearance 0.016~0.054 0.13 4TNV94/98(T) Arm hole di18.50~18.52 18.57 4TNV106(T) ameter Shaft O.D. 18.47~18.49 18.44 Clearance 0.01~0.05 0.13

6. Rocker arm shaft Mainly inspect seizure and wear at the surface in sliding contact with the arm. The rocker shaft diameter shall be as specified in (5.5) above.

7. Push rod Mainly inspect the surface in contact with the tappet and adjusting screw. Slight defects shall be corrected with an oilstone. Bend limit 0.03 mm or less 8. Valve clearance adjusting screw Mainly inspect the surface in contact with the push rod. Slight defects shall be corrected with an oilstone. 9. Rocker arm spring Mainly inspect surface defects and corrosion.

13. Thickness gauge

51-93


51. ENGINE 51.4.2.6 Valve seat correction

NOTE: Always check the oil clearance between the valve and valve guide before correcting the valve seat. If it exceeds the limit, replace the valve or valve guide first to make the clearance satisfy the standard. After correction, wash the valve and the cylinder head sufficiently with diesel oil to remove all grinding powder or compound.

1. If the seat surface is slightly roughened: perform (A) and (B) below. (A): Lap the valve and seat with a mixture of valve compound and engine oil. (B): Lap with engine oil only. 2. If the seat is heavily roughened but the width is almost normal, correct with a seat grinder or seat cutter first. Then perform lapping (A) and (B).

Seat cutter angle

Intake 120

Exhaust 90

1. Seat angle 2. Seat width

3. Seat cutter

4. Grinder

5. Grindstone

3. If the seat is heavily roughened and the width is much enlarged, grind the seat inner surface with a seat grinder whose center angle is 40°, then grind the seat outer surface with a grinder whose center angle is 150° to make the seat width match the standard. Then perform seat correction as described in 2), and then carry out lapping (A) and (B). Grinding wheel angle

θ1

θ2

40

150

51.4.2.7 Valve guide replacement 1. Use a valve guide extraction tool (51.12.1-1) and extract the valve guide from the cylinder head. 2. Put liquid nitrogen or ether (or alcohol) with dry ice added in a container and put the valve guide for replacement in it for cooling. Then insert it in with a valve guide inserting tool (Refer to No.2 of 51.4.1.2).

CAUTION Do not touch the cooled valve guide with bare hands to avoid skin damage. 3. Check the inside diameter and finish to the standard inside diameter as required with a reamer.

51-94


51. ENGINE

4. Check the projection from the cylinder head. Model 3TNV82A 4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 4TNV88 4TNV84T 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) 4TNE106(T)

Number of valves 2 valves

mm Projection 11.7~12.0 14.7~15.0 8.2~8.5

4 valves

9.7~10 13.4~13.6 6. Valve guide extracting 8. Valve guide and inserting tool 9. Cylinder head 7. Projection

51.4.2.8 Valve stem seal replacement Always use a new seal after the intake/exhaust valve is disassembled. Since the one for the exhaust valve is marked with yellow paint, do not confuse the intake and exhaust valves. 1. Apply engine oil to the lip. 2. Push with the inserting tool (Refer to No.5 of 51.4.1.2) for installation.

10. Valve stem seal insert- 12. Valve guide ing tool 13. Cylinder head 11. Stem seal

3. Measure and check the projection of valve stem seal to keep proper clearance between valve guide and stem seal. mm Model Number of valves Projection 3TNV82A 15.7~16.0 4TNV84 2 valves 3TNV84(T) 18.7~19.0 4TNV88 4TNV84T 9.9~10.2 4TNV94L 11.7~12.0 4TNV98(T) 4 valves 4TNE106(T)

15.4~15.6 14. Stem seal 15. Valve guide 16. Clearance

51-95

17. Stem seal projection 18. Valve guide projection


51. ENGINE 51.4.3

GEAR TRAIN AND CAMSHAFT

51.4.3.1 Components NOTE: This figure shows the 3TNV84

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Camshaft driving gear Cooling water pump Crankshaft pulley Gear case Fuel injection pump Idle gear Crankshaft gear Starter

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

51-96

Flywheel Camshaft Gear case flange Oil seal Fuel pump spacer Flywheel housing Don’t disassemble: pump flange 16, fuel pump drive gear 17, flange bolt 18


51. ENGINE 51.4.3.2 Disassembly procedure Disassemble in the order of the numbers in the illustration. • Perform steps 1) to 12) of the cylinder head disassembly procedure. • Remove the cooling water pump. • Remove the crankshaft pulley. (See Point 1 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the gear case cover. (See Point 2 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the fuel injection pump. (See Point 3 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the idle gear assy. (See Point 4 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the PTO drive gear. (See Point 5 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the starting motor. • Remove the flywheel. (See Point 6 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the camshaft assy. (See Point 7 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the gear case. (See Point 8 of 51.4.3.4) • Remove the oil seal from the gear case cover. (See 51.4.3.6)

51.4.3.3 Reassembly procedure Reverse of the disassembly procedure.

51-97


51. ENGINE 51.4.3.4 Servicing points Point 1 Disassemble • Remove the crankshaft pulley using a gear puller after removing the crankshaft pulley set bolt. When removing the pulley using the gear puller, use a pad and carefully operate so as not to damage the thread. Set the gear puller securely to prevent the pulley from being damaged. Reassemble • Apply grease MG2 to the oil seal lips. For the oil seal with double lips dust seal, further slightly apply engine oil on the lips so as not to damage them. • Clean by wiping off any oil on both taper surfaces using detergent. • Be sure to use the crankshaft pulley installing tool so as not to damage the oil seal lips. (See 51.4.3 (6) Oil seal replacement) • When installing the crankshaft pulley, apply lube oil to the set bolt to tighten and carefully assemble so as not to damage the oil seal. Nm (kgf•m) Model Tightening torque 3TNV82A~TNV88 112.7~122.7 (11.5~12.5) 4TNV94L/98/106(T) 107.9~127.5 (11.0~13.0)

Point 2 Reassemble • When installing the gear case, do not forget to install the two reinforcing bolts at the center. • Measure the backlash of each gear. mm 3TNV82A~88 Standard Limit Crankshaft gear Camshaft gear 0.07~0.15 0.17 Fuel injection pump gear Idle gear, PTO gear Lubricating oil pump gear 0.11~0.19 0.21 4TNV94L-106(T) Standard Limit Crankshaft gear Camshaft gear 0.08~0.14 0.16 Fuel injection pump gear Idle gear, PTO gear Balancer gear 0.12~0.18 0.20 (only 4TNV106(T) ) Lubricating oil pump gear 0.09~0.15 0.17 • Apply sealant and install the gear case by correctly positioning the two dowel pins.

1. Fuel injection drive gear 2. Camshaft gear 3. PTO gear 4. Crankshaft

51-98

pump 5. Direction of rotation 6. Lubricating oil pump gear 7. Idle gear


51. ENGINE

Point 3: (Refer to 51.7.2.5) Disassemble • Remove the mounting nut of the fuel injection pump drive gear, remove the gear using the gear puller, and remove the fuel injection pump. Do not forget to remove the stay on the rear side. When extracting the gear using the gear puller, use a pad at the shaft and carefully operate so as not to damage the thread. Reassemble • Tightening torque for fuel pump drive gear nut (without lube. Oil) Nm (kgf•m) Model Tightening torque TNV82A~88 78~88 (8.0~9.0) 4TNV94L/98/106(T) 113~123 (11.5~12.5)

Point 4 Reassemble • Assemble crankshaft gear A, fuel injection pump drive gear B and camshaft gear C at the same time by aligning with idle gear A, B and C marks. • Install the idle gear shaft with the oil hole facing upward. Point 5 Reassemble • Install the PTO drive gear with its inner spline side facing the flywheel.)

51-99


51. ENGINE

Point 6 Disassemble • Install a bolt as a handle in the hole at the end face of the flywheel and remove carefully so as not to damage the ring gear. Reassemble • Flywheel mounting bolt : apply lube oil Model 3TNV82A~88 4TNV94L/98/106(T)

Nm (kgf•m) Tightening torque 83.3~88.2 (8.5~9.0) 186.2~205.8 (19.0~21.0)

Point 7 Disassemble Measure the camshaft side gap. mm Item Side gap

Standard 0.05~0.20

Limit 0.30

• If the measured side gap exceeds the limit, replace the thrust metal. 8. Camshaft gear 9. Thrust metal

Disassemble • Since the camshaft gear is shrink-fit, heat it to 180°C~200°C for extraction. • For camshaft removal, raise the engine with its mounting flange at the bottom. After removing the thrust metal mounting bolt from the camshaft gear hole, extract the camshaft carefully so as not to damage the bearing bushing. • Rotate the camshaft a few turns before extracting it to prevent the tappet from being caught by the cam. • After removing the camshaft, set the engine horizontal and fix it on the base.

CAUTION Unforeseen injury may arise due to falling of slipping when raising the engine vertically or returning it to the horizontal position. Proceed carefully so as not to lose balance.

51-100

10. Side gap


51. ENGINE

Point 8: Gear case Reassemble • Do not forget to install the oil pan mounting bolts on the bottom side when installing the gear case. • Apply sealant and install the gear case by matching the two dowel pints.

51.4.3.5 Parts inspection and measurement 1. Camshaft Mainly check the contact between the tappet and cam contact surface, bearing seizure and wear, and gear damage. (a) Shaft bend measurement Support the camshaft with V blocks. Rotate the camshaft and measure the runout at the center of the camshaft and at each journal with a dial gauge. half of the runout is the bend. mm Item Standard Limit Bend 0~0.02 0.05 11. Dial gauge

12. V-block

13. Flywheel side

14. Micrometer

(b) Intake/exhaust cam height measurement mm Model 3TNV82A~88 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106(T)

Standard 38.600~38.800 43.400~43.600 50.900~51.100

Limit 38.350 43.150 50.650

(c) Camshaft outside diameter and bearing hole diameter measurement Measure the camshaft outside diameter with a micrometer. The oil clearance shall be calculated by subtracting the measured camshaft outside diameter from the the camshaft bushing inside diameter after insertion to the cylinder measured with a cylinder gauge.

51-101


51. ENGINE

Model

Place

Item Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance Bushing I.D. Camshaft O.D. Oil clearance

Gear side

3TNV82A~TNV88

Intermediate position

Wheel side

Gear side

TNV94L/98(T)

Intermediate position

Wheel side

Gear side

4TNV106(T)

Intermediate position

Wheel side

Standard 44.990~45.055 44.925~44.950 0.040~0.130 45.000~45.025 44.910~44.935 0.065~0.115 45.000~45.025 44.925~44.950 0.050~0.100 49.990~50.055 49.925~49.950 0.040~0.130 50.000~50.025 49.910~49.935 0.065~0.115 50.000~50.025 49.925~49.950 0.05~0.100 57.980~58.050 57.910~57.940 0.040~0.140 58.000~58.030 57.895~57.925 0.075~0.135 58.000~58.030 57.910~57.940 0.050~0.120

Limit 45.130 44.890 0.240 45.100 44.875 0.225 45.100 44.890 0.210 50.130 49.890 0.240 50.100 49.875 0.225 50.100 49.890 0.210 58.105 57.875 0.250 58.105 57.860 0.245 58.105 57.875 0.230

2. Idle gear Mainly check the bushing seizure and wear, and gear damage. Shaft outside diameter and bushing inside diameter measurement mm Item Standard Limit Shaft outside diameter 45.950~49.975 45.900 Bushing inside diameter

46.000~46.025

46.075

Clearance 0.025~0.075 0.175 3. PTO drive gear Mainly check sticking of bearings on both sides, gear damage and looseness, and gear shaft damage and wear.

15. Idle gear 16. Shaft

51-102

17. Inside diameter 18. Shaft diameter


51. ENGINE 51.4.3.6 Oil seal replacement (Gear case side) 1. Replace the oil seal with a new one when the gear case is disassembled. Extract the used oil seal. 2. Insert a new oil seal. Fit the position of the oil seal insertion to the end face of the gear case. (Refer to the below figure.) 3. Apply grease to the oil seal tips. For the oil seal with double lips dust seal, further, slightly apply engine oil on the oil seal lip so as not to damage them, when installing the pulley. NOTE: Pay attention not to drop any oil on the taper surface of the crankshaft. If dropped, clean by wiping off using detergent. 4. Carefully install the crankshaft pulley so as not to damage the oil seal lips. Especially for the engine installed the oil seal with double lips dust seal, be sure to use the crankshaft pulley-installing tool.

19. Oil seal with doule lips 21. Crankshaft pulley dust seal 22. Guiding 20. Crankshaft pulley installing tool

51.4.3.7 Camshaft bushing replacement Replace the bushing using the special service tool (Refer to No.7 of 51.4.1.2)

51-103


51. ENGINE 51.4.4

CYLINDER BLOCK

51.4.4.1 Components NOTE: This figure shows the 3TNV84

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Oil filter Oil pan spacer Oil pan Oil suction pipe Piston & connecting rod Flywheel housing Bearing cap

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

51-104

Crankshaft Tappet Piston ring Oil seal case Flywheel Oil seal Gear case flange


51. ENGINE 51.4.4.2 Disassembly procedure: Disassemble in the order of the numbers in the illustration. • Perform steps 1) to 12) in the cylinder head disassembly procedure. • Perform steps 1) to 12) in the gear train disassembly procedure. • Remove the oil pan. (See Point 1 of 51.4.4.4) • Remove the lubricating oil suction pipe. • Remove the piston w/rod. (See Point 2 of 51.4.4.4) • Remove the mounting flange. (See Point 3 of 51.4.4.4) • Remove the bearing metal caps. (See Point 4 of 51.4.4.4) • Remove the crankshaft. (See Point 5 of 51.4.4.4) • Remove the tappets. • Remove the pistons and rings. (See Point 6 of 51.4.4.4) • Remove the oil seal from the mounting flange. (See 51.4.4.8 of 51.4.4.4)

51.4.4.3 Reassembly procedure: Reverse of the disassembly procedure.

51.4.4.4 Servicing points Point 1: Oil pan Disassemble • Sealant is applied to the oil pan mounting surface on the block. Carefully operate soas not to damage or distort the bonding surface. Reassemble • Apply sealant before reassembly. Point 2: Piston w/rod Disassemble • Measure the connecting rod side gap. mm Standard 0.20~0.40 • Carefully remove the carbon deposit on top of the cylinder so as not to damage the inner side of the cylinder.

1. Thickness gauge

51-105

2. Crankshaft


51. ENGINE

• Set the piston at the BDC position and remove the connecting rod cap. Then set the piston at the TDC position, and push the connecting rod big end with the wooden shaft of a hammer. Proceed carefully so as not to cause the cylinder block catch the rod big end. Set the rod caps and crankpin metals in their correct combinations. Reassemble • Apply oil especially carefully to the sliding contact surfaces of the pistons, rods and rings. • Use the piston insertion tool (see 51.12.1-9) to insert each piston w/rod in the cylinder block and install the bearing metal cap. Rod bolt tightening torque Nm (kgf•m) Model Standard (apply lube oil) 3TNV82A 37.2~41.2 (3.8~4.2) TNV84~88 44.1~49.0 (4.5~5.0) 4TNV94L·98 53.9~58.8 (5.5~6.0) 4TNV106(T) 78.5~83.4 (8.0~8.5) Point 3: mounting flange Disassemble Place the engine on a stable base with the cylinder block upper surface facing down, and remove the mounting flange carefully so as not to damage the combustion surface.

Reassemble Apply sealant and install the mounting flange by matching the two dowel pins. After assembly, raise the engine with its mounting flange on the bottom side.

CAUTION Unforeseen injury may arise due to falling of slipping when raising or reversing the engine. Carefully operate so as not to lose balance.

51-106


51. ENGINE

Point 4: Journal bearing cap Disassemble • Before removing the journal bearing, measure the crankshaft side gap. Measure it in either method because there are the next two methods. 1. Install a dial gauge on the cylinder block, and move a crankshaft in front and back, and measure the side gap as shown in the right figure.

2. Put a thickness gauge in the clearance between thrust metal and crankshaft directly, and measure it. Side gap standard mm Model Standard Limit All models 0.13~0.23 0.28 Reassemble • If the side gap exceeds the standard, replace the thrust metal with an oversize one. Machine the standard width of the crankshaft thrust part into the dimension of the below table at the same time. Refer to a parts catalog when ordering the part.

3. 4. 5. 6.

The surface finishing precision (refer to 51.4.4.5(2): 1.6 0.25 mm Oversized thrust metal (0.25 DS) mm 0.25 DS 3TNV82A TNV84~88 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106(T)

Standard thickness 2.055~2.105 2.055~2.105 2.055~2.105 2.555~2.605

The standard width of the crankshaft thrust part mm Model 3TNV82A TNV84~88 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106(T)

Standard thickness 25.250~25.271 28.250~28.271 32.250~32.275 36.250~36.275

51-107

Cylinder block Crankshaft Thrust metal Bearing cap

7. Thickness gauge 8. Standard width 9. Thrust face


51. ENGINE

Disassemble • Remove the bearing caps, cap side bearings, and thrust metals. Place each thrust metal with identification of the position and direction. The position number of reassembling is punched on a metal cap (except for both ends) and a cylinder block.

10. Wheel side 13. Block side main bear11. Gear side ing metals 12. Cap side main bearing 14. Thrust metals metals

Reassemble • Carefully install each thrust metal so that the grooved one is positioned away from the cap. • Do not confuse the upper and lower main bearing metals. The upper main bearing metal (block side) has an oil hole, and the lower one does not. The “arrow” marks on the cap shall face the flywheel. Tighten main bearing cap bolts.

15. Upper main bearing 18. Main bearing metal 19. Thrust metal 16. Oil hole 20. Grove 17. Lower

Main bearing cap bolt tightening torque (apply lube oil) Nm (kgf•m) Model Standard thickness 3TNV82A 76.4~80.4 (7.8~8.2) TNV84~88 93.2~98.1 (9.5~10.5) 4TNV94L·98 108.1~117.9 (11.0~12.00) 4TNV106(T) 186.2~205.8 (19.0~21.0)

21. Mark

51-108

22. Position number of reassembling


51. ENGINE

Point 5: Crankshaft Disassemble • Remove the crankshaft. Remove each main bearing metal upper (block side) and pair it with the metal cap side lower metal.

CAUTION Carefully prevent damage to the bearing or finger injury when removing the crankshaft because it is heavy.

Point 6: Piston pin and rings Disassemble • Using the piston ring replacer (see 51.4.1.2), remove the piston rings. • Remove the circlip and remove the piston pin by pushing it out. 23. Make the punched manufactere’s mark upward

Reassemble • Install each piston ring on the piston, with the punched manufacturer’s mark facing upward. Reassemble • The piston ring joints shall be staggered at by 120° intervals. Do not position the top ring joint vertical to the piston pin. The coil expander joint shall be opposite to the oil ring joint.

24. Oil ring joint 25. Second ring joint

51-109

26. Top ring joint 27. Expander joint


51. ENGINE

Reassemble • When installing the piston pin to the rod and piston, the punched match mark on the big end of the connecting rod shall be opposite to the size mark on the piston top. Reassemble • Install the piston in the cylinder clock with the punched mark on the big end of the rod on the nozzle side. (The embossed mark at the connecting rod I-beam section shall be on the flywheel side.)

28. 29. 30. 31.

Camshaft side Nozzle side Piston ID mark Flywheel side Cylinder size mark

34. Engraved mark 35. Camshaft side

51-110

32. Embossed mark (Flywheel side) 33. Match mark

36. Flywheel side


51. ENGINE 51.4.4.5 Parts inspection and measurement 1. Cylinder block Especially clean head surface, cylinder bores and oil holes, and check after removing any carbon deposit and bonding agent. (a) Appearance inspection Check if there is any discoloration or crack. If crack is suspected, perform color check. Sufficiently clean the oil holes and check they are not clogged. (b) Cylinder bore and distortion Measure at 20 mm below the crest of the liner, at 20 mm from the bottom end and at the center. Roundness: Roundness is found as follows though it is the simple method. Measure cylinder diameters of the A direction and the B direction on each section of a, b and c. Roundness is the maximum value among those difference values. Cylindricity: Cylindricity is found as follows though it is the simple method. Measure cylinder diameters of a, b and c sections in the A direction, and calculate the difference in maximum value and minimum value of the measured diameters. In the same way measure and calculate the difference in the B direction. Cylindricity is the maximum value between those difference values.

mm Item

Cylinder inside diameter

Cylinder bore

Roundness Cylindricity

Model 3TNV82A TNV84 TNV88 4TNV94L 4TNV98 4TNV106(T) all TNV

51-111

Standard 82.000~82.030 84.000~84.030 88.000~88.030 94.000~94.030 98.000~98.030 106.000~106.030

Limit 82.200 84.200 88.200 94.130 98.130 106.130

0.01 or less

0.03


51. ENGINE

(c) If the limit is exceeded or any surface defect is found, repair by boring and honing. Use an oversized piston (and new piston rings) as required. Oversized piston (0.25 mm, with piston rings) Model Standard (mm) 3TNV82A 82.250 3TNV84(T) 84.250 4TNV84 4TNV84T 84.250 3/4TNV88 88.250 4TNV94L 94.250 4TNV98 98.250 4TNV106 106.250 4TNV106T 106.250

Cylinder dimension after boring and honing Cylinder dimension Honing angle Model (mm) (deg.) 3TNV82A 82.250~82.280 3TNV84(T) 84.250~84.280 4TNV84 3/4TNV88 88.250~88.280 30~40 deg. 4TNV94L 94.250~94.280 4TNV98 98.250~98.280 4TNV106(T) 106.250~106.280

2. Crankshaft Mainly check seizure and wear of the crankpins and journals. Since the crankshaft gear is shrink-fitted, heat to 180° to 200° when extraction is necessary. (a) Shaft portion color check After washing the crankshaft, inspect it by means of color check or a magnaflux inspector. Replace it if cracked or heavily damaged. Slight defects shall be corrected by grinding.

51-112

Surface roughness

Rmax 1.0~3.5S

Roundness/Cylindricity (mm)

0.01 or less


51. ENGINE

(b) Crankshaft bend Support the crankshaft journals at both ends with Vblocks. Use a dial gauge and measure the runout at the center journal while rotating the shaft to inspect the bend. Limit 0.02 mm or less

37. Bend 38. Deflection

39. Dial gauge 40. V-block

41. Crankshaft journal

42. Crankpin

(c) Crankpin and journal measurement Measure the outside diameter, roundness and taper at each crankpin and journal. Correct by grinding if unevenly wear, roundness exceeding the limit or insufficient outside diameter is found. Replace if the defect is excessive.

51-113


51. ENGINE

Crankpin mm Model & Item Pin outside diameter 3TNV82A Metal thickness Oil clearance Pin outside diameter TNV84~88 Metal thickness Oil clearance Pin outside diameter 4TNV94L·98 Metal thickness Oil clearance Pin outside diameter 4TNV106(T) Metal thickness Oil clearance If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, use an undersized bearing.

Standard 42.952~42.962 1.487~1.500 0.038~0.090 47.952~47.962 1.492~1.500 0.038~0.074 57.952~57.962 1.492~1.500 0.038~0.074 63.952~63.962 1.984~1.992 0.054~0.090

Limit 42.902 0.150 47.902 0.150 57.902 0.150 63.902 0.150

Undersized crankpin bearing (0.25 mm) Model Standard thickness (mm) 3TNV82A 1.612~1.625 TNV84~88 1.617~1.625 4TNV94L·98 1.617~1.625 4TNV106(T) 2.109~2.117

Pin machining dimension Model 3TNV82A TNV84~88 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106(T)

Pin machining dimension (mm) Ø 42.702~42.712 Ø 47.702~47.712 Ø 57.702~57.712 Ø 63.702~63.712

Crank journal mm Model & Item Journal O.D. 3TNV82A Metal thickness Oil clearance Journal O.D. TNV84~88 Metal thickness (Selective assembly) Oil clearance Journal O.D. 4TNV94L·98 Metal thickness (Selective assembly) Oil clearance Journal O.D. 4TNV106(T) Metal thickness (Selective assembly) Oil clearance If the clearance limit is exceeded, use an undersized bearing.

51-114

Standard 46.952~46.962 1.987~2.000 0.038~0.080 53.952~53.962 1.995~1.990 0.038~0.068 64.952~64.962 1.995~2.010 0.038~0.068 75.952~75.962 2.488~2.503 0.052~0.082

Limit 46.902 0.150 53.902 0.150 64.902 0.150 75.902 0.150


51. ENGINE

Undersized crankpin bearing (0.25 mm) Model Standard thickness (mm) 3TNV82A 2.112~2.125 TNV84~88 2.112~2.125 4TNV94L·98 2.112~2.125 4TNV106(T) 2.605~2.618

Crankshaft Journal machining dimension Pin machining dimension Model (mm) 3TNV82A Ø 46.702~46.712 TNV84~88 Ø 53.702~53.712 4TNV94L·98 Ø 64.702~64.712 4TNV106(T) Ø 75.702~75.712

• Dimension R and finishing precision of crankshaft journal and pin As for grinding processing of journal and pin, machine it by using the grinding wheel of the dimension R of below table. Surface finishing precision standard on journal and pin: Ry = 0.8S super polishing Surface finishing precision standard on the thrust side of crankshaft arm: 1.6 43. Super polishing 44. Crank pin

mm Model

Standard thickness

3TNV82A TNV84~88

3.5 +0.3/ 0

4TNV94L·98(T) 4TNV106(T)

94.0 +0.3/ 0

51-115

45. Crank journal


51. ENGINE

NOTE: lf the oil clearance is excessive though the thicknesses of the iournal and crankpin metals are normal or if partial uneven wear is observed, re-grind the crankshaft and use an oversized metals. lf rust or surface roughening exists on the rear side of the metals, coat it with blue or minimum. Then assemble the crankpin metal to the connecting rod, and tighten the rod bolt to the specified torque to check the metal for contact. lf the contact surface occupies 75% or more, the metal is normal. lf the contact surface is insufficient, the metal interference is insufficient. Replace the metal with a new one.

• Thrust metal inspection (a) Inspect any damage or wear. (b) Measure side gap and thrust metal thickness

Side gap and thrust metal thickness mm Model

Side gap

Standard Limit TNV82A~88 0.14~0.22 4TNV94L¡98 0.13~0.23 4TNV106(T) 0.13~0.23 If the side gap is exceeded, use an oversized thrust metal.

Oversized metal (0.25 mm) Model Standard thickness (mm) 3TNV82A 2.15 TNV84~88 2.15 4TNV94L¡98 2.055~2.105 4TNV106(T) 2.555~2.605

3. Piston Especially clean the combustion surface, circumference, ring grooves and piston pin bosses, and check after removing any carbon deposit. Any burr at a ring groove or snap ring groove shall be removed. If crack is suspected, inspect by color check. (a) Piston outside diameter measurement Measure the long diameter at H mm from the bottom end of the piston of the oval hole in the vertical direction to the piston pin hole.

51-116

Thrust metal thickness Standard Limit 1.930~1.980 1.850 1.930~1.980 1.850 2.430~2.480 2.35


51. ENGINE

Piston outside diameter mm Model 3TNV82A 3,4TNV84(T) 3,4TNV88 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T)

Outside diameter Standard 81.950~81.980 83.945~83.975 87.945~87.975 93.945~093.955 97.940~097.950 105.930~0105.960

Limit 81.905 83.900 87.900 93.900 97.895 105.880

Clearance between piston and cylinder 0.035~0.065

If the clearance between piston and cylinder exceeds the limit, use an oversized piston. (Refer to the tables of oversized pistons, oversized piston rings and cylinder boring dimension on 51.4.4.5 (1)(c). (b) Piston pin hole measurement Measure the outside diameter of piston pin and the inside diameter of piston pin hole. Calculate the clearance between piston pin and piston pin hole. If any data exceeds the limit, replace the part with a new one.

Model

mm Limit 23.039 22.965 0.074 26.039 25.965 0.074 30.039 29.959 0.080 37.039 36.959 0.080 direction

Item Standard Pin I.D. 23.000~23.009 3TNV82A Pin O.D. 22.995~23.000 Clearance 0.000~0.014 Pin I.D. 26.000~26.009 3TNV84~88 Pin O.D. 25.995~26.000 Clearance 0.000~0.014 Pin I.D. 30.000~30.009 4TNV94L Pin O.D. 29.989~30.000 4TNV98(T) Clearance 0.000~0.020 Pin I.D. 37.000~37.011 4TNV106(T) Pin O.D. 36.989~37.000 Clearance 0.000~0.022 PIN. Measure at position (a), (b) and (c) in (A) and (B). HOLE. Measure at positions (a), (b) and (c) in direction (A) and (B).

51-117

0.040~0.070

0.050~00.080

Measurement position (H) 22~25 22 22 30


51. ENGINE

(c) Piston ring, ring groove and end clearance measurement • Except for the top ring, to measure the piston ring groove width, first measure the width of the piston ring. Then insert the piston ring into the ring. Then insert the piston ring into the ring groove. Insert a thickness gauge in between the piston ring and groove to measure the gap between them. Obtain the ring groove width by adding ring width to the measured side clearance. • To measure the end clearance, push the piston ring into the sleeve using the piston head, insert a thickness gauge in end clearance to measure. The ring shall be pushed in to approx. 30 mm above the bottom end of the cylinder. For the top ring, measure only the piston ring joint end clearance in normal state.

46. Top ring 47. Second ring

48. Oil ring

49. Width

50. Thickness

51. Head surface 52. Cylinder block

53. Pistonring 54. Joint end clearance

51-118


51. ENGINE

Piston ring dimension mm Model

Part

Top ring

TNV82A/84

Second ring

Oil ring

Top ring

TNV88

Second ring

Oil ring

Top ring

4TNV94L¡98

Second ring

Oil ring

Top ring

4TNV106(T)

Second ring

Oil ring

Item Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance

51-119

Standard 2.065~2.080 1.970~1.990 0.075~0.110 0.200~0.400 2.035~2.050 1.970~1.990 0.045~0.080 0.200~0.400 4.015~4.030 3.970~3.990 0.025~0.060 0.200~0.400 2.060~2.075 1.970~1.990 0.070~0.105 0.200~0.400 2.025~2.040 1.970~1.990 0.035~0.070 0.200~0.400 4.015~4.030 3.970~3.990 0.025~0.060 0.200~0.400 2.040~2.060 1.940~1.960 0.080~0.120 0.250~0.450 2.080~2.095 1.970~1.990 0.090~0.125 0.450~0.650 3.015~3.030 2.970~2.990 0.025~0.060 0.250~0.450 2.520~2.540 2.440~2.460 0.060~0.100 0.300~0.450 2.070~2.085 1.970~1.990 0.080~0.115 0.450~0.600 3.015~3.030 2.970~2.990 0.025~0.060 0.300~0.500

Limit 1.950 0.490 2.150 1.950 0.200 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.950 0.490 2.140 1.950 0.190 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.920 0.540 2.195 1.950 0.245 0.730 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.550 2.420 0.540 2.185 1.950 0.235 0.680 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.600


51. ENGINE

4. Connecting rod (a) Appearance inspection Inspect the portion near the boundary of the chamfered portion and I-beam section of the big and small ends of the connecting rod as well as the portion near the oil hole of the bushing at the small end for cracks, deformation, and discoloration. (b) Twist and parallelism measurement Use a connecting rod aligner and measure the twist and bend. mm Item Standard dimension Limit dimension Twist and 0.03 or less per 100 mm 0.08 parallelism 55. Parallelism 56. Twist

(c) Rod small end measurement Measure the pin outside diameter according to 51.4.4.5 (a) described above. mm Model Item Standard Limit Piston pin 23.025~23.038 23.068 I.D. bushing 3TNV82A Pin O.D. 22.995~23.000 22.967 Clearance 0.025~0.043 0.101 Piston pin 26.025~26.038 26.068 I.D. bushing TNV84~88 Pin O.D. 25.995~26.000 25.967 Clearance 0.025~0.043 0.101 Piston pin 30.025 30.038 30.068 I.D. bushing 4TNV94L¡98 Pin O.D. 29.987 30.000 29.959 Clearance 0.025 0.051 0.109 Piston pin 37.025 37.038 37.068 I.D. bushing 4TNV106(T) Pin O.D. 36.989 37.000 36.961 Clearance 0.025 0.049 0.107

58. Connecting rod aligner

51-120

57. Mandrel


51. ENGINE

If the bushing is to be replaced because the oil clearance exceeds the limit, use spare part.

59.

60. Cylinder gauge

(d) Rod big end measurement Measure the crankpin and bushing according to 51.4.4.5 (c) described above. Calculate the oil clearance of a crank pin metal and a crank pin from the measured values of the crank pin metal inner diameter and the crank pin outside diameter. Replace a crank pin metal if the oil clearance becomes about the limit dimension of the below table. Correct by grinding if unevenly wear, roundness exceeding the limit or insufficient outside diameter is found. Also use an undersized metal. When measuring the inside diameter of the rod big end, install the crankpin metals in the rod big end not to mistake the top and bottom of the metals and tighten the rod bolts by the standard torque. 61. Cylinder gauge

Tightening torque of rod bolt Model 3TNV82A TNV84/88 4TNV94L/98 4TNV106(T)

Tightening torque

Lubricating oil application (threaded portion, and bearing seat surface)

37.2~41.2 (3.8~4.2) 44.1~49.0 (4.5~5.0) 53.9~58.8 (5.5~6.0) 78.5~83.4 (8.0~8.5)

Lube. oil applied

51-121


51. ENGINE

Standard of rod big end mm Model

3TNV82A

TNV84/88

4TNV94L/98

4TNV106(T)

Item Rod I.D. bushing Crankpin O.D. Metal thickness Clearance Rod I.D. bushing Crankpin O.D. Metal thickness Clearance Rod I.D. bushing Crankpin O.D. Metal thickness Clearance Rod I.D. bushing Crankpin O.D. Metal thickness Clearance

Standard 42.952~42.962 43.000~43.042 1.487~1.500 0.038~0.090 47.952~47.962 48.000~48.026 1.492~1.500 0.038~0.074 57.952~57.962 58.000~58.026 1.492~1.500 0.038~0.074 63.952~63.962 64.016~64.042 1.984~1.992 0.054~0.090

Limit 42.902 0.150 47.902 0.150 57.902 0.150 63.902 0.150

5. Tappet Mainly check the tappet contact surface with the cam and push rod. Slight surface defects shall be corrected with an oilstone. (a) Tappet stem outside diameter measurement mm Model Item Standard Limit Tappet hole 12.000~12.025 12.045 I.D. TNV84~88 Stem O.D. 11.975~11.990 11.955 Clearance 0.010~0.050 0.090

4TNV94L¡98

Tappet hole I.D.

Stem O.D. Clearance Tappet hole I.D. 4TNV106(T) Stem O.D. Clearance

12.000~12.018 12.038

62. Abnormal contact sur- 63. Normal contact surface face

11.975~11.990 11.955 0.010~0.043 0.083 14.000~14.018 14.038 13.966~13.984 13.946 0.015~0.052 0.092

51-122


51. ENGINE 51.4.4.6 Cylinder bore correction 1. Slight uneven worn, flawed, etc. shall be corrected by honing only. If the cylinder is unevenly worn partially, flawed or otherwise damaged and cannot be repaired simply by honing, rebore the cylinder first and then hone. See 51.4.4.5 (c) for the boring dimension. 2. Items to be prepared for honing • Flex-Hone (see No.8 of 51.4.1.2) • Electric drill • Honing fluid (50:50 mixture of lube oil and diesel oil)

64. Flex-Hone 65. Electric drill

3. Apply the honing fluid to the Flex-Hone and turn the electric drill at 300 to 1200 rpm. Then insert the FlexHone into the cylinder bore while turning it, and move it up and down for about 30 sec. to obtain a honing mark with a cross hatch angle of 30° to 40°. NOTE: Avoid faster revolution than 1200 rpm since it may cause breakdown. Do not insert or extract the Flex-Hone in stopped state because the cylinder will be damaged.

H1. Time for honing H2. Boring and honing interval H3. Service life of cylinder block 68. Increase in L.O.C.

69. Honing 70. Boring 71. Honing

51-123

66. Honing fluid 67. 50:50 mixture of lube oil and diesel oil


51. ENGINE 51.4.4.7 Piston pin bushing replacement Replace bushing by using the special service tool (see 51.4.1.2).

51.4.4.8 Oil seal replacement (Flywheel housing side) 1. Replace oil seal, when a flywheel housing is removed. Extract the used oil seal. 2. Insert a new oil seal with the oil seal insertion tool. 3. Apply lithium grease.

51-124


51. ENGINE

51.5

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

51.5.1

LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM

Oil filter Bypass valve Fuel injection pump Hydraulic swich Regulator valve Oil pump

Cylinder body • Main gallery Intermediate gear shaft

Oil suction pipe (strainer)

Camshaft bearing

Crank journal

Rocker arm bearing

Crank pin

Rocker arm Tappet • Cam face Oil pan

NOTE: It varies in the specifications of each model whether Oil cooler and Piston cooling of the * mark are attached.

51-125


51. ENGINE 51.5.2

TROCHOID PUMP COMPONENTS

Trochoid pump (3TNV82A~TNV88)

Trochoid pump (4TNV94L/98/106)

1. 2. 3. 4.

51.5.3

Outer rotor Inner rotor Cover Control valve

5. 6. 7. 8.

DISASSEMBLY(REVERSE THE PROCEDURE BELOW FOR ASSEMBLY)

1. Loosen the belt, and remove the radiator pulley, fan and V-belt. (See 51.4.2.2. 2). 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. (See 51.4.3.2. 3). 3. Remove the gear case cover. (See 51.4.3.2. 4). 4. Remove the lubricating oil pump assy from the gear case for 4TNV94/98/106. (51.5.4 Point 1) Remove the lube oil cover from gear case cover for 3TNV82A-88. (51.5.4 Point 1) 5. Remove the pressure regulating valve from the lubricating oil pump body. (51.5.4 Point 2)

51-126

Gear case Punch Crankshaft Mark


51. ENGINE 51.5.4

SERVICING POINTS

Point 1 Disassemble • Check if the pump rotates smoothly and see that there is no play between the shaft and gear, and inner rotor. Reassemble NOTE: Always check if the pump rotates smoothly after installation on the gear case. Running the engine when the pump rotation is heavy may cause the pump to be burnt. 1. 3TNV82A-88 • Apply lube oil to rotor (outer/inner) insertion part. • Assemble the outer rotor so that the mark of the end face may become a cover side when inserting it in the gear case. • Fasten a lube oil pump cover by the standard torque. Tightening torque: 6.9 ± 1.5 Nm (0.7 ± 0.15 kgf m) • When replacing the lube oil pump, replace the whole assy. 2. 4TNV94L/98/106 • Apply lube oil to lube oil pump insertion part of gear case. • Install the outer rotor in the gear case so that the punch mark on the end face is seen. • When replacing the lube oil pump, replace the whole assy.

Point 2 Disassemble-Reassemble • Only wash the pressure regulating valve. Disassembly is unnecessary unless any abnormality in operation is detected.

51-127


51. ENGINE 51.5.5

PARTS INSPECTION AND MEASUREMENT

51.5.5.1 Trochoid pump inspection and measurement 1. Outside clearance and side clearance of outer rotor Insert a gap gauge between a outer rotor and a pump body, and measure the clearance. Outside clearance mm Model 3TNV82A~88 4TNV94L/98 4TNV106(T)

Standard 0.12~0.21 0.100~0.155 0.100~0.165

Limit 0.30 0.25 0.25 1. Outer case

5. Gear case

When measuring a side clearance, put a right-angle gauge to the pump body, insert a gap gauge and measure the clearance. Side clearance mm Model 3TNV82A~88 4TNV94L/98 4TNV106(T)

2.

Standard 0.02~0.07 0.05~0.10 0.03~0.12

Limit 0.12 0.15 0.17

Inner rotor and gear boss clearance (3TNV82A4TNV88)

Item

Part

Inside clearance of in- Gear boss diameter ner rotor Rotor inner diameter Width across flat Width across flat of gear boss clearance of inner roWidth across flat of rotor tor

Standard dimension Standard clearance (mm) (mm) 53.05~53.15 53.45~53.55 49.45~49.75 49.95~50.05

8. Crank gear 9. Inner rotor

51-128

Standard clearance limit (mm)

0.3~0.5

0.6

0.2~0.6

0.7

10. Width across flat of rotor 11. Rotor inner diameter


51. ENGINE

3. Rotor shaft clearance (4TNV94L/98/106) Measure the outside diameter of rotor shaft and the shaft hole diameter of gear case. Calculate the clearance from that difference.

12. Rotor shaft 13. Gear case

Model 4TNV94L/ 98

4TNV106(T)

Inspection item Gear case bearing I.D. Rotor shaft O.D. Rotor clearance Gear case bearing I.D. Rotor shaft O.D. Rotor clearance

Standard 12.980~13.020 12.955~12.970 0.035~0.065 13.000~13.020 12.955~12.965 0.035~0.065

51-129

14. Shaft O.D. 15. Bearing I.D.

Limit 13.05 12.945 0.105 13.05 12.945 0.105


51. ENGINE

51.6

COOLING SYSTEM

51.6.1

COOLING WATER SYSTEM

Thermostat

Radiator

Bypass

Cylinder head

Cylinder block

Coolant recovery tank

Cooling water pump

L.O. cooler

51.6.2

COOLING WATER PUMP COMPONENTS

NOTE: This figure shows the 4TNV84

1. Thermostat cover 2. Thermostat 3. Cooling water pump

4. Cylinder head 5. Joint

6. Thermo switch 7. V-pulley

51-130

8. Spacer 9. Fan


51. ENGINE 51.6.3

DISASSEMBLY (REVERSE THE PROCEDURE BELOW FOR ASSEMBLY)

1. Remove the alternator. See 51.4.2.2. 1). 2. Remove the fan, V-belt and pulley. See 51.4.2.2. 2). 3. Remove the cooling water pump. (Point 1, in below 51.6.4) 4. Remove the thermostat. (Point 2 in below 51.6.4)

51.6.4

SERVICING POINTS

Point 1 Disassemble-Reassemble: • Check to see that the cooling water pump bearing is free from abnormal noise, sticking or play and water leakage from the bearing. If replacement is necessary, replace the whole cooling water pump assy.

NOTE: Replace the O-ring of the cooling water pump with new one when disassembling. And, be sure to use the special O-ring for each engine model, because the material is different, although the dimension is the same as a commercial part. (Refer to the right figure.) Point 2 Disassemble: Check the thermostat function. See 51.2.7 for the inspection method. 10. O-Ring 11. Joint

51-131

12. Cooling water pump


51. ENGINE

51.7

FUEL INJECTION PUMP/GOVERNOR

Only the outline of the MP fuel pump is explained in this chapter. Refer to the MP pump service manual of the separate volume for the disassembly and assembly.

51.7.1

INTRODUCTION

It is described about the features of the fuel injection pump, YDP-MP, manufactured by Yanmar, disassembly, assembly and adjustment procedure. Fuel injection pump is the most important equipment, which is enable to make the sensitive adjustment according to the variable load of the engine. Therefore all of the parts are required not only very precise machining but also finest, assembling with top level. The careful arrangement of keeping off the dust and the rust when disassemble, adjustment and reassemble of the fuel injection pump is made in the market. Yanmar YDP-MP Pump is a distributor type pump which is unified of Mono-plunger, a distributing shaft, a hydraulic head which equipped the delivery valve for each cylinder, pump housing which has a cam shaft internally and governor. The fuel, which is pressurized by the up and down movement of the plunger driven by the cam-rotation, is supplied through the distributor shaft, which is rotating accordingly. There are a model YDP-MP2 and a model YDP-MP4, and plunger diameter and fuel cam speed are different.

51-132


51. ENGINE 51.7.2

FUEL INJECTION PUMP

51.7.2.1 Fuel system diagram

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Fuel tank Water separator Electric fuel feed pump Fuel filter Orifice Pressure control valve Low pressure gallery Trochoid pump Oil seal Engine oil Engine crankcase Cam

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.

51-133

High pressure gallery Fuel injection pipe Injection pump Overflow orifice Tappet Fuel return Joint Nozzle Accumulator Timer piston Plunger Distributor shaft


51. ENGINE 51.7.2.2 External view and components NOTE: This figure shows the 3TNV84

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

V-belt / V-pulley Fuel injection pipe Cooling fan Don’t disassemble: pump flange, fuel pump drive gear Drive gear nut Fuel pump spacer Water separator Fuel injection pump Cylinder head

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

51.7.2.3 Disassembly procedure:

51-134

Fuel filter Fuel injection valve Intake manifold Cooling water pump Camshaft driving gear Crankshaft gear Gear case Oil seal Crankshaft pulley


51. ENGINE

Disassembly from the engine body • Remove the cooling fan, pulley and V-belt. • Remove the fuel injection pipe, fuel oil piping, fuel return pipe and rear stay. See point 1 of 51.7.2.5. • Remove the fuel injection pump cover (the cover of the drive gear). • Make ID marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so on. See Point 2 of 51.7.2.5. • Loosen a fuel pump drive gear nut, and remove a pump drive gear from the fuel pump by using a gear puller. See Point 3 of 51.4.3.4. • Remove a drive gear nut carefully not to drop it to the inside of the gear case. • Record the installation angle of the fuel pump precisely by using a mark-off line and a sticker. See (4) of 51.2.2.7. • Remove the fuel injection pump. See Point 3 of 51.7.2.5.

Fuel pump (4 cylinder)

Fuel pump (3 cylinder)

19. Fuel injection pipe 20. Fuel pump 21. Governor side

51.7.2.4 Assembly procedure Reverse the disassembly procedure and adjust the fuel injection timing finally. See (4) of 51.2.2.7.

51-135

22. Drive side 23. Cylinder No. 24. Engine


51. ENGINE 51.7.2.5 Servicing points Point 1 Disassemble • Block an entrance with the tape so that trash may not enter the fuel injection pipe and the fuel injection pump. Point 2 Disassemble • After putting the I.D. marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so on, remove the gear installation nut. NOTE: Don't remove four flange bolts. 25. Fuel injection pump 26. I.D. mark 27. Idle gear

28. Flange bolt 29. Gear installation nut 30. Fuel pump driving gear

Reassemble • Reassemble the pump driving gear while checking the I.D. marks on the driving gear and idle gear. Tightening torque of the gear installation nut Model TNV82A~88 4TNV94~106(T)

Nm (kgf•m)

Lubricating oil application (thread portion, and seat surface)

78~88 (8~9) 113~123 (11.5~12.5)

Not applied

51-136


51. ENGINE

Point 3 Disassemble There is an acoustic material part to name as fuel pump spacer between the fuel pump and the cylinder block. Loosen fuel pump installation bolts with a closed wrench when disassembling a fuel pump. NOTE: An intake manifold may obstruct the disassembly of the fuel pump by the engine model. Remove the fuel pump after removing the intake manifold first. Reassemble When installing a fuel pump on the gear case, put a fuel pump spacer between the cylinder blocks, and install it .

31. Cylinder block 32. Fuel pump spacer 33. Fuel pump

51-137

34. Cylinder head 35. Suction manifold 36. Closed wren


51. ENGINE

51.8

TURBOCHAGER: DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AND REASSEMBLY

51.8.1

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTIONS

51.8.1.1 Main specifications

Applicable engine model (application)

3TNV84T(CL, VM) 4TNV84T(CL) RHB31

Turbocharger model Turbocharger specification Turbine type Blower (compressor) type Lubrication method Max. continuous allowable speed 250.000 Max. continuous allowable gas inlet temperature Dry weight N (kgf) 24(2.4) Note) VM application is provided with the waste gate.

3TNV84T(VM)

RHB51 Standard (w/waste gate) Radial flow Centrifugal External lubrication 180.000

RHF5

750 41(4.2)

51.8.1.2 Construction

AI. Air inlet AO. Air outlet GI. Gas inlet

4TNV106T(CL, VM)

GO. Gas outlet OI. Oil inlet OO. Oil outlet

51-138

46(4.7)


51. ENGINE 51.8.1.3 Structural and functional outline No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Part name

No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Turbine shaft Oil thrower Turbine side seal ring Seal plate Journal bearing Thrust bearing Compressor housing M5 hexagon bolt M5 spring washer Compressor side clamp

1. Turbine The exhaust gas from the engine is accelerated at the nozzle portion in the turbine housing and blown onto the turbine impeller to rotate the turbine shaft. This is called the turbine. A seal ring and heat insulating plate are installed to prevent the bearing from adverse influence of the gas. 2. Compressor The compressor impeller installed on the turbine shaft rotates with the shaft to suck and compress air for feeding into the intake manifold. This is called the blower or compressor. 3. Bearings Thrust bearing As the turbine shaft is constantly applied with a thrust force, this bearing prevents the shaft from being moved by the thrust force. Radial bearing A floating bearing is adopted. Since the bearing moves with the turbine shaft as the oil films are formed both inside and outside the bearing, the bearing sliding speed is slower than the turbine shaft speed, resulting in higher dynamic stability.

51-139

Part name Turbine housing M6 hexagon bolt Turbine side clamp Lock washer Bearing housing Retaining ring M3 countersunk flat head screw Compressor wheel Shaft end nut Heat protector


51. ENGINE

4. Compressor side sealing mechanism To prevent the intake air and oil form leaking, a seal ring and a seal plate are provided to form a double wall structure on the rear side of the compressor impeller. 5. Waste gate When the blower side pressure (intake air pressure) exceeds the specified level, the exhaust gas at the turbine inlet is partially bypassed to the exhaust discharge side to control the turbine rpm so as to maintain the intake pressure at the specified level for improving the response to load variation in the low to medium speed range and to minimize black smoke generation. It consists of a control assembly separated from the turbocharger and a valve assembly installed in the turbine impeller chamber.

51-140


51. ENGINE 51.8.1.4 Components

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Part name Turbine shaft Oil thrower Seal ring (turbine side) Seal plate Journal bearing Thrust bearing Compressor housing Flanged bolt Spring washer Clamp Turbine housing Bolt Lock plate Thrust bushing Bearing housing Retaining ring Screw

No. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

51-141

Part name Impeller Lock nut Heat protector Seal ring Seal ring Screw Lock washer Liquid gasket Waste gate actuator Hose Adapter Clip Retaining ring Waste gate valve Link plate Bolt Washer


51. ENGINE 51.8.2

SERVICE STANDARDS AND TIGHTENING TORQUE

51.8.2.1 Service standards

C. Compresson side

T.

Turbine side

1. RHF5 type

Turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A) Turbine shaft seal ring groove width (E) Turbine shaft Compressor side seal ring groove width (G1) Compressor side seal ring groove width (G2) Turbine shaft run-out Journal bearing inside diameter (C) Bearing Journal bearing outside diameter (D) Bearing housing inside diameter (B) Thrust bearing width (J) Thrust bearing Thrust bushing groove dimension (K) Turbine side (bearing housing)(F) Seal ring fixing Compressor side (seal ring) (H1) area Compressor side (seal ring)(H2) Rotor play in axial direction Rotor play in radial direction

51-142

Standard dimension 7.99~8.00 1.25~1.28 1.22~1.23 1.02~1.03 0.002 8.01~8.03 12.32~12.33 12.40~12.41 3.99~4.01 4.04~4.05 15.00~15.02 12.40~12.42 10.00~10.02 0.03~0.06 0.08~0.13

Unit: mm Wear limit 7.98 1.29 1.31 1.11 0.011 8.04 12.31 12.42 3.98 4.07 15.05 12.45 10.05 0.09 0.17


51. ENGINE

2. RHB31/RHB51 type

Turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A) Turbine shaft seal ring groove width (E) Turbine shaft Compressor side seal ring groove width (G1) Compressor side seal ring groove width (G2) Turbine shaft run-out Journal bearing inside diameter (C) Bearing Journal bearing outside diameter (D) Bearing housing inside diameter (B) Thrust bear- Thrust bearing width (J) ing Thrust bushing groove dimension (K) Turbine side (bearing housing)(F) Seal ring fixCompressor side (seal ring) (H1) ing area Compressor side (seal ring)(H2) Rotor play in axial direction Rotor play in radial direction

Standard dimension RHB31 RHB51 6.257~6.263 7.99~8.00 1.038~1.062 1.25~1.28 1.02~1.03 1.22~1.23 0.82~0.83 1.02~1.03 0.002 0.002 6.275~6.285 8.01~8.03 9.940~9.946 12.32~12.33 9.995~10.005 12.40~12.41 3.59~3.61 3.99~4.01 3.632~3.642 4.04~4.05 11.00~11.018 15.00~15.02 9.987~10.025 12.40~12.42 7.968~8.00 10.00~10.02 0.022~0.053 0.03~0.06 0.061~0.093 0.08~0.13

Unit: mm Wear limit RHB31 RHB51 6.25 7.98 1.07 1.29 1.04 1.31 0.84 1.11 0.005 0.011 6.29 8.04 9.93 12.31 10.01 12.42 3.58 3.98 3.65 4.07 11.03 15.05 10.04 12.45 8.01 10.05 0.07 0.09 0.12 0.17

51.8.2.2 Tightening torque 1. RHF5 type Part Turbine housing set bolt Compressor housing set bolt Thrust bearing set screw Seal plate set screw Blower impeller set nut (left-handed screw)

Thread diameter M8 M5 M3 M3 M5

Nm (kgf•cm) Tightening torque 27~29 (275~295) 4.2~5.2 (43~53) 1.2~1.4 (12~14) 1.2~1.4 (12~14) 1.8~2.2 (18~22)

2. RHB31/ RHB51 type Nm (kgf•cm) Part Waste gate actuator set bolt Lock plate set bolt Thrust bearing set screw Seal plate set screw Blower impeller set nut (left-handed screw)

Thread diameter M5 M6 M8 M3 M3 M5

51-143

Tightening torque RHB31 RHB51 3.9~4.9 (40~50) 3.9~4.9 (40~50) 11.8~12.8 (120~130) 11.8~12.8 (120~130) 11.8~12.8 (120~130) 27.0~28.9 (275~295) 1.2~1.4 (12~14) 1.2~1.4 (12~14) 1.2~1.4 (12~14) 1.2~1.4 (12~14) 0.9~1.1 (9~11) 1.8~2.2 (18~22)


51. ENGINE 51.8.3

PERIODIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE

51.8.3.1 Periodic inspection intervals Periodically inspect the turbocharger for the overall conditions and fouling. The inspection interval varies with the operating conditions, but refer to the table below for the guideline for each application.

Application For vehicles (automobiles) For construction machinery For farming machinery For marine use Rotor rotation Rotor play Overhaul and overall inspection Oil filter cleaning and inspection Engine oil replacement

Every 6 months or 60.000 km Every 6 months or 500hrs Every 6 months or 200hrs Every 6 months or 1,500hrs P

Inspection interval Every 12 months or 150.000 km Every 12 months or 1,000hrs Every 12 months or 400hrs Every 12 months or 3,000hrs

Every 24 months or 300.000 km Every 24 months or 2,000hrs Every 24 months or 800hrs Every 24 months or 6,000hrs

P P Based on engine operation manual

51.8.3.2 Inspection procedure 1. Rotor rotation inspection Inspect the rotor rotation by listening to any abnormal sound generation during rotation. For inspection with a sound detecting bar, bring the tip end of the bar into strong contact with the turbocharger case and raise the engine speed gradually. If any high pitch sound is generated at intervals of 2 to 3 seconds, the rotation is abnormal. Since the bearing or rotor may be defective in this state, either replace or overhaul the turbocharger. 2. Rotor play inspection Remove the turbocharger from the engine and inspect the rotor play in the axial and radial directions according to the procedure below. After removing the turbocharger from the engine, always bind the oil inlet and outlet holes with adhesive tape.

Rotor play in axial direction

AP. Axial play (Service standard:0.03 to 0.06 mm (Wear limit: 0.09 mm) DG. Dial gauge MB. Magnet base MT. Move the turbine shaft in the axial direction TW. Turbine wheel chamber

51-144


51. ENGINE 51.8.3.3 Waste gate valve adjustment procedure Rotor play in radial direction

DG. Dial gauge MB. Magnet base MT. Move the turbine shaft in the radial direction at the same time on the left and and right sides

OI. Oil inlet OU. Oil outlet RP. Radial play (Service standard:0.08 to 0.13 mm (Wear limit: 0.17 mm)

It is indispensable to adjust the waste gate valve opening pressure and lift after its overhaul or inner parts replacement. Negligence of this adjustment will adversely affect the engine performance. NOTE: If the adjustment is impossible, give up overhaul but replace the whole turbocharger assembly. 1. Method for checking the waste gate valve opening pressure and lift (a) Equipment Prepare the equipment shown in the figure below.

51-145


51. ENGINE

(b) Measuring instruments and devices Dial gauge Capable of measuring 0 to 10 mm (A flat head type is recommendable.) Manometer Mercury column or electrical type (capable of measuring 0 to 1500 mmHg) Pressure regulating valve Allowing gradual adjustment in a range between 0 and 2 kgf/cm2 (0.196 Mpa) Pressure reducing valve Used for suppressing the air supply pressure at 5 kgf/cm2 (0.49 Mpa) or less. Pressure gauge Bourdon tube pressure gauge (0 to 10 kgf/cm2 (0.98 Mpa))

A. C. CA. DG. M. N.

Adapter Clip Compressed air Dial gauge Manometer Hose

PG. Pressure gauge PR. Pressure regulating valve PV. Pressure reducing valve WA. Waste gate actuator WG.Waste gate valve

(c) Check method 1. Set the manometer control pressure (Pc) applied to the waste gate actuator to 0 and set the dial gauge to the zero point. 2. Gradually open the pressure regulating valve and measure the Pc value when the actuator rod is operated by 2 mm. 3. For the hysteresis, let the rod move to 3 mm first. The gradually close the pressure regulating valve, measure the pressure when the rod is moved to 2mm and obtain the difference from the pressure measured in b. above.

51-146


51. ENGINE

4. Precautions • Set the dial gauge on the extension line of the actuator rod. • The piping and joints shall completely be free from leak. • Fix the turbocharger and dial gauge securely. • If an electric manometer is used, it shall have sufficient precision. • Even when an electric manometer is used, use of a mercury column type manometer in combination is recommended for calibration and daily check. • The speed for increasing/decreasing Pc by means of the pressure regulating valve shall be very slow near the measuring point. If the mm position is exceeded, restart from the beginning. • Do not apply over 0.49 MPa (5 kgf/cm2) to the actuator.

2. Waste gate actuator leak test Apply 0.12 Mpa (1.2 kgf/cm2) to the actuator and hold the state for minute. The actuator is good if the pressure then is 0.11 Mpa (1.1 kgf/cm2) or above.

51-147


51. ENGINE 51.8.4

DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

51.8.4.1 Preparation for disassembly In addition to the general tools, the following special tools are required for turbocharger disassembly and reassembly:

Tool name

Bar

Use

Illustration

For removing thrust bearing and thrust bushing Material: Copper or brass

Pliers

For removing floating bearing circlip

Pliers

For removing seal ring

Torque driver for TORX bolt (multifunctional type) 0.5 to 4.9N•m (5 to 50 kgf•cm)

Box wrench

For thrust bearing installation (for M3):1.3 N•m (13 kgf•cm)

Item sold on market

For seal plate installation (for M3):1.3 N•m (13 kgf•cm)

For fixing turbine shaft (mm dodecagonal) Box only may be used.

Torque wrench (single purpose)

For following bolts and nuts: M8:mm, kgf•cm(N•m) M5:mm, kgf•cm(N•m) M5:mm, kgf•cm(N•m) For measuring play in axial and radial directions: To be installed on a dial gauge

Probe

51-148


51. ENGINE 51.8.4.2 Inspection before disassembly 1. Inspect the turbine wheel and compressor impeller for any undesirable contact and the rotor for smooth rotation. 2. Measure the rotor play as described in section 8.3(2.2). • Rotor axial play Wear limit: mm • Rotor radial play Wear limit: mm

51.8.4.3 Disassembly The mounting angles of the turbine housing, bearing housing and compressor housing are determined according to its mounting state on the engine. Put match marks before starting disassembly. NOTE: The number after each part is the one described in the structural drawing in 8.1 (2). 1. Compressor housing removal • Remove flanged hexagon bolt 8 and compressor side keep plate 10. • Remove compressor housing 7. NOTE: Liquid gasket is applied on the surface of compressor housing 7 where bearing housing 15 is mounted. When disassembling compressor housing 7, carefully operate so as not to damage the compressor impeller. 2. Compressor impeller removal • Set a box spanner (10mm) on the turbine side end of the turbine shaft, and remove shaft end clamp 18. NOTE: Pay attention to the loosening direction since the shaft end nut has left-handed screw. • Remove compressor impeller 18. 3. Turbine housing removal • Remove hexagon nut 12 and turbine side keep plate 13. • Remove turbine housing 11. 4. Turbine shaft extraction • Hold heat insulating plate 20 lightly with a hand, and extract turbine shaft 1. NOTE: If the turbine shaft is hard to be extracted, tap the compressor side end of the shaft lightly with a wooden hammer. • Remove heat insulating plate 20.

51-149


51. ENGINE

5. Seal plate removal • Use the Torx driver and loosen M3 Torx T-type machine screw 17 for seal plate mounting. • Remove seal plate 4. NOTE: Liquid gasket has been applied to the seal plate and bearing housing mounting surface. • Remove oil thrower 2 from the seal plate. 6. Slide bearing and thrust bushing removal • Use the Torx driver and loosen the M3 Torx T-type machine screw for thrust bearing installation. • Use the bar (copper) and remove thrust bearing 6 and thrust bushing. 7. Floating bearing removal • Use the stop ring pliers and remove circlip 16 from bearing housing 15. • Remove floating bearing 5 from bearing housing 15. 8. Seal ring removal • Remove turbine side seal ring 3 from turbine shaft 1. • Remove compressor side seal ring (small) and compressor side seal ring (large) from oil thrower 2.

51-150


51. ENGINE 51.8.5

WASHING AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE

51.8.5.1 Washing 1. Inspection before washing Visually inspect each part before washing to check trace of seizure, wear, foreign matter or carbon adhesion. Carefully inspect for identifying the cause of trouble especially when a fault has occurred.

Major inspection items Check point Carbon adhesion state Lubrication status (wear, seizure, discoloration, etc.)

Oil leak state

Checking position • Turbine shaft 1, turbine side seal ring and rear side of turbine wheel • Heat insulating plate 20 mounting portion and inside of bearing housing 15 • Turbine shaft 1, journal portion and thrust bushing oil thrower 2 • Floating bearing 5 and thrust bearing 6 • Bearing housing 15 and inner wall of bearing fitting ring • Inner wall of turbine housing 11 • Outer surface of bearing housing 11 and heat insulating plate 20 mounting portion • Turbine shaft 1 turbine side seal ring portion and rear side of turbine wheel • Inner wall of compressor housing 7 • Rear side of compressor impeller 18 • Surface and seal ring inserting portion of seal plate 4

2. Washing procedure Keep the following in mind when washing the parts.

Part a) Turbine shaft

Tools and detergent Tools • Bucket(500 x 500) • Heat source: Steam or gas burner • Brush

Procedure • Boil the turbine in the washing bucket. Do not strike the blade to remove the carbon. • Immerse in the detergent until the carbon and other deposits are softened. • Use a plastic scraper or hand hair scrubber to remove the softened deposits. • Protect the bearing surface and seal ring groove on the turDetergent • Standard carbon removing bine shaft so as not to be damaged. • Any deposit remaining on the turbine shaft due to improper agent washing may cause unbalancing. Be sure to remove thoroughly. Never use a wire brush. b) Turbine wheel cham- Tools • Boil the turbine in the washing bucket. ber • Same as for turbine shaft • Immerse in the detergent until the carbon and other deposits are softened. • Use a plastic scraper or hard hair scrubber to remove the Detergent softened deposits. Same as for turbine shaft c) Blower blade and Tools • Immerse in the washing bucket until the deposit is sofchamber tened. • Bucket(500 x 500) • Use a plastic scraper or hard hair scrubber to remove the • Brush softened deposits. Never use a wire brush. • Detergent d) Others • Wash all other parts with diesel oil. • Clean the lubricating oil path by blowing with compressed air. • Be especially careful so as not to damage or corrode the parts.

51-151


51. ENGINE 51.8.5.2

Inspection procedure

1. Compressor housing 7 Inspect the compressor housing for any contact trace with the compressor impeller, surface defect, dent or crack at joint surface, and replace it if defective. 2. Turbine housing 11 Inspect any trace of contact with the turbine wheel, exfoliation due to degradation by oxidation of the cast surface, thermal deformation or crack. Replace with a new one of defective. 3. Compressor impeller 18 Inspect any contact trace, chipping, corrosion or deformation. Replace with a new one if defective.

4. Turbine shaft 1 • Inspect any contact trace, chipping, thermal discoloration or deformation at the turbine wheel. Check the shaft portion for bend, the journal portion for thermal discoloration or abnormal wear, and the seal ring groove for surface defect or wear. Replace with a new one if defective. • Measure the turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A) and seal ring groove width (E). Replace with a new turbine shaft if beyond the wear limit. Wear limit of journal outside diameter (A) RHF5.......... 7.98 mm RHB51 ....... 7.98 mm RHB31 ....... 6.25 mm Wear limit of ring groove width (E) RHF5.......... 1.29 mm RHB51 ....... 1.29 mm RHB31 ....... 1.07 mm • Measure the turbine shaft run-out, and replace with a new turbine shaft if it exceeds 0.011 mm.

5. Heat insulating plate 20 Inspect the heat insulating plate for any contact trace, thermal deformation or corrosion Replace with a new one if defective.

51-152


51. ENGINE

6. Thrust bushing, oil thrower (2) and thrust bearing (6) Inspect each part for wear, surface defect and discoloration. Replace with a new one if defective even within the wear limit. (a) Thrust bushing Measure the distance between grooves (K) of the thrust bushing, and replace with a new one if the wear limit is exceeded. Wear limit RHF5 ......... 4.07 mm RHB51 ....... 4.07 mm RHB31 ....... 3.65 mm

(b) Oil thrower 2 Measure the seal ring groove widths (G1) and (G2), and replace with a new one if the wear limit is exceeded. Wear limit RHF5 ......... G1: 1.31 mm, G2: 1.11 mm RHB51 ....... G1: 1.31mm, G2: 1.11 mm RHB31 ....... G1: 1.04 mm, G2: 0.84 mm

(c) Thrust bearing 6 Measure the thrust bearing width (J), and replace with a new one if the wear limit is exceeded. Wear limit RHF5 ......... 3.98 mm RHB51 ....... 3.98 mm RHB31 ....... 3.58 mm

7. Floating bearing 5 • Inspect the floating bearing for abnormal wear, discoloration or surface defect. Replace with a new one if defective. • Measure the inside diameter (C) and outside diameter(D). Replace the bearing if either wear limit is exceeded. Wear limit RHF5 ......... Outside diameter (D): 12.31mm, Inside diameter (C): 8.04mm RHB51 ....... Outside diameter (D): 12.31mm, Inside diameter (C): 8.04mm RHB31 ....... Outside diameter (D): 9.93mm, Inside diameter (C): 6.29mm

51-153


51. ENGINE

8. Bearing housing 15 • Inspect the housing for cast surface exfoliation due to oxidation and degradation, dent or crack. • Inspect circlip 16 for chipping or crack, and replace with a new one if defective. • Measure the (B) and (F) portions of the bearing housing shown in the figure below. • Replace with a new one if either wear limit is exceeded. Wear limit of bearing housing inside diameter (B) RHF5.......... 12.42 mm RHB51 ....... 12.42 mm RHB31 ....... 10.01 mm Wear limit of turbine side seal ring inserting portion (F) RHF5.......... 15.05 mm RHB51 ....... 15.05 mm RHB31 ....... 11.03 mm

BF. Bearing fitting ring CS. Compressor side

9. Seal plate 4 • Inspect the seal plate for any contact trace, joint surface defect, dent or crack. Replace it if defective. • Measure the seal ring inserting dimensions (H1 and H2) on the compressor side, and replace the seal ring with a new one if either wear limit is exceeded. Wear limits RHF5.......... H1: 12.45 mm, H2: 10.05 mm RHB51 ....... H1: 12.45 mm, H2: 10.05 mm RHB31 ....... H1: 10.04 mm, H2: 8.01 mm

10. Seal rings Replace seal rings with new ones. 11. Inspect keep plates 10, 13 and bolts for any deformation, and replace defective parts with new ones. Also replace M3 Torx machine screws with new ones.

51-154

IP.Inner plate TS.Turbine side


51. ENGINE 51.8.6

REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

51.8.6.1 Preparation for reassembly 1. Prepare general tools, special tools, liquid gasket and Loctite No.242 before reassembling the turbocharger. 2. Always replace the following parts with new ones: • Turbine side seal ring 1pc. • Compressor side seal ring(large) 1pc. • Compressor side seal ring(small) 1pc. • M3 machine screws 3pcs. • M3 machine screws 4pcs.

AO. Applicable only to the one closest the turbine FA. For all other than above FM. Floating metal

51.8.6.2 Reassembly 1. Floating bearing installation • Use the snap ring pliers and install inner circlip 16 on bearing housing 15. • Install floating bearing 5 in bearing housing 15. • Use the snap ring pliers and install outer circlip 16 on bearing housing 15. NOTE: The circlip joint shall be positioned as shown in the figure at right above. The rounded side of the circlip shall face the bearing. Apply lubricating oil on the floating bearing before reassembly.

51-155

LO. Lubricating oil inlet MU.Match up contact surface VT.View from the turbine 16. Circlip


51. ENGINE

2. Turbine shaft installation • Fit the seal ring onto turbine shaft 1. • Install heat insulating plate 20 on the turbine side of bearing housing 15. • Apply lubricating oil on the journal portion of the turbine shaft and insert the shaft from the turbine side of bearing housing 15. NOTE: Carefully operate so as not to damage the floating bearing by the turbine shaft. The seal ring joint shall be positioned on the lubricating oil inlet side after centering with the turbine shaft.

3. Thrust bearing installation • Fit thrust bushing on turbine shaft 1. • Apply lubricating oil on the bearing portion of thrust bearing 6 and install it in bearing housing 15. • Apply Loctite on the threaded portion of M3 Torx T machine screw 17 for thrust bearing installation, and use Torx torque driver for installation by tightening to the specified torque. Tightening torque: 1.3±0.1 Nm (13±1 kgf•cm)

4. Seal plate installation • Fit the seal ring on oil thrower 2. • Insert oil thrower 2 into seal plate 4. NOTE: The seal ring joint portion shall be positioned as illustrated at right. • Apply liquid gasket on the seal plate mounting surface on the compressor side of bearing housing 15. NOTE: See the illustration below for the applying position.

LO.Inlet

Applying thickness: 0.1~0.2 mm • Install seal plate 4 on bearing housing 15. • Apply Loctite on the threaded portion of M3 machine screw for seal plate mounting, and tighten it with a torque screwdriver. Tightening torque: 1.3±0.1 Nm (13±1 kgf•cm)

CP. Carefully prevent the liquid gasket from leaking out to this area LG. Liquid gasket applying position

51-156

VC. View from the compressor


51. ENGINE

5. Compressor impeller installation • Fit compressor impeller 18 onto turbine shaft 1. • Set a box spanner (10 mm) on the turbine side end of turbine shaft 1, and tighten shaft end nut 19. NOTE: Since the shaft end nut has left-handed screw, pay attention to the tightening direction. Tightening torque: 2.0±0.2 Nm (20±2kgf•cm) 6. Turbine housing installation • Install bearing housing 15 on turbine housing 11 by aligning the match marks put before disassembly. NOTE: In case of part replacement, check the oil inlet and outlet positions and the exhaust gas inlet position before reassembly. • Install the turbine side keep plate and tighten M8 hexagon bolt 12. Tightening torque: 285±10 Nm (28±1 kgf•cm) 7. Compressor housing installation • Apply liquid gasket on the compressor side flange of bearing housing 15. NOTE: See section (4) 3) for the portion to be applied. Applying thickness: 0.1~0.2 mm • Check the mark and install the compressor housing 7 on the bearing housing 15. NOTE: When a part is replaced, confirm a position of an oil entrance and a position of an air exit, and assemble it. • Install the keep plate 10 on compressor side, and tighten M8 hexagon bolt 8. Tightening torque: 48± Nm (4.7±0.5 kgf•cm) 8. Rotor play measurement See the inspection procedure in section 8.3.2 for the measurement method. If the rotor play does not satisfy the standard, reassembly is necessary since assembly error or use of a wrong part is conceivable. Service standard of rotor play in axial direction RHF5 ......... 0.03~0.06 mm RHB51 ....... 0.03~0.06 mm RHB31 ....... 0.022~0.053 mm Service standard of rotor play in radial direction RHF5 ......... 0.08~0.13 mm RHB51 ....... 0.08~0.13 mm RHB31 ....... 0.061~0.093 mm

51-157


51. ENGINE 51.8.7

HANDLING AFTER DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

When installing the turbocharger on the engine or handling the turbocharger after installation, strictly observe the instructions given below. Especially pay careful attention for preventing foreign matter entrance into the turbocharger.

51.8.7.1 Instructions for turbocharger installation Lubrication system • Pour new lubricating oil through the oil filler port before installation on the engine, and manually turn the turbine shaft to lubricate the floating and thrust bearings. • Flush the oil inlet pipe from the engine and outlet pipe, and check no crushed pipe nor dirt or foreign matter remaining in the pipes. • Connect the pipes securely so as to ensure no oil leak from joints. Intake system • Check no foreign matter or dirt in the intake line. • Connect securely to prevent any air leak from joints with the intake duct and air cleaner. Exhaust system • Check no dirt or foreign matter in the exhaust system. • Since heat resistant steel is used for the bolts and nuts, do not use general bolts and nuts for installation. Always apply anti-seizure agent on fastening bolts and nuts to be tightened. (Use heat-resistant hexagon bolts for the turbine housing.) • Connect exhaust pipes securely to prevent gas leak from each pipe joint.

51-158


51. ENGINE 51.8.8

TROUBLESHOOTING

Sufficient turbocharger performance and required engine output cannot be obtained if there is any fault. In such a case, first check each engine part to see there is no engine fault. Then inspect the turbocharger for troubleshooting according to the procedure shown below.

51.8.8.1 Excessively exhaust smoke 1. Insufficient intake air volume Cause 1. Clogged air cleaner element 2. Blocked air intake port 3. Leak from a joint in intake line

Corrective action • Replace or wash the element. • Correct to the normal state. • Inspect and repair.

2. Turbocharger revolution failure Cause 1. Deposit of impurities in oil sticking on the turbine side seal portion to make turbine revolution heavy 2. Sticking bearing • Insufficient lubrication or clogged lubrication piping • Excessively high oil temperature • Unbalanced rotating part • Insufficient warming up or sudden stop from loaded operation (no-load operation) 3. Contact or breakdown of turbine wheel or blower vane • Excessive revolution • Excessive exhaust temperature rise • Foreign matter invasion • Worn bearing • Assembly defect

Corrective action • Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and washing) with lubricating oil replacement • Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and repair) • Lubricating oil line inspection, repair of defective portion and lubricating oil replacement • Rotating part replacement or washing • Strict observance of instructions in operation manual • Inspection and repair of each engine part • Perfect foreign matter elimination in disassembled state, followed by inspection and repair of individual air cleaner and engine components • Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and repair) • Reassembly

3. Influence of exhaust resistance Cause Corrective action 1. Exhaust gas leak before the turbocharger to decrease • Joint inspection and correction its revolutions 2. Deformed or clogged exhaust pipe to decrease turbo- • Correct to the normal state. charger revolutions

51.8.8.2 White smoke generation Cause Corrective action 1. Clogged or deformed oil return pipe causing oil flow to • Repair or pipe replacement the blower or turbine side 2. Excessive bearing wear causing abnormal wear or • Turbocharger disassembly and repair damage of seal ring

51-159


51. ENGINE 51.8.8.3 Sudden oil decrease Cause 1. Excessive bearing wear causing abnormal wear or damage of seal ring

Corrective action • Turbocharger disassembly and repair

51.8.8.4 Decrease in output Cause 1. Gas leak from any part in exhaust piping 2. Air leak from discharge side of blower 3. Clogged air cleaner element 4. Fouled or damaged turbocharger

Corrective action • Inspection and repair of defective portion • Element cleaning or replacement • Turbocharger disassembly and repair or replacement

51.8.8.5 Poor (slow) response (starting) of turbocharger Cause Corrective action 1. Hard carbon deposit on the turbine side (wheel seal- • Turbocharger disassembly and washing with lubricating portion) to make turbine shaft revolution heavy ing oil replacement 2. Incomplete combustion • Engine combustion state inspection, followed by improvement of combustion to normal state

51.8.8.6 Abnormal sound or vibration 1. Abnormal sound generation Cause Corrective action 1. Excessively narrowed gas path due to clogged nozzle • Turbocharger disassembly and washing in turbine wheel chamber or reverse flow of blower discharge in acceleration (generally called surging) • Turbocharger disassembly and repair or replacement 2. Contact rotating part

2. Vibration Cause Corrective action 1. Loosened intake, exhaust or oil pipe connection with • Turbocharger installation status check and repair of dethe turbocharger fective portion 2. Damaged bearing, contact between rotating part and • Turbocharger disassembly with repair or replacement, adjacent part, or chipping of turbine wheel or blower or perfect removal of foreign matters in case of foreign vane due to foreign matter in vasion matter invasion 3. Unbalanced rotating part • Repair or replacement of rotating part

51-160


51. ENGINE

51.9

STARTING MOTOR

As a representative example of starter, the one for 4TNV94L·98 and 4TNV106 (T) is shown in this chapter. 51.9.1

FOR 4TNV94L/ 98

51.9.1.1 Specifications Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi) Nominal output Weight Revolution direction (as viewed from pinion) Engaugement system Terminal voltage/current No-load Revolution Terminal voltage/current Loaded Torque Clutch system Pinion projection voltage (at 100°C) Pinion DP or module/number of teeth difference (O-ring, oil seal) Application

kW kg V/A rpm V/A Nm (kgf•m) V -

51-161

S13-204 2.3 5.5 Clockwise Magnetic shift 11/140 or less 4100 or above 2.5/1050 or less 24.5 (2.5) or above Overrunning 8.6 or less M3/9 Dry (none) Standard

S13-205 Wet (with) Option


51. ENGINE 51.9.1.2 Components

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9. 11.

Through bolt Rear cover Brush Field coil Armature Magnetic switch Shift lever

13. 14. 18. 19. 20. 21.

51-162

Bearing retainer Gear case Pinion shaft Clutch assy O-ring Oil seal


51. ENGINE 51.9.1.3 Troubleshooting Is the shift le- NO ver at the neutral position?

Are the battery charge and ter- NO minal connection normal without any corrosion?

Set the shift lever at the neutral position

• Charge or replace the battery • Connect the battery terminal and repair corrosion

YES NO Is the starting motor magnetic switch actuating sound head?

Engine starting failure? YES Can the engine be cranked?

Inspect the wiring up to the magnetic switch and repair if necessary • Key switch • Safety relay • Magnetic switch • Connection state

YES NO

Is the starting motor sound heard?

NO

YES NO

• Adjust / dimension • Inspect the shift lever for deformation, the return spring for fatigue and the pinion for sliding • Repair meshing between pinion and ring gear or replace as needed

Pinion and ring gear meshing normal?

YES Pinion roller clutch damage, inspection and replacement. Reduction gear damage inspection and replacement

NO Connect the M terminal of the individual starting motor with the battery. Does the motor runt?

• Inspect the brush and replace if worn • If brushes are nor worn, replace the motor (yoke assy or armature)

YES Magnetic switch contact defect. Replace it

When the starting motor is wetted with water, always replace the magnetic switch even if the function is normal.

YES Is the revolution normal?

NO (slow revolution)

YES

Are the battery charge and ter- NO minal connection normal without any corrosion?

1

For an abnormality (Immediately disconnect the battery negative terminal)

YES

Inspect the fuel systems

Is the Lube oil viscosity normal?

NO

Replace the Lube oil.

The motor does not stop even when the key switch is turned OFF

Repair or replace the starting motor

Repair or replace the key switch, starting motor relay or magnetic switch.

YES Does the engine run when the YES starting motor is replaced with a new one? Slow revolution

Inspect the inside of the engine

Inspection item

Causes and remedies

51-163


51. ENGINE 51.9.1.4 Names of parts and disassembly procedure 1. Disassembling order

1. Nut M8 (Disconnect the connecting wire.) See the disassembly drawing. 2. Screw M4 (2) 3. Through bolt M5 (2) 4. Rear cover 5. Brush holder 6. Yoke assy. 7. Armature 8. Bolt M6 (2) 9. Magnetic switch

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

2. Disassembly procedure • Nut M8 Remove the magnetic switch nut M8 (12 mm) (1) and disconnect the connecting wire (22).

51-164

Dust cover Shift lever Screw M4 (3) Bearing retainer Gear case Pinion stopper clip Pinion stopper Return spring Pinion shaft Clutch assy.


51. ENGINE

• Screw M4 (2) • Through bolt M5 (2) • Rear cover Remove the M4 screw fastening the brush holder and remove through bolt M5 for rear cover removal.

• Brush holder Pull the brush spring up with the brush spring puller. On the negative (-) side, bring the brush spring into contact with the side of the brush for lifting from the commutator surface. On the positive (+) side, extract the brush from the brush holder.

• Yoke Assy. • Armature Remove the brush holder. The armature and yoke assy can now be removed.

• Bolt M6 (2) • Magnetic switch Remove bolt M6 (10 mm), and the magnetic switch can be removed.

51-165


51. ENGINE

• Dust cover • Shift lever Take the dust cover out from the gear case. The shift lever can be removed.

• Screw M4 (3) • Bearing retainer • Gear case Remove screw M4, and the bearing retainer and clutch assy can be removed.

• Pinion stopper clip Remove the bearing retainer at the edge and the bearing, and shift the pinion stopper toward the pinion. use a plain screwdriver and pry to remove the pinion stopper clip.

• Pinion stopper • Return spring • Pinion shaft • Clutch Assy Remove the pinion stopper clip. The pinion stopper, return spring, pinion shaft and bearing retainer can be removed. Disassembly is completed now.

51-166


51. ENGINE 51.9.1.5 Inspection and Maintenance 1. Armature (a) Commutator outside diameter Measure the commutator outside diameter and replace the commutator if the measured value is less than the limit. mm Standard Limit 36.5 35.5

(b) Armature coil continuity test Check continuity between commutator segments with a multimeter (M). Good if continuity exists. In case of no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the armature.

(c) Armature coil insulation test Inspect the continuity between a commutator segment and the shaft or core with a multimeter (M). Good if no continuity exists. If continuity exists (coil short circuit), replace the armature.

(d) Armature and commutator run-out Use a dial gauge and measure the armature core runout and commutator run-out. Correct or replace if the limit is exceeded. mm Standard Limit A. Armature 0.03 0.2 C. Commutator 0.03 0.2

51-167


51. ENGINE

(e) Commutator surface inspection If the commutator surface is roughened, grind with 500 to 600 emery cloth grain.

(f) Commutator insulation depth Measure the depth of the insulating material between commutator segments, and correct it if it is less than the limit. mm Standard Limit A. Armature 0.5~0.8 0.2

A. Abnormal H.Hack-saw C. Commutator IM.Insulating material CS. Commutator segment N.Normal

2. Field coil (a) Field coil continuity test Check continuity between field coil terminals. Good if continuity exists. If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the field coil.

(b) Field coil insulation test Check continuity between field coil terminal and yoke. Good if no continuity exists. If continuity exists (coil short circuit), replace the armature.

51-168


51. ENGINE

3. Brush Measure the length of the brush (B). Replace with a good one if the length is less than the limit. mm Standard Limit 15 9

4. Brush holder (a) Brush holder insulation test Check the continuity between the brush holder (+ side) and base (- side) with a multimeter (M). Good if no continuity exists. If continuity exists (insulation defect), replace the brush holder.

(b) Brush spring inspection Inspect the brush spring pressure. N(kgf) Standard spring force 31~39 (3.1~3.9)

5. Magnetic switch When the starting motor is wetted with water, always replace the magnetic switch with a new even if the function is normal. (a) Shunt coil continuity test Check the continuity between the S terminal and the switch body. Good if continuity exists. If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the magnetic switch.

51-169


51. ENGINE

(b) Series coil continuity test Check continuity between the S and M terminals. Good if continuity exists. If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the magnetic switch.

(c) Contact continuity test Depress the magnetic switch with the plunger at the bottom. Check continuity between the B and M terminals with a multimeter M. Good if continuity exists. If no continuity (coil continuity defect), replace the magnetic switch.

6. Pinion clutch (a) Pinion inspection Manually rotate the pinion. Inspect if it is rotated smoothly in the driving direction, and is locked in the opposite direction. Replace the pinion clutch if abnormal.

(b) Pinion sliding inspection Check if the pinion slide smoothly in the axial direction. If damaged, rusted or heavy in sliding, repair it. If grease is applied too much on the pinion shaft, sliding becomes heavy.

51-170


51. ENGINE

(c) Ball bearing inspection Rotate the ball bearing while holding the outer race with fingertips. Inspect if it is sticking or it there is play.

51.9.1.6 Service standards Spring force Standard height/wear limit Magnetic switch resistance, series coil/shunt coil (at 20°C) Standard diameter/limit diameter Commuta- Difference between maximum Repair limit/repair accuracy tor and minimum diameter Mica undercut depth chips Repair limit/repair accuracy Armature front Armature rear Bearing Nominal number type Pinion front Pinion rear L dimension (pinion projection length) Brush

N (kgf) mm Ω mm

35 (3.6) 15/9 0.27/0.60 36.5/35.5

mm

0.2/0.03

mm mm

0.2/0.5 0.8 6903DDU 608DDU 60004DDU 6904DDU 0.3-1.5

51.9.1.7 Assembly The assembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure, but pay attention to the following points: 1. Grease application points • Gears in the gear case • Shift lever operating portion • Pinion sliding portion • Magnetic switch plunger sliding portion Use the specified grease as below table at all points.

Pinion and magnetic switch plunger sliding portions Gears Shift lever operating portion

MG2

51-171


51. ENGINE

2. Magnetic switch assembly • Install the shift lever on the magnetic switch with the torsion spring in-between.

• For installation on the gear case, install the magnetic switch with the shift lever on the gear case after pulling the pinion out. Fix the magnetic switch by tightening a built-in bolt M6. Do not forget to install the dust cover (adjusting shim).

3. Pinion projection length Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal S and negative (-) lead to terminal M. Turn the switch ON and measure the pinion moving distance L in the thrust direction. Perform this test within 10 seconds. mm Standard L 0.3~1.5

NOTE: Before measuring the dimension, pull the pinion out lightly in the direction of the arrow.

If the measured L dimension is outside the standard range, either insert or remove the dust cover (adjusting shim 0.5 mm, 0.8 mm) for adjustment.

51-172


51. ENGINE 51.9.1.8 Characteristic test Since the characteristics can be checked roughly by means of a simple no-load test as explained below. NOTE: Complete the test quickly since the rating of the starting motor is 30 seconds. 1. No-load test Fix the starting motor on a test bench and connect wiring as shown in Fig.31. When the switch is closed, a current flows in the starting motor, which is rotated at no-load. Measure the current, voltage and number of revolutions then and check if they satisfy the specified characteristics.

A. B.

Ammeter Battery

V.

51-173

Voltmeter


51. ENGINE 51.9.2

FOR 4TNV106(T)

51.9.2.1 Specifications Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi) Yanmar code Nominal voltage Nominal output Rating Revolution direction (as viewed from pinion) Clutch system Engaugement system Pinion: Module/number of teeth Weight Pinion projection voltage (at 100°C) Terminal voltage/current No-load Revolution Terminal voltage/current Loaded Torque Revolution

-

S13-138

V kW Sec kg V V/A rpm V/A Nm (kgfm) min-1

12 3.0 30 Clockwise Roller clutch Magnetic shift M3/9 7.3 8 or less 12/180 or less 3000 or more 9/500 16.7 (1.7) or more 1270 or more

51.9.2.2 Configuration drawing

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Gear case Magnetic switch Rear cover Gear shaft Pinion stopper Shift lever Needle bearing Pinion Ball bearing

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

51-174

Oil seal Armature Yoke Through bolt Terminal E O-ring Brush Ball bearing


51. ENGINE 51.9.2.3 Troubleshooting Engine does not start.

Can the engine be cranked?

NO

Does the starting motor revolve?

NO

Are the battery charge and NO terminal connection normal without any corrosion?

YES

• Charge or replace the battery • Connect the battery terminal or repair corrosion

YES YES

Does the gear shift revolve?

Inspect pinion roller clutch for damage and replace if necessary.

NO Does the starting motor relay operate?

NO

Inspect the starting motor relay wiring system and repair if necessary • Key switch • Starting motor relay • Connection state

YES

Inspect the reduction gear (armature, gear shaft) for damage and replace if necessary.

Is the starting motor magnetic switch actuating sound heard?

NO • Inspect the wiring up to the magnetic switch and repair if necessary

YES NO

• Adjust the dimension • Inspect the shift lever for deformation, the return spring for fatigue and the pinion for sliding • Repair engaugement between pinion and ring gear or replace as needed

Does the motor ravolve NO when M terminal of starting motor is connected to the battery?

• Inspect the brush and replace if worn • If brushes are not worn, replace the motor (yoke assy or armature)

Are pinion and ring gear engaging normally?

YES

YES Are pinion and ring gear engaging normally? YES Is the revolution normal?

NO (slow revolution)

YES

Inspect the ignition and fuel systems.

Are the battery charge and terminal connection normal without any corrosion?

NO

1 Upon abnormality: Immediately disconnect the battery negative terminal

YES

NO Is the engine oil viscosity normal?

Replace the engine oil.

The motor does not stop even when the key switch is turned OFF

Repair or replace the starting motor

Repair or replace the key switch, starting motor relay or magnetic switch.

YES YES Does the engine run when the starting motor is replaced with a new one? NO

Inspection item

Inspect the inside of the engine

Causes and remedies

51-175


51. ENGINE 51.9.2.4 Component names and disassembly procedure 1. Disassembly procedure 2. Disassembly diagram

1. 2. 3. 4.

Disconnect the lead. Remove the magnetic switch. Remove the rear cover. Remove the brush holder.

5. 6. 7. 8.

51.9.2.5 Disassembly procedure 1. Disconnecting the lead Loosen the M8 nut (12 mm) of the magnetic switch and disconnect the lead.

51-176

Disassemble the gear case and center bracket. Remove the shift lever pin. Remove the gear case dust cover. Remove the pinion.


51. ENGINE

2. Removal of magnetic switch Remove the M6 bolts (10 mm x 2).

3. Removal of rear cover Remove the brush holder tightening screws (4 mm Ă˜ x 2) and the M5 through bolts (x 2). Next, disconnect the rear cover from the yoke using a – screwdriver.

51-177


51. ENGINE

4. Removal of brush holder For the negative (–) brush, bring the brush spring into contact with the side of the brush for lifting from the commutator surface. For the positive (+) brush, extract the pull out the brush from the brush holder. After the brush holder is removed, the armature and yoke can be disassembled.

5. Separating gear case from center bracket Remove three M6 bolts (10mm) fastening the gear case to the center bracket. After removal of the M6 bolts, the center bracket and oil seal can be removed.

51-178


51. ENGINE

6. Removal of shift lever pin Remove the M6 nut (10 mm) and pull out the shift lever pin. Now. the dustcover, shift lever, gear case and gear shaft can be removed.

7. Removal of gear case dust cover Remove the two M5 bolts (using 4 mm hexagon wrench) to disassemble the dust cover from the gear case.

51-179


51. ENGINE

8. Removal of pinion Slide the pinion stopper towards the pinion and remove the pinion stopper clip using a – screwdriver.

51.9.2.6 Inspection and maintenance 1. Armature • Check the commutator for rough surface. If so, smooth the surface using 500 to 600 emery cloth grain. If the outside periphery of the commutator has been deflected over 0.2 mm, repair by a lathe.

51-180


51. ENGINE

• Measure the depth of the insulating material between commutator segments, and correct if it is less than 0.2 mm.

• Armature coil continuity and earth tests Test type Measurement point Continuity test Across commutator Between commutator and shaft or armaEarth test ture

Replace if needed.

51-181

Normal Yes

Abnormal (cause) None (open circuit)

None

Yes (short-circuiting)


51. ENGINE

2. Field coil • Field coil continuity and earth tests Test type Measurement point Continuity test Across commutator Between commutator and shaft or armaEarth test ture

Replace if needed.

51-182

Normal Yes

Abnormal (cause) None (open circuit)

None

Yes (short-circuiting)


51. ENGINE

3. Brush • Check wear of the brush and the brush spring force.

L. Limit N. New

• Check of brush movement If the brush does not move smoothly, inspect the brush holder for bending and the brush holder sliding surface for dirt. Repair or clean as needed. • Check the continuity between the insulated brush holder (positive (+)) and the brush holder base (negative (-)). If they are electrically continuous, replace since the holder is grounded.

51-183

U. Used


51. ENGINE

4. Magnetic switch continuity test Test type Measurement point Shunt coil Between C and ground Series coil C and M

Replace if needed.

Shunt coil Series coil

S13-138 Resistance (at 20°C) 0.6 0.218

5. Pinion • Check the pinion teeth for wear and damage. Replace with a new one, if necessary. • Check if the pinion slides smoothly. If it is damaged or rusted or does not slide smoothly, repair. • Check springs for damage, and replace if necessary. 6. Ball bearing If abnormalities such as irregular noises are detected to the ball bearing, replace with a new one.

51-184

Normal Yes None

Abnormal (cause) None (open circuit) Yes (short-circuiting)


51. ENGINE 51.9.2.7 Assembly The assembly procedure is reverse of the disassembly procedure, but pay attention to the following points.

1. Apply grease as instructed below. Greasing point Sliding portions and head of plunger Pinion metal and metal portions of gear case Spline portions of pinion Sliding portions of shift lever Deceleration gear

Grease type

MG2

2. Armature thrust No adjustments are needed for the thrust. 3. Gear shaft thrust Some thrust washers of 1.0 and 0.25 mm thickness are provided between the center bracket and gear shaft supporting surface. Make sure to check them at reassembly. If washers are deformed or worn, replace them with new ones. The appropriate thrust is from 0.05 to 0.3 mm. If it is over 0.3 mm, and the appropriate thrust washer, but pay attention so that the thrust is not 0.

51.9.2.8 Adjustment 1. Pinion projection length L by magnetic switch

51-185


51. ENGINE

Measure the pinion moving distance L (0.3 to 1.5 mm) in the thrust direction when the pinion is protruded by the magnetic switch. If the distance L is outside the standard range, adjust by the dust cover as shown below.

B.

Battery

S.

Switch

D. Dust cover

51.9.2.9 Service standards

Brush

Spring force N (kgf) Standard / Limit height Outside diameter

Commutator

Deflection Depth of insulation mica Armature shaft diameter

Standard dimensions

Bearing on gear case side Sliding portion of pinion

Ball bearing

Armature

Standard Limit Limit Correction accuracy Limit Correction accuracy Front Rear Gear shaft diameter Hole diameter Shaft diameter Hole diameter Front Rear

Length L (pinion projection length)

51-186

31.4 (3.2) 18/6 37 36 0.2 0.05 0.2 0.5~0.8 25 12 13.95~13.968 14.00~14.018 13.95~13.968 14.03~14.05 6905DDU 6001DDU 0.3~1.5


51. ENGINE

51.10 ALTERNATOR As a representative example of alternator, the alternator of 40A is shown in this chapter.

51.10.1

THE 40A ALTERNATOR FOR 3TNV84 AND OTHER MODELS

51.10.1.1 Components 1. Parts related to the alternator

1. Joint 2. V-belt adjuster

2. Alternator components of the disassembly and assembly

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Nut Spring washer Washer Rear bracket Spacer Stator

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

51-187

Front bracket Cap Bearing Coupler Bearing Pulley

3. Alternator 4. Gear case


51. ENGINE 51.10.1.2 Specifications Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi) Rating Battery voltage Nominal output (13.5V heat) Rated revolution Operating revolution Grounding characteristics Direction of revolution (viewed from pulley) Integrated regulator Weight Pulley (outside diameter) Belt shape

V A min-1 min-1 kg mm -

ACFA68 Continuous 12 40 5.000 1.350~18.000 Minus side grounding Clockwise IC regulator 2.8 69.2 Type A

51.10.1.3 Wiring diagram

B. K. L.

Battery Key switch Load

La. Charge lamp (Max. 3.4 W) R. IC regurator T. Alternator assy

• Don't do miss-wiring and short-circuit of each terminal. • Don’t short-circuit between IG and L. (Connect it through the charge lamp.) • Don’t connect a load between L and E. • Don't remove a battery terminal and a B terminal when rotating. • Shut out a battery switch during the alternator stop. • Tightening torque of each terminal: 1.7-2.3 Nm

51-188


51. ENGINE 51.10.1.4 Standard output characteristics The standard output characteristics of this alternator are shown as the right figure. (13.5 V Constant) (Ambient Temp.: 25°C)

A. Output current C. Cold

H. Hot S. Alternator speed (x 103 min-1

D. Defect E. Clearance

N. Normal

51.10.1.5 Inspection 1. V belt inspection • Inspect the matter whether there are not crack, stickiness and wear on the belt visually. Check that a belt doesn't touch the bottom part of the pulley groove. If necessary, replace the V belt set. • V belt tension: (Refer to 51.2.2.2)

2. Visual check of wiring and check of unusual sound • Confirm whether wiring is right or there is no looseness of the terminal part. • Confirm that there is no unusual sound from the alternator during the engine operation. 3. Inspection of charge lamp circuit • Move a start switch to the position of on. Confirm lighting of the charge lamp. • Start an engine, and confirm the lights-out of the lamp. Repair a charge lamp circuit when a lamp doesn't work.

51-189


51. ENGINE 51.10.1.6 Troubleshooting

Turn key switch to ON. Does the charge lamp come ON?

OFF Disconnect GN coupler (L, IG)

Ground L-terminal of the OFF driven machine side coupler (L, IG). Does the charge lamp come ON?

Replace the carge lamp. The carge lamp is available from the driven machine manufacturer.

ON

Inspect the rotor coil and brush ICRG. ON Turn the key switch to START. (The engine starts).

ON

Inspect or replace the fan belt, and inspect the alternator.

The lamp flashes.

Inspect the diode (+ side).

At idling Does the charge lamp goes OFF?

The lamp is lit dimly. OFF Increase the engine speed to 1500 rpm and turn the light switch to ON. Excessive voltage drop between BAT and batt (+ side) terminal.

VB - VL > 0.5 v

Does the charge lamp come ON?

The lamp is lit dimly.

Measure VB and VL at BAT L-terminal during idling. L-terminal defective conduction.. Inspect the diode (− side).

VB - VL < 0.5 v

Measure VB at BAT terminal with the engine running at 1500 rpm.

VB > 15.5

VB = 13~5

Replace IC-RG

Turn the light switch to ON during idling.

Does the carge lamp ON? OFF

Remarks • Use a fully charged battery • DC voltmeter: 0 to 30 V 0.5 class • The check method id also applicable to the bench test

Explanation on abbrevations: GN: Alternator IC-RG: IC regulator VB: BAT terminal voltage VL: L-terminal voltage

51-190

ON Inspect the auxiliary diode.

Not abnormal.


51. ENGINE

51.11

ELECTRIC WIRING

51.11.1

ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM

1. Wiring of starter must be observed as follows otherwise it causes miss starting or damage of startermotor. • Total electric resistance of battery cable (1) + (2) should be less than 2/1000 Ω. Reference: AV 15 : ≤ 1.4 m, AV 20 : ≤ 2.2 m AV 30 : ≤ 3.8 m, AV 40 : ≤ 4.6 m • Total electric resistance of wiring for starter (3)~(6) should be less than 5/100 Ω. Reference of terminal resistance: 15/1000 Ω per coupler 0 Ω per screw setting • Battery earth cable (1) connection on shall be ensured. Painted surface may not be used (for earthing) avoiding the miss contact. 2. Battery treatment must be observed as follows. Otherwise it may cause burning of electric equipment or components. Alternator (diodes) burning caused by battery cable connection reversely is not warranted. • Battery should be fixed by fitting. (not to move). • Battery cable length should be adjusted properly and clamped not to be connected reversely. • Not loose the battery cable terminal, nor turn the battery switch off during the engine running. 3. Only the specified load should be applied on the alternator (L) and (P) line. 4. Check any surge current or voltage occured under normal operations and expective erroneous operations, and confirm the circuit no surge occurs. Especially provide the flywheel diode for (C-LOAD) and diode for (L-LOAD).

51-191

MARK B W R L G Y Br Lg Sb O P Gr R/W

COLOR Black White Red Blue Green Yellow Brown Light green Sky blue Orange Pink Gray Red / White


51. ENGINE

NOTE: For engine stop solenoid 1. Permissible resistance of solenoide circuit should be less than 0.07 Ω to guarantee permissible lowest voltage 9 V to work solenoid (pull coil). (terminal reistance: 15/1000 Ω per coupler 0 Ω per screw setting. Coupler reistance of solenoid doesn’t need to be counted) Reference: AV2 (0.0088 Ω/m) : ≤ 8.0 m, without terminal resistance AV3 (0.0056 Ω/m) : ≤ 12.5 m, same as above When you exceed permissible resistance, adopt the circuit impressed from the power supply to the solenoid directly using a relay .... refer to # 2. High temperature parts, such as an exhaust pipe, should not approach for the pull power fall of solenoid, and heating prevention of inner coil temperature. (permissible ambient temperature: -30~100°C) 3. Install fuse to protect the harness against trouble such as short circuit or continuos drive of pull-coil. 4. The power supply of solenoid may not be common with the line of alternator initial excitator as shown in this drawing. (Otherwise, solenoid may loose stop function due to the power supply from alternator (L) terminal). 5. In case of waterproof connect or application, connector should be fixed by fitting to prevent lead wire break. 6. In case of emargency stop of machine for safety will be applied, switch location should be shown as a. 7. In case of the solenoid circuit resistance would be limit, # wiring is applicable.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

For 4TNV84(T), 88 starter motor DC12V 1.4 kW For 3TNV82A, 84(T), 88 starter motor DC12V 1.2 kW Battery DC12V Fusible link Generator DC12V-40A Timer 15±1.5 sec Pre-heat lamp (after 15 sec OFF) less than 3.4 W Air heater DC12V-400 W Charge lamp DC12V 3.4 W Safety relay 20A fuse 5A fuse

MARK B W R L G Y Br Lg Sb O P Gr R/W

20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.

51-192

COLOR Black White Red Blue Green Yellow Brown Light green Sky blue Orange Pink Gray Red / White

Pilot lamp DC12V less than 3.4 W Electrical feed pump DC12V 1.5 A L.O. press sw. DC12V 1A 0.5 Kg/cm2 OFF C.W. temp switch DC12V 0.4A 110°C ON Solenoid DC12V hold 0.49 A pull 36.5 A Timer 1±1.5 sec Relay DC12V 40A Solenoid DC12V Diode 600 V, 1.1A


51. ENGINE

51-193


51. ENGINE 51.11.2

PRECAUTION ON ELECTRIC WIRING

51.11.2.1 Alternator In the cases listed below the warranty shall not be deemed to apply. Please be sure to read these conditions carefully when planning to use it with other equipment. Also be certain to give appropriate guidance on usage to the user. 1. When the battery cable can be connected backwards The alternator diode will be damaged and recharging made impossible if the plus and minus ends of the battery cable are confused. The stator coil will also be burned as a result. To prevent this, supply the user with a cable of such a length or structure that the plus and minus ends cannot be confused. Also warn the user not to connect the cable backwards.

2. When charging output voltage is used for control purposes The engine speed at starting is not proportional to the output voltage of the alternator, so this output voltage must not be used for any control systems. It is especially wrong to use it for the control signal of the safety relay for cutting the starter motor because this will damage the starter motor and cause engine starting failure.

3. When the L line is used for control purposes Consult with dealer first before connecting any load other than the charge lamp to the L line. Damage to the alternator and related equipment will not be warranted without such prior consultation.

4. Non-use of wiring diagram Use without prior consultation of any wiring diagram other than that provided by dealer removes any breakdown of any electrical equipment from the warranty.

51-194


51. ENGINE

5. Regarding lamp control Once the charge lamp goes out after the start of charging, it does not come on again even if the engine speed falls and charging is insufficient. The lamp will not light again if the charging circuit is normal. The lamp only comes on during operation if the alternator itself is broken or the drive V-belt breaks. However, when an LED is used for the charge lamp, the LED will shine faintly even during normal operation. This is due to the control system for the alternator lamp and is not an abnormality.

6. Use of a non-specified V-belt Use of a non-specified V-belt will cause inadequate charging and shorten the life of the belt. Use a belt of the specified type.

7. Direct high pressure washing is prohibited Water will enter the brush if the alternator is washed directly at high pressure, causing inadequate charging. Warn users not to use direct, high-pressure washing.

8. Use of agricultural or other chemicals (direct contact or airborne) Adhesion of agricultural and other chemicals, especially those with high sulfur content, to the IC regulator corrodes the conductor on the substrate, leading to over-charging (battery boiling) and charging malfunctions. Consult with Yanmar prior to use in such an environment. Use without prior consultation removes any breakdown from the warranty.

51-195


51. ENGINE 51.11.2.2 Starter In the cases listed below the warranty shall not be deemed to apply. Please be sure to read these conditions carefully when planning to use it with other equipment. Also be certain to give appropriate guidance on usage to the user. 1. Starting performance in the case of using an untested battery The starting performance of the engine is closely dependent on the battery capacity. This battery capacity is itself affected by the climate and the type of equipment installation. The details regarding ambient temperature and equipment installation vary depending on the OEM, so dealer cannot decide the battery capacity on its own. Confer with dealer in advance after checking these conditions and fix the battery capacity on the basis of confirmatory tests.

2. When the resistance of the battery cable exceeds the specified value The combined total resistance of the battery cable in both directions between the starting motor and battery should be within the value indicated on the wiring diagram. The starting motor will malfunction or break down if the resistance is higher than the specified value.

3. When the resistance of the starter circuit exceeds the specified value The combined total resistance of the wiring between the starting motor and key switch (or power relay or safety relay, depending on the application) should be within the value indicated on the wiring diagram. Engine starting will be difficult if the resistance is higher than the specified value. This can also cause welding of the magnet switch at the point of contact and resultant burning of the armature coil.

51-196


51. ENGINE

4. When there is no safety relay Over-running (when the electric current flows for too long) is a major cause of starting failure. This burns the armature coil and causes clutch failure. Excessive work and failure of the key switch to return properly are the main causes of over-running. The user must be given sufficient warning about this. Be sure to use the safety relay to prevent over-running. This safety relay is supplied as an option. Consult Yanmar first when planning to install a safety relay at your own company. In the case of failure to consult with Yanmar, our warranty will not be applied to all the electrical equipment.

5. When there is too much rust due to the entry of water The water-proofing of the starting motor is equivalent to R2 of JIS D 0203. This guarantees that there will be no damage from the sort of exposure encountered in rain or when water is poured on from a bucket. You should, however, avoid the use of high-pressure washing and steeping in water.

6. Regarding the heat resistance of the starter motor The starter motor has heat resistance for an ambient temperature of 80° and surface temperature of 100°. Insulators must be installed to prevent overheating when used near high temperature parts such as the exhaust system.

7. Corrosion of magnet switch contact point by corrosive gas. When using equipment with a dry clutch, ammonium gas generated by friction is liable to corrode the contact of the magnet switch. Be sure to install a vent in the clutch case.

51-197


51. ENGINE 51.11.2.3 Current limiter In the cases listed below the warranty shall not be deemed to apply. Please be sure to read these conditions carefully when planning to use it with other equipment. Also be certain to give appropriate guidance on usage to the user. 1. When an over-discharged battery is used Use of booster starting with an over-discharged battery (when the voltage has dropped to 8V or less) will destroy other electrical equipment by generating an abnormally high voltage. A specialized battery charger should be used to recharge such an over-discharged battery (when the voltage has dropped to 8V or less).

2. When checks for malfunctioning are not performed When high voltage noise from other electrical equipment is impressed on the current limiter upon turning off the key switch, the current limiter can be damaged and cause loss of control over the output voltage. Other electrical equipment may also be damaged if this happens, so surge killers should be fitted to the electrical equipment whenever necessary. Be sure to check prior to mass production whether electrical noise might damage the current limiter by turning the key switch and other electrical equipment on and off while the engine is running, using both the vehicle and the wire harness that will be used in mass production.

3. Removal of the battery cable during operation The current limiter may malfunction if the battery cable and/or battery are removed during operation, depending on the kind of electrical equipment being used, causing loss of control over the output voltage. In such cases, the current limiter and other electrical equipment will be damaged by the generation of a continuous high voltage of 24-43V (for 5.000 rpm dynamo). All electrical equipment falls outside the scope of the warranty under these circumstances. Be sure to warn the user not to remove the battery cable and/or battery during operation.

51-198


51. ENGINE

4. If the battery cable can be attached in reverse The current limiter’s SCR diode will be destroyed if the plus and minus ends of the battery cable are connected the wrong way around. This causes charging malfunctioning and burns the harness. Give the user a cable of such a length that it cannot be connected the wrong way and warn the user against connecting the cable backwards.

5. Non-use of wiring diagram Use without prior consultation of any wiring diagram other than that provided by dealer removes any breakdown of any electrical equipment from the warranty.

6. Installation environment Observe the following when installing the current limiter: • Do not install it on the engine. • Place it in a well-ventilated place with an ambient temperature of 65°C or less. • Ensure that the cooling air flows in the right direction for the current limiter’s cooling fins. • Do not use the earth wire of the current limiter to earth any other electrical equipment.

51-199


51. ENGINE 51.11.2.4 Section area and resistance of electric wire 1. Allowable maximum cable length (Terminal resistance is not included).

Cable construction Resistance mm Element No. (Ω/m) Cable dia. 3 41 ø 0.32 0.005590 5 65 ø 0.32 0.003520 8 50 ø 0.45 0.002320 15 84 ø 0.45 0.001380 20 41 ø 0.80 0.000887 30 70 0.80 0.000520 40 85 0.80 0.000428 50 108 0.80 0.000337 60 127 0.80 0.000287 85 169 0.80 0.000215 100 217 0.80 0.000168 Note1) Allowable maximum resistance of Battery cable Note2) Allowable maximum resistance of Starting motor circuit Cable size

2

2. Terminal resistance Generally, a terminal resistance is 15 m Ω per coupler and 0 Ω per screw setting. This resistance should be included in allowable maximum resistance when the cable length is planned.

51-200

2 m Ω Note1 (m) 0.36 0.57 0.86 1.45 2.25 3.85 4.67 5.93 6.97 9.30 11.90

20 m Ω Ref. (m) 3.58 5.68 8.62 14.49 22.55 38.46 46.73 59.35 69.69 93.02 119.05

50 m Ω Note2 (m) 8.94 14.20 21.55 36.23 56.37 96.15 116.82 148.37 174.22 232.56 297.62


51. ENGINE

51.12 SERVICE STANDARDS 51.12.1

ENGINE TUNING

No.

Inspection item

TNV82A~98 mm 4TNV106(T) Between alternator Used part and crank pulley New part V-belt tension Between alternator Used part mm 2 and radiator fan New part at 98N (10kgf) Used part Between radiator fan and crank pulley New part 3TNV82A~TNV88(VM) Fuel injection pressure 4TNV94L~106(T) 3 MPa (kgf/cm2) 3TNV82A~TNV88(CL) 1

4

5

6

7

8

Gap at intake/exhaust valve heads

TNV82A Compression pressure TNV84 (at 250 min-1) MPa (kgf/cm2) 3/4TNV84T TNV88-106 3TNV82A,84 Coolant water 3TNV84T,88 Capacity 4TNV84(T),88 (Only engine body) (Liter) 4TNV94L 98(T) 4TNV106(T) 3TNV82A Lubricating oil capacity 3TNV84(T)/88 (oil pan) 4TNV84(T)/88 (Liter) 4TNV94L/98(T) 4TNV106(T) (CL class) 4TNV106(T) (VM class) 3TNV82A~98 4TNV98T 4TNV106(T) Lubricating oil pressure (VM, WO balancer) MPa (kgf/cm2) 4TNV106(T) (CL, WO balancer) 4TNV106(T) (VM, W balancer) Oil pressure switch operating pressure MPa (kgf/cm2)

Standard 0.15~0.25 0.25~0.35 10~14 8~12 7~10 5~8 9~13 7~11 21.57~22.55 (220~230) 19.6~20.6 (200~210) 3.16 (31)±0.1(1) 3.24(33)±0.1(1) 2.94(30)±0.1(1) 3.43(35)±0.1(1) 1.8 2.0 2.7 4.2 6.0 Full Effective 5.5 1.9 6.7 2.8 7.4 3.4 10.5 4.5 14.0 9.0 14.0 7.5 at rated speed 0.29(3.0)~0.39(4.0)

All models

0.31(3.2)~0.49(5.0)

107~113

51-201

0.06(0.6) or above

0.05±0.01 (0.5±0.1)

80~84

10 Thermo switch actuating temperature (deg.C)

2.45(25)±0.1(1) 2.55(26)±0.1(1) 2.45(25)±0.1(1) 4 2.75(28)±0.1(1) at low idle speed

0.34(3.5)~0.44(4.5)

69.5~72.5

All models option

-

0.39(4.0)~0.49(5.0)

valve opening temperature deg. C 9 Thermostat

Limit -

Full opening lift (mm) (temperature) 8 or above (85 deg.C) 10 or above (95 deg.C) -


51. ENGINE 51.12.2

ENGINE BODY

51.12.2.1 Cylinder head 1. Cylinder head Inspection item Combustion surface distortion 3TNV82A (2-valve head)

Valve sink

TNV84~88 (2-valve head) 4TNV84T(4-valve) mm 4TNV94L¡98(T) (4-valve head) 4TNV106(T) (4-valve head)

Valve seat (2-valve, 4-valve)

Seat angle Deg.

Intake Exhaust Intake

Standard 0.05 or less 0.35~0.55 0.30~0.50 0.30~0.50

Limit 0.15 0.8 0.8 0.8

Exhaust

0.30~0.50

0.8

Intake Exhaust Intake Exhaust Intake Exhaust

0.36~0.56 0.35~0.55 0.5~0.7 0.7~0.9 120 90 40, 150

0.8 0.8 1.0 1.2 -

mm

Seat correction angle

deg.

51-202


51. ENGINE

2. Intake/exhaust valve and guide mm Inspection item Guide inside diameter Intake Valve stem outside diameter Clearance 3TNV82A (2-valve head) Guide inside diameter Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter Clearance Guide inside diameter Intake Valve stem outside diameter 4TNV84 Clearance 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 Guide inside diameter (2-valve head) Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter Clearance Guide inside diameter Intake Valve stem outside diameter Clearance 4TNV84T (4-valve head) Guide inside diameter Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter Clearance Guide inside diameter Intake Valve stem outside diameter 4TNV94L Clearance 4TNV98(T) Guide inside diameter (4-valve head) Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter Clearance Guide inside diameter Intake Valve stem outside diameter Clearance 4TNV106(T) (4-valve head) Guide inside diameter Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter Clearance 3TNV82A 4TNV84, 3TNV84(T), 4TNV88 Valve guide projection from cylinder head 4TNV84T 4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T) Valve guide driving-in method

51-203

Standard 7.000~7.015 6.945~6.960 0.040~0.070 7.000~7.015 6.940~6.955 0.045~0.075 8.010~8.025 7.955~7.975 0.035~0.070 8.015~8.030 7.955~7.960 0.045~0.075 6.000~6.015 5.960~5.975 0.025~0.055 6.000~6.015 5.945~5.960 0.040~0.070 7.000~7.015 6.945~6.960 0.040~0.070 7.000~7.015 6.940~6.955 0.045~0.075 7.008~7.020 6.945~6.960 0.048~0.075 7.008~7.020 6.960~6.975 0.033~0.060 11.7~12.0

Limit 7.08 6.90 0.18 7.08 6.90 0.18 8.10 7.90 0.18 8.10 7.90 0.18 6.08 5.90 0.15 6.08 5.90 0.17 7.08 6.90 0.17 7.08 6.90 0.17 7.08 6.92 0.16 7.08 6.90 0.18 -

14.7~15.0

-

8.2~8.5 9.7~10.0 13.4~13.6 Cold-fitted

-


51. ENGINE

3. Valve spring mm Inspection item 3TNV82A (2-valve) 4TNV84,3TNV84(T), 4TNV88 (2-valve) 4TNV84T (4-valve) 4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T), (4-valve) 4TNV106(T) (4-valve) 3TNV82A (2-valve) 4TNV84, 3TNV84(T), 4TNV88 (2-valve) 4TNV84T (4-valve) 4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T), (4-valve) 4TNV106(T) (4-valve)

Free length

Inclination

Standard 44.4 42.0 37.4 39.7 50.6 -

Limit 43.9 41.5 36.9 39.2 50.1 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.4 1.5

Standard 16.000~16.020 15.966~15.984 0.016~0.054 18.500~18.520 18.470~18.490 0.010~0.050

Limit 16.07 15.94 0.13 18.57 18.44 0.13

4. Rocker arm and shaft mm Model TNV82A~88

4TNV94L/98(T)/106(T)

Inspection item Arm shaft hole diameter Shaft outside diameter Clearance Arm shaft hole diameter Shaft outside diameter Clearance

5. Push rod mm Inspection item

Standard -

Bend

51-204

Limit 0.03


51. ENGINE 51.12.2.2 Gear train and camshaft 1. Camshaft mm Inspection item Side gap Bending (1/2 the dial gauge reading) 3TNV82A-TNV88 Cam height 4TNV94L¡98 4TNV106(T) Shaft outside diameter / Metal inside diameter Bushing inside diameter Gear side Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter TNV82A~TNV88 Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Wheel side Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Gear side Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter 4TNV94L/98(T) Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Wheel side Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Gear side Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter 4TNV106(T) Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Wheel side Camshaft outside diameter Clearance

Standard 0.05 ~ 0.20 0 ~ 0.02 38.600~38.800 43.400~43.600 50.900~51.100

Limit 0.30 0.05 38.350 43.150 50.650

44.990~45.055 44.925~44.950 0.040~0.130 45.000~45.025 44.910~44.935 0.065~0.115 45.000~45.025 44.925~44.950 0.050~0.100 49.990~50.055 49.925~49.950 0.040~0.130 50.000~50.025 49.910~49.935 0.065~0.115 50.000~50.025 49.925~49.950 0.05~0.100 57.980~58.050 57.910~57.940 0.040~0.140 58.000~58.030 57.895~57.925 0.075~0.135 58.000~58.030 57.910~57.940 0.050~0.120

45.130 44.890 0.240 45.100 44.875 0.225 45.100 44.890 0.210 50.130 49.890 0.240 50.100 49.875 0.225 50.100 49.890 0.210 58.105 57.875 0.250 58.105 57.860 0.245 58.105 57.875 0.230

2. Idle gear shaft and bushing mm Inspection item Shaft outside diameter Bushing inside diameter Clearance

Standard 45.950~45.975 46.000~46.025 0.025~0.075

51-205

Limit 45.900 46.075 0.175


51. ENGINE

3. Backlash of each gear mm Model 3TNV82A~88 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T)

Inspection item Crank gear, cam gear, idle gear, fuel injection pump gear and PTO gear Crank gear, cam gear, idle gear, fuel injection pump gear and PTO gear Lubricating oil pump gear Balancer drive gear (only for 4TNV106(T))

Standard

Limit

0.07~0.15

0.17

0.08~0.14

0.16

0.09~0.15

0.17

0.12~0.18

0.20

51.12.2.3 Cylinder block 1. Cylinder block mm

Cylinder inside diameter

Cylinder bore

Inspection item 3TNV82A TNV84 TNV88 4TNV94L 4TNV98 4TNV106(T) Roundness Inclination

51-206

Standard 82.000~82.030 84.000~84.030 88.000~88.030 94.000~94.030 98.000~98.030 106.000~106.030

Limit 82.200 84.200 88.200 94.130 98.130 106.130

0.01 or less

0.03


51. ENGINE

2. Crankshaft mm Inspection item Bending (1/2 the dial gauge reading) Pin outside diameter Metal inside diameter 3TNV82A Metal thickness Clearance Pin outside diameter Metal inside diameter TNV84~88 Metal thickness Clearance Crank pin Pin outside diameter Metal inside diameter 4TNV94L¡98 Metal thickness Clearance Pin outside diameter Metal inside diameter 4TNV106(T) Metal thickness Clearance Journal outside diameter Metal inside diameter 3TNV82A Metal thickness Clearance Journal outside diameter Metal inside diameter TNV84~88 Selective pairing Metal thickness Clearance Crank journal Journal outside diameter Metal inside diameter 4TNV94L¡98 Selective pairing Metal thickness Clearance Journal outside diameter Metal inside diameter 4TNV106(T) Selective pairing Metal thickness Clearance

Standard 42.952~42.962 43.000~43.042 1.487~1.500 0.038~0.090 47.952~47.962 48.000~48.026 1.492~1.500 0.038~0.074 57.952~57.962 58.000~58.026 1.492~1.500 0.038~0.074 63.952~63.962 64.016~64.042 1.984~1.992 0.054~0.090 46.952~46.962 47.000~47.032 1.987~2.000 0.038~0.080 53.952~53.962 54.000~54.020 1.995~1.990 0.038~0.068 64.952~64.962 65.000~65.020 1.995~2.010 0.038~0.068 75.952~75.962 76.014~76.034 2.488~2.503 0.052~0.082

Limit 0.02 42.902 0.150 47.902 0.150 57.902 0.150 63.902 0.150 46.902 0.150 53.902 0.150 64.902 0.150 75.902 0.150

3. Thrust bearing mm Crankshaft side gap

Inspection item All models

Standard 0.13~0.23

51-207

Limit 0.28


51. ENGINE

4. Piston and ring Piston

Inspection item 3TNV82A 3,4TNV84(T) Piston outside diameter 3,4TNV88 (Measure in the direction vertical to the pis4TNV94L ton pin.) 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T) 3TNV82A 3,4TNV84(T) 3,4TNV88 Piston diameter measure position (Upward from the bottom end of the piston) 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T) Hole inside diameter 3TNV82A Pin outside diameter Clearance Hole inside diameter TNV84~88 Pin outside diameter Clearance Piston pin Hole inside diameter 4TNV94L¡98 Pin outside diameter Clearance Hole inside diameter 4TNV106(T) Pin outside diameter Clearance

51-208

Standard 81.950~81.980 83.945~83.975 87.945~87.975 93.945~93.955 97.940~97.950 105.930~105.960 16 24 24 22 22 30 23.000~23.009 22.995~23.000 0.000~0.014 26.000~26.009 25.995~26.000 0.000~0.014 0.000~30.009 29.989~30.000 0.000~0.020 37.000~37.011 36.989~37.000 0.000~0.022

mm Limit 81.905 83.900 87.900 93.900 97.895 105.880 23.039 22.965 0.074 26.039 25.965 0.074 30.039 29.959 0.080 37.039 36.959 0.080


51. ENGINE

Piston ring mm Model

Top ring

3TNV82A TNV84

Second ring

Oil ring

Top ring

TNV88

Second ring

Oil ring

Top ring

4TNV94L/98

Second ring

Oil ring

Top ring

4TNV106(T)

Second ring

Oil ring

Inspection item Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance

51-209

Standard 2.065~2.080 1.970~1.990 0.075~0.110 0.200~0.400 2.035~2.050 1.970~1.990 0.045~0.080 0.200~0.400 4.015~4.030 3.970~3.990 0.025~0.060 0.200~0.400 2.060~2.075 1.970~1.990 0.070~0.105 0.200~0.400 2.025~2.040 1.970~1.990 0.035~0.070 0.200~0.400 4.015~4.030 3.970~3.990 0.025~0.060 0.200~0.400 2.040~2.060 1.940~1.960 0.080~0.120 0.250~0.450 2.080~2.095 1.970~1.990 0.090~0.125 0.450~0.650 3.015~3.030 2.970~2.990 0.025~0.060 0.250~0.450 2.520~2.540 2.440~2.460 0.060~0.100 0.300~0.450 2.070~2.085 1.970~1.990 0.080~0.115 0.450~0.600 3.015~3.030 2.970~2.990 0.025~0.060 0.300~-0.500

Limit 1.950 0.490 2.150 1.950 0.200 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.950 0.490 2.140 1.950 0.190 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.920 0.540 2.195 1.950 0.245 0.730 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.550 2.420 0.540 2.185 1.950 0.235 0.680 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.600


51. ENGINE

5. Connecting rod mm Inspection item

Standard 0.2~0.4

Thrust clearance

Limit -

Rod small end mm Model 3TNV82A

TNV84-88

4TNV94L¡98

4TNV106(T)

Inspection item Bushing inside diameter Pin outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Pin outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Pin outside diameter Clearance Bushing inside diameter Pin outside diameter Clearance

Standard 23.025~23.038 22.995~23.000 0.025~0.043 26.025~26.038 25.995~26.000 0.025~0.043 30.025~30.038 29.987~30.000 0.025~0.051 37.025~37.038 36.989~37.000 0.025~0.049

Limit 23.068 22.967 0.101 26.068 25.967 0.101 30.068 29.959 0.109 37.068 36.961 0.107

Inspection item Tappet hole (block) inside diameter Tappet stem outside diameter Clearance Tappet hole (block) inside diameter Tappet stem outside diameter Clearance Tappet hole (block) inside diameter Tappet stem outside diameter Clearance

Standard 12.000~12.025 11.975~11.990 0.010~0.050 12.000~12.018 11.975~11.990 0.010~0.043 14.000~14.018 13.966~13.984 0.015~0.052

mm Limit 12.045 11.955 0.090 12.038 11.955 0.083 14.038 13.946 0.092

6. Tappet

TNV84-88

4TNV94L¡98

4TNV106(T)

51-210


51. ENGINE 51.12.2.4 Lubricating Oil System (Trochoid Pump) 1. Outside clearance of outer rotor mm Model

Standard 0.12~0.21 0.100~0.155 0.100~0.165

3TNV82A~88 4TNV94L/98 4TNV106(T)

Limit 0.30 0.25 0.25

2. Side clearance of outer rotor mm Model

Standard 0.02~0.07 0.05~0.10 0.03~0.12

3TNV82A~88 4TNV94L/98 4TNV106(T)

Limit 0.12 0.15 0.17

3. Inside clearance of inner rotor mm Item

Parts Gear boss diameter Inside clearance of inner rotor Rotor diameter Width across flat of Width across flat clearance of Gear boss inner rotor Width across flat of rotor

Standard 53.05~53.15 53.45~53.55 49.45~49.75

Standard

Limit

0.3~0.5

0.6

0.2~0.6

0.7

49.95~50.05

4. Rotor shaft clearance mm Model 4TNV94L/ 98

4TNV106(T)

Inspection item Gear case bearing I.D. Rotor shaft O.D. Rotor clearance Gear case bearing I.D. Rotor shaft O.D. Rotor clearance

51-211

Standard 12.980~13.02 12.955~12.975 0.035~0.065 13.00~13.02 12.955~12.965 0.035~-0.065

Limit 13.05 12.945 0.105 13.05 12.945 0.105


51. ENGINE

51.13 TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR BOLTS AND NUTS 51.13.1

TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR MAIN BOLTS AND NUTS

Part and engine model 3TNV82A TNV84~88 Cylinder head bolt 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106(T) 3TNV82A TNV84~88 Connecting rod bolt 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106(T) TNV82A~88 Flywheel set bolt 4TNV94L·98·106(T) 3TNV82A TNV84~88 Bearing cap set bolt 4TNV94L·98 4TNV106(T) TNV82A~88 Crankshaft pulley set bolt 4TNV94L·98·106(T) TNV82A~88 Fuel nozzle set bolt 4TNV94L·98·106(T) TNV82A~88 Fuel pump drive gear set nut 4TNV94L·98·106(T) TNV82A~88 Fuel injection pipe set bolt 4TNV94L·98·106(T) Fuel return pipe joint bolt 4TNV94L·98·106(T) Rocker arm cover set bolt 4TNV106(T) EPA flange set bolt

4TNV106(T)

Thread diameter Lubricating oil application Tightening torque x pitch (thread portion, and seat surNm (kgf•m) mm face) 61.7~65.7 M9x1.25 (6.3~6.7) 85.3~91.1 M10x1.25 (8.7~9.3) Applied 103.1~112.9 M11x1.25 (10.5~11.5) 188.0~197.8 M13x1.5 (19.0~20.0) 37.2~41.2 M8x1.0 (3.8~4.2) 44.1~49.0 M9x1.0 (4.5 5.0) Applied 53.9~58.8 M10x1.0 (5.5~6.0) 78.5~83.4 M11x1.0 (8.0~8.5) 83.3~88.2 M10x1.25 (8.5~9.0) Applied 186.2~205.8 M14x1.5 (19~21) 76.4~80.4 M10x1.25 (7.8-8.2) 93.2~98.1 M12x1.5 (9.5~10.5) Applied 108.1~117.9 M11x1.25 (11.0~12.0) 186.2~205.8 M14x1.5 (19~21) 112.7~122.7 M14x1.5 (11.5~12.5) Applied 107.9~127.5 M14x1.5 (11.0~13.0) 24.4~28.4 M8x1.25 (2.5~2.9) Not applied 22.6~28.4 M8x1.25 (2.3~2.9) M14x1.5 78~88 (8~9) Not applied 113~123 M18x1.5 (11.5~12.5) 29.4~34.3 M12x1.5 (3.0~3.5) Not applied 19.6~24.5 M12x1.5 (2.0~2.5) 7.8~9.8 M6x1.0 Not applied (0.8~1.0) 16.7~22.5 M8x1.25 Not applied (1.7~2.3) 113~123 M18x1.5 Not applied (11.5~12.5)

51-212


51. ENGINE 51.13.2

13.2 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR STANDARD BOLTS AND NUTS

Tightening torque Nm (kgf-m) 9.8~11.8 M6x1 (1.0~1.2) 22.6~28.4 M8x1.25 (2.3~2.9) 44.1~53.9 M10x1.5 (4.5~5.5) Hexagon bolt (7T) and nut 78.4~98.0 M12x1.75 (8.0~10) 127.5~147.1 M14x1.5 (13~15) 215.7~235.4 M16x1.5 (22~24) 9.8 1/8 (1.0) 19.6 1/4 (2.0) PT plug 29.4 3/8 (3.0) 58.8 1/2 (6.0) 12.7~16.7 M8 (1.3~1.7) 19.6~25.4 M10 (2.0~2.6) 24.5~34.3 Pipe joint bolt M12 (2.5~3.5) 39.2~49.0 M14 (4.0~5.0) 49.0~58.8 M16 (5.0~6.0) Note) Lubricating oil is not applied to threaded portion and seat surface. Item

Nominal thread diameter x pitch

51-213

Remarks Use 80% of the value at left when the tightening part is aluminum. Use 60% of the value at left for 4T bolts and lock nuts.

-

-


51. ENGINE NOTE:

51-214


71. SUPPORTING DATA TABLE OF CONTENTS 71.1 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................. 71-2 71.1.1

STANDARD SPECIFICATION ............................................................... 71-3

71.1.2

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT OPERATION ..................................................... 71-4

71.1.3

SCHEMATIC PIPING FOR HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ............................. 71-14

71.2 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................................... 71-15



71. SUPPORTING DATA

This page is blank because of editing convenience.

71-1


71. SUPPORTING DATA

71.1

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

No.

NAME

1

PUMP ASSY

2

CONTROL VALVE

2-3

SLEWING CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-4L

LEFT TRAVEL MOTOR CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-4R

RIGHT TRAVEL MOTOR CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-5

BOOM CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-6

ARM CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-7

BUCKET CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-8

SWING CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-9

DOZER CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-10

SERVICE CONTROL VALVE SECTION

3

SLEWING MOTOR

4L

TRAVEL LEFT MOTOR

4R

TRAVEL RIGHT MOTOR

5

BOOM CYLINDER

6

ARM CYLINDER

7

BUCKET CYLINDER

8

SWING CYLINDER

9

DOZER CYLINDER

10

SWIVEL JOINT

11

PILOT VALVE (ATT)

12

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL)

13

SOLENOID VALVE

13-1

PILOT RELIEF VALVE

14

PILOT VALVE (DOZER)

15

SHUTTLE VALVE

16

CONTROL VALVE (OPT)

17

RETURN FILTER (ELEMENT)

18

SUCTION STRAINER

19

INLINE FILTER

20

CHECK VALVE

21

STOP VALVE

22

SELECTOR VALVE

23

OIL COOLER

24

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

25

TRAVEL 1-2 SPEED CHANGE OVER

26

LEVER LOCK

201

MAIN RELIEF VALVE P1,P2

202

MAIN RELIEF VALVE P3

203

OVER LOAD RELIEF VALVE

204

OVER LOAD RELIEF VALVE

304

SLEW RELIEF VALVE

71-2


71. SUPPORTING DATA 71.1.1

STANDARD SPECIFICATION

D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

403

P

4

402

B

B

A

A

406

405

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

4R

4L

10

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

2-4R

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

T 1

14

P P2

Fig. 71-1

71-3


71. SUPPORTING DATA 71.1.2

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT OPERATION

(1) NEUTRAL CIRCUIT D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

405

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

10

4R

4L

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

2-4R

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

P A2 A1

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

14

P P2

71-4

1

4

3

12

26 25

T

T

Fig. 71-2

T 1


71. SUPPORTING DATA (2) TRAVEL CIRCUIT: Travel forward operation at travel 2nd speed D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

4R

4L

10

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

2-4R

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

T 1

14

P P2

Fig. 71-3

71-5


71. SUPPORTING DATA (3) SLEWING CIRCUIT: Slewing left operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

4R

4L

10

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

2-5

150kPa {22psi} B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

2-4R

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

14

P P2

71-6

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

Fig. 71-4

T 1


71. SUPPORTING DATA (4) BUCKET CIRCUIT: Bucket digging operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

4R

4L

10

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

2-4R

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

T 1

14

P P2

Fig. 71-5

71-7


71. SUPPORTING DATA (5) BOOM CIRCUIT: Boom up operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

4R

4L

10

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

2-4R

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

14

P P2

71-8

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

Fig. 71-6

T 1


71. SUPPORTING DATA (6) ARM CIRCUIT: Arm in operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

10

4R

4L

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

LEFT RIGHT

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

2-3

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

2-4R

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

T 1

14

P P2

Fig. 71-7

71-9


71. SUPPORTING DATA (7) SWING CIRCUIT: Boom swing left operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

10

4R

4L

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

2-4R

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

14

P P2

71-10

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

Fig. 71-8

T 1


71. SUPPORTING DATA (8) DOZER CIRCUIT: Dozer down operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

10

4R

4L

305

C

8

DR B LEFT

PB

A RIGHT

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

2-4R

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

T 1

14

P P2

Fig. 71-9

71-11


71. SUPPORTING DATA (9) COMBINED OPERATION CIRCUIT: Travel (forward) 1st speed / Dozer down operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

10

4R

4L

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

2-4R

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

P A2 A1

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

14

P P2

71-12

1

4

3

12

26 25

T

T

Fig. 71-10

T 1


71. SUPPORTING DATA (10) COMBINED OPERATION CIRCUIT: Travel (forward) 1st speed / Boom up operation D2

P3

P

401 R1

404

A1G A1 A2 A2G A4 A3

406

407

407 408

402

B

B

A

A

406

302

6 22

402

301

15

21

407

407 D1

3

5

403

405

405

M

401

404

408

9

D1

P2

RED

403

P

4

21.0MPa

R2

P3

P2

7

D2

A

B PP

S1

304 21.0MPa

304

303

305

R1

D

1

4R

4L

10

305

C

8

DR B

PB

A

T

BD PG A C F E

23 20 147kPa {21psi}

2-8

2-10 2

150kPa {22psi}

2-5 B9

18 17

A9

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr B8 A8 Pa8

B7

2-3

2-44 A7 Pa7

P1

P2

Pa6 A6 B6

A5 B5 Pa4

A4

B4

Pa3 A3

2-7

24

B3

A2 Pa2

P3 B2

A1Pa1

B1

2-9

2-6

11

206

11

24

25.5MPa

1

24

3

1

3

204 27.5MPa

203

25.5MPa

27.5MPa

25.5MPa

202

204

203

MRV3

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

23.0MPa

25.5MPa

201 MRV

204

P

25.5MPa

P

T

T

204 T2

Pb9

Pb8

Pb7

2-4R

Pb6

Pb4

Pb3

Pb2

T1

P

Pb1

Pp1

2

26 25 P

13-1 P1

3.5MPa

1

4

3

12

A2 A1

T

T

T1

13 19

14

2

T P

1 2

T 1

14

P P2

Fig. 71-11

71-13


71. SUPPORTING DATA 71.1.3

SCHEMATIC PIPING FOR HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

3 1 2 1 P

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

H

R

4 2 P

T

T C D B

T2 B9 A9

Pb9

A

Pa9

Pb8’ Dr Pb8

B8

A8

P1 i8 j

i5 j

4 P 1 3

2

i4 j 4 P 1

i6 j i1 j 3

T

i7 j

2

A7 Pa7

B7

Pb7

Pb6

P2 A6 Pa6

B6

i2 j

Pa8

B5

T

i3 j

Pb4

B4

Pb3

B3 Pp1

PB

A5 A4

Pa4 Pa3

A3 P3

T1

Pb2

B2

Pb1

B1

A2 A1

Pa2 Pa1

PP B T DR A

A4

A1

A3

A2 P1

T

S E F C A

G

P

B D P

P2

R

2 1

A1

H

A2

D1 A B

71-14

T1

D2 B P

A

Fig. 71-12


71. SUPPORTING DATA

71.2

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

No.

NAME

1

PUMP ASSY

2

CONTROL VALVE

2-3

SLEWING CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-5

BOOM CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-6

ARM CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-7

BUCKET CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-8

SWING CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-9

DOZER CONTROL VALVE SECTION

2-10

SERVICE CONTROL VALVE SECTION

3

SLEWING MOTOR

4L

TRAVEL LEFT MOTOR

4R

TRAVEL RIGHT MOTOR

5

BOOM CYLINDER

6

ARM CYLINDER

7

BUCKET CYLINDER

8

SWING CYLINDER

9

DOZER CYLINDER

10

SWIVEL JOINT

11

PILOT VALVE (ATT)

12

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL)

13 13-1

SOLENOID VALVE PILOT RELIEF VALVE

14

PILOT VALVE (DOZER)

15

SHUTTLE VALVE

16

CONTROL VALVE (OPT)

17

RETURN FILTER (ELEMENT)

18

SUCTION STRAINER

19

INLINE FILTER

20

CHECK VALVE

23

OIL COOLER

24

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

25

TRAVEL 1-2 SPEED CHANGE OVER

26

LEVER LOCK

27

PILOT CIRCUIT

28

MAIN CIRCUIT

29

SUPPLY / RETURN (DRAIN) CIRCUIT

71-15


71. SUPPORTING DATA

E-13 20B 2 YB

2

R B B

R-1 14 2WR

8 3R

14 2WR

B

E-4 D-12

B C

S O O T A F N R F T

S

AC

P

8 5R

9 5R

11 WY

11 WY 81 O

R-8

E

R-2

8 5R

B

1

BAT P

L

IG IC REG

6 WG 47 3LY

6 WG

47 3LY

R1

M-1

M

M-6

E-1 8 2R 71 3Y 7 2RB 72 L

B S

20R

9 5R

10A

30A

30A

30A

30A

30A

WY 1 1.25 YB 2 2YG 3 2RG 4 2W 5 WG 6

6

WG

E-8

47 3LY

R2

7 2RB

ACC

72 L

BR

13 BW 1.25

C

SW-1 5 2W

R-7 5 W

5 W 70 2BR

5 W 70 2BR

5 2W 15 YG 16 RW B

HOLD PULL

D-2

R-6

D-3

2B

4 RG

E 2B

SV-3

D-14 E 2B

4 RG

B

E-3 SW-7

1 WY

1 WY

L-1

B

17 PB

(2/3)

D-1 B

E-10

O L H F F O I

SW-10

B

E

18 LY

L

19 LB

M

1 WY W O O W A F A S S H F N H E E R R

SW-4

L E

M-2 20 G

R

22 Br

Y S

H

21 WB

M

1 WY

(2/3)

+1

M

M

- B +B

M

E-12

L

B

M-3 71-16

E-2

Fig. 71-13 (1/3)

F25779


71. SUPPORTING DATA

(1/3) (1/3)

E-6 6

6 WG

LB 7 57 GB 58 6

5

2

D-4

YG 4 51 8

2 3

50 GW

86 LgR

4

12

O

81

11 56 YB 13 52 YR

1

SW-5

50 GW

SW-6

52 YR

SE-2

B

48 LgB 6

10

51 YG

E-2

1

R-8

B

SW-2

B

SE-1 49 P

H M

E-26 O O F N F

SW-2

4

E-6

3

R-9

E L

3

YG

3

L-2

R-22

86 LgR

YG

B 2

2 YB

2

YB

2

YB

106 W 105 LG

SW-31

B

101 GW

B

D-13

107 WR

SW-30

SV-12 B

B

39 GW

SW-9

R-14

SW-28

B

SV-1

100 Lg

R-23

63 BY 64 LW

R-3

M-4 60 GY A 64 LW P1

60 GY 61 LB

E-14 6 WG 1 B

B

63 BY

P2

6

39 GW

HOLD

HOLD

3 43 Lg 5 46 WB

112 WR

M

R-24 B

108 LW

SW-33

B B

SV-9

110 G 113 OW

SW-11 2 61 LB 4 45 BW

6

2 YB

SW-9

109 LO

SW-34 B

B

111 GL

R-25

B

SV-10

SV-2 2 YB 43 Lg

D-4

2

SW-3

E-6 46 WB

B F25780

Fig. 71-13 (2/3)

71-17


71. SUPPORTING DATA

E-15 4 1

4 1.25RG

20A

91 1.25 O

20A

89 1.25RL 1 LR

SW-23

R-13 1 WY

M

SV-5

SW-24

54 PL

55 YL

SW-25

R-10

SW-16 90 RW

B

E-20

B

SW-26 SW-27

E-17

R-11 M

E-16

E-18:

SW-15 B

SW-24 1 WY

54 PL

55 YL

E-20

B

SW-25 2

YB

SW-26

B

SW-27

E-7

R-9 3

SW-2

3

1.25YG 86 LgR

87 1.25BrR B

B

L-5

F25781

71-18

Fig. 71-13 (3/3)


Turn static files into dynamic content formats.

Create a flipbook
Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.